PUB.

(PLANNING GUIDE

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2011

200

& ENROUTE)

ANTARCTICA

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2011 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

NINTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Internet: http://

bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001.
II 

Pub. 120

Preface

Pub. 200, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide and Enroute)

Antartica, Ninth Edition, 2011, is issued as Part I and Part II,

with both Planning Guide and Enroute information combined

in one volume.

Digital Nautical Charts 29 provides electronic chart coverage for the area covered by this publication. 

This publication has been corrected to 5 March 2011, including Notice to Mariners No. 10 of 2011.

Explanatory Remarks

Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA) under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) are intended to assist

mariners in planning ocean passages and to eliminate duplication by consolidating useful information about all the countries

adjacent to a particular ocean basin in one volume. 

Planning Guide publications are compiled and structured in

the alphabetical order of countries contained within the region

covered by each publication.

Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by the initial letters of the points of the

compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended, degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC). 

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Data Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain web site.

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of origin along a track having the identical meridional angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity.

0.0 Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United

States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides Internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign

Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of these

web sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and

omissions in the contents of these web sites.

0.0 International Ship and Port Facility Security (ISPS)

Code.—The ISPS Code is a comprehensive set of measures to

enhance the security of ships and port facilities developed in

response to the perceived threats to ships and port facilities in

the wake of the 9/11 attacks in the United States. Information

on the ISPS Code can be found at the International Maritime

Organization web site:

0.0 Lights and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not

described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

3. DSN: 287-3147

4. DNC web site: http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

DNC.portal

5. Maritime Domain website:http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

MSI.portal

6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

National Geospatial-Intelligence 

Agency

Mail Stop D-44

4600 Sangamore Road

Bethesda MD 20816-5003

NGA Maritime Domain Website 

http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/MSI.portal

International Maritime Organization Home Page

http://www.imo.org
 III

Pub. 120

0.0 National Ocean Claims.—Information on national ocean

claims and maritime boudary disputes, which have been compiled from the best available sources, is provided solely in the

interest of the navigational safety of shipping and in no way

constitutes legal recognition by the United States. These nonrecognized claims and requirements may include, but are not

limited to:

1. A requirement by a state for advance permission or

notification for innocent passage of warships in the

territorial sea.

2. Straight baseline, internal waters, or historic waters

claims.

3. The establishment of a security zone, where a state

claims to control activity beyond its territorial sea for security reasons unrelated to that state’s police powers in its territory, including its territorial sea.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids and

radio weather services are not described in detail. Publication

No. 117 Radio Navigational Aids and NOAA Publication,

Selected Worldwide Marine Weather Broadcasts, should be

consulted.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters. 

0.0 Special Warnings.—Special Warnings may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Domain

website.

Time Zone.—The Time Zone description(s), as well as

information concerning the use of Daylight Savings Time, are

included. The World Time Zone Chart is available on the Internet at the web site given below.

0.0 Winds.—Wind directions are the true directions from which

winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0British Hydrographic Office Sailing Directions.

0.0Argentina Sailing Directions.

0.0U.S. National Science Foundation journals, reports, and

doc-uments.

0.0Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels

and various shipping companies.

0.0Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other

documents in possession of the Agency.

World Time Zone Chart

http://www.odci.gov/cia/publications/factbook/

reference_maps/pdf/time_zones.pdf
IV 

Pub. 120

0.0
 V

Pub. 120

Conversion Tables

 Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

 Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

 Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

 Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67
VI 

Pub. 120

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13

 Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Assoc of Lighthouse Authorities No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication
Pub. 200 IX

Contents

Page

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II

Publication Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Part I (Planning Guide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Appendix I—South African Ship Reporting System (SAFREP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Appendix II—Chile Ship Reporting System (CHILREP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Appendix III—Australian Ship Reporting System (AUSREP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Part II (Enroute) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Part II- Enroute

Sector 1

The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Sector 2

The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Sector 3

The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea—Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Sector 4

The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Index—Gazetteer197
The Antarctic 1

Pub. 200

PART I
2 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

SATELLITE IMAGE MAP OF ANTARCTICA

Prepared by the United States Geological Survey in cooperation with the

National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration and the National Remote

Sensing Center, England with support from the National Science Foundation.
The Antarctic 3

Pub. 200

THE ANTARCTIC

General 3

Cautions 4

Climatology 4

Geophysical Features 9

History of Exploration 10

Ice 15

Magnetic Field 33

Meteorology 34

Navigational Information 36

Oceanography 47

Optical Phenomena 50

Pollution 52

Regulations 52

Search and Rescue 64

Seas 64

Ship Reporting System 76

Appendix I—South African Ship Reporting System

(SAFREP) 79

Appendix II—Chile Ship Reporting System (CHILREP)83

Appendix III—Australian Ship Reporting System

(AUSREP) 89

General

0.0 The Antarctic is defined by the Antarctic Treaty as the area

lying S of 60°S. Antarctica is defined as the Antarctic continent and the off-lying islands within its general proximity. The

area covered by this publication extends N from the shores of

Antarctica to 60°S, or approximately to the limits of the drift

ice. 

0.0 Pub. 200, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide and Enroute)

Antarctica, unlike the series of publications which cover the

world in separate Enroute and Planning Guide formats, is a

combination of both volumes and contains in one publication

information normally found in both of the above. This combination of volumes was initiated due to the rather unique aspect

of the Antarctic continent.
4 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 Part I, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Antarctica includes information concerning physical geography, meteorology, exploration, treaties and legal agreements, regulations,

history, and navigation.

0.0 Part II, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Antarctica is comprised

of four sectors and includes basic coastal and navigational information.

0.0 Polar Regions.—Various criteria have been used to define

the polar regions and many have been based upon meteorological considerations, mean temperatures, the length of the frostfree growing season, the amount of ice, or the tree line.

0.0 Astronomically, the limits of the Arctic Circle and the Antarctic Circle may be considered to lie at approximately

66°30'N and S, respectively, or at the point where the sun becomes circumpolar (90° minus the maximum declination of the

sun).

0.0 Below the S polar region, the transitional subpolar region is

often defined as the winter limits of the drift ice (about 60°S).

However, this subpolar region is sometimes considered as extending another 10° of latitude and well into the stormy seas

surrounding Antarctica.

0.0 Geographic Names.—The lack of international agreement

on the use of geographic names is a world problem. However,

the problem of geographic names in Antarctica differs from

that of any other land mass of comparable size because this area has unresolved questions of sovereignty.

0.0 As a result of the Antarctic Treaty, there is now a degree of

agreement to handle this problem. Although some duplication

and substitution of names occurs, most participating countries

have now established nomenclature committees responsible for

names in this region.

0.0 All proposed new names, together with the supporting arguments for their recognition, are considered by national committees. Subsequently, these names are brought forth for

international agreement and are ultimately proclaimed by the

initiating country. Some geographic features have not achieved

international agreement on nomenclature, and different names

may be found on charts produced by different countries.

0.0 In the United States, a gazetteer, Geographic Names of the

Antarctic-1995, has been published with approval by the United States Board on Geographic Names and the Secretary of the

Interior. This gazetteer contains names for features in Antarctica and the area extending N to the Antarctic Convergence.

0.0 For the names of submarine features, reference should be

made to Undersea Features-1990, which is also published by

the U.S. Board on Geographic Names. These names have been

approved for use by U.S. Government agencies. 

Cautions

Special Warning 120 (Issued 16 November 2001)

1. Due to recent events in the Middle East and the American homeland, U.S. forces worldwide are operating at a

heightened state of readiness and taking additional defensive

precautions against terrorist and other potential threats. Consequently, all aircraft, surface vessels and subsurface vessels

approaching U.S. forces are requested to maintain radio contact with U.S. forces on bridge-to-bridge channel 16, international air distress (121.5 MHz VHF), or MILAR Distress

(243 MHz UHF)

2. U.S. forces will exercise appropriate measures in selfdefense if warranted by the circumstances. Aircraft, surface

vessels, and subsurface vessels approaching U.S. forces will,

by making prior contact as described above, help make their

intentions clear and avoid unnecessary initiation of such defensive measures.

3. U.S. forces, especially when operating in confined waters, shall remain mindful of navigational considerations of

aircraft, surface vessels, and subsurface vessels in their immediate vicinity.

4. Nothing in this special warning is intended to impede or

otherwise interfere with the freedom of navigation or overflight of any vessel or aircraft, or to limit or expand the inherent self-defense right of U.S. forces. This special warning is

published solely to advise of the heightened state of readiness

of U.S. forces and to request that radio contact be maintained

as described above.

Climatology

0.0 The following information concerning weather along the

shipping routes was prepared by the National Environmental

Satellite Data and Information Service, National Oceanic and

Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).

0.0 Antarctic Climate.—The Antarctic is one of the coldest regions in the world with a recorded minimum temperature of -

86.9°C. The continental influence of Antarctica is enhanced by

its size and altitude. Along with minimum sunlight and maximum radiational cooling, the continental influence produces

extremely cold winters. These severe conditions are tempered

on the coast and at sea by a vast expanse of relatively warm

ocean surrounding the continent.

0.0 Most of the ice-free ocean area is located in a belt of strong,

persistent W winds. The boundaries between the polar continental and polar maritime air masses (Antarctic front) and between the polar maritime and tropical maritime air masses

(polar front) represent areas of frequent and intense storm activity throughout the year. Most of these storms form to the N

of 70°S and circle the continent from W to E. Lows forming

along the polar front tend to move SE toward the continent.

Some penetrate the interior, while others end up in the Ross

Sea and the Weddell Sea, where they dissipate. Some tend to

stagnate in the Bellingshausen Sea where the resultant NE

winds provide a milder climate than on the E side of the Antarctic Peninsula.

0.0 The storms of this region resemble those of the N hemisphere except that the winds blow clockwise toward the center.

The contrast in air mass temperatures and the uncomplicated

land and sea distribution makes fronts and weather changes

more distinct than in the N latitudes. This is especially true of

cold fronts. In addition, the storm movement is more constant,

more rapid, and less erratic than in the N. The average speed of

these systems ranges from about 20 knots in summer to more

than 30 knots in winter. The regularity of movement enables

vessels proceeding E to remain in an area of good or bad

weather if its speed matches the speed of these troughs and

ridges (good weather). Vessels proceeding W usually encounter a series of disturbances. These storms have a tendency to

occur every 3 to 5 days. The first indications of their approach

is often a cirrus or altocumulus cloud deck observed some 100
The Antarctic 5

Pub. 200

to 200 miles away on the W horizon. Several hours later, the

barometer begins to fall and mist gradually fills the air reducing visibility to a few miles. About 8 hours after the first cirrus,

a stratus deck forms, becoming overcast within a few hours.

The passage of the low is indicated by rising pressure and

winds from a W quadrant.

0.0 In addition to the intense low pressure systems and their associated fronts, frequent cold frontal troughs occur which extend for hundreds of miles to the N and NW. The sudden and

often violent changes occurring during the E passage of these

troughs can create problems for vessels.

0.0 Summer (October-March).—Since nearly 85 per cent of

the sea ice melts during the summer, navigation is much less

restricted, particularly from December through March. However, the weather remains hazardous. During September and October when the ice cover reaches its N position and the

temperature difference between the air masses is the greatest,

storms are most frequent and intense. To the S of 60°S, two to

six storms per month are common. By the middle of summer

this frequency is usually cut in half. The effects of these storms

are greatest along the N portions of the routes.

0.0 Through the Drake Passage, where extratropical storm activity is frequent in early summer, gales are encountered up to 20

per cent of the time. The frequency slackens to 15 per cent and

less by the middle of summer as storm activity decreases. The

worst conditions are found on the W side of the passage where

SW through NW winds blow at an average of about 20 knots

throughout the season. These winds are responsible for wave

heights of 3m or more, which are reported 20 to 35 per cent of

the time even in the middle of summer. They are reported more

than 50 per cent of the time during the rough October period.

Under mostly cloudy skies visibility remains good except in

precipitation, which occurs about 30 to 40 per cent of the time.

Snow and frontal fogs can decrease visibility to less than 0.5

mile, but this is uncommon. Snow is most likely early in the

season and to the S. Temperatures hover around freezing in

these waters while near Cape Horn they range from about 4.4°

to 8.9°C; the warmest readings occur in January and February.

0.0 The routes that approach Antarctica from the Atlantic Ocean

usually encounter the roughest conditions. Winds from SW

through NW are responsible for the gales that blow 10 to 20

per cent of the time even in the middle of summer. Gale frequencies, in general, decrease with increasing latitude. Gales

are most likely to occur to the N of 55°S from around South

Georgia Island and E into the W part of the Indian Ocean area.

Near 60°S, NE gales become common by the middle of summer.

0.0 Fog is most likely during the middle of summer when visibility decreases to less than 5 miles about 40 to 60 per cent of

the time and less than 0.5 mile about 10 to 20 per cent of the

time.

0.0 Precipitation as well as fog restricts visibility. Precipitation

is most likely along the N portions of the routes where it is encountered about 30 to 40 per cent of the time. It falls as snow

on about one-half of the precipitation observations. Snow is

most likely to occur to the S of 60°S where temperatures average about -2.2° to 0°C.

0.0 Routes from the Indian Ocean usually face less hostile conditions than those in the Atlantic region. To the S of the Cape

of Good Hope, gales blow 20 to 30 per cent of the time, as

storm activity remains frequent, but to the E of 60°E in the

middle of summer, the frequency drops to 5 per cent or less.

Winds from SW through NW are common everywhere near

60°S. To the S, winds from E are frequent, but strong winds are

not. Fog and precipitation decrease the visibility in summer to

less than 5 miles about 40 per cent of the time. Along the 60th

parallel, isolated areas exist where the visibility falls to below

0.5 mile up to 20 per cent of the time. Precipitation is encountered about 30 to 40 per cent of the time. Snow accounts for 15

to 20 per cent of the precipitation observations. This is reflected in the temperatures which drop below freezing at about

60°S.

0.0 Winds from SW through NW also prevail when entering the

adjacent waters from the Pacific where extratropical activity is

at a minimum in summer. Gales are encountered about 5 to 10

per cent of the time. To the S of 60°S, winds are lighter and

more variable. The visibility decreases to less than 5 miles

about 20 to 40 per cent of the time. Temperatures close N of

the region, which range from 7.8° to 11.1°C on the average, decrease to an average of 1.7°C to the S of 60°S. This is reflected

in the snowfall frequency which accounts for about one-half of

all observations at these higher latitudes. Precipitation is generally encountered about 30 to 40 per cent of the time.

0.0 Along circumpolar routes near 60°S there is some climatic

variation in conditions. While W winds predominate, these

routes are close to the transition area and velocities are generally slower than those farther N. Winds from E are also present

on occasion. Gales are encountered only about 5 per cent of the

time. The frequency of the visibility being less than 5 miles

ranges from 20 per cent on the Pacific Ocean side to 40 per

cent elsewhere. The visibility decreases to less than 0.5 mile

about 5 to 10 per cent of the time with some isolated 20 per

cent occurrences existing to the N of Queen Maud Land during

the middle of summer. Temperatures range from 5° to 7°C on

the Pacific side and from -2° to 0.5°C on the Atlantic side. This

accounts for the variation in snow frequency which ranges

from one-half of all precipitation to the S of the Atlantic as

compared to less than 10 per cent to the S of the Pacific. In

general, precipitation occurs 30 to 40 per cent of the time along

these routes.

Winter (April-September).—Most winter navigation is restricted to the seas around and N of 60°S because of ice. Along

the routes that circle the continent at about 55°S, winds blow

mainly out of the SW through NW. They are strongest early

and late in the season when gales are encountered 20 to 30 per

cent of the time in the Drake Passage and in the waters to the S

of the Atlantic. Elsewhere along these routes, gales can be expected 10 to 20 per cent of the time. During the middle of winter, gales are less frequent, but may still be expected about 20

per cent of the time in the Drake Passage.

0.0 The visibility is usually good, except during precipitation. It

is best along the portions of the routes to the S of the Pacific

Ocean and the Indian Ocean and worst to the S of the Atlantic

Ocean and Drake Passage, off the Cape of Good Hope. In general, the visibility decreases to less than 5 miles about 20 to 40

per cent of the time. Sometimes fog or snow may reduce the

visibility to less than 0.5 mile. This is most likely to the S of

the Atlantic Ocean where the frequency is about 10 per cent.

0.0 On the average, temperatures are coldest and least variable in

the middle of winter when they are near freezing everywhere
6 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

along these routes except in the Pacific area where the average

is a few degrees warmer. Early and late in the season, temperatures remain around freezing, or even a little below, to the S of

the Atlantic. However, they are more likely to be a few degrees

warmer elsewhere. This temperature spread is indicative of the

snowfall distribution as well. In general, precipitation occurs

about 40 to 50 per cent of the time along these routes with little

seasonal variation. However, in the Drake Passage, the precipitation occurs as snow about one-quarter of the time. To the S of

the Atlantic during the middle of winter and late season, snow

occurs on about 30 per cent of all precipitation observations.

To the S of the Indian Ocean and the Pacific Ocean, this frequency decreases to about 10 per cent.

0.0 The Antarctic Peninsula.—The rugged peninsula and the

nearby islands project out into the adjacent waters, interrupting

the general E flow around the continent and extending into the

W winds of the lower latitudes. The climate benefits from the

relatively warm waters that flow into the area for a good portion of the year. Its maritime nature is most apparent in summer

when diurnal temperature variations are small, rain is prevalent, and winds are weakest. Weather producers include extratropical storms, from the oceans to the N, and cold continental

outbreaks, from the S. Both are modified somewhat by local topography.

0.0 Storms, high pressure systems, and local topography produce variable, and often strong, winds throughout the region.

Wind speeds are usually highest from June through October

when averages range from 10 to 20 knots, depending upon exposure. Gales are most likely during this period. From November through May, wind speed averages range from 5 to 15

knots while gales blow on about 1 to 8 days per month. January

and February are usually the quietest months.

0.0 Coastal and island locations are subject to foehn winds,

which develop on the lee side of the mountains. Their descent

causes a sharp increase in wind speed along with a drop in humidity and a rise in temperature. For example, the wind increased from calm to WSW at 44 knots at Hope Bay during an

observation in July. The humidity dropped from 86 to 20 per

cent and the temperature increased from -10° to 6.1°C.

0.0 In the Bellingshausen Sea, dissipating storms generate a preponderance of NE winds over its E shores. However, a strongly

curved arc of mountains protects this area from the gales that

blow along the flank of the Graham Land range. Hence, the

leeward side of the Antarctic Peninsula has a noticeably high

percentage of calms and light winds. For example, calms are

reported at Port Lockroy on about 20 per cent of the observations from February through August.

0.0 Along the Argentine Islands, winds are variable and gales

are infrequent. In Marguerite Bay during the summer, winds

from NW through N have been observed to blow for weeks at a

time. These winds produce a densely packed area of drift ice

off the W coast of Adelaide Island, which clogs the S part of

the bay. At times, winds from the N and NE reach gale force in

this bay.

0.0 In Crystal Sound, the predominant winds blow from the SW,

but the effects of the central plateau and coastal topography

cause strong E gales close to the coast in some areas. Lows often bring N gales, which cause a rise in temperature and heavy

snow. Darbel Bay is affected by winds blowing down the glaciers, particularly in the SE corner. Lallemand Fjord forms a

natural funnel to strong winds blowing off the plateau, which

turn to the N when moving up the fjord. The S part of Hanusse

Bay is influenced by winds funneling through The Gullet.

0.0 Among the South Shetland Islands and the South Orkney Islands, winds are variable and often strong. Winds from E and

W are both frequent as lows pass to the N and S of these islands. The stations at Admiralty Bay and Deception Island are

sheltered from the worst effects of the high winds. At Deception Island, gales blow on an average of 35 days annually as

compared to 60 days at Scotia Bay on Laurie Island. In the

South Orkney Islands, winds are frequently from the NW and

W. Winds from the SE and SW are also common. The stations

on the South Shetland Islands have reported a slight preponderance of NE winds, but only SE and S winds are infrequent.

Throughout the islands, winds are usually strongest from about

July through October with average speeds ranging from 12 to

18 knots.

0.0 The visibility is often exceptional in this region, which is

free of pollution and dust particles. Fog is reported less than 5

per cent of the time while the visibility is more likely to be reduced by rain, mist, drizzle, snow, blowing snow, and sea

spray. On rare occasions, radiation fog forms in protected areas. This is usually composed of supercooled water droplets,

but observations of ice fog have been reported at Marguerite

Bay with temperatures below -31.7°C. Occasionally steam fog

or sea smoke, usually 15 to 30m thick, will form when very

cold air off the continent blows out over warmer water.

0.0 Snowstorms and blowing snow can obscure the coast and adjacent waters. A 20-knot wind blowing over a recent dry snowfall can raise snow a few meters while a 40-knot gale can raise

it as high as 15m and reduce the visibility to less than 100m.

0.0 In the South Shetland Islands, blowing snow is the major restriction to visibility. At Deception Island, poor visibility is reported on an average of 84 days annually as compared to

Scotia Bay, in the South Orkney Islands, where 41 days are reported. The visibility is worst in winter throughout these islands.

0.0 The annual average number of days with fog or reduced visibility ranges from less than 20 in the Argentine Islands to more

than 100 at Hope Bay. Winter is the worst period when 5 to 10

fog days per month occur on the average. December, January,

and February are generally the months with the best visibility.

0.0 Most precipitation in this region falls as snow or other frozen

forms. Rain frequency generally increases with decreasing latitude. Frequent precipitation does not necessarily coincide with

large amounts, as much of it falls as light, dry, powdery snow.

Blowing and drifting snow make measurements difficult while

the topography and ice shelves complicate precipitation patterns. Another form of precipitation observed on the Antarctic

Peninsula is rime or hoarfrost from supercooled fogs. Rime deposits on the windward sides of obstructions may build up to a

thicknesses of a few meters.

0.0 Precipitation is usually generated by the frequent extra-tropical storms and their associated fronts. Many of these systems,

moving E from W of Cape Horn, are channeled through the

Drake Passage and deflected S across the Antarctic Peninsula

and into the Weddell Sea.

0.0 Precipitation is frequent throughout the year along the Antarctic Peninsula and over the islands. In the Bellingshausen

Sea, it is observed on about 15 to 25 days per month on the av-
The Antarctic 7

Pub. 200

erage. September through October and March through April

seem to be the peak periods along the coasts. Snow is usually

most frequent, but rain reaches a peak during the latter period.

From December through April, rain occurs on up to 12 days

per month over the off-lying islands. At Signy Island during

March, rain falls on an average of 12 days while snow occurs

on 16.

0.0 Gray overcast conditions blanket the area for days at a time.

Dense masses of frontal clouds can cover large areas of the

open sea, restricting daylight and reducing visibility. Near Deception Island, cloudy conditions prevail on an average of 240

days annually while clear days are only observed about 4 times

per year at some island locations. Near the coast, the onset of

offshore winds sometimes improves conditions. The least

cloudy conditions generally occur from May through September. In coastal waters on both sides of the peninsula, clear skies

are estimated to occur about 10 per cent of the time. Summer is

usually the cloudiest period in many locations, but local variations occur. For example, on Stonington Island, in Marguerite

Bay, the least cloudy months of December and January coincide with the period of least frequent precipitation. In the South

Orkney Islands, the cloudiest period is from October through

April.

0.0 While an extreme of -89.6°C was recorded in the interior at

Vostok (78°27'S., 106°52'E.), temperatures along the coast are

much warmer. On the peninsula, extremes range from -26.1° to

45.5°C. Extreme maximums range from 7°C near the base of

the peninsula to 15.5°C in the South Shetland Islands. The extent of the cold continental air reaches a minimum in February

when the warmer maritime air advances beyond the latitude of

the South Orkney Islands.

0.0 In general, temperatures are warmer on the W side of the

peninsula than on the Weddell Sea side. The distribution of ice

and water may also account for temperature differences between nearby locations. For example, Port Lockroy is usually

1.7° to 3.3°C warmer than the Argentine Islands, which are

only about 40 miles distant. Diurnal temperature changes are

smallest in summer (2.8° to 5.6°C) due to the small change in

the angle of elevation of the sun between day and night. However, day to day differences are large. Changes of 11.1° to

16.7°C can occur in a few hours by a change in the air mass. In

Graham Land, high temperatures are often associated with foehn winds. At Hope Bay, maritime air crossing the mountains

may reach a temperature of 10°C, even in winter.

0.0 Maximum temperatures climb above freezing consistently

from November through March. January and February are usually the warmest months when average maximums are about 2°C

and minimums range from -2.2° to -1.1°C. Latitudinal influences are small in summer in this region. The coldest temperatures

usually occur in July when maximums average -7.8° to -5.3°C

and minimums range from -17.8° to -9.4°C.

0.0 The average relative humidity across this region ranges from

78 to 85 per cent with a small daily change. The annual range

is also small, but lowest values usually occur on summer afternoons. Although humidities are high, the relatively low temperatures mean that absolute moisture is small. When a foehn

wind blows, humidities can drop below 30 per cent, particularly on the islands. Highest readings occur when relatively warm

air from the N flows across the colder water. Areas of fog may

occur when the saturation point is reached. The highest recorded readings in this region occur in the islands. At Scotia Bay, in

the South Orkney Islands, the average relative humidity ranges

from 86 per cent in January to 92 per cent during June and August.

0.0 East Antarctica.—The circumpolar trough that flanks this

region throughout the year reflects the large number of storms

that affect the area. Winds are mostly from the E quadrant

while gales are frequently generated by the storms and interior

winds. Precipitation, under mostly cloudy skies, is usually

snow as temperatures do not often climb above freezing.

0.0 The prevailing winds blow from NE to SE throughout the

year, although S winds are also somewhat common. In general,

winds are strongest in winter, blowing from the prevailing directions at averages of 20 to 35 knots at many locations. At Sanae in May, NE winds average a speed of 39 knots. In summer,

the averages decrease to 10 to 25 knots. Gales blow on about

100 days annually and are most likely from March through

September. In many locations, katabatic or drainage winds

boost the averages. Novolazarevskaya, Roi Baudouin, Mawson, and Mirnyy are particularly susceptible along this coast.

The winds usually extend out only into the near coastal waters

and are local. For example, at Gauss, winds are lighter and

gales much less frequent than at nearby Mirnyy Station. Mawson is exposed to SE winds which blow, at an average of 20 to

25 knots, for 60 to 85 per cent of the time all year-round, and

80 to 85 per cent from February through May and again from

August through September.

0.0 Maximum wind gusts throughout the year range from 80 to

120 knots and usually blow from the SE or ESE. By contrast,

the second most common wind conditions are calms which occur 5 to 15 per cent of the time at Mawson. Sanae also has a

relatively high percentage of calms. Strong wind gusts are

common throughout the region and many locations have recorded speeds of 100 knots or more. While they can occur in

any season, strong gusts are most likely from April through

October. Snow prevails and is recorded on 150 to 200 days annually along these coasts. Precipitation amounts are often not

reported because of the difficulty in obtaining accurate measurements. At the few stations where records are available, the

averages range from 150 to 630m annually. At Novolazarevskaya, the peak period for snow is from July through October. Mirnyy Station records about 600mm of precipitation each

year with 50 to 100mm of snow per month from May through

September.

0.0 The coast is usually less cloudy than the open sea. Sheltered

locations on the lee side of high ground often have frequent periods of broken clouds. May through September is usually the

least cloudy period. Showa, one of the few locations measuring

clear days, records 69 days annually when skies are clear. This

reaches a peak during the period from May through September

when 6 to 8 clear days per month occur on the average. Summer is usually the cloudiest time.

0.0 Good visibility prevails and exceptional visibility is common. Coastal stations are usually not affected by sea fog or radiation fog and most report true fog less than 2 per cent of the

time. At Sanae, fog or poor visibility has been reported on 25

days annually. Snow, rain, and drizzle are common restrictions

and can cause the visibility to decrease below fog limits.

Strong winds can reduce visibility with sea spray on the water

and blowing snow along the coast. This blowing snow can ob-
8 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

scure both the coastline and adjacent waters.

0.0 In general, fog is most likely in summer when relatively

warm air is cooled by the water or ice. In coastal waters, the

visibility can decrease to less than 0.5 mile on up to 10 days

per month. In winter, the visibility is more wind and precipitation related. At Halley Bay, blowing snow has been recorded

on average on 188 days annually and on 16 to 19 days per

month from March through November.

0.0 Along this coast there is a temperature swing of about -1.1°C

from winter to summer. Maximums in the middle of summer

average 0° to 1.7°C with the minimums being 4.4° to 8.3°C

colder. Extreme maximum temperatures may reach up to 5°C.

Temperatures generally decrease rapidly as the sun moves to

the N. By April, the maximum temperatures average less than -

6.7°C. July, August, and September are the coldest months.

Average maximums range from -16.1° to -13.9°C at lower elevations to -25°C at Halley Bay (30m above Mean Sea Level) in

August. Minimums usually decrease to -17.8°C. Extreme minimums range from -34.4° to -51.1°C. 

0.0 The average relative humidity along this coast ranges from

55 to 85 per cent. The determining factors seem to be exposure

to winds off the water and temperature. Foehn winds can drop

the humidity to less than 30 per cent. The highest humidity often occurs in winter, when temperatures are lowest, although

the moisture content of the air may be very small.

0.0 West Antarctica.—Storms in this area are frequent and often move past Cape Adare into the Ross Sea. The area extending from the Adelie Coast to George V Land is known as the

windiest region in the world and the “home of the blizzards.”

Stormy conditions are almost continuous for 9 months of the

year and frequently reach hurricane force. Cyclogenesis is pronounced W of the Ross Sea where frequent outbreaks of cold

continental air steepen the horizontal temperature gradients.

The resulting differences between cold dry continental air and

relatively warm moist maritime air are also pronounced in the

Ross Sea with its sharply indented coastline. These differences,

and therefore cyclonic activity, are most pronounced during

September and October.

0.0 In this region, particularly around the Ross Sea, the frequency of extratropical cyclones and continental air mass outbreaks

increases the frequencies of winds from W to S. At Little

America, winds are mostly from the E, except from July

through September when S and SW winds are more common.

At Cape Hallett, S winds are frequent all year-round while SW

winds are common from April through August. Winds from SE

and S make up most of the observations at Cape Denison while

E winds prevail at Oasis.

0.0 The extreme wind speeds experienced along these coasts are

the result of extratropical cyclones and local katabatic winds

off the interior highlands and ice plateaus. However, these

winds seldom extend more than 3 miles to seaward.

0.0 In Commonwealth Bay, violent SE gales are common. Along

the coast between the Adelie Coast and George V Land, strong

land winds can develop at night even in the relatively quiet

summer season. At Cape Denison, the annual average wind

speed is 38 knots and this is probably the windiest region in the

world. The average wind speed for July is 47 knots with gales

blowing on 29 days on the average. For the year, gales occur on

an average of 284 days and blizzards are almost continuous for

9 months.

0.0 Other locations are less windy and some are well sheltered

from strong winds. At Cape Hallett, when strong winds aren’t

blowing from the S, there is a good chance that conditions are

calm. Extreme winds at most locations approach or exceed 100

knots. At Wilkes, a maximum gust of 120 knots was reported

blowing from the ESE during October.

0.0 Reduced visibility is often associated with storms. In the

frontal zone, precipitation may be accompanied by fog while

blowing snow is often a problem in coastal waters. In this region the winds are the rule rather than the exception. At Dumont d’Urville, near Cape Denison, 132 days annually are

reported with blowing snow and 346 days with wind speeds of

28 knots or more. This station records 30 days per year with

fog as compared to 50 days at McMurdo. The fog is most likely to occur from April through October. At Little America, the

visibility decreases to less than 0.5 mile on 40 days per year.

0.0 Most of the precipitation in this region falls as snow. Although a large number of snow days are recorded each year, in

many places, amounts are not large since many snows are light.

At Oasis, 200mm of precipitation was recorded as compared to

300mm at Wilkes, where snow falls on an average of 104 days

annually. At Cape Hallett, snow, measuring about 200mm, falls

on an average of 181 days annually, with the maximum occurring during February and March. Mist is observed sometimes

during the summer months.

0.0 Cloud amounts are often difficult to assess due to persistent

blowing snow. Cumulus clouds are uncommon, but cirrus is

widespread and forms at lower levels than in temperate regions. While extratropical storms and their associated fronts

bring an abundance of cloudiness to this region, the downslope

flow from the interior often dissipates clouds and this is reflected in cloud cover minimums over the Ross Ice Shelf and on the

Wilkes Land coast. Cloudiness reaches a seasonal minimum in

winter when the long nights and expansion of the ice field further intensify the polar anticyclones. At Little America, clear

skies have been reported on as many as 17 days in July. Minimum cloud coverage usually occurs from May through September and a maximum occurs in summer.

0.0 Along these coasts, the average maximum temperatures

range from above freezing in summer to -12.2°C and less in

winter. Minimums are usually 2.8° to 5.6°C cooler in summer

and 5.6° to 11.1°C cooler in winter. As a result of foehn winds

descending from the interior, extreme high temperatures have

reached from 4.4° to 10°C. These are most likely to occur in

January although they have occurred in November and December at some locations. The coldest temperatures are recorded

from July through September and range from -34.4° to -

51.1°C.

0.0 Diurnal temperature variations are similar to those in temperate latitudes except in winter. When the sun is continuously

below the horizon (May, June, and July), the temperatures remain above the daily average from 0900 to 1900, but they fall

below during the remaining hours.

0.0 During December and January, the average maximum temperatures range from -1.1°C at McMurdo to 4.4°C at Oasis.

The minimums average below freezing everywhere. By March,

temperatures everywhere usually remain below freezing even

during the day. The coldest temperatures occur from June

through August when average maximums range from -12.2° to

-23.3°C and average minimums range from -17.8° to -34.4°C.
The Antarctic 9

Pub. 200

The warmest region is along the S coast of Wilkes Land while

the coldest is along the Ross Sea shore.

0.0 Because of the pronounced continental influence and the extensive ice fields, the relative humidity is low along these

coasts and ranges from 45 to 85 per cent on average. The higher readings are often due to the low temperatures and not any

large moisture content. The highest readings occur at Cape

Denison from March through May when averages range from

80 to 87 per cent. This is due to a combination of minimum ice

cover and falling temperatures. At Oasis, with its frequent land

winds and relatively warm temperatures, the usual humidity in

summer is about 45 per cent.

Geophysical Features

0.0 Physical Geography.—Antarctica is a geographically isolated land mass centered approximately at the South Pole and

surrounded by water. South America, the nearest continent to

Antarctica, lies about 380 miles away. The land area of Antarctica is approximately 5.4 million square miles, or slightly larger than the size of the continental United States and Mexico.

The continental shelves of Antarctica, although relatively narrow, have an area of about 1.5 million square miles.

0.0 The weather conditions of Antarctica are extremely cold and

harsh, and about 98 per cent of this continent is permanently

covered with an ice sheet that averages 2,000m in thickness.

Only areas along the coast, the Transantarctic Mountains, and

the Ellsworth Mountains have extensive snow and ice-free areas.

0.0 East Antarctica (Greater Antarctica), the area lying between

approximately 30° W and 165° E, is characterized by a vast

dome-shaped cover of ice that is generally over 3,000m thick

and locally exceeds 4,000m in thickness. Beneath the ice sheet

in East Antarctica, the bedrock surface is made up of large lowland plains bounded by several large interior and coastal mountainous regions. The Transantarctic Mountains separate East

Antarctica from West Antarctica, and extend from the Oates

Coast to Coats Land. They range in elevation from 2,000 to

4,530m.

0.0 West Antarctica (Lesser Antarctica) includes Marie Byrd

Land, Ellsworth Land, and the Antarctic Peninsula. This area

would be a mountainous island archipelago if the ice cover

were removed. The mountains of the Antarctic Peninsula are

considered to be a continuation of the South American Andes

to which they are linked by a submarine arc, the Scotia Ridge,

that curves out to enclose the Scotia Sea. The South Orkney Islands, the South Sandwich Islands, and South Georgia are but

above-water peaks of this undersea chain.

0.0 Vinson Massif, the highest peak, attains a height of 5,140m

and rises in the Ellsworth Mountains.

0.0 Two great indentations in the continent, the Ross Sea and the

Weddell Sea, reduce Antarctica to its narrowest width of about

1,200 miles. 

0.0 East Antarctica (Greater Antarctica) is twice as large as West

Antarctica (Lesser Antarctica) and geologically much older,

having been inactive since Precambrian time. This area is what

geologists call a “shield,” a term used to describe a very old

and stable part of the earth’s crust. It is similar to the continental shields of Africa, Australia, and Canada. In East Antarctica,

the shield forms a high plateau which on average is one of the

world’s highest continents. If the ice were removed from this

area, much of the underlying land would remain above sea level.

0.0 The base of East Antarctica is composed of high-grade metamorphic and intrusive igneous rocks such as basalts. Flat-lying

sedimentary and volcanic rocks, such as sand and silt-stones,

overlie the base. These strata are exposed extensively in the

Transantarctic Mountains but rarely in other sections of this area.

0.0 West Antarctica (Lesser Antarctica) is geologically very different. This area is composed of a series of mountain ranges

whose rocks are much younger, but its geologic structure is

less well known. The base is believed to be of Paleozoic age

and mostly composed of igneous intrusives and metamorphic

rocks. Strongly folded and metamorphosed sedimentary and

volcanic sequences of Paleozoic and Mesozoic age mantle this

base level.

0.0 The relatively few lakes that are located in Antarctica have

few associated streams. These lakes rarely receive sediments

and are rarely thermally stratified in the summer. Most of the

lakes are highly saline and have low species diversity. They

may or may not be permanently covered by ice.

0.0 Ice-free oases, or “dry valleys,” occur in some portions of

East Antarctica. They are the result of evaporation and sublimation of water and ice, and the restricted flow of glaciers into

the valleys. The soils, ponds, or lakes within the valleys are

usually saline because there is no external drainage. The best

known dry valleys are those located in the S part of Victoria

Land and the Bunger Oasis region.

0.0 Permafrost.—Knowledge of the permafrost conditions in

Antarctica is limited. Dry permafrost, a condition in which the

soil or rock contains no ice or contains very little ice, prevails

over most of the continent, but ice-rich permafrost has been

identified at some locations. When dry permafrost materials

thaw, there is little or no reduction in volume and consequently

no expansion upon refreezing. However, the melting of ice-rich

permafrost produces large volumes of water. This almost spontaneous liquefaction can cause the mass movement of sediment

and water even on slight inclines. The base of the permafrost in

the McMurdo-Dry Valley area is irregular, ranging from 440 to

550m in depth at McMurdo Station to 970m near Lake Vanda.

This irregularity is explained by steep geothermal gradients,

the high salinity of groundwater, and possible solar heating beneath the lake ice. Ice-rich permafrost is more prevalent in the

Antarctic Peninsula, especially in depressions and on slopes

facing S.

0.0 Volcanism.—Evidence of volcanic activity (past and

present) has been found along the Transantarctic Mountains

between McMurdo Sound and Cape Adare, and in the Queen

Maud Range. It has also been found in Marie Byrd Land, the

Antarctic Peninsula, and the South Shetland Islands.

0.0 The largest volcano, Mount Erebus, rises on Ross Island and

attains a height of 3,743m. The crater of this volcano consists

of a pool of molten lava.

0.0 Fumarole activity (a hole or vent from which vapors rise) has

been reported at Mount Erebus; at Mount Terror, on Ross Island; at Mount Morning, which rises 140 km SW of Mount

Erebus; on Deception Island, in the South Shetland Islands;

and on Thule Island, in the South Sandwich Islands.

0.0 Seismic studies were conducted in the McMurdo Sound and
10 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

Mount Erebus areas and the data collected showed that one

small earthquake occurred every 2 days. Other tectonically active areas are the Antarctic Peninsula, with its surrounding islands, and the Scotia Arc region. Prominent tectonic features

include active volcanoes in the South Sandwich Islands and the

South Shetland Islands.

0.0 Extensive seismic studies are needed to determine the stability of the entire continent. However, it can be reasonably assumed that East Antarctica is a more stable area in comparison

to West Antarctica.

0.0 Terrestrial Biota.—The terrestrial ecosystems of the Antarctic are simple and lack diversity because they exist under

extreme conditions for life support. In addition, in many cases,

they represent the early stages of colonization following deglaciation. Even so, interrelationships between organisms are

poorly understood. Due to energy pathways or food webs being

simple, the ecosystems are vulnerable to disruption and are

slow in recovering from disturbances.

0.0 The ecosystems of Antarctica comprise mainly non-vascular

plants and small invertebrates. The vegetation on the continent

consists mostly of scattered patches of crptogams such as

mosses, lichens, algae, and fungi. The invertebrates include

bacteria, protozoa, and certain arthropods such as springtails

and mites.

0.0 The maritime areas of the continent have less snow, higher

temperatures, and more precipitation. Therefore, these areas

have additional developed vegetation such as ferns, fruiticose,

crustose lichens, and some flowering plants. Invertebrates and

other low life forms are more abundant and small wingless insects, annelids, spiders, and molds exist.

0.0 Ice Sheet.—The enormous ice sheet that covers Antarctica

accounts for about 65 to 70 per cent of the world’s freshwater.

The average thickness of this ice sheet is approximately

2,000m, but it attains a thickness of over 4,500m in places.

0.0 From the high elevations in the interior, the ice slowly flows

outward to the edge of the continent. At the coast, the flows

combine to form ice shelves in many places. These ice shelves

comprise more than 10 per cent of the area of Antarctica. The

largest are the Ross Ice Shelf (700,000 km2

), the Filchner Ice

Shelf, the Ronne Ice Shelf, and the Amery Ice Shelf. An ice

shelf may range in thickness from 200 to 600m and may be either floating or grounded.

0.0 Icebergs.—Eventually, as the ice shelves grow, icebergs

calve off the leading edges and move N into the adjacent waters. These icebergs can be of enormous size, some measuring

larger than 60km by 100km horizontally. They can also rise up

to 100m above sea level and extend up to 400m below sea level, causing deep scouring of the continental shelf.

0.0 In 1987, it was reported that a massive iceberg (Designated

B9) was calved from the Ross Ice Shelf. This berg was the

largest piece of floating ice on record, being approximately

208km long, 53km wide, and 250m thick. (Three times the size

of Long Island, NY.)

0.0 The icebergs move in a N direction in response to the ocean

currents and can generally be found as far N as 45°S in the Pacific Ocean and 35°S in the Atlantic Ocean and the Indian

Ocean.

0.0 The ice cap of Antarctica represents a potential resource to

those areas of the world deficient in freshwater resources. The

annual yield of icebergs that break off the ice cap is approximately 1,000km3

. If 10 per cent of this annual iceberg production could be transported economically, the water demands of

an urban population of 500 million could be satisfied.

0.0 Sea Ice.—Whereas icebergs calve off the front of ice shelves,

sea ice (drift ice) forms from the freezing of seawater and covers

enormous areas around Antarctica, with significant physical and

biological implications. The area of the sea ice varies several

fold between the summer and the winter. In March, sea ice covers approximately 3 ,000,000km2

; in August or September, it

covers approximately 20,000,000km2

, hence, in effect, doubling

the ice area of Antarctica. In winter, this ice cover completely

encloses Antarctica and can extend as far N as 55°S. Individual

ice floes extend 10 to 100m across and can be about 3m thick,

but most of the drift ice is “first-year ice,” which averages 1.5m

in thickness. As the summer progresses, the ice moves N and

melts. Consequently, open water can be found in coastal areas

while a zone of drift ice occurs farther offshore. Sea ice moves in

response to the winds and can travel up to 65km in a day.

0.0 The widely varying extent of the ice is believed to have an

important influence on worldwide climatic conditions. However, the relationship is complex and only partially understood.

Two factors that play a role are the thermal insulating properties of ice and its high albedo. Sea ice acts as a thermal insulator that restricts the exchange of heat between the atmosphere

and the ocean. Because of its high albedo relative to water, it

affects the amount of radiant energy that is absorbed regionally. These properties along with the wide seasonal fluctuations

in the extent of the sea ice cover will affect the heat transfer in

Antarctica and, hence, the global climate.

0.0 The sea ice provides habitat for many seals and penguins.

While these animals feed on organisms in the ocean, the sea ice

offers a refuge from predators. Therefore, these animals are

frequently found at the edge of the sea ice near open water. 

History of Exploration

0.0 History.—The concept of a southern continent intrigued

even the ancient Greeks, who believed that such a continent

was needed to balance the land masses of the North Hemisphere. In 1772-1775, Captain James Cook circumnavigated

Antarctica, but saw no continent. However, the 1800s brought

many adventurers to this region.

0.0 The first person to sight the continent, as reported by the

Americans, was Nathaniel Palmer in November, 1820; Captain

Edward Bransfield, as reported by the English, in January,

1820; and Captain Fabian Von Bellingshausen, as reported by

the Russians, 1820-1821. Between the years of 1838 and 1843,

three expeditions, led by d’Urville, Wilkes, and Ross, were

made to Antarctica in order to find the South Magnetic Pole.

Although the goal of these expeditions was not realized, other

significant scientific contributions were made. A number of

“firsts” in the history of the continent include achievements by

Bull, Gerlache, Borchgrevink, Bruce, Mawson, and Amundsen. Subsequently, scientific research programs began in the

early 1900s and have continued to the present.

0.0 Early geologic exploration of Antarctica began in the late

19th century with the collection of rock fragments from the sea

bottom. Extensive programs were carried out by teams of scientists who accompanied voyages to Antarctica from the 1890s

to the 1920s. Progress was made in mapping and in under-
The Antarctic 11

Pub. 200

standing Antarctica’s geology, glaciology, and geography. After World War I, advances in transportation and communications allowed even greater exploration.

0.0 The International Geophysical Year (IGY) conducted in

1957-58 was the beginning of Antarctica’s role as an international science laboratory. Base stations were maintained by

twelve countries during this period. New data was obtained on

meteorology, upper atmosphere physics, geomagnetism, seismology, glaciology, and geography.

0.0 The record of investigations begins in the 1830s with observations made by James Eights and the Charles Wilkes expedition. Robert Cushman Murphy made important contributions

concerning subantarctic birds and terrestrial flora and fauna in

the early 1900s.

EXPLORATION AND RESEARCH HISTORY OF THE ANTARCTIC CONTINENT

Expedition Expedition Remarks

James Cook 1772-1775 Circumnavigated Antarctica but did not sight the continent.

Fabian von Bellingshausen 1820 Circumnavigated Antarctica but did not sight the continent.

Nathaniel Palmer 1820-1831 Discovered the Antarctic Peninsula in 1820.

Edward Bransfield 1820 Discovered the Antarctic Peninsula (According to British reports).

James Weddell 1822-1824 Discovered the Weddell Sea in 1823.

James Clark Ross 1839-1843 Discovered the Ross Sea and the Ross Ice Shelf.

Charles Wilkes 1838-1842 Discovered Wilkes Land.

Dumont d’Urville 1837-1840 Discovered the Adelie Coast

Adrien de Gerlache 1897-1899 First to winter aboard ship in the area.

C. E. Borchgrevink 1898-1900 First to winter on the continent.

William S. Bruce 1902-1904 First to set up a permanent station in the region.

Douglas Mawson, T. David, 

and A. Mackay

1911-1914 First to reach the South Magnetic Pole.

Roald Amundsen December 14, 1911 First to reach the geographic South Pole.

Robert Scott 1901-1913 Various expeditions. Reached the geographic South Pole on January 

17, 1912, but perished in blizzard with four others on return journey.

Ernest Shackleton 1907-1922 Various expeditions.

United Kingdom 1923-1939 First continuing scientific research program.

Hubert Wilkins 1928 First flight across the Antarctic Peninsula.

Richard E. Byrd 1928-1941 Various expeditions. First to fly over the geographic South Pole in 

1929.

Lincoln Ellsworth 1933-1939 Demonstrated feasibility of aircraft landings and takeoffs.

United States 1946-1947 Operation Highjump. The largest expedition in Antarctica.

United States 1947-1948 Operation Windmill.

International effort—

• Argentina

• Australia

• Belgium

• Chile

• France

• Japan

• New Zealand

• Norway

• Russia

• South Africa

• United Kingdom

• United States

1957-1958 International Geophysical Year (IGY). First major international 

scientific effort.
12 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 Between 1920 and 1955, four expedition teams from the

United States developed a sizable data base on Antarctic terrestrial features, including that of the interior. The Second Byrd

Antarctic Expedition (1935-37) explored the inland mountains

and nunataks, and made extensive discoveries. The United

States Service Expedition of 1939-1941 investigated the natural resources of Antarctica; studied botany, zoology, and

oceanography; and made physiological observations of expeditionary personnel. Two United States Navy projects, Operation

Highjump (1946-1947) and Operation Windmill (1947-1948),

made extensive observations on the Antarctic.

0.0 In the late 1950s, the United States established a permanent

expedition, the United States Antarctic Research Program (USARP).

0.0 In 1968, the first drill hole to penetrate rock through the ice,

which was 2,164m thick, was made at Byrd Station (elevation

1,530m).

0.0 Currently, work is being done in all aspects of Antarctic research with funding, management, and guidance provided by

the National Science Foundation (NSF). 

0.0 Additional information concerning stations and bases is

available from the Council of Managers of National Antarctic

Programs (COMNAP), at their website, as follows:

COMNAP Home Page

http://www.comnap.aq

ANTARCTIC RESEARCH STATIONS

Country Station Location Comments

Argentina Orcadas (LOK) Laurie Island Permanently manned.

Esperanza (LTS) Trinity Peninsula Permanently manned.

Vice Comodoro Marambio 

(LUU)

Seymour Island Permanently manned. Landing strips.

General Belgrano II (LTS4) Coats Land Permanently manned.

General San Martin (LTS2) Debenham Island Permanently manned.

Jubany (J25) King George Island Permanently manned.

Almirante Brown (LOY) Danco Coast Summer occupation only.

Primavera (LTR88) Danco Coast Summer occupation only.

Teniente Camara South Shetland Islands Temporary occupations.

Decepcion Deception Island Temporary occupations.

Melchior Palmer Archipelago Temporary occupations.

General Belgrano (LTA) Filchner Ice Shelf Temporary occupations.

Teniente Matienzo (LUM) East Coast-Graham Land Temporary occupations. Landing strips.

Alferez de Navio Sobral Filchner Ice Shelf Temporary occupations.

Petrel Joinville Island Group Temporary occupations. Landing strips.

Australia Macquarie Macquarie Island Permanently manned.

Mawson MacRobertson Land Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Davis Ingrid Christensen Coast Permanently manned. Winter landings on 

sea ice.

Casey Budd Coast. Wilkes Land Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Australia Heard Island Atlas Cove Summer only occupation.

Law Base Larsemann Hills Summer only occupation.

Law Dome 110 km from Casey Summer only occupation.

Brazil Commandante Ferraz 

(ZXOECF)

Keller Peninsula Permanently manned.

Bulgaria Ochridski Livingston Island Periodically manned.

Chile Capitan Prat (CCZ) South Shetland Islands Permanently manned.

General Bernardo O’Higgins 

(CATU2)

Trinity Peninsula Permanently manned. Landing strips.
The Antarctic 13

Pub. 200

Chile Julio Escudero South Shetland Islands Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Eduardo Frei Montalva King George Island Permannetly manned. Landing strips.

Teniente Luis Carvajal Adelaide Island Summer occupation only. Landing strips.

Presidente Gonzalez Vidiez Danco Coast Summer occupation only.

Yelcho Palmer Archipelago Summer occupation only.

Ripamonti King George Island Summer occupation only.

Risopatron Robert Island Summer occupation only.

China Great Wall South Shetland Islands Permanently manned.

Zhongshan 69°22'S, 76°23'E Permanently manned.

Ecuador Vicente Antarctic peninsula Occassionally manned.

Finland Aboa Dronning Maud Land Summer occupation only.

France Alfred Faure Permanently manned.

Port aux Francais Iles Kerguelen Permanently manned.

Dumont d’Urville Terre Adelie Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Martin-de-Vivies Permanently manned.

Dome C (Concordia) Antarctic plateau Summer use only.

Germany Dallmann King George Island Summer station only.

Georg von Neumayer 

(DLA21) (DB9020)

Eckstrom Ice Shelf Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Kohnen Dronning Maud Land Summer use only. Landing strips.

India Maitri 70°45'S, 11°44'E Permanently manned. Helipad.

Italy Baia Terra Nova Victoria Land Summer use only. Landing strips.

Dome C (Concordia) Antarctic plateau Summer use only.

Japan Syowa (JGX) East Ongul Island Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Miznho East Antarctica Summer occupation only.

Asuka (JGY) Queen Maud Land Summer occupation only.

Dome Fuji Valkyrjedomen peak Summer occupation only.

Korea King Sejong (6NA20) King George Island Permanently manned.

New Zealand Scott (ZLQ) McMurdo Sound Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Norway Troll Dronning Maud Land Summer occupation.

Tor Dronning Maud Land Summer occupation.

Peru Macchu Picchu Summer occupation only.

Poland Henryk Arctowski (3ZL301) King George Island Permanent occupation. Scientific base.

Russia Bellingshausen (UGE2) King George Island Permanently manned.

Molodezhnaya (RUZU) Enderby Land Permanently manned. Landing strips. 

Airfield. Main Russian research base.

Mirny (UBA) (UFE) Queen Mary Land Permanently manned.

Vostok (RKIS) East Antarctica Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Novolazarevskaya Dronning Maud Land Permanently manned. 

Progress Princess Elizabeth Land Permanently manned. 

ANTARCTIC RESEARCH STATIONS

Country Station Location Comments
14 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 Significant international interest in the continent developed

during the International Geophysical Year (IGY) 1957-1958.

This marked the beginning of major scientific activities that

have continued to the present. Although earlier expeditions

conducted some scientific activities, the efforts of international

working agreements reached during the IGY period were recognized as unique by all nations involved. Twelve nations established over sixty research stations in Antarctica during the

IGY period. This became the basis for the Scientific Committee on Antarctic Research (SCAR) and the formulation of the

Antarctic Treaty. The nations included Argentina, Australia,

Belgium, Chile, France, Japan, New Zealand, Norway, South

Africa, Russia, the United Kingdom, and the United States.

0.0 In 1958, the SCAR, as a committee of the International

Council of Scientific Unions, was tasked to continue the scientific and logistic cooperation which began during the IGY period. The SCAR seeks to identify scientific problems of

Antarctica, their scope and significance. The member nations

work independently or jointly to bring available logistics support and scientific personnel to seek solutions to these problems, maintaining multinational efforts as the common objective.

0.0 Following the IGY period, with the claims issue made by

seven nations to portions of Antarctica unsettled since 1945,

the United States called a conference in 1959. The Washington

Conference convened on October 1 and was attended by those

12 nations which had conducted substantial activities in Antarctica including the following seven claimant states (The

United Kingdom, France, Australia, New Zealand, Norway,

Argentina, and Chile). The final act of the Washington Conference on the Antarctic was the Antarctic Treaty, signed at Washington on December 1, 1959. Subsequently, this treaty was

ratified by all the signatories by June 23, 1961, with the continued spirit of cooperation achieved during the IGY period. By

April 1991, thirty nine nations were signatories. 

0.0 An agreement reached in Madrid in April of 1991, signed by

all 39 parties, imposes a ban on all mineral exploitation in Antarctica for 50 years. The agreement demilitarizes the continent,

establishes the right to scientific research for all countries, and

creates a procedure for monitoring the environment.

0.0 Sovereignty.—Seven of the original 12 signatories to the

1959 Antarctic Treaty have claimed sovereignty over parts of

Antarctica. These countries are Argentina, Australia, Chile,

France, New Zealand, Norway, and the United Kingdom. Some

areas of Antarctica are claimed by more than one of these

countries, while other areas remain unclaimed. The remainder

Russia Druzhnaya 4 (ULO1) Ingrid Christensen Coast Summer occupation only.

Soyuz (RUNI) McRobertson Land Summer occupation only.

South Africa Marion Island Prince Edward Islands Permanently manned.

Sanae IV (ZRP) Queen Maud Land Permanently manned. 

Gough Island Tristan de Cunha group Permanently manned.

E-base Queen Maud Land Summer occupation only.

Spain Juan Carlos I (3ZL34) Livingston Island Summer occupation only.

Gabriel de Castilla Deception Island Summer occupation only.

Sweden Wasa (SLUI) Dronning Maud Land Summer use only.

Ukraine Vernadsky Galindez Island Permanently manned.

United Kingdom King Edward Point (ZBH) South Georgia Permanently manned.

Bird Island W end of South Georgia Permanently manned.

Signy (ZHF33) South Orkney Islands Summer use only.

Adelaide Island (Rothera) 

(ZHF45)

West Coast-Graham Land Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Halley (VSD) Coats Land Permannently manned. Landing strips.

United States Palmer (NGH) Anvers Island Permanently manned. Heliport.

McMurdo (NGD) Ross Sea Permanently manned. Airfield. Largest 

station in Antarctica.

Amundsen-Scott (NPX) South Pole Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Uruguay Artigas (C2C) South Shetland Islands Permanently manned. Landing strips.

Note.—In addition to the above research bases and stations, numerous small refuges, most with provisions and fuel, are

situated on the continent and off-lying islands. Vessels should contact McMurdo Station for the latest information concerning

the locations and conditions of these refuges. 

ANTARCTIC RESEARCH STATIONS

Country Station Location Comments
The Antarctic 15

Pub. 200

of the original signatories (Belgium, Japan, South Africa, Russia, and the United States) have neither made claims nor recognized claims made by other countries. In the Antarctic Treaty,

the disagreement over the issue of territorial sovereignty is

dealt with in a manner that allows the parties to cooperate in

the conduct of the specific activities addressed by the treaty.

0.0 Historical Impact.—To date, the major impacts on the terrestrial environment from the present occupation of Antarctica

are localized and are mostly associated with support facilities

such as fuel-handling and storage; waste disposal; and construction, operation, and maintenance of stations and field

camps. Those environmental features that have been affected

include rocks, soils, lakes, ponds, terrestrial biota, and glacial

snow and ice. The degree to which they have been affected, in

some cases, is unknown, but is generally only local in extent.

0.0 During 1980 and again in 1991, the National Science Foundation performed comprehensive environmental impact assessments of U.S. activities in Antarctica. The assessments

concluded that continuation of these activities would have no

significant continental impacts on Antarctica.

0.0 Only a few localized impacts of any significance could be

identified. Most of these impacts are significant only in instances where research being carried out requires an undisturbed environment for its success.

0.0 The protection of the Antarctic environment is of prime concern to personnel working in Antarctica, and this concern is reflected in directives issued under the Antarctic Treaty.

0.0 Current scientific activities and tourism in Antarctica have

little impact on the marine environment. Those impacts that

have been noted are only local in extent. A small number of

birds and seals are lost to scientific collecting. Activities near

rookeries, such as helicopter overflights and foot expeditions,

are restricted.

0.0 Impact on the marine environment has been limited in the

past except for the harvesting of mammals. The disposal of

garbage, sanitary waste, and solid waste in coastal waters degrades water quality on a local scale. Vessel traffic and the handling of petroleum products have resulted in small oil spills or

oil discharges which may harm local animal populations. During 1989, a vessel ran aground to the SW of Palmer Station,

spilling about 4,000 barrels (about 170,000 gallons) of fuel into

the sea.

0.0 Commercial harvesting of whales and seals has had significant impacts in the past. Twentieth century whaling greatly reduced the populations of baleen whales. The International

Whaling Commission now regulates whaling. The fin, blue,

humpback, and southern right whales are protected from harvesting, and harvest quotas have been set for other species. The

reduction of the number of whales in this century from approximately 975,000 to approximately 338,000 means that less krill

are consumed by whales. Whereas baleen whales used to consume an estimated 180 million tons of krill, they now only consume an estimated 33 million tons, increasing the availability

of krill for other predators. Subsequently, the population of crabeater seals increased and the populations of other predators

may also have increased. Hence, whaling may have altered the

populations of many species besides the whales themselves.

0.0 Fur seals and elephant seals were captured for their fur and

blubber, respectively, during the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, and the number of fur seals was severely reduced. Both

of these seals are now protected by the Convention for Conservation of Antarctic Seals.

0.0 In the early 20th century, a whaling station was established in

King Edward Cove, on South Georgia Island, to support whaling operations. The activities in this harbor grossly polluted the

water with organic effluents and fuel oil, impacting the local

marine communities. However, contamination has stopped and

evidence indicates that the benthic fauna has recovered.

0.0 The Antarctic environment has been contaminated at extremely low levels with organochlorides as a result of human

activities outside of Antarctica. The entire impact of these contaminants is not known. However, DDT and other chlorinated

hydrocarbons have been found in Antarctic birds. In addition,

DDT, PCBs, and other organochlorides have also been found in

krill, although at concentrations that do not pose a human

health hazard.

0.0 Marine traffic is considerable in the Drake Passage, which is

used by vessels too large to pass through the Panama Canal.

Commercial shipping, which includes oil tankers, pass through

this area, usually to the N of the Antarctic Convergence. Recently, several cruise vessels have transited Antarctic waters.

0.0 Bases.—McMurdo Station is the main United States base

and also the largest multipurpose research and logistics center

in Antarctica. The population of bases on the continent may

reach 2,000 people during the summer and 800 people during

the winter. The U.S. bases rely heavily on aircraft, rather than

on ships, for transport of personnel and priority cargo. However, when fuel or bulk cargo is transported (some 90 per cent of

the total), it is shipped to McMurdo. Icebreakers are used to

open an approach channel, enabling cargo vessels and tankers

to off-load directly at this station. McMurdo has one of the few

airfields on the continent that are suitable for use, at times, by

wheeled aircraft.

Ice 

Combined Antarctic Naval Patrol

0.0 The Combined Antarctic Naval Patrol (Argentina-Chile)

normally carries out patrol duties from November 15 until

March 15. Patrol duties include search and rescue duties; maritime salvage, surveillance, and anti-pollution work; providing

safe conditions for mariners and human life at sea; and maintaining the area to be free of pollution. The area of responsibility is S of 60°S between the meridians of 10°W and 131°W.

Vessels requiring assistance should contact naval patrol vessels

on VHF channel 16 or 2182 kHz or with any of the following

Maritime Rescue Coordination Centers (MRCC) or Maritime

Rescue Subcenters (MRSC): 

1. MRCC Ushuaia—

a. Telephone: 54-2901-431098

b. Radio: 500 kHz, 2182 kHz, 4660 kHz, and

VHF channel 16

c. E-mail: mrccushuaia@directemar.cl

2. MRCC Punta Arenas—

a. Telephone: 56-61-201161

56-61-201140

56-61-201142

b. Facsimile: 56-61-201196

c. E-mail: mrccpuntaarenas@directemar.cl

3. MRSC Puerto Williams—
16 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

a. Telephone: 56-61-621090

56-61-621582

b. E-mail: mrscpuertowilliams@directemar.cl

Natural Charactaristics

0.0 Formation and Growth of Sea Ice in Polar Regions.—An

understanding of the formation, growth, and decay of sea ice is

desirable for comprehension of many of the problems in ice

seamanship. The climatic factors bearing on the formation of

ice naturally vary from place to place and from season to season. However, a knowledge of the basic physics involved

should be of great assistance and enable mariners to recognize

certain salient features of ice and take advantage of its properties.

0.0 Freezing.—In temperate and tropical latitudes, the ocean

acts as a storehouse of radiant heat from the sun, the visible

and infrared wave lengths being largely absorbed in the surface

layers. The heat that is stored by this action is then given off to

the air at night and at other periods when the air is colder than

the sea surface. However, in higher latitudes, insufficient heat

is stored in the short daylight periods to compensate for the

losses at night and the temperature of the surface water is lowered. As the altitude of the sun becomes lower, less radiation is

received and more is reflected from the sea surface due to the

low angle of incidence of the rays. Finally, the water reaches

freezing point and further loss of heat results in the formation

of ice.

0.0 Conditions then become even less favorable for the retention

of radiant heat from the sun; since, ice reflects much more of

the visible radiation than does water. The cooling of the air that

is in contact with the ice becomes accelerated and even more

ice is formed as this cold air spreads.

0.0 Salinity.—Fresh water freezes at 0°C, but sea water remains

liquid until a lower temperature is reached due to the presence

of salt. The greater the amount of salt (salinity), the lower the

freezing point. Ordinary sea water, with a salinity of 35 parts

per thousand, does not begin to freeze until it has been cooled

to -1.88°C.

0.0 Salinity may also affect the rate of freezing through its influence on the density of the water. Fresh water contracts on cooling and sinks below the surface until a temperature of 4°C is

reached. On further cooling, fresh water expands and its density decreases. If the cooling takes place at the surface with no

other process of mixing at work, the coldest water will stay in a

layer at that position. It is then necessary for only the layer at

the surface to be cooled to the freezing point for ice to form.

0.0 The temperature of maximum density decreases faster than

the freezing point with increasing salinity. These two temperatures coincide at a salinity of 24.7 parts per thousand. This

means that with a salinity of 24.7 parts per thousand or greater,

density currents operate until the freezing point is reached and

theoretically the entire body must be cooled to this temperature

before ice can form on the surface.

0.0 However, in nature, rapid cooling of still water often occurs

under conditions where heat is removed from the surface layers

faster than it can be supplied from the deeper layers through

convection currents. In such a case, ice will form on the surface

of the water before the deeper layers have approached the

freezing point.

0.0 A practical outcome of the foregoing is that if a body of water originally of uniform density is losing heat at the surface,

ice will be formed most readily in fresh water, less readily in

sea water of low salinity, and least readily in sea water of high

salinity. The greater heat removal required to freeze sea water

is due not only to its relatively low freezing point, but also to

the increased tendency of the cooled surface water to sink as

the temperature of maximum density decreases.

0.0 Ice Propagation.—Ice forms first in shallow water, near the

coast or over shoals and banks; in bays, inlets, and straits in

which there is no current; and in regions with reduced salinity,

such as those near the mouths of rivers. It then spreads from

these areas.

0.0 The first sign of freezing is an oily or opaque appearance of

the water. This is due to the formation of needle-like spicules

and thin plates of ice, about 1 centimeter wide, which are

known as frazil crystals. These crystals of fresh ice, which are

free of salt, increase in number until the sea is covered by a

thick and soupy slush, known as grease ice.

0.0 Snow, falling into water, aids the freezing process by cooling

and by providing nuclei for the ice crystals. In such conditions,

the slush forms into new ice. Except in sheltered waters, an

even sheet of ice seldom forms immediately. The slush, as it

thickens, breaks up into separate masses and frequently into

the characteristic pancake form, the rounded shape and raised

rim of which are due to the fragments colliding with each other. The formation of slush dampens down the sea and swell,

and if the low temperature continues, the pancakes of ice adhere to each other, forming a continuous sheet or floe.

0.0 An accumulation of spongy ice lumps, known as shuga, is

the next normal stage of formation from grease ice. On further

freezing and depending upon the salinity and wind exposure,

shuga develops into nilas, an elastic crust of high salinity and

up to 10 centimeters thick, or into ice rind, a brittle and shiny

crust of low salinity up to 5 centimeters thick. When the ice

reaches a thickness of from 10 to 30 centimeters, it is collectively referred to as young ice which is the transition stage between nilas and first-year ice. First-year ice is usually between

30 centimeters and 2 meters thick. Ice up to 3m or more in

thickness that has survived at least one summer melt is known

as old ice. Multi-year ice is the term now used to describe old

ice which has survived more than two summers melts. Old ice

has a bluish-green tone on its surface in contrast to the greenish-white tone of first-year ice. Multi-year ice usually develops

an intense blue tone with age.

0.0 Melting.—The melting of ice takes place mostly at the expense of the heat of the surrounding water. This heat may have

been absorbed from solar radiation in the vicinity or provided

by currents originating in warmer latitudes. Melting also results from direct absorption of radiation by the ice and from

contact with warm air. Ice will condense dew from warm,

moist air on its surface, and each increment of moisture so condensed will melt several times its weight of ice in the ratio of

the latent heat of evaporation to the heat of fusion.

0.0 Another factor tending to accelerate the rate of ice melting

from solar radiation, once it has commenced, is the increased

stability of the surface layers of the sea brought about by the

freshening effect of the melt water. Mixing between the surface

and deeper layers, already diminished by the wave-damping

action of floating ice, is further decreased by the formation of a

surface stratum of relatively low density. The normal transfer
The Antarctic 17

Pub. 200

to greater depths of heat received as infrared radiation in the

top layers is retarded, and the melting of the ice is thereby

speeded up.

0.0 The phenomenon of “dead water” is sometimes encountered

by vessels in areas where a layer of nearly fresh water that has

derived from melting ice extends to about keel depth. Under

such conditions, the propulsive power of a vessel may be largely dissipated in generating internal waves in the boundary between the fresher water and the more saline water.

Consequently, the vessel slows down, begins to steer sluggishly, and appears to be “stuck” in the water. Fortunately, this state

of affairs occurs only when the speed of the vessel is below the

speed of propagation of such waves, which is not more than 2

or 3 knots. Therefore, “dead water” will usually affect only

sailing vessels, in light winds, small craft, or tugs with very

heavy tows.

0.0 In regions where the spring melting of ice is brought about

chiefly by atmospheric transfer of heat from lower latitudes

and where local fogs restrict the solar radiation reaching the ice

and sea surface, the fresh surface layers of sea water may become greatly chilled and the rate of melting reduced.

0.0 In places where the vertical exchange of water caused by

wind, sea, currents, and tides occurs, melting of the ice is expedited by heat being brought to the upper layers.

0.0 Disintegration.—In spring, as the duration of daylight begins to increase and the mean air temperature at the sea surface

rises, the snow cover of the sea ice and the top layers of the ice

itself begin to thaw. Under conditions of low humidity, most

loss on the upper surface of the ice will take place through

evaporation imperceptible to the ordinary observer. When the

relative humidity is high, pools of dew and melt water will

form on the surface. This fresh water, running down through

cracks and holes in the ice, will freeze again on contact with

the cold sea water; hence, sealing the openings. In addition,

cracks extending only part way through the ice will be widened

by the expansion of the water freezing in them. On further rising of the air temperature and melting of the surface, these

cracks open up again and fresh water in a layer, as much as 1m

thick, flows under the ice.

0.0 Sea ice less than 1 year old melts more readily than older ice

because of its higher salt content. Fast ice usually melts first

near the shore, forming the so-called “offshore water.” As melting progresses, the ice farther out from the shore becomes honeycombed with cracks due to tides, air temperature changes,

temperature gradients in the ice, and ice pressure. Under the influence of wind and current, this ice now commences to disintegrate and an increased number of channels and polynyas

(open areas) are produced. With the first strong wind, the ice

breaks into smaller pieces and finally all the fast ice disintegrates into drift ice.

0.0 Decay of the ice is expedited by mechanical attrition from

the swell. The physical erosion of the floes produces scaling,

resulting in the formation of a quantity of small blocks and

brash. The scaling process enables the sea to reach more extensive areas of ice where the cycle continues.

0.0 The final stages of melting vary with the type of ice. Ice of

one winter’s growth melts readily in low latitudes, if brine is

still present. The internal melting due to variations in the salt

content produces a honeycombed appearance with a much

greater surface area. Since the rate of heat absorption through

conduction is proportional to the area exposed, the ice so

formed quickly disappears. Fresher and firmer hummocky ice

is longer lived. The old floes are heavily undercut at the water

line, but honeycombing is rare, due to the absence of salt. Underwater rams are produced by the melting back of the uppermost meters of ice. The years-old hummocks, having a

homogeneous structure of nearly salt-free ice and a minimum

of exposed surface in proportion to their bulk, survive the longest in warmer waters.

0.0 Break-up on rivers usually occurs three or four weeks after

the mean air temperature has risen above 0°C. Ice on lakes

breaks up two or three weeks later, and sea ice may break up

about this same time.

0.0 Comparison of Arctic and Antarctic Ice.—The warmth of

the Arctic summer has no parallel in the Antarctic and, mainly

because of this thermal difference, the ice sheets of the N polar

region are unlike those of the S. The edge of the Antarctic cap,

overflowing its land support, is free to spread over the sea until

it fractures and large strips become detached. Hence, such

large strips that form tabular or box-shaped bergs are generally

a characteristic of only the S polar region.

0.0 In Greenland, by contrast, the edge of the inland ice ends on

land and usually icebergs that are irregular in shape are formed.

Hence, the pinnacled and picturesque berg is generally a characteristic of only the N polar region.

0.0 The Antarctic sea ice surrounds the continent while the Arctic sea ice forms a central mass surrounded by land. The ice

moves around and outward from Antarctica and it is unusual

for sea ice to be more than 1 or 2 years old. The drifts in both

the Weddell Sea and the Ross Sea carry the ice out into the

open oceans in a period of just over 1 year.

0.0 However, in the Arctic, floes of great age are frequent. Ice

formed off the Siberian coast may take from 3 to 5 years to

drift across the polar basin and down the E side of Greenland.

Subsequently, ice of this age becomes pressed and hummocked

to a degree unknown in lower latitudes. During the Arctic summer, melting on the surface is considerable and pools of fresh

water are formed on the floes. In the Antarctic, surface pools

on floes in the ice such as these are almost unknown.

0.0 The outstanding difference between Arctic and Antarctic ice,

which becomes soon apparent to the navigator, is the softer texture of the latter.

0.0 While Arctic sea ice appears to be formed primarily through

surface freezing of sea water, Antarctic sea ice apparently includes substantial amounts of infiltrated snow ice and underwater ice. Infiltrated snow ice is formed by the flooding and

refreezing of extensive fields of snow lying on existing floes.

Underwater ice results from the growth and consolidation of a

cloud of ice crystals in the cold water column beneath existing

ice.

0.0 Classification.—Ice met at sea consists for the most part either of icebergs, originating from glacier and continental ice

sheets, or of sea ice, formed by the freezing of the top layers of

the sea itself. Sea ice proper accounts for probably 95 per cent

of the area of ice encountered, but bergs are important because

of the manner in which they drift far from their place of origin

and constitute a grave menace to navigation. A certain amount

of ice may also originate in rivers or estuaries as freshwater ice,

but it is already in a state of decay by the time it reaches the

open sea and its importance is no more than local.
18 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 Icebergs.—Icebergs are large masses of floating (or stranded) ice derived from the fronts of glaciers, from glacier ice

tongues, or from the shelf ice of the Antarctic. They are products of the land and not of the sea. Their structure and, to some

extent, their appearance depend upon the source from which

they are derived.

0.0 Antarctic ice islands, commonly called tabular icebergs, are

significantly larger and more numerous than their Arctic counterparts. Some, with observed horizontal dimensions of more

than 200km by 50km, have calved away from the Ross, Ronne,

and other ice shelves. These huge tabular floes, which may

tower as high as 200m above the sea surface, have been observed grounded at depths of about 500m. However, Antarctic

icebergs rarely find their way into the main shipping lanes.

They move in a N direction in response to the ocean currents

and can generally be found as far N as 45°S in the Pacific

Ocean and 35°S in the Atlantic Ocean and the Indian Ocean.

0.0 Bergs are usually an opaque, flat, and white color with soft

iridescent hues of blue or green. Many bergs show veins of soil

or rock debris and others may have yellowish or brownish

stains, probably due to diatom (minute algae) films. Under certain conditions of illumination, an iceberg may appear dark in

color in contrast with the sky or with other bergs under direct

sunlight. This phenomenon has often led mariners to report islands where none exist.

0.0 The ratio of the mass of the submerged portion of a berg to

its total mass is equal to the ratio of the specific gravity of the

berg to that of the water in which it is floating. On account of

the origin of glacial ice in compacted snow, berg ice contains

up to perhaps 10 per cent of trapped air and is somewhat less

dense than ordinary ice. Measurements of the specific gravity

of icebergs have given values close to 0.9, while the cold sea

water in which they float has a specific gravity of about 1.027.

Consequently, about seven-eighths of the mass of a berg is submerged.

0.0 It is often erroneously assumed that an iceberg floats with a

draft seven times its height above the water, but these ratios

hold good for only mass and not for linear dimensions. Actual

reported measurements of bergs indicate that the draft is seldom more than five times the exposed height for the blockiest

bergs, and may be as low as one or two times the exposed

height for the pinnacled and irregular types.

0.0 On a clear day, an iceberg can be seen at a great distance due

to its brilliant luster. However, an iceberg may not be perceptible until dangerously close during foggy weather. When the

fog is dense and the sun is shining, the first appearance of an

iceberg is in the form of a luminous, white object. If the sun is

not shining, the first appearance is in the form of a dark, somber mass with a narrow streak of black at the water line. The

diffusion of light in the fog will produce a blink around the

berg that augments the apparent size of the ice mass.

0.0 Icebergs may, at any time, calve off large sections of sheet

ice or glaciers, relieving stresses set up by temperature changes

or responding to vibrations from sound or wave action. After

falling into the water, they may travel up to the surface again

with great force and often at a considerable distance away. Icebergs are often so balanced that this calving causes a shift in

their center of gravity with consequent capsizing and readjustment of their mass to a new state of equilibrium. Therefore,

vessels and boats should keep well clear of icebergs that give

any evidence of disintegrating or overturning. In addition, icebergs may also possess underwater spurs and ledges which extend considerable distances from the visible portions.

0.0 In good weather, icebergs can be of great assistance to navigation in floating ice as they may mark shoals, break up a consolidated mass of ice, and provide reference points. Having a

relatively small sail area in proportion to their bulk, icebergs

are not affected by wind to the same extent as drift ice. With

the wind blowing drift ice past a berg, an optical illusion often

occurs and the berg seems to be moving to windward and cutting a channel through the ice. Illusion or not, such a lee may

be a desirable place for a vessel to lie in order to avoid heavy

ice. Under such circumstances, vessels have reported laying

out an ice anchor to a berg, but a careful watch must be kept for

growlers which have calved off. Vessels are frequently alarmed

by the presence of icebergs in an anchorage area. However, it is

usually safe unless the bergs are of mammoth size or disintegrating.

0.0 When navigating in fog, the presence of a large number of

growlers, bunched together, may be a good indication of an

iceberg to windward. In calm weather, growlers may sometimes be found distributed in a curved line, with the iceberg located on the concave side of the curve.

0.0 Sea Ice.—Sea ice can be divided into fast ice and drift ice,

according to mobility.

0.0 Fast ice forms in sheltered bays, gulfs, and fjords, as well as

among floating lumps of old ice. Developing along the shore

and spreading into the sea, fast ice joins the new ice formed

around islands, grounded floebergs, and floating masses of old

ice. Although subjected to repeated fracturing with the fall in

temperature of the air, it then spreads farther and farther into

the sea, increasing in thickness and offering more and more resistance to breaking up. Finally in the first months of the winter, the fast ice extends up to its maximum distance offshore,

beyond which the region of drift ice is found. The width of a

belt of the fast ice depends upon the configuration of the shore,

since the more rugged the coastline and the greater the number

of islands in its vicinity, the greater is the width of the fast ice.

Hummocks stranded in shoal water also assist fast ice to develop. Fast ice can extend a few meters or several miles from the

shore. Generally, fast ice that projects more than 2m above sea

level is known as an ice shelf.

0.0 Along open coasts, the fast ice is liable at all times to break

up and drift away. However, this break-up may not occur in regions where the configuration of the land is such as to shelter

the ice from the prevailing winds. In addition, stranded bergs

sometimes act as anchors for fast ice and prevent it from breaking out and drifting into the open sea.

0.0 Drift ice is the term widely used to include any area of sea

ice, other than fast ice, no matter what form it takes. When drift

ice is highly concentrated, over seven-tenths of the surface, it is

then described as pack ice. Flat pieces of sea ice that are 20m

or more wide are called floes. An ice-covered area over 10km

wide that is formed by floes freezing together is called an ice

field.

0.0 The age of floes may often be judged by the presence of colored bands at their edges. During the summer, minute algae,

known as diatoms, adhere to the underside of pieces of floating

ice, which may be slowly growing through the freezing of fresh

water derived from melting of their upper side. In the winter,
The Antarctic 19

Pub. 200

the ice grows more rapidly and diatoms are absent due to the

lack of sunlight. Consequently, the intervals between two winter freezings are marked by yellow strata of frozen diatoms and

may indicate the age of the floe.

0.0 A piece of sea ice that rises less than 1m above the sea level;

covers an area of about 20m2, and often appears transparent,

green, or almost black in color is known as a growler.

0.0 A large piece of sea ice that rises between 1 and 5m above

the sea level and covers an area of about 100 to 300m2

 is

known as a bergy bit.

0.0 A massive piece of sea ice that is composed of a hummock

or several hummocks, rises up to 5m above sea level, and is

separated from any ice surroundings is known as a floeburg.

0.0 Pack Ice.—Pack ice may be composed of high concentrations of drift ice, detached fragments of fast ice, and, to a lesser

extent, disintegrated particles of land ice.

0.0 Pack ice is classified according to the thickness of its arrangement and may be described as compact pack, consolidated pack, close pack, and open pack. The ice masses themselves

are described according to size and may be ice fields, floes, or

pancakes. Depending on their surface, they may be described

as level or hummocked.

0.0 The belts of pack ice usually lie perpendicular to the prevailing wind. Projections, called tongues, are sometimes formed

by the wind or currents and extend considerable distances from

the ice edge. Bays or bights may also be formed by the wind or

current in a belt of pack ice. The degree of openness and the

physical character of the ice forming the belt greatly determine

the resistance offered against such actions. When the wind produces this effect, the indentation is usually small. However, indentations formed in the pack ice by the influence of a current

sometimes are of huge dimensions.

0.0 Often consolidated pack ice, the heaviest form, will drift

away from the shore or will separate, forming cracks, fractures,

and leads through the ice area. When the separation is wide

enough to permit the passage of a ship, it is called a lead. A

lead between pack ice and the shore is known as a shore lead

and one between pack ice and fast ice is known as a flaw lead.

A lead ending in an impenetrable barrier is known as a blind

lead.

0.0 Navigation in shore leads and flaw leads is dangerous because the pack ice can close against the fast ice or the shore.

Before leads refreeze, lateral motion generally occurs between

the floes. Hence, unless the pressure is extreme, numerous

large patches of open water remain. These nonlinear shaped

open patches, which are called polynyas, may contain small

fragments of ice. In summer, the leads do not generally refreeze.

0.0 Pressure Ice.—The deformation of ice results in greater

thickness and is caused by the movement and interaction of

floes. This process is usually caused by winds, tides, and currents. It transforms a relatively flat sheet of ice into pressure ice

which has a rough surface.

0.0 Pressure set up in the floes produces bending, tenting, and

rafting. Bending, the first stage, is an upward or downward motion and occurs in thin and very plastic ice. In heavier floes,

which are less resilient, tenting occurs. Here, the ice bends up

until a crack is formed perpendicular to the direction of pressure. This results in the formation of a flat-sided arch with a

cavity beneath that resembles a tent-like structure. Rafting, the

most frequent movement, is the overriding of one floe on top of

another. 

0.0 When pieces of ice pile up haphazardly over one another and

form a wall or line of broken ice, the process is known as ridging and the wall is referred to as a ridge. When this action results in the pressure ice having a surface consisting of

numerous mounds, the process is known as hummocking. The

surface is referred to as hummocked ice and each mound is referred to as a hummock. When weathered, hummocked ice has

the appearance of smooth hillocks.

0.0 The ridges in pressure ice may be as high as 15m where

grounded against a coast, but in deep water and away from the

land they are usually no more than 10m high.

0.0 Massive detachments of ice resulting from hummocking are

called floebergs. These should not be confused with icebergs,

or growlers, which are of glacial origin.

0.0 Movement.—Any wind will tend to regroup ice that is more

or less scattered over a considerable area. As the wind rises, the

separate floes form lines at right angles to the wind direction.

These lines break up when the wind changes and, after a time,

realign themselves at right angles to the new wind direction.

When the wind blows out from the coast, a channel of open

water usually forms between the shore and the ice or any such

existing channel increases in width. When the wind blows toward the coast, the fast ice tends to move closer to shore and

reduce the width of any existing channel. If the wind is strong

enough, hummocks may be produced along a line lying approximately at right angles to the wind direction.

0.0 The rate at which the different floes travel is not so much dependent upon the size and depth of the floe as upon the nature

of its surface. Since pack ice is made up of a conglomeration of

young ice, old floes, and icebergs, it varies radically in resistance to wind and current. Surface irregularities, such as hummocks and pressure ridges, act as sail areas. Hence, the rate of

movement of a floe depends to a certain extent on the amount

of hummocking in proportion to the area and weight of the

floe. As a result of previous pressure, hummocked floes in turn

become the cause of still further pressure. When two floes are

moving at different rates, either the distance between them is

increased and an open lane is produced or the distance between

them is decreased and they are brought into physical contact. In

gaining momentum, larger floes will accelerate more slowly.

However, once underway, they will retain their motion long after smaller floes have stopped. Therefore, in the early stages,

the large and heavy floes will be charged and overtaken by

smaller floes. In the later stages, the smaller floes will be disrupted by the larger ones and their surface appearance will be

changed. This process will then create new and further differences in the speed of their movement.

0.0 The swinging or turning of floes is due to the tendency of

each cake of ice to trim itself to the wind when the cover is sufficiently open to permit this freedom of movement. In close

pack ice, this tendency may be produced by pressure from another floe. Since floes continually hinder each other and the

wind may not be constant in direction, even greater forces may

result. Hence, the wind can also produce a rotating motion in

the floe. This shearing or rotating effect results in excessive

pressure at the projecting corners of floes and usually forms a

hummock of loose ice blocks. The process of rotating is referred to as screwing and this action is extremely dangerous to
20 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0FEBRUARY 1 (MAXIMUM—MEAN—MINIMUM ICE EDGES)
The Antarctic 21

Pub. 200

0.0FEBRUARY 15 (MAXIMUM—MEAN—MINIMUM ICE EDGES)
22 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0MAY 1 (MAXIMUM—MEAN—MINIMUM ICE EDGES(
The Antarctic 23

Pub. 200

0.0MAY 15 (MAXIMUM—MEAN—MINIMUM ICE EDGES)
24 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0AUGUST 1 (MAXIMUM—MEAN—MINIMUM ICE EDGES)
The Antarctic 25

Pub. 200

0.0AUGUST 15 (MAXIMUM—MEAN—MINIMUM ICE EDGES)
26 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0NOVEMBER 1 (MAXIMUM—MEAN—MINIMUM ICE EDGES)
The Antarctic 27

Pub. 200

0.0NOVEMBER 15 (MAXIMUM—MEAN—MINIMUM ICE EDGES)
28 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

vessels.

0.0 During its motion, ice opens up and closes like an accordion.

There are always a certain number of lanes or leads present,

otherwise the ice could not move. In summer, these lanes usually remain open, except in very high latitudes. However, in

winter they are soon frozen over with young ice. In addition,

the swell tends to break up the ice. Consequently, as a result of

all these actions, the ice is alternately being broken up, even

throughout the winter, and subjected to pressure.

0.0 Signs of Ice.—There are two reliable signs of drift ice, ice

blink and abrupt smoothing. Ice blink, the reflection of ice on

the lower clouds, is the indication that has been most used by

experienced polar navigators. It is rarely, if ever, produced by

bergs, but is nearly always distinct over consolidated and extensive pack ice. On clear days with a mostly blue sky, ice

blink is reported to appear as a luminous yellow haze on the

horizon in the direction of the ice. On days with an overcast

sky or low clouds, it is reported to appear as a whitish glare on

the clouds, the yellow color being absent. Under certain conditions, ice blink has appeared as brilliant, scintillating strips on

the horizon.

0.0 Abrupt smoothing of the sea and the gradual decrease of the

normal sea swell is a sign that drift ice lies to windward.

0.0 Other likely signs of ice include fog and the presence of

birds.

0.0 In late spring and summer, a thick band of fog often lies over

the edge of the drift ice. In fog, white patches indicate the presence of ice at a short distance.

0.0 In the Antarctic, the presence of the Antarctic Petrel or the

Snow Petrel indicates the proximity of ice. The former bird is

normally seen only within about 400 miles of the ice edge and

the latter considerably closer.

0.0 The lowering of the sea surface temperature is reported to

give little or no indication of the proximity of ice. However, if

the surface temperature falls to 1°C and the vessel is not in one

of the main cold currents, the ice edge may be considered to lie

between 100 and 150 miles distant. If the temperature falls to -

0.5°C, the nearest ice should generally be considered to lie not

more than 50 miles distant.

0.0 Signs of Open Water.—Dark patches or steaks on the underside of low clouds, sometimes almost black in comparison

with the clouds in general, usually indicate the presence of

open water below them. This phenomena is known as water

sky.

0.0 Like ice blink, water sky depends upon the greater absorption

of sunlight by water than by ice or snow and the subsequent diffusion of the reflected light in the lower atmosphere.

0.0 Dark spots in fog give a similar indication, but are only visible at a short distance. A dark bank on the underside of a cloud

at a high altitude indicates the existence of small patches of

open water below which may connect with a larger distant area

of open water.

0.0 The sound of a surge in the ice indicates the presence of

large expanses of open water in the immediate vicinity.

0.0 When approaching ice, a darkness appearing on the low horizon indicates that there is probably open water beyond the

ice, in some cases up to 40 miles or more beyond the visible

horizon.

0.0 With a cloudless sky, no iceblink is possible although a yellow or white haze or glare on the horizon may indicate the

presence of ice. However, abnormal refraction may occur. This

effect raises the horizon and enables the observer to see the ice

or patches of open water at greater distances than would normally be possible. The ice or area of open water, or a mixture

of the two, may be seen as an erect or inverted image, or both

images may be seen at once, one above the other. In the latter

case, the erect image is the higher of the two. Allowance must

also be made for the fact that refraction causes the apparent dimensions of ice to increase. Hence, sometimes bergy bits appear to be icebergs. Areas of open water often appear dark

relative to the ice.

0.0 Drift.—While the general direction of the drift of icebergs

over a long period of time is known, it may not be possible to

predict the drift of an individual berg at a given place and time

because bergs lying close together have been observed to move

in opposite directions. Bergs usually move under the influence

of the prevailing current at the depth to which they are submerged. Such currents may often be in opposition to the existing wind and current at the surface.

0.0 Drift ice moves with the wind and tide, usually to the left of

the true wind in the S hemisphere and to the right in the N

hemisphere. The speed of drift may not depend entirely upon

the strength of the wind, since it is influenced greatly by the

presence or absence of open water in the direction of the drift,

even though the open water may be somewhat distant.

0.0 Neglecting the resistance of the ice, Ekman’s theory of wind

drift calls for the ice to drift 45° from the wind direction. Observations show that the actual drift is about 30° from the wind

direction on the average, or very nearly parallel to the isobars

on a weather map. In winter, when the ice is more closely

packed and offers more resistance, its drift deviates less from

the wind direction than in summer, and tidal influences become

more important. Therefore, the speed of drift ice (pack ice) can

be fairly closely determined from the wind speed.

0.0 Note.—The National Ice Center (NIC) operates MetFax

which is a dial-up service. In order to receive MetFax, ships

must have a facsimile machine with polling function capability.

The products available include sea ice analysis and forecasts

for the Antarctic.

0.0 To receive weather data charts from MetFax and access the

autopolling system, receivers should dial 301-763-3190/3191.

When connected, receivers should follow the menu and select

the data required. To access the system, a Personal Identification Number (PIN) is required which allows the NIC to identify users and requests in order to maximize services. PIN access

is provided at no cost. For a PIN or further information concerning MetFax, send requests to the NIC at the following address:

0.0 National Ice Center

0.0 Federal Building No. 4

0.0 4251 Suitland Road

0.0 Washington D.C. (20395)

0.0 Facsimile: 301-457-5305

0.0 The National Climatic Data Center (NCDC) provides weekly Antarctic sea ice analysis charts on a mail subscription basis.

For further information contact NCDC at the following address:

0.0 National Climatic Data Center (NCDC)

0.0 151 Patton Ave 

0.0 Asheville NC (28801-5001)
The Antarctic 29

Pub. 200

0.0 Telephone: 828-271-4800 

0.0 Facsimile: 828-271-4876

0.0 For further information concerning ice, see Pub. No. 9, The

American Practical Navigator (Bowditch-2002 Edition); or

contact the National Science Foundation (NSF) at the following address:

0.0 National Science Foundation (NSF)

0.0 Office of Polar Programs (OPP)

0.0 4201 Wilson Boulevard

0.0 Arlington VA (22230)

0.0 Telephone: 703-292-8030

0.0 Faxcsimile: 703-292-9081

Ice Terms

0.0 The following glossary provides definitions in general use

for the many kinds of ice encountered at sea. The terms are

based on the nomenclature established by the World Meteorological Organization (WMO).

0.0 Aged ridge.—A ridge which has undergone considerable

weathering. These ridges are best described as undulations.

0.0 Anchor ice.—Submerged ice attached or anchored to the

bottom, irrespective of its formation.

0.0 Area of weakness.—A satellite-observed area in which either the ice concentration or the ice thickness is significantly

less than that in the surrounding areas. Because the condition is

satellite observed, a precise quantitative analysis is not always

possible, but navigation conditions are significantly easier than

in surrounding areas.

0.0 Bare ice.—Ice without snow cover.

0.0 Belt.—A large feature of ice arrangement; longer than it is

wide; from 1 km to more than 100 km in width.

0.0 Bergy bit.—A large piece of floating ice generally showing

between 1 and 5m above sea level and normally about 100 to

300m2 in area.

0.0 Bergy water.—An area of freely navigable water in which

ice of land origin is present in concentrations of less than onetenth. There may be sea ice present, although the total concentration of all ice should not exceed one-tenth.

0.0 Beset.—Situation of a vessel surrounded by ice and unable

to move.

0.0 Big floe.—See Floe.

0.0 Bight.—Extensive crescent-shaped indentation in the ice

edge formed by either wind or current.

0.0 Brash ice.—Accumulations of floating ice made up of fragments not more than 2m wide.

0.0 Bummock.—From the point of view of the submariner, a

downward projection from the underside of the ice canopy, the

counterpart of a hummock.

0.0 Calving.—The breaking away of a mass of ice from an ice

wall, ice front, glacier, or iceberg.

0.0 Close pack ice.—Pack ice in which the concentration is seven-tenths to eight-tenths, composed of floes mostly in contact.

0.0 Compacted ice edge.—A ridge which has undergone considerable Close, clear-cut ice edge compacted by wind or current, usually on the windward side of an area of pack ice.

0.0 Compacting.—Pieces of floating ice are said to be compacting when they are subjected to a converging motion, which increases ice concentration and/or produces stresses that may

result in ice deformation.

0.0 Compact pack ice.—Pack ice in which the concentration is

ten-tenths and no water is visible.

0.0 Concentration.—The ratio expressed in tenths describing

the amount of the sea surface covered by floating ice as a fraction of the whole area being considered. Total concentration includes all stages of development that are present. Partial

concentration may refer to the amount of a particular stage or

of a particular form of ice and represents only a part of the total.

0.0 Concentration boundary.—A line approximating to the

transition between two areas of pack ice with distinctly different concentrations.

0.0 Consolidated pack ice.—Pack ice in which the concentration is ten-tenths and the floes are frozen together.

0.0 Consolidated ridge.—A ridge in which the base has frozen

together.

0.0 Crack.—Any fracture of fast ice, consolidated ice, or a single floe which has been followed by a separation ranging from

a few centimeters to 1m.

0.0 Dark nilas.—Nilas which is under 5cm in thickness and is

very dark in color.

0.0 Deformed ice.—A general term for ice which has been

squeezed together and in places forced upwards (and downwards). Subdivisions are rafted ice, ridged ice, and hummocked ice.

0.0 Difficult area.—A general qualitative expression to indicate, in a relative manner, that the severity of ice conditions

prevailing in an area is such that navigation in it is difficult.

0.0 Diffused ice edge.—Poorly defined ice edge limiting an area

of dispersed ice; usually on the leeward side of ice.

0.0 Diverging.—Ice fields or floes in an area are subjected to diverging or dispersive motion; hence, reducing ice concentration and/or relieving stresses in the ice.

0.0 Dried ice.—Sea ice from the surface of which melt water

has disappeared after the formation of cracks and thaw holes.

During the period of drying, the surface whitens.

0.0 Drift ice.—Term used in a wide sense to include any area of

sea ice other than fast ice no matter what form it takes or how it

is dispersed. When concentrations are high, i.e. seven-tenths or

more, drift ice may be replaced by the term pack ice.

0.0 Easy area.—A general qualitative expression to indicate, in

a relative manner, that ice conditions prevailing in an area are

such that navigation is not difficult.

0.0 Fast ice.—Sea ice which forms and remains fast along the

coast, where it is attached to the shore, to an ice wall, to an ice

front, between shoals or grounded icebergs. Vertical fluctuations may be observed during changes of sea level. Fast ice

may be formed in situ (in its original place) from sea water or

by the freezing of drift ice of any stage to the shore. It may extend a few meters or several hundred kilometers from the coast.

Fast ice may be more than 1 year old and may then be prefixed

with the appropriate age category (second-year or multi-year).

If it is thicker than about 2m above sea level, it is called an ice

shelf.

0.0 Fast ice boundary.—The ice boundary at any given time between fast ice and drift ice.

0.0 Fast ice edge.—The demarcation at any given time between

fast ice and open water.

0.0 Finger rafted ice.—Type of rafted ice in which floes thrust

“fingers” alternately over and under the other.
30 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 Finger rafting.—Type of rafting whereby interlocking

thrusts are formed, each floe thrusting “fingers” alternately

over and under the other. Common in nilas and gray ice.

0.0 Firn.—Old snow which has recrystallized into a dense material. Unlike snow, the particles are to some extent joined together. However, unlike ice, the air spaces in it still connect

with each other.

0.0 First-year ice.—Sea ice of not more than one winter’s

growth developing from young ice. It has a thickness of from

30cm to 2m and may be subdivided into thin first-year ice/

white ice, medium first-year ice, or thick first-year ice.

0.0 Flaw.—A narrow separation zone between pack ice and fast

ice, where the pieces of ice are in a chaotic state; it forms when

pack ice shears under the effect of a strong wind or current

along the fast ice boundary.

0.0 Flaw lead.—A passageway between (pack) drift ice and fast

ice which is navigable by surface vessels.

0.0 Flaw polynya.—A polynya between pack ice and fast ice.

0.0 Floating ice.—Any form of ice found floating in water. The

principal kinds of floating ice are lake ice, river ice, and sea

ice, which form by the freezing of water at the surface, and glacier ice (ice of land origin), which is formed on land or in an

ice shelf. The concept includes ice that is stranded or grounded.

0.0 Floe.—Any relatively flat piece of sea ice 20m or more

wide. Floes are subdivided according to horizontal extent, as

follows:

1. Giant—over 10 km wide

2. Vast—2 to 10 km wide

3. Big—500 to 2,000m wide

4. Medium—100 to 500m wide

5. Small—20 to 100m wide

0.0 Floeberg.—A massive piece of sea ice composed of a hummock, or a group of hummocks, frozen together and separated

from any ice surroundings. It may protrude up to 5m above sea

level.

0.0 Flooded ice.—Sea ice which has been flooded by meltwater

or river water and is heavily loaded by water and wet snow.

0.0 Fracture.—Any break or rupture through very close ice,

compact ice, consolidated ice, fast ice, or a single floe resulting

from deformation processes. Fractures may contain brash ice

and/or be covered with nilas and/or young ice. Their length

may vary from a few meters to many kilometers.

0.0 Fracture zone.—An area which has a great number of fractures.

0.0 Fracturing.—Pressure process whereby ice is permanently

deformed and rupture occurs. Most commonly used to describe

breaking across very close ice, compact ice, or consolidated

ice.

0.0 Frazil ice.—Fine spicules or plates of ice suspended in water.

0.0 Friendly ice.—From the point of view of the submariner, an

ice canopy containing many large skylights or other features

which permit a submarine to surface. There must be more than

ten such features per 30 nautical miles (56 km) along the submarine’s track.

0.0 Frost smoke.—Fog-like clouds due to the contact of cold air

with relatively warm water, which can appear over openings in

the ice, or to leeward of the ice edge, and which may persist

while ice is forming.

0.0 Giant floe.—See Floe.

0.0 Glacier.—A mass of snow and ice continuously moving

from higher to lower ground or, if afloat, continuously spreading. The principal forms of glacier are inland ice sheets, ice

shelves, ice streams, ice caps, ice piedmonts, cirque glaciers,

and various types of mountain (valley) glaciers.

0.0 Glacier berg.—An irregularly-shaped iceberg.

0.0 Glacier ice.—Ice in, or originating from, a glacier, whether

on land or floating in the sea as icebergs, bergy bits, or growlers.

0.0 Glacier tongue.—Projecting seaward extension of a glacier,

usually afloat. In the Antarctic, glacier tongues may extend for

over many tens of kilometers.

0.0 Grease ice.—A later stage of freezing than frazil ice when

the crystals have coagulated to form a soupy layer on the surface. Grease ice reflects little light, giving the sea a matte appearance.

0.0 Grey (gray) ice.—Young ice 10 to 15cm thick. Less elastic

than nilas and breaks on swell. Usually rafts under pressure.

0.0 Grey (gray)-white ice.—Young ice 15 to 30cm thick. Under

pressure more likely to ridge than to raft.

0.0 Grounded hummock.—Hummocked grounded ice formation. There are single grounded hummocks and lines (or

chains) of grounded hummocks.

0.0 Grounded ice.—Floating ice which is aground in shoal water (See Stranded ice).

0.0 Growler.—Smaller piece of ice than a bergy bit or floeberg,

often transparent but appearing green or almost black in color,

extending less than 1m above the sea surface and normally occupying an area of about 20m2.

0.0 Hostile ice.—From the point of view of the submariner, an

ice canopy containing no large skylights or other features

which permit a submarine to surface.

0.0 Hummock.—A hillock of broken ice which has been forced

upwards by pressure. May be fresh or weathered. The submerged volume of broken ice under the hummock, forced

downwards by pressure, is termed a bummock.

0.0 Hummocked ice.—Sea ice piled haphazardly one piece over

another to form an uneven surface. When weathered, it has the

appearance of smooth hillocks.

0.0 Hummocking.—The pressure process by which sea ice is

forced into hummocks. When the floes rotate in the process it

is termed screwing.

0.0 Iceberg.—A massive piece of ice of greatly varying shape,

protruding more than 5m above sea level, which has broken

away from a glacier. May be afloat or aground. Icebergs may

be described as tabular, dome-shaped, sloping, pinnacled,

weathered, or glacier bergs.

0.0 Iceberg tongue.—A major accumulation of icebergs projecting from the coast, held in place by grounding and joined

together by fast ice.

0.0 Ice blink.—A whitish glare on low clouds above an accumulation of distant ice.

0.0 Ice bound.—A harbor, inlet, etc. is said to be ice bound

when navigation by ships is prevented on account of ice, except

possibly with the assistance of an icebreaker.

0.0 Ice boundary.—The demarcation at any given time between

fast ice and drift ice or between areas of drift ice of different

concentrations (See Ice edge).

0.0 Ice breccia.—Ice of different stages of development frozen

together.
The Antarctic 31

Pub. 200

0.0 Ice cake.—Any relatively flat piece of sea ice less than 20m

wide.

0.0 Ice canopy.—Drift ice from the point of view of the submariner.

0.0 Ice cover.—The ratio of an area of ice of any concentration

to the total area of sea surface within some large geographic locale; this locale may be global, hemispheric, or prescribed by a

specific oceanographic entity such as Baffin Bay or the Barents

Sea.

0.0 Ice edge.—The demarcation at any given time between the

open sea and sea ice of any kind, whether fast or drifting. It

may be termed compacted or diffuse (See Ice boundary).

0.0 Ice field.—Area of floating ice consisting of any size of

floes, which is greater than 10km wide (See ice patch).

0.0 Ice foot.—A narrow fringe of ice attached to the coast, unmoved by tides and remaining after the fast ice has moved

away.

0.0 Ice free.—No sea ice present. There may be some ice of land

origin present (See Open water).

0.0 Ice front.—The vertical cliff forming the seaward face of an

ice shelf or other floating glacier varying in height from 2 to

50m or more above sea level (See Ice wall).

0.0 Ice island.—A large piece of floating ice protruding about

5m above the sea level which has broken away from an Antarctic ice shelf, having a thickness of from 30 to 50m, and an area

of from a few thousand square meters to 500km2 or more. Usually characterized by a regularly undulating surface which

gives it a ribbed appearance from the air.

0.0 Ice jam.—An accumulation of broken river ice or sea ice

caught in a narrow channel.

0.0 Ice keel.—From the point of view of the submariner, a

downward-projecting ridge on the underside of the ice canopy;

the counterpart of a ridge. Ice keels may extend as much as

50m below the sea level.

0.0 Ice limit.—Climatological term referring to the extreme

minimum or maximum extent of the ice edge in any given

month or period based on observations over a number of years.

Term should be preceded by minimum and maximum (See

Mean ice edge).

0.0 Ice massif.—A variable accumulation of close or very close

drift ice (pack ice) covering hundreds of square kilometers

which is found in the same regions every summer.

0.0 Ice of land origin.—Ice formed on land or in an ice shelf,

found floating in water. The concept includes ice that is stranded or grounded.

0.0 Ice patch.—An area of pack ice less than 10km wide.

0.0 Ice port.—An embayment (indentation) in an ice front, often of a temporary nature, where ships can moor alongside and

unload directly onto the ice shelf.

0.0 Ice rind.—A brittle shiny crust of ice formed on a quiet surface by direct freezing or formation of grease ice, usually in

water of low salinity. Thickness to about 5cm. Easily broken by

wind or swell, commonly breaking in rectangular pieces.

0.0 Ice shelf.—A floating ice sheet of considerable thickness

showing 2 to 50m or more above sea level, attached to the

coast. Usually of great horizontal extent and with a level or

gently undulating surface. Nourished by annual snow accumulation and often also by the seaward extension of land glaciers.

Limited areas may be aground. The seaward edge is termed an

ice front.

0.0 Ice stream.—Part of an inland ice sheet in which the ice

flows more rapidly and not necessarily in the same direction as

the surrounding ice. The margins are sometimes clearly

marked by a change in the direction of the surface slope, but

may be indistinct.

0.0 Ice under pressure.—Ice in which deformation processes

are actively occurring and therefore a potential impediment or

danger to shipping.

0.0 Ice wall.—An ice cliff forming the seaward margin of a glacier which is not afloat. An ice wall is aground, the rock basement being at or below sea level (See Ice front).

0.0 Jammed brash barrier.—A strip or narrow belt of new,

young, or brash ice (usually 100 to 5,000m wide), formed at

the edge of either drift or fast ice or at the shore. It is heavily

compacted mostly due to wind action and may extend from 2

to 20m below the surface but does not normally have appreciable topography. Jammed brash barriers may disperse with

changing winds but can also consolidate to form a strip of unusually thick ice as compared to the surrounding drift ice.

0.0 Lake ice.—Ice formed on a lake, regardless of observed location.

0.0 Large fracture.—Fracture more than 500m wide.

0.0 Large ice field.—An ice field over 20km wide.

0.0 Lead. Any fracture or passageway through sea ice which is

navigable by surface vessels.

0.0 Level ice.—Sea ice which is unaffected by deformation.

0.0 Light nilas.—Nilas which is more than 5 centimeters in

thickness and rather lighter in color than a dark nilas.

0.0 Mean ice edge.—Average position of the ice edge in any

given month or period based on observations over a number of

years. Other terms which may be used are mean maximum ice

edge and mean minimum ice edge (See Ice limit).

0.0 Medium first-year ice.—First-year ice 70 to 120cm thick.

0.0 Medium floe.—See Floe.

0.0 Medium fracture.—Fracture 200 to 500m wide.

0.0 Medium ice field.—An ice field 15 to 20km wide.

0.0 Multi-year ice.—Old ice up to 3m or more thick which has

survived at least two summers’ melt. Hummocks even smoother than in second-year ice, and the ice is almost salt-free. Color,

where bare, is usually blue. Melt pattern consists of large interconnecting irregular puddles and a well-developed drainage

system.

0.0 New ice.—A general term for recently formed ice which includes frazil ice, grease ice, slush, and shuga. These types of

ice are composed of ice crystals which are only weakly frozen

together (if at all) and have a definite form only while they are

afloat.

0.0 New ridge.—Ridge newly formed with sharp peaks and

slope of sides usually 40°. Fragments are visible from the air at

low altitude.

0.0 Nilas.—A thin elastic crust of ice, easily bending on waves

and swell under pressure, thrusting in a pattern of interlocking

“fingers” (finger rafting). Has a matte surface and is up to 10

centimeters in thickness. May be subdivided into dark nilas and

light nilas.

0.0 Nip.—Ice is said to nip when it forcibly presses against a

ship. A ship so caught, though undamaged, is said to have been

nipped.

0.0 Old ice.—Sea ice which has survived at least one summer’s

melt, thickness up to 3m or more. Most topographic features
32 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

are smoother than on first-year ice. May be subdivided into

second-year ice and multi-year ice.

0.0 Open ice.—Floating ice in which the concentration is fourtenths to six-tenths with many leads and polynyas, and the

floes are generally not in contact with one another.

0.0 Open water.—A large area of freely navigable water in

which sea ice is present in concentrations less than one-tenth.

When there is no sea ice present, the area should be termed ice

free.

0.0 Pack ice.—Concentration of seven-tenths or more of drift

ice (See Drift ice). (The term was formally used for all ranges

of concentration.)

0.0 Pancake ice.—Predominantly circular pieces of ice from

30cm to 3m in diameter. Up to about 10m in thickness with

raised rims due to the pieces striking up against one another. It

may be formed on a slight swell from grease ice, shuga, or

slush or as a result of the breaking of ice rind, nilas, or under

severe conditions of swell or waves, of gray ice. It also sometimes forms at some depth, at an interface between water bodies of different physical characteristics, from where it floats to

the surface. Its appearance may rapidly cover wide areas of water.

0.0 Polynya.—Any non-linear shaped opening enclosed in ice.

Polynyas may contain brash ice and/or be covered with new

ice, nilas, or young ice. Submariners refer to these as skylights.

Sometimes the polynya is limited on one side by the coast and

is called a shore polynya or by fast ice and is called a flaw

polynya. If it recurs in the same position every year, it is called

a recurring polynya.

0.0 Puddle.—An accumulation of meltwater on ice, mainly due

to the melting of snow, but in the more advanced stages also to

the melting of the ice. Initial stage consists of patches of melted snow.

0.0 Rafted ice.—Type of deformed ice formed by one piece of

ice overriding another (See Finger rafting).

0.0 Rafting.—Pressure processes whereby one piece of ice

overrides another. Most common in the new and young ice

(See Finger rafting).

0.0 Ram.—An underwater ice projection extending from an ice

wall, ice front, iceberg, or floe. Its formation is usually due to a

more intensive melting and erosion of the unsubmerged part.

0.0 Recurring polynya.—A polynya which recurs in the same

position every year.

0.0 Ridge.—A line or wall of broken ice forced up by pressure.

May be fresh or weathered. The submerged volume of broken

ice under a ridge, forced downwards by pressure, is termed an

ice keel.

0.0 Ridged ice.—Ice piled haphazardly one piece over another

in the form of ridges or walls. Usually found in first-year ice

(See Ridging).

0.0 Ridged ice zone.—An area in which much ridged ice with

similar characteristics has formed.

0.0 Ridging.—The pressure process by which sea ice is forced

into ridges.

0.0 River ice.—Ice formed on a river, regardless of observed location.

0.0 Rotten ice.—Sea ice which has become honeycombed and

which is in an advanced state of disintegration.

0.0 Sastrugi.—Sharp, irregular ridges formed on a snow surface

by wind erosion and deposition. On mobile floating ice, the

ridges are parallel to the direction of the prevailing wind at the

time they were formed.

0.0 Sea ice.—Any form of ice found at sea which has originated

from the freezing sea water.

0.0 Second-year ice.—Old ice which has survived only one

summer’s melt. Thickness up to 2.5m and sometimes more.

Because it is thicker than first-year ice, it stands higher out of

the water. In contrast to multi-year ice, summer melting produces a regular pattern of numerous small puddles. Bare patches and puddles are usually greenish-blue.

0.0 Shearing.—An area of ice is subject to shear when the ice

motion varies significantly in the direction normal to the motion, subjecting the ice to rotational forces. These forces may

result in phenomena similar to flaw.

0.0 Shear ridge.—An ice ridge formation which develops when

one ice feature is grinding past another. This type of ridge is

more linear than those caused by pressure alone.

0.0 Shear ridge field.—Many shear ridges side by side.

0.0 Shore lead.—A lead between drift ice and the shore, or between drift ice and an ice front.

0.0 Shore melt.—Open water between the shore and the fast ice,

formed by melting and/or due to river discharge.

0.0 Shore polynya.—A polynya between drift ice and the coast,

or between drift ice and an ice front.

0.0 Shore ice ride-up.—A process by which ice is pushed

ashore as a slab.

0.0 Shuga.—An accumulation of spongy white ice lumps, a few

centimeters wide; they are formed from grease ice or slush and

sometimes from anchor ice rising to the surface.

0.0 Skylight.—From the point of view of the submariner, thin

places in the ice canopy, usually less than 1m thick and appearing from below as relatively light, translucent patches in dark

surroundings. The undersurface of a skylight is normally flat.

Skylights are called large if big enough for a submarine to attempt to surface through them (120m), or small if not.

0.0 Slush.—Snow that is saturated and mixed with water on land

or ice surfaces, or as a viscous floating mass in water after a

heavy snowfall.

0.0 Small floe.—See Floe.

0.0 Small fracture.—Fracture 50 to 200m wide.

0.0 Small ice cake.—An ice cake less than 2m wide.

0.0 Small ice field.—An ice field 10 to 15km wide.

0.0 Snow-covered ice.—Ice covered with snow.

0.0 Snow drift.—An accumulation of wind-blown snow deposited in the lee of obstructions or heaped by wind eddies. A

crescent-shaped snow drift, with ends pointing downwind, is

known as snow barchan.

0.0 Standing floe.—A separate floe standing vertically or inclined and enclosed by rather smooth ice.

0.0 Stranded ice.—Ice which has been floating and has been

deposited on the shore by retreating high water.

0.0 Strip.—Long and narrow area of pack ice, about 1km or less

wide. Usually composed of small fragments detached from the

main mass of ice which have run together under the influence

of wind, swell, or current.

0.0 Tabular berg.—A flat-topped iceberg. Most tabular bergs

form by calving from an ice shelf and show horizontal banding

(See Ice island).

0.0 Thaw holes.—Vertical holes in sea ice formed when surface

puddles melt through to the underlying water.
The Antarctic 33

Pub. 200

0.0 Thin first-year ice/white ice.—First-year ice 30 to 70cm

thick. May sometimes be subdivided into first stage (30 to

50cm thick) and second stage (50 to 70cm thick).

0.0 Tide crack.—Crack at the line of junction between an immovable ice foot or ice wall and fast ice, the latter subject to

rise and fall of the tide.

0.0 Tongue.—A projection of the ice edge up to several kilometers in length, caused by wind or current.

0.0 Vast floe.—See Floe.

0.0 Very close pack ice.—Pack ice in which the concentration is

nine-tenths to less than ten-tenths.

0.0 Very open pack ice.—Pack ice in which the concentration is

one-tenth to three-tenths and water preponderates over ice.

0.0 Very small fracture.—Fracture 1 to 50m wide.

0.0 Very weathered ridge.—Ridge with peaks very rounded,

slope of sides usually 20° to 30°.

0.0 Water sky.—Dark streaks on the underside of low clouds,

indicating the presence of water features in the vicinity of sea

ice.

0.0 Weathered ridge.—Ridge with peaks slightly rounded and

slope of sides usually 30° to 40°. Individual fragments are not

discernible.

0.0 Weathering.—Processes of ablation and accumulation

which gradually eliminate irregularities in an ice surface.

0.0 White ice.—(See Thin first-year ice/white ice).

0.0 Young coastal ice.—The initial stage of fast ice formation

consisting of nilas or young ice. Its width varies from a few

meters up to 200m from the shoreline.

0.0 Young ice.—Ice in the transition stage between nilas and

first-year ice, 10 to 30cm thick. May be subdivided into gray

ice and gray-white ice.

Magnetic Field

0.0 (The following information was prepared by the U.S. Naval

Oceanographic Office.)

0.0 Antarctic Magnetic Field.—The dip poles, commonly referred to as the magnetic poles, are the points on the earth’s

surface at which the horizontal component (H) of the total

magnetic field decreases to a minimum (approaches zero) and

where the magnetic field is most nearly all vertical. At such a

point, a dip needle will stand straight up and down.

0.0 The magnetic poles should not be confused with the geomagnetic poles. Although the term geomagnetic pole does not

have a rigorous definition and usage varies among different

textbooks, the most common definition is a theoretical point at

which the axis of a central dipole field intersects the earth’s

surface. However, the earth’s magnetic field is not a pure dipole as it contains approximately 5 per cent quadrupole and external magnetic field components. Therefore, the two principal

magnetic dipoles (North and South) do not correspond with the

geomagnetic poles.

0.0 There is a misconception that the needle of a magnetic compass points to the magnetic pole. Actually, the direction indicated by such a needle is the local horizontal direction of the

earth’s magnetic lines of force. These lines eventually converge

at the magnetic poles but wander considerably. A compass cannot be used in regions near the magnetic pole to find direction

as it will remain in any direction in which it happens to be

placed. In reality, a rather large area, in which a compass cannot be used, surrounds the magnetic pole because of the low

magnitude of H. Where H is approximately 6,000 nanoteslas

(nT) or less, the compass is frequently erratic. The magnetic

compass is not reliable for underway navigation where H is

3,000 nT or less. An illustration of horizontal magnetic intensity contours shows the areas bounded by the 3000 and 6,000 nT

contours. In comparison with the North Magnetic Pole, the region surrounding the South Magnetic Pole, where the compass

is unreliable, is much smaller.

Magnetic Poles

The computed location of the North Magnetic Pole on January 1, 2010 was 80°01.2'N, 72°12.6'W; the computed location

of the South Magnetic Pole on the same date was 80°01.2'S,

107°47.4'E. These locations were computed using the 2010

Epoch World Magnetic Model, WMM-2010, which was used

in the compilation of charts published by U.S. National

Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA) beginning in January,

2010. 

WMM-2010 is a joint product of NGA and the United Kingdom’s Defence Geographic Center (DGC). The U.S. National

Geophysical Data Center (NGDC, Boulder, Colorado) and the

United Kingdom’s British Geological Survey (BGS, Edinburgh, Scotland) produced WMM-2010, with funding provided

by NGA and United Kingdom’s Defence Geographic Imagery

and Intelligence Agency (DGIA). It is the official model for

both the U.S. Department of Defense, the U.K. Ministry of Defence, the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), and the

International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) for navigation,

attitude, and heading referencing systems using the geomagnetic field. It is also widely used in civilian navigation and

heading systems. 

The model, associated software, and documentation are distributed by NGDC on behalf of NGA. The model is produced

at 5-year intervals; WWM-2010 will expire on December 31,

2014. 

0.0 Magnetic Variation.—Magnetic variation information

printed on topographic maps and navigation charts is derived

from a model, which must be redefined at least every five

years. The principal reason is that the earth’s magnetic field

changes appreciably in that period of time, and it has not been

possible to predict the secular change with confidence more

than a few years into the future.

0.0 Variation, also known as magnetic declination, is measured

in angular units and named East or West to indicate the side of

True North on which the N part of the magnetic meridian lies.

East variation is positive and West variation is negative. The

DoD publishes grid variation charts which illustrate the angle

between the grid and magnetic meridians at any place.

0.0 Anomalies.—Significant magnetic anomalies may exist due

to local magnetization in the earth’s crust. These geologically

produced magnetic fields cannot be modeled on a worldwide

basis. Individual detailed geomagnetic surveys are required.

Local conductivity anomalies will affect the way external magnetic fields generate currents in the crust, which in turn generWorld Magnetic Model (WMM) Home Page

http://www.ngdc.noaa.gov/seg/WMM
34 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

ate induced magnetic fields. These induction fields will also be

local in character. Observations of erratic compass behavior

should be reported with details of the particular circumstances

at the time. Any disturbances to the geomagnetic field can also

interfere with magnetic navigation. The flow of the solar wind

(which contains electrons and protons) past the earth creates

magnetic disturbances at the earth’s surface. Some of these disturbances are known to be highly localized while others occur

over wide areas. Auroras are the visible result of a significant

magnetic storm.

0.0 There are four different periodicities of magnetic disturbances. Although magnetic storms can occur at any time, they are

most numerous during the period of maximum activity in the

11-year sunspot cycle. There is a weak semi-annual periodicity

where the level of disturbance is at a maximum in October and

April. More prominently, magnetic storms tend to have a 27-

day repetition period due to the synodic rotation period of the

sun, that is, the apparent rotation period as seen from the earth.

Magnetic storms typically last 2 to 3 days. The substorms

which accompany them only last from 1 to 3 hours and tend to

occur more frequently and more strongly at local midnight.

0.0 During a particularly intense magnetic storm, such as occurred in March 1989, electrical currents are generated in the

magnetosphere and the ionosphere. The magnetic fields of

these currents also induce fluctuating voltages in the earth and

cause additional current. The total current can significantly alter the geomagnetic field observed at the earth’s surface and

change its direction as much as several degrees and its magnitude as much as 10 per cent.

0.0 Navigation.—Navigation by magnetic compass in polar regions is much less reliable than in equatorial and mid-latitudes.

Low directive force on the compass card, the enhanced effects

of magnetic storms near the magnetic poles, the relatively

sparse knowledge of local anomalies in regions outside commercial traffic areas, and the slow drift of the actual magnetic

pole positions all contribute. As a minimum, the most current

magnetic information and charts should be carried. Any chart

older than the current model should be replaced.

0.0 Charts of the geomagnetic field are available from the Department of Defense (DoD). Magnetic variation charts are published every 5 years. Charts of the total intensity, vertical

intensity, horizontal intensity, and inclination (magnetic dip)

are published every 10 years.

Meteorology

0.0 The meteorological conditions encountered on the Antarctic

continent and adjacent seas are the world’s most adverse. The

frequent passage of intense cyclonic offshore storms (60° to

70°S), the strong outflow of relatively cold air from the continent (katabatic winds), extremely low temperatures, and precipitation in excess of evaporation are the major features that

contribute to the rigorous climatic conditions. Not only are the

average conditions harsh, but the weather can be extremely

variable. This high degree of variability and the relatively

sparse number of weather stations makes meteorological forecasting somewhat unreliable.

0.0 In coastal areas, the mean temperatures range from about

0°C in summer to -30°C or lower in winter. The Antarctic Peninsula, particularly its NW coast and the islands of the Scotia

Arc, have a milder winter, with mean temperatures of approximately 10°C. The mean temperatures on the continental plateau are much colder, ranging from -40°C in summer to -70°C

or lower in winter. These extremely low temperatures result

from the loss of heat by radiation from the snow covered

ground. The temperature is actually much higher at a height of

only a few meters above the ground.

0.0 Coastal areas can be stormy. Storm conditions are associated

with cyclonic centers or depressions which are frequently generated around Antarctica between 60°S and 70°S. The S extent

of these storms can penetrate the coastal areas, causing windy

conditions and heavy snowfalls.

0.0 Katabatic winds or gravity winds occur when cold, dense air

flows down the slopes from the high continental interior. These

winds can be extremely strong. With the passage of cyclonic

storms, conditions are enhanced for katabatic outflow from the

continent, particularly along the E coast of the Antarctic Peninsula and along most of the coast of East Antarctica. These katabatic winds often last for the entire period, one to several

days, between cyclonic storm passages. They are more frequent in winter and may continuously exhibit wind speeds in

excess of 70 knots for several hours. During the summer, the

frequency of windstorms (both katabatic and cyclonic) is significantly reduced, but by no means nonexistent.

0.0 The primary role of the polar regions in relation to global climate is that they provide a major heat sink to counterbalance

the heat source of the tropics. Atmospheric motions are initiated and maintained by patterns of heating and cooling. Changes

in these thermal patterns, if persistent, can change atmospheric

circulation patterns which, in turn, feed back to alter the thermal patterns.

0.0 Thermal patterns are influenced by the composition of the atmosphere and by radiative and reflective properties of the

earth’s surface. Constituents of the atmosphere, both natural

and anthropogenic, which can significantly affect radiative

properties of the air and hence the climate, include carbon

monoxide, water vapor, and ozone. Chlorofluoromethane, nitrous oxide, methane, and carbon tetrachloride also affect the

radiative properties, but to a less certain degree.

0.0 Radiative properties of the earth’s surface also have a strong

influence on the patterns of heating and cooling and, thereby,

atmospheric motions. Seasonal fluctuations in the extent of the

ice around Antarctica strongly influence the heat exchange between the air and sea surface. This interaction affects air temperature and the degree to which Antarctica acts as a global

heat sink. For example, the strength, frequency, and track of

cyclonic storms near 65°S varies seasonally in response to the

seasonal fluctuations of the drift ice boundaries. In the summer

when the ice has receded, the intensity and frequency of cyclonic storms is reduced and they tend to pass to the S of their

mean winter tracks.

0.0 The reflective properties or albedo of the surface of Antarctica strongly influence the heat budget of the polar region and

hence the climate. Snow and ice can reflect up to 98 per cent of

incoming solar radiation but they average about 80 per cent,

while moderately rough ocean water will reflect only 10 to 15

per cent. This characteristic of the Antarctic ice cap provides a

powerful positive feedback mechanism, affecting climate. For

example, a decrease in the average Antarctic temperature will

lead to an increase in sea ice cover, which, in turn, increases
The Antarctic 35

Pub. 200

the albedo of the S pole and leads to further cooling. While the

importance of Antarctica in influencing the global climate is

clear, the interactions and feedback mechanisms of the atmosphere-hydrosphere-cryosphere system are far too complex

and polar observations far too meager to provide a complete

understanding of its role.

Weather-Related Phenomena

0.0 Superstructure Icing.—In certain weather conditions, ice

accumulating on hulls and superstructures can be a serious

danger to vessels. Ice accumulation may occur because of fog

with freezing conditions; freezing rain or drizzle; and sea spray

or salt water breaking over vessels when the air temperature is

below freezing (about -1.9°C).

0.0 The most dangerous form of icing is caused by sea spray,

sometimes known as “glaze ice,” which has high density and

great powers of adhesion.

0.0 In evaluating the potential for superstructure icing, two categories were subjectively selected. Moderate ice accumulation

seems to occur when the air temperature is less than or equal to

-2°C and the wind is stronger than or equal to 13 knots. If the

air temperature decreases to -9°C or below and the wind reaches 30 knots or more, ice accumulation takes place at an accelerated rate. This category is termed severe. For example, on a

small fishing vessel of 300 to 500 tons displacement, ice accumulation in the severe category would exceed about 4 tons per

hour.

0.0 Radio and radar failures due to ice accumulating on aerials

and insulators may be experienced soon after superstructure icing begins. The ice tends to form high up on vessels and a large

amount of accumulation may result in a loss of freeboard and

stability.

0.0 The probability of forecasting gales with freezing air temperatures is made difficult by the sparseness of meteorological and

oceanographic information in the Antarctic region. For this

reason, superstructure icing represents a serious hazard to navigation anywhere S of the Antarctic Circle.

0.0 Immersion Hypothermia.—Immersion hypothermia is the

loss of heat when a body is immersed in water. With few exceptions, humans die if their normal rectal temperature of approximately 37.6°C drops below 25.9°C. Cardiac arrest is the

most common direct cause of death. Except in tropical waters

warmer than 20° to 25°C, the main threat to life during prolonged immersion is cold or cold and drowning combined.

0.0 Cold lowers the body temperature, which in turn slows the

heart beat and lowers the rate of metabolism. This increases the

amount of carbon dioxide in the blood and results in an impaired mental capacity which is a major factor in death by hypothermia. Numerous reports from wrecks and accidents in

cold water indicate that people can become confused and even

delirious, further decreasing their chances of survival.

0.0 The length of time that a human can survive in water depends on the water surface temperature and, to a lesser extent,

on a person’s behavior. The table following shows the approximate human survival time in the sea. Body type can cause deviations, since thin people become hypothermic more rapidly

than fat people. Extremely fat people may survive almost indefinitely in water near 0°C if they are warmly clothed.

0.0 The cooling rate can be slowed by the person’s behavior and

insulated gear. Studies have shown that if the critical heat loss

areas can be protected, survival times will increase. The Heat

Escape Lessening Posture (HELP) was developed for those

persons in the water alone and The Huddle for small groups of

people, but both methods require life preservers.

0.0 HELP involves holding the upper arm firmly against the

sides of the chest, keeping the thighs together, and raising the

knees to protect the groin area. In The Huddle, people face

each other and keep their bodies as close together as possible.

These positions improve survival time in water with a temperature of 8.9°C to 4 hours, or approximately double that of a

swimmer and one and one-half times that of a person in the

passive position.

0.0 Near-drowning victims in cold water (temperature less than

21.1°C) show much longer periods of revivability than usual.

The keys to a successful revival are immediate cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) and administration of pure oxygen.

The whole revival process may take hours and require medical

help.

0.0 Windchill—Frostbite.—A body begins to lose heat when it

is warmer than the surroundings. The rate of loss depends on

the barriers to heat loss such as clothing and insulation in addition to the speed of air movement and the air temperature. Heat

loss increases dramatically in moving air that is colder than

skin temperature (33°C). In the Antarctic, windchill results

from the intense cold and strong winds. This combination affects not only comfort, but the morale and safety of personnel.

0.0 The equivalent windchill temperature relates a particular

wind and temperature combination to whatever temperature

would produce the same heat loss at about 3 knots, the normal

speed of a person walking. At extremely cold temperatures,

wind and temperature effect may account for only two-thirds

of the heat loss from the body. For example, at a temperature of

-40°C, about one-third of the heat loss from the body occurs

through the lungs in the process of breathing. Conversely, heat

loss is not as great in bright sunlight.

0.0 When the skin temperature drops below 10°C, a marked constriction of the blood vessels occurs, leading to vascular stagnation, oxygen want, and some cellular damage. The first

indication that something is wrong is a painful tingling. Swelling of varying extent follows, provided freezing has not occurred. Excruciating pain may then be felt if the skin

temperature is lowered rapidly, but freezing of localized portions of the skin may be painless when the rate of change is

Table of Survival Time versus Water Temperature

Water 

temperature

Exhaustion or 

unconsciousness

Expected time of 

survival

0°C 15 minutes 15 to 45 minutes

0° to 5°C 15 to 30 minutes 30 to 90 minutes

5° to 10°C 30 to 60 minutes 1 to 3 hours

10° to 15°C 1 to 2 hours 1 to 6 hours

15° to 20°C 2 to 7 hours 2 to 40 hours

20° to 25°C 3 to 12 hours 3 hours to indefinite 

25°C Indefinite Indefinite
36 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

slow.

0.0 Cold allergy is a term applied to the welts which may occur.

Chilblains usually affect the fingers and toes and are manifested as reddened, warm, and itching swollen patches. Trench

foot and immersion foot present essentially the same picture.

Both result from exposure to cold and a lack of circulation.

Wetness can add to the problem as water and wind soften the

tissues and accelerate heat loss. The feet swell, discolor, and

frequently blister. Secondary infection is common and gangrene may result.

0.0 Injuries from the cold may, to a large extent, be prevented by

maintaining natural warmth through the use of proper footgear

and adequate, dry clothing. Personnel should avoid being in

cramped positions or wearing constricting clothing. They

should also carry out active exercises of the hands, legs, and

feet.

0.0 Frostbite usually begins when the skin temperature falls

within the range of -10° to -15.5°C. Ice crystals form in the tissues and small blood vessels. Once started, freezing proceeds

rapidly and may penetrate deeply. The rate of heat loss determines the rate of freezing, which is accelerated by wind, wetness, extreme cold, and poor blood circulation. Parts of the

body most susceptible to freezing are those with surfaces large

in relation to their volume, such as toes, fingers, ears, nose,

chin, and cheeks.

Navigational Information

0.0 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not available at any place within the

area covered by this publication. However, vessels approaching

a manned base or harbor are advised to seek information concerning navigational conditions by radio.

0.0 Navigational Aids.—Lights, ranges, buoys, and beacons

etc., are virtually non-existent in the Antarctic region. Such

aids are subject to damage and failure by ice or storm, or may

disappear altogether and remain unreported for long periods of

time.

0.0 Polar Charts.—Even in high latitudes, mariners have exhibited an understandable partiality for Mercator charts, on which

a rhumb line appears as a straight line, and these have been

used virtually everywhere ships have sailed. However, as the

latitude increases, the superiority of the Mercator projection

decreases, primarily because the value of the rhumb line becomes progressively less. At latitudes greater than 60°, the decrease in utility begins to be noticeable, and beyond 70°, it

becomes troublesome. In the clear polar atmosphere, visual

bearings are observed at great distances, sometimes 50 miles or

more. The use of a rhumb line to represent such a bearing and

distance at high latitudes introduces excessive errors. Another

problem with the use of Mercator charts at high latitudes is the

increasing rate of change of scale over a single chart. This aspect results in the shape of the land mass being distorted and

subsequent errors in measuring distances.

0.0 At some latitudes, the disadvantages of the Mercator projection outweigh its advantages. The latitude at which this occurs

depends upon the physical features of the area, the configuration and orientation of land and water areas, the nature of the

operation, and mostly, upon the previous experience and personal preference of the mariner. Because of differences of

opinion in this matter, a transitional zone exists in which several projections may be useful. Under all circumstances, a wise

navigator should be prepared to use any of them, because coverage of the operating area may not be adequate on the preferred projection.

0.0 Charts of polar areas are generally inferior to those of other

regions because of lack of detail, inaccuracy, and poor coverage.

0.0 Relatively few soundings are available in polar areas and

many of the coastal features are only shown on the chart by

their general outlines. Large areas are perennially covered by

ice which presents a changing appearance as the amount, position, and the character of the ice changes. Heavy covers of ice

and snow also prevent the accurate determination of the surface

features beneath.

0.0 Polar charts, of which relatively few are available, may be

inaccurate because they are based upon limited information

and reports from those who have been in the areas. These reports are usually less reliable than in other areas as icebergs are

sometimes mistaken for islands, especially those having morainic deposits; and ice-covered islands are occasionally mistaken for grounded icebergs. In addition, shorelines are not

easy to detect and inlets and sounds may be completely obscured by ice and snow.

0.0 The three chart projections most commonly used near the

poles are the transverse Mercator, the modified Lambert conformal, and the polar stereographic. When a gyro is used as a

directional reference, the track of the craft is approximately a

great circle. A desirable chart is one on which a great circle is

represented as a straight line with a constant scale and with angles correctly represented. These requirements are not met entirely by any single projection, but they are approximated by

both the modified Lambert conformal and the polar stereographic.

0.0 Polar Navigation.—Navigation in polar regions does not

differ materially from that in lower latitudes. However, unique

conditions, such as high latitude and meteorological factors, require the use of special techniques. Much of the thinking of the

marine navigator is in the terms of the “rectangular” world of

the Mercator projection, on which the meridians are equally

spaced with vertical lines perpendicular to the horizontal parallels of latitude. On such a projection, direction is measured relative to the meridians a straight line on a chart represents a

rhumb line.

0.0 In polar regions, conditions are somewhat different as the

meridians rapidly converge at the poles, which are centers of a

series of concentric circles constituting the parallels of latitude.

The rapid convergence of the meridians renders the usual convention of direction inadequate for some purposes and even visual bearings cannot be adequately represented as rhumb lines.

At the pole, all directions are toward the opposite pole and

lines of position, in the usual sense, are replaced by longitude.

0.0 Stars circle the sky without noticeable change in altitude and

planets rise and set once each sidereal period (12 years for Jupiter, 30 years for Saturn). At the S pole, the sun rises about

September 23; slowly spirals to a maximum altitude of approximately 23°27' about December 21; slowly spirals downward

to the horizon about March 21; and then disappears for another

6 months.

0.0 It requires about 32 hours for the sun to cross the horizon,

during which time it circles the sky one and one-third times.
The Antarctic 37

Pub. 200

The twilight periods, following sunset and preceding sunrise,

last for several weeks. The moon rises and sets about once each

month and only celestial bodies with S declination are visible

at the pole.

0.0 The long polar night is not wholly dark as the full moon at

this time rises relatively high in the sky. In addition, light from

the aurora australis is often quite bright, occasionally exceeding that of the full moon. Even the planets and stars contribute

an appreciable amount of light in this area where the snow cover provides an excellent reflecting surface.

0.0 All time zones, like all meridians, meet at the pole. Local

time does not have its usual significance, because the hours of

the day bear no relation to periods of light and darkness or to

the altitude of celestial bodies.

0.0 Operations in polar regions are attended by hazards and

problems not encountered elsewhere. Lack of knowledge,

sometimes accompanied by fear of the unknown, has prevented

navigation in these areas from being conducted with the same

confidence with which it is pursued in more familiar areas. As

experience in high latitudes has increased, much of the mystery

surrounding these areas has been dispelled and operations there

have become more predictable.

0.0 Before entering polar regions, navigators should acquaint

themselves with the experience of those who have preceded

them into these areas. This information can be found in accounts of explorers, reports of previous voyages in high latitudes, and articles in professional journals concerning

operations in polar regions. The search for knowledge should

not be confined to just navigation and such subjects as survival,

geography, ice, climate, and weather should be studied.

0.0 Planning, important in any operation, is vital to the success

of polar navigation. Vessels should be provided with all the

needed charts, publications, and special navigational material.

All available data and information from previous operations in

the area should be available. Key personnel should be adequately instructed in polar navigation prior to departure or

while enroute to the region. Forecasts on anticipated ice and

weather conditions should be obtained before departure and on

approach to the continent.

0.0 Radar.—In polar regions, where fog and long periods of

continuous daylight or darkness reduce the effectiveness of

both celestial navigation and visual piloting, radar is particularly valuable. Its value is further enhanced by the fact that polar

seas are generally smooth, resulting in relatively little oscillation of the shipborne antenna. In addition, when ice is not

present, relatively little sea return is encountered from the calm

sea.

0.0 However, certain limitations exist with the use of radar in polar regions. Similarity of detail along the polar shore is even

more apparent by radar than by visual observation. Lack of accurate detail on charts adds to the difficulty of coastal identification. Identification is even more of a problem when the

shoreline is beyond the radar horizon and accurate contours are

not shown on the chart. When an extensive mass of ice extends

out from shore, accurate location of the shoreline is also extremely difficult.

0.0 Experience is required to interpret accurately the radar returns in polar regions where ice may cover both land and sea. A

number of icebergs lying near the coast may be located too

close together to be resolved, giving an altered appearance to a

shoreline, or they may be mistaken for off-lying islands. The

shadow of an iceberg or pressure ridge and the lack of return

from an open lead in the ice may easily be confused. Smooth

ice may look like open water.

0.0 As with visual bearings, radar bearings require correction for

convergence unless the objects observed are quite close to the

vessel.

0.0 As the state of the sea increases, so does the minimum size

of berg that can be detected. On very rough seas, bergs as high

as 15m cannot always be detected in the sea return. Only in exceptionally smooth seas can radar be depended upon to pick up

growlers.

0.0 Meteorological conditions in certain areas affect radar propagation in a manner that may, under certain conditions, reduce

the range in fog when radar is most needed.

0.0 Caution is essential during periods when vessels are navigating in consolidated ice during low visibility. Generally, large

icebergs can be distinguished from adjacent drift ice returns at

ranges of 3,500m or more, but they may be obscured at lesser

ranges. Therefore, in no case should the radar be accepted as

100 per cent accurate, resulting in the relaxation of normal

safety precautions.

0.0 Radio Direction Finder.—The Radio Direction Finder

(RDF) is useful when the few transmitting stations in the polar

region are within range. One of the principal uses of RDF in

polar regions is to assist in locating other vessels, for rendezvous or other purposes. This is particularly true in an area of

many icebergs, where radar may not distinguish between ships

and bergs.

0.0 Magnetic Compass.—The magnetic compass depends for

its directive force upon the horizontal intensity of the magnetic

field of the earth. As the magnetic poles are approached, this

force becomes progressively weaker until at some point the

magnetic compass becomes useless as a direction-measuring

device. In a marginal area, the magnetic compass must be kept

under almost constant scrutiny as it may become somewhat erratic in dependability and its error may change rapidly. Compass observation logs are always useful to keep as a reference.

Magnetic storms may also cause additional magnetic compass

errors.

0.0 The magnetic poles themselves are somewhat elusive, because they participate in the normal diurnal, annual, and secular changes in the earth’s field, as well as more erratic changes

caused by magnetic storms.

0.0 Measurements indicate that the magnetic poles move within

an elongated area of perhaps 100 miles in a generally N/S direction, and somewhat less in an E/W direction. Normally, they

are at the S end of the area of movement at local noon and at

the N end 12 hours later. However, during severe magnetic

storms, this motion is upset and becomes highly erratic. Due to

the motions of the poles, they are sometimes regarded as areas

rather than points. Some evidence exists to support the belief

that several secondary poles exist, although such alleged poles

may be anomalies, possibly of intermittent or temporary existence. Various severe anomalies have been found to occur in the

polar areas and others may exist.

0.0 The continual motion of the poles may account, at least in

part, for the large diurnal changes in the variation encountered

in high latitudes. Changes as large as 10° have been reported.

0.0 Measurements of the earth’s magnetic field in polar regions
38 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

are neither numerous nor frequent. The isogonic lines in these

areas are close together, resulting in rapid changes within short

distances in some directions. As a result, charted variation in

polar regions is not at the same order of accuracy as elsewhere.

0.0 The decrease in horizontal intensity encountered near the

magnetic poles, as well as magnetic storms, also affects the deviation of vessels. Any deviating magnetic influence remaining

after adjustment, which is seldom perfect, exerts a greater influence as the directive force of horizontal intensity decreases.

It is not uncommon for residual deviation determined in moderate latitudes to increase 10 or 20 fold in marginal areas. Interactions between correctors and compass magnets exert a

deviating influence that may increase to a troublesome degree

in high latitudes.

0.0 The heeling magnet, correcting for both permanent and induced magnetism, is accurately situated only for one magnetic

latitude. Near the magnetic pole, its position might be changed,

but this may induce sufficient magnetism in the Flinders Bar to

more than offset the change in deviation due to the change in

the position. In addition, the relatively strong vertical intensity

may render the Flinders Bar a stronger influence than the horizontal field of the earth. When this occurs, the magnetic compass reading remains nearly the same on all headings.

0.0 Another effect of the decrease in the directive force of the

compass is a greater influence of frictional error. This, combined with an increase in the period of the compass, results in

greatly increased sluggishness in its return to the correct reading after being disturbed. For this reason, the magnetic compass may be frequently inaccurate for quite a long period after

an impact by the vessel against ice.

0.0 Magnetic storms can also affect the magnetism of vessels as

well as that of the earth. Changes in deviation of as much as

45° have been reported during severe magnetic storms, although it is possible that such large changes may be a combination of deviation and variation changes.

0.0 The area in which the magnetic compass reduces its value

cannot be determined in specific terms. However, a magnetic

compass in an exposed position generally performs better than

one in an enclosed position. However, there is a danger of the

compass liquid freezing when it is subjected to extremely low

temperatures. Sufficient heat to prevent the liquid from freezing can normally be obtained from the compass light, which

should not be turned off during severe weather.

0.0 Despite the various limitations, the magnetic compass is a

valuable instrument in much of the polar regions, where the gyrocompass is also of reduced reliability. Careful compass adjustment, frequent checks, and review of the records of

previous behavior are advised.

0.0 Gyro Compass.—The gyro compass is generally reliable up

to about 70°. At higher latitudes, the disturbing effect of imperfections in the compass or the adjustment is magnified. The latitude adjustment becomes critical and the speed error increases

as the speed of the vessel approaches the rotational speed of the

earth. In addition, the ballistic deflection error increases and

the compass becomes slow to respond to correcting forces.

Subsequently, frequent changes of course and speed, which are

often necessary when proceeding through ice, introduce errors

that are slow to settle out. When the gyro compass is deflected

by the impact of the vessel against the ice, it does not return or

stabilize quickly to the correct heading.

0.0 These errors increase and become more erratic as the vessel

proceeds to higher latitudes. Extreme errors as large as 27°

have been reported at latitudes greater than 82°. The gyro compass probably becomes useless at about latitude 85°. At latitude 70°, the gyro error should be determined frequently and

the gyro compass should be compared frequently with the

magnetic compass. Instructions for use at high latitudes are

sometimes provided by the manufacturer of the gyro compass.

0.0 Bearings.—Natural landmarks are plentiful in some areas,

but their usefulness is restricted by the difficulty in identifying

them, or locating them on the chart. Along many of the coasts

in the Antarctic, the various points and inlets bear a marked resemblance to each other. In addition, the appearance of the

coast is often very different when many of its features are

masked by a heavy covering of snow or ice.

0.0 Bearings of landmarks are useful, but they have limitations.

When bearings of more than two objects are taken, they may

fail to intersect at a point because the objects may not be charted in their correct relation to each other. Even a two-point fix

may be considerably in error since the objects used may be

charted in correct relationship to one another, but in the wrong

position geographically. However, in restricted waters, it is

usually more important to know the position of the vessel relative to the nearby land and shoals than to know the accurate latitude and longitude. The bearings and distances of uncharted,

locally known objects then become valuable.

0.0 When a position is established relative to nearby landmarks,

it is good practice to use this to help establish the identity and

location of some prominent feature a considerable distance

ahead. Through this practice, unidentifiable or uncharted features can be used to establish future positions.

0.0 In high latitudes, it is not unusual to make use of bearings of

objects which are located a considerable distance from the vessel. Because of the rapid convergence of the meridians in these

areas, such bearings are not accurately represented by straight

lines on a Mercator chart. Therefore, if this projection is used,

the bearings should be corrected in the same manner as radio

bearings because both can be considered to be great circles.

Neither visual nor radio bearings require a correction when

plotting on a Lambert conformal or a polar stereographic chart.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are so important in polar regions

that echo sounders are customarily operated continuously

while underway. A good practice is to have two such instruments, preferably those of the recording type with a wide flexibility in range. Enough soundings have been obtained to

produce an accurate portrayal of the bottom configuration in

only a few parts of the polar regions. Hence, caution should be

maintained at all times in order to avoid unobserved shoaling.

0.0 The polar regions have relatively few shoals, but a number of

pinnacles and ledges may rise abruptly from the bottom in

some areas. Such dangers constitute a threat to vessels because

they exist in areas generally not surrounded by any apparent

shoaling. Therefore, in unknown areas, vessels are advised to

send one or more small craft ahead with portable sounding

gear. It should be noted that echo sounders will not give a reading when ice is under the vessels or when the water beneath the

ship is disturbed by turbulence by ice floes being shoved

around. A vessel proceeding in uncharted coastal waters may

minimize the risk of grounding by having a boat equipped with

a portable echo sounder scout ahead.
The Antarctic 39

Pub. 200

0.0 In very deep water, 2,000m or more, the echo return from the

bottom is sometimes masked by the sound of ice coming in

contact with the hull of the vessel. This is generally not a problem when the bottom is close enough to be menacing. Ice generally prevents the effective use of a hand lead unless the vessel

is stopped.

0.0 When vessels become beset by ice, they may lose steerage

way and drift with the ice. Such vessels may be in danger of

CONVERSION ANGLE TABLE FOR VISUAL BEARINGS IN POLAR WATERS

Difference of Longitude

Mid

Latitude

Mid 

Latitude

 0° 0.5° 1° 1.5° 2° 2.5° 3° 3.5° 4° 4.5°

61 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 2.0 61

62 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 62

63 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0 63

64 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0 64

65 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 65

66 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 66

67 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 67

68 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.1 68

69 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.1 69

70 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.1 70

71 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.1 71

72 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.1 72

73 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.2 73

74 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.2 74

75 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.2 75

76 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.2 76

77 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.2 77

78 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 78

79 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 79

80 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 80

81 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 81

82 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 82

83 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 83

84 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 84

85 0.0 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 85

The table should be entered with the middle latitude and the difference in longitude (between the object and the vessel). The

angles listed in the table (corrections) represent the difference between the great circle bearing and the rhumb line direction

(Mercator). The sign of the correction to be applied is, as follows:

Latitude of Vessel Object/Landmark

(direction from vessel)

Correction Sign

South East -

South West +

North East +

North West -
40 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

grounding as the ice moves over a shoal area. Therefore, it is

important that soundings be continued to be taken even when a

vessel is beset. If necessary, a hole should be made in the adjacent ice and a hand lead used. A vessel with limited means for

freeing itself may prudently save such means for use only

when there is danger of grounding.

0.0 Useful information concerning the depth of water in the vicinity of a vessel can sometimes be obtained by watching the

ice. A stream of ice moving faster than surrounding ice or a

stretch of open water located in loose drift ice often marks a

channel leading through shoal water. A patch of stationary ice

located in the midst of moving ice often may mark a shoal.

0.0 Some knowledge of earth formations may also prove helpful.

The slope of the land is often an indication of the underwater

gradient. Shoal water is often found off low islands and spits,

etc., but seldom near a steep shore. Where glaciation has occurred, moraine deposits are likely to have formed an offshore

bar. Submerged rocks and pinnacles are more likely to be encountered off a rugged shore than near a low, sandy beach.

0.0 Icebergs.—Radar can easily pick up large icebergs in ample

time to avoid collision. However, small bergs or growlers,

which are capable of inflicting serious damage to vessels, may

go undetected even with moderate conditions of wind and sea.

Only in exceptionally smooth seas can radar be depended upon

to pick up growlers. Therefore, it is unsafe for any vessel, because of radar, to assume immunity to ice hazards.

0.0 Air temperatures are not a reliable guide to the presence of

icebergs, nor can sea temperatures be depended upon to give

warning of their approach. It is true that a small increase in water surface temperature can usually be detected within about 1

mile of an iceberg. This increase is due to the freshening of the

surface layer of the sea by the melting ice. However, variations

of surface temperature of the same order of magnitude are frequently encountered in the total absence of icebergs.

0.0 In fog, the use of the steam whistle or foghorn for detecting

small bergs or growlers by echo is of little value. The sound

waves will only be reflected by a high, vertical wall of ice and

they are not always discernible. Hence, the absence of an echo

does not mean that no bergs are close.

0.0 Care should be exercised when approaching icebergs and

soundings should be taken continuously as submerged projections caused by overcutting may extend a considerable distance

to seaward.

0.0 Vessels hove-to in drift ice during heavy weather are advised

to place their bow against a floe and use their engines to hold

themselves up into the wind. If vessels are allowed to drift in

such circumstances, serious damage may be sustained from

grinding and surging floes. Often in the mass of ice, old ice is

integrated by a film of young ice. Under such conditions, it is

prudent to remain amongst the young ice since its soft texture

will buffer the vessel against encroachment by old ice.

0.0 When approaching snow-covered land from ice-free waters,

a yellowish landblink is usually observed before the land is

seen above the horizon. Many of the coasts of Antarctica are

fronted by a belt of ice which extends between 20 and 60 miles

offshore. Hence, a strip of ice-free water lies adjacent to the

shore. When transiting in this strip of water, vessels should

maintain observations of any movement of the belt of drift ice.

With onshore winds, the belt of drift ice may be driven in

quickly and such vessels placed in danger of being set on to the

land.

0.0 An accumulation of icebergs offshore invariably marks a

shoal. An area of water lying offshore from which a line of icebergs extends is almost certain to be foul. Islands with nearly

continuous lines of icebergs extending between them and the

shore are usually connected to the coast by shallow water or by

a submerged shoal ridge. However, if the icebergs are concentrated around the islands, leaving wide spaces free of ice, such

spaces are probably clear of shoals. A coast that is fringed by

glaciers or studded with inshore bergs, but is free of ice to seaward, is usually considered to be safe up to about 1 mile from

the shore.

0.0 Bays in which icebergs are found generally have a channel

leading into them. Channels, the sides of which are bordered

with bergs, may invariably be considered safe if their centers

are clear of ice. Open water will usually be found during the

summer adjacent to coasts where offshore winds prevail.

0.0 Duration Of Sunlight.—Rising, setting, and twilight data

are tabulated in the Nautical Almanac to latitude 72°N and

60°S. Within these limits, the times of these phenomena can be

determined. Graphs are used in the higher latitudes instead of

tables because they give a clearer picture of conditions, which

may change radically with relatively little change in position or

date. Under these conditions, interpolation is simpler by graph

than by table. In those parts of the graph which are difficult to

read, the times of the phenomena’s occurrence are themselves

uncertain, being altered considerably by relatively small

changes in refraction or height of eye. The graphs for high latitudes may be found in the Air Almanac which is published

each year by the U.S. Naval Observatory.

0.0 The graph displaying the semiduration of sunlight may be

used for latitudes higher than 60° and shows the number of

hours from sunrise to meridian passage or from meridian passage to sunset. There is continuous daylight in the area marked

“sun above horizon.” The figures near the top of the graph indicate, for several convenient dates, the LMT of meridian passage. With the aid of the intermediate dots, the LMT for any

given day may be obtained to the nearest minute. Using the latitude and the LMT of meridian passage, the semiduration can

be extracted. The time of sunrise may be found by subtracting

the semiduration from the time of meridian passage. The time

of sunset can be found by adding the semiduration to the time

of meridian passage. Similar graphs for twilight and semiduration of moonlight in high latitudes are also displayed.

0.0 ODAS.—The term Ocean Data Acquisition System (ODAS)

covers a wide range of devices for collecting weather and

oceanographic data. However, the devices of most concern to

vessels consist of buoy systems which support instruments.

These buoy systems may be expected to become more numerous each year and may be found in polar waters.

0.0 The buoy systems vary considerably in size and are either

moored or free-floating. As far as possible, positions of the

former will always be widely promulgated, and, if considered

to be of a permanent enough nature, will be charted. In both

types, the instruments may be either in the float or attached at

any depth beneath it.

0.0 The buoys are colored yellow and marked ODAS with an

identification number. The moored buoys usually display a yellow light, showing a group of 5 flashes every 20 seconds.

0.0 ODAS may be encountered in unexpected areas and often in
The Antarctic 41

Pub. 200

deep water where navigational buoys would not be found. It

should be noted that valuable instruments are often suspended

beneath these systems or attached to the mooring lines. In

some cases, the moorings have been cut loose beneath the buoy

by unauthorized salvors, with the consequent loss of the most

valuable part of the system.

0.0 The moored buoys may be up to 7.5m in diameter and 2 to

3m in height. The free-floating buoys are usually much smaller, 2m wide, and do not display a light.

0.0 Caution.—Vessels should use extreme care when navigating

in the regions covered by this publication as very few of the

bays, inlets, and harbors have been carefully surveyed. Information contained herein was compiled from numerous sources,

much of which appears to be contradictory. Charts of the region lack details and should be utilized only as a guide.

0.0 Reliance should not be placed upon sketchy reports by observers as the unusual phenomena and atmospheric conditions

in the S pole region often lead the inexperienced observer to

optical errors. Navigation in this area becomes further complicated with sea ice, sudden and violent changes in the weather,

dangerous shoals, compass instability, and the absence of navigation aids.

0.0 The most serious danger is that caused by the pressure of ice

on a vessel, which may result in the crushing of the hull or

damage to underwater hull fittings. The risk is greatest when a

vessel is navigating in pack ice. Apart from this hazard, vessels

beset in ice, and hence drifting with it, may be forced into waters that are dangerous for navigation.

0.0 Distances.—The following navigable surface distances

(nautical miles) between points combine the use of great circles and rhumb lines: 

0.0 Note.—Due to changing ice conditions in the Antarctic region, the above distances may differ from those actually

steamed.

Electronic Navigation and Communication

0.0 In general, radio wave propagation in high latitudes follows

the same principles that apply elsewhere. However, certain

anomalies occur, and although these are but imperfectly understood and experience to date has not always been consistent,

there is much that has been ascertained. An understanding of

these conditions is important if maximum effective use is to be

made of electronics in high latitudes.

0.0 Communication between the scientific stations in Antarctica

and the rest of the world, including vessels at sea, is vital.

However, radio communications in high latitudes presents special problems. The permanent stations on the various parts of

Antarctica are widely separated within an area of 4,000,000

square miles. Hence, these stations are isolated by great distances and by ice caps. Most radio communications depend on

the high frequency band, using the ionosphere as a reflector. A

network of high frequency radio systems connects other parts

of the world to Antarctica, including summer bases, field parties, ships, and aircraft. Generally, this high frequency network

of communications is effective over great distances, but the

system may become ineffective at times due to atmospheric

disturbances, high ionospheric absorption flutter, drift static,

and local man-made interference.

0.0 Disturbances.—The ionosphere is irregular and unstable in

the auroral zone and the intensity of absorption is high nearly

all of the time, especially during the daylight hours.

0.0 Man-made interference is caused by locally produced noise

such as generators, transmitters, mobiles, switchgear, power

lines, scientific equipment, etc. Because the Antarctic atmosphere is not restrictive to noise interference, a receiver unit becomes unusually sensitive to locally produced noise. In

addition, the noise from other electrical equipment is accentuated by low ground conductivity.

0.0 Drift static and/or precipitation static are caused by electrically charged particles and are a common phenomena in this

region. Static discharges are a serious problem frequented by

severe blizzards, particularly when the drifts are dry and powdery, driven over a long distance by a gradient wind, and steep

fronted. This phenomena usually builds up an electrical charge

of several thousand volts before it discharges and can strongly

distort high frequency radio systems. It is reported that measures to reduce smaller forms of static shocks have been successful to some degree by filterization and special grounding.

0.0 Flutter, which is a rapid succession of reflected pulses resulting from ionospheric storms, is common in polar regions. Its

effect is particularly noticeable on voice circuits and in severe

cases, radio teletype reception is impacted. Since flutter is usually associated with fading signal strength, high powered transmitters are sometimes suggested, but they should not exceed

signal to noise ratios required for good reception.

From: Anvers Island—Antarctic Peninsula (64°00'S., 

64°00'W.)

To: Boston, United States 7,235

Buenos Aires, Argentina 1,856

Cape Town, South Africa 3,811

Fremantle, Australia 6,839

Montevideo, Uruguay 1,762

Panama 4,489

Port Stanley, Falkland Islands 885

Rio de Janeiro, Brazil 2,604

Ushuaia, Argentina 606

Valparaiso, Chile 1,987

From: Cape Adare—Ross Sea (71°00'S., 172°00'E.)

To: Auckland, New Zealand 2,287

Dunedin, New Zealand 1,532

Fremantle, Australia 3,504

Hobart, Tasmania 1,843

McMurdo Sound, Antarctica 380

Melbourne, Australia 2,208

Pearl Harbor, Oahu 5,662

Sydney, Australia 2,338

Wellington, New Zealand 1,800
42 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 It is important that the signal to noise ratio at the receiver

should be at as high a level as is necessary to give intelligible

communication. However, it is equally important that the power used to transmit the signal should not be greater than necessary. Hence, it should not be so great as to cause radio

frequency interference with scientific programs and other radio

reception, nor is it desirable for logistics reasons to use more

power than is necessary.
The Antarctic 43

Pub. 200

0.0 The specification of signal to noise ratio for the mode of signal to be employed presents no problems. Nor is there any

problem in measuring the noise level on which to base this

specification. As previously stated, the ionosphere in the auroral zone is unstable. Therefore, the theory of measuring noise

level in this case becomes highly speculative.

0.0 Disturbances on the sun may cause interference with radio

communication. At the time of an intense solar flare or erup-
44 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

tion, a flash of ultraviolet light and a stream of charged particles are emitted from the sun. The flash of ultraviolet light

takes only 8 minutes to reach the earth, where it produces great

ionization (electrification) at abnormally low layers of the upper atmosphere. Short radio waves, which travel round the

earth by being reflected from a higher layer of the upper atmosphere, cannot penetrate this barrier of ionization and a radio

“fadeout” is experienced. However, long radio waves may be
The Antarctic 45

Pub. 200

reflected more strongly from the base of the lower layer of ionization. Since these short wave radio fadeouts and long wave

enhancements are caused by the effects of ultraviolet light from

the sun, they are confined to the sunlit side of the earth and are

almost simultaneous with the flare, lasting on the average for

about 20 minutes.

0.0 The stream of charged particles, traveling much more slowly

than light, arrives at the earth, if it is suitably directed, in about
46 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

one to three days. The stream visibly signals its arrival at the

earth by producing a bright and active aurora. It also causes

great ionization in the upper atmosphere, which is much more

prolonged than that caused by the ultraviolet light. There is

again deterioration in short wave radio communications, which

may be a complete “blackout” in higher latitudes. At this time,

currents of up to a million amperes may circulate in the upper

atmosphere. The resulting magnetic field may extend to the

surface of the earth and may deflect a compass needle noticeably from its normal position. The effects of these magnetic

and ionospheric storms, which may persist with varying intensity for several days, are usually greatest in higher latitudes.

Radio “blackouts” and simultaneous deflections of magnetic

compasses are not uncommon in and near the auroral zones.

When a great aurora is seen in abnormally low latitudes, it is

invariably accompanied by a magnetic and ionospheric storm.

Unlike the fadeouts which occur only on the sunlit side of the

earth, the interference with radio communications that accompanies an aurora and a magnetic storm may occur by day or at

night. All these effects occur most frequently and in most intense forms at the time of sunspot maximum.

0.0 Polar Cap Disturbance (PCD) is an ionospheric disturbance

which is in no way dependent on the ice cap in the polar region. It is the result of the focusing effect the earth’s magnetic

field has on particles released from the sun during a solar proton event. The effect concentrates high energy particles in the

region of the magnetic pole with the result that normal very

low frequency propagation is disrupted. The effect on radio

waves is known as Polar Cap Absorption (PCA).

0.0 Historically PCDs produced large or total absorption of high

frequency radio waves crossing the polar region. A transmission path that is entirely outside the polar region is unaffected

by PCDs. The PCDs, often called PCA Events (PCAs), may

persist for a week or more, but commonly the duration lasts

only a few days. The frequency of this phenomenon increases

during those years of peak solar activity.

0.0 Sudden Ionospheric Disturbance (SID) is a sudden increase

in the ionization density in the lower part of the ionosphere. It

is caused by very sudden and large increases in X-ray flux

which is emitted from the sun, usually during a solar flare.

These disturbances (SIDs) also occur during flares called Xray flares that produce large X-ray flux, but which have no

components in the visible light spectrum. The effect, which is

restricted to sunlit propagation paths, causes a phase advance

and is known as a Sudden Phase Anomaly (SPA). The SID effects are related to solar zenith angle and consequently occur

mostly in lower latitude regions. Usually, a phase advance over

a period of 5 to 10 minutes occurs which is followed by a recovery over a period of 30 to 60 minutes.

0.0 International Maritime Satellite Organization (INMARSAT).—Around the world satellite communication systems

have now become synonymous with reliable and quality transfer of information. The International Maritime Satellite Organization (INMARSAT) is an international consortium

comprising over 75 partners who provide maritime safety management and maritime communications services.

0.0 The INMARSAT system consists of a number of satellites,

which maintain geosynchronous orbits, and provides quality

communications coverage between about 77°N and about

77°S, including locations with less than a 5° angle of elevation.

0.0 INMARSAT-A, the original system, provides telephone, telex, and fax services. However, this system is being replaced by

INMARSAT-B, which, by the use of digital technology, is providing the services with improved quality and higher data

transmission rates. INMARSAT-C provides a store and forward data messaging capability, but no voice communication.

0.0 To qualify for access into the system, the National Science

Foundation (NSF) applied through COMSAT, the United

States representative to INMARSAT. Because McMurdo Station, the main United States base in Antarctica, qualifies as a

search and rescue coordination center for that region, the application was approved and the base now operates within the network as a ship/earth station. Since 1983, a permanent

communication link between McMurdo Station and the United

States has been provided via INMARSAT.

0.0 Global Maritime Distress and Safety System

(GMDSS).—The Global Maritime Distress and Safety System

(GMDSS) provides a great advancement in safety over the previous usage of short range and high seas radio transmissions.

This system, fully implemented since 1 February 1999, consists of satellite as well as advanced terrestrial communications

operations.

0.0 The GMDSS has been adopted by the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) 1974. It applies to

cargo vessels of 300 grt and over and all vessels carrying more

than 12 passengers on international voyages. Unlike previous

regulations, the GMDSS requires vessels to carry specified

equipment according to the area in which they are operating.

Such vessels navigating in polar regions must carry VHF, MF,

and HF equipment and a satellite Emergency Position Indicating Radiobeacon (EPIRB).

0.0 It should be noted that after 1999, compliant vessels are no

longer required to maintain a voice listening watch on VHF

channel 16 or 2182kHz and considerable difficulty may be experienced in establishing communications between a GMDSS

and a non-GMDSS equipped vessel.

0.0 SafetyNET.—NAVTEX is an international automated direct

printing service for providing coastal navigational information,

distress warnings, and meteorological warnings, including ice

reports. It is an element of GMDSS and has replaced the broadcasts of safety information over MF morse frequencies.

0.0 The SafetyNET broadcast system provides the same information as NAVTEX to vessels on the high seas and is delivered

by the INMARSAT-C system.

0.0 Global Positioning System (GPS).—The NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based system, operated by the U.S. Air Force, which provides very accurate

positioning, time, and velocity information to multiple users. It

is an all-weather system with world wide and continuous usage

which will replace OMEGA and other such hyperbolic radio

navigation systems. The space component of GPS consists of

24 satellites, of which a minimum of six are observable from

any place on earth. GPS receivers convert data from the satellites to produce three-dimensional positions (latitude, longitude, and altitude). They compute information for fixes in

terms of the World Geodetic System (1984) reference ellipsoid; hence, a datum shift correction may be required before a

position can be plotted on a chart.

0.0 GPS provides two services for navigation positioning, as follows:
The Antarctic 47

Pub. 200

1. Standard Positioning Service (SPS)—The standard

level of positioning and timing accuracy. It is available

without restrictions to any user on a continuous worldwide

basis. As of midnight (EDT) 1 March 2000, Selective Availability was set to zero; users should experience a GPS horizontal accuract of 10 to 20m or better.

2. Precise Positioning Service (PPS)—An encoded level

intended for use by the Department of Defense.

0.0 Note.—For further information concerning the International

Maritime Satellite Organization (INMARSAT), the Global

Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS), the SafetyNET system, and the Global Positioning System (GPS), see

Pub. No. 9, The American Practical Navigator (Bowditch-2002

Edition); Pub. 117, Radio Navigation Aids; and Annual Notice

to Mariners No. 1.

Oceanography

0.0 The Antarctic continent is surrounded by waters forming a

confluence of the S portions of the Pacific Ocean, the Atlantic

Ocean, and the Indian Ocean. Adjacent to the continent lie the

Weddell Sea, the Bellingshausen Sea, the Amundsen Sea, and

the Ross Sea. The water surrounding Antarctica is unique

among the world’s oceans because the configuration of land

and water in the southern hemisphere permits a circumpolar

oceanic flow comprising about 10 per cent of the world’s sea

water. The only major physical boundary that constricts the

zonal flow is Drake Passage which lies in the Scotia Sea region

between the southernmost part of the South American continent and the Antarctic Peninsula. Great depths within this passage permit an unhindered flow of water. However, this area

can become exceptionally stormy because there is no barrier to

reduce the persistent and strong W winds.

0.0 Antarctica provides the S boundary of the adjacent waters

whereas the N boundary is defined by the cold water lying S of

the Antarctic Convergence or Polar Front Zone.

0.0 The continental shelves surrounding Antarctica are relatively

narrow and deep. Although they have an average width of

30km, they comprise an area of approximately 4,000,000km2

and reach depths of 500 to 900m at the shelf edge. This is two

to four times greater than the world average shelf depth, and

may be caused by isostatic subsidence in response to the

weight of the ice cap. At the edge of the shelf, the gradient

steepens to define the continental slope. The water depth increases rapidly to approximately 3,000m over a distance of less

than 100km. Seaward of the continental slope, the continental

rise and deep ocean bottom lie at depths greater than 3,000 and

4,500m, respectively. These areas are underlain by thick sediments.

0.0 The Antarctic Convergence.—The Antarctic Convergence

occurs where the cold Antarctic water merges with warmer

tropical waters and downwells or dives underneath the warmer

surface of the South Atlantic Ocean, the Pacific Ocean, and the

Indian Ocean. This phenomenon occurs in a remarkably discernible climatic and oceanic boundary which extends to the

50th parallel. In many locations this line is easily and precisely

distinguished by a quick alteration in surface temperature;

hence, producing a physical boundary between the waters lying

adjacent to Antarctica and those of the sub-polar region or Polar Front Zone.

0.0 The Antarctic Convergence may form the extreme N limit of

drift ice, but such ice is rarely found so far to the N. The waters

to the S of the Antarctic Convergence are ice laden and abound

with sub-polar aquatic life, forming a feeding ground for pelagic birds and the world’s largest population of seals and

whales.

0.0 The Antarctic Divergence.—In the zone of Antarctic upper

water, between the continent and the Antarctic Convergence,

there is an area of divergence of surface waters and consequent

upwelling, which coincides with the boundary between the E

and W wind belts. The position of this Antarctic Divergence

and the occurrence and strength of divergent motion are both

variable and depend on the prevailing meteorological conditions. Influenced by the wind and the rotation of the earth, the

ocean surface water on each side of the Divergence moves in a

direction to the left of the wind direction. The Divergence lies

N of the drift ice and between 5° and 10° of latitude S of the

Antarctic Convergence.

0.0 Tides—Currents.—The Antarctic Circumpolar Current,

known as the West Wind Drift, is the world’s greatest current.

Strong W winds between about 40°S and 60°S (Roaring Forties) drive this current in an E direction at approximately 0.5

meter per second. This current completely encircles Antarctica

and is so deep that it can reach the ocean bottom. Closer to

Antarctica, E or SE winds prevail that cause a W current which

is known as the East Wind Drift. The flow of this current is

complicated by the irregular coastline and gyres (eddies) can

form in bays such as the the Weddell Sea, the Ross Sea, and

Bellingshausen Sea.

0.0 Relatively warm, saline, and nutrientrich water, which has

flowed at depth to high latitudes from lower latitudes, upwells

to the surface in a zone. This zone of general upwelling, known

as the Antarctic Divergence, separates the Circumpolar Current

from the East Wind Drift. This divergence, located 150 to 200

miles from the coast, is not entirely continuous, but disappears

to the E of Drake Passage.

0.0 More than half of the bottom waters of the world’s oceans

are formed around Antarctica. Cold winter temperatures and

ice formation produce dense seawater which sinks to the ocean

bottom, where it spreads to the N. The continual production of

this Antarctic Bottom Water plays an important role in renewing the bottom waters of the oceans; without this renewal, the

respiration of animals in the deep ocean would deplete the oxygen content of the bottom waters. In the Weddell Sea, which is

believed to be the major source, bottom water formation appears to occur year-round, particularly on the S and W continental shelf. Estimates of bottom water formation in the

Weddell Sea vary from 2 to 5 million cubic meters per second.

0.0 Tides are long-period forced waves whose speed is determined by the balance between the attraction of the sun and

moon and the frictional effects of the ocean bottom. Tidal

movement around Antarctica is unique in the world’s ocean basins in that there are no significant land masses to impede the

E/W (counterclockwise) sweep of the tides around the continent. The tidal movement is therefore principally a progressive

wave, and the tide is predominantly diurnal. Diurnal tides are

characterized by one high water and one low water each tidal

day (a lunar day of 24 hours and 50 minutes).

0.0 Wind-generated waves are greatest around 50°S to 60°S because of predominant W winds and the long fetch. The tip of
48 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

the Antarctic Peninsula extends into this region and rough seas

can be encountered along its ice-free coastline. Higher latitudes and ice cover account for smoother seas along the rest of

the Antarctic coast.

0.0 Surface Temperature.—The Antarctic Convergence is a

boundary surface which separates the heavier, colder Antarctic

water to the S from the lighter but more saline water to the N.

The mean position of this circumpolar boundary is fairly constant, lying at about 50°S in the Atlantic sector and between

50°S and 60°S in the Pacific sector. Its position is marked by

steep horizontal temperature and salinity gradients at the surface. Across the convergence, the temperature ranges in the

summer from 3.9° to 6.7°C and in the winter from 1.1° to

2.8°C. Surface waters immediately S of the convergence have

an average temperature of about 1.1° to 2.2°C in the winter and

2.8° to 5°C in the summer, while further S near the continent

temperatures vary only from about -1.7° to -0.5°C.

0.0 Salinity in the region to the N of the Antarctic Convergence

changes only little throughout the year. However, to the S of

the convergence, the melting of ice during spring and summer

results in a highly variable distribution of surface salinity. Partially-melted fields of drift ice produce extensive local areas of

relatively low salinity.

0.0 Tsunamis.—Earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, and submarine landslides frequently produce an unusual wave called a

seismic sea wave or a tsunami. Tsunamis have long wave

TYPES OF TIDES
The Antarctic 49

Pub. 200

lengths and travel across the open ocean at high speeds. As

they approach the shore, the wave length decreases and the

wave height increases, so that they can be a formidable agent

of destruction. In the open ocean, the wave height is only 0.3 to

0.6m and may pass unnoticed. However, near the shore, the

wave may build rapidly to heights of more than 15m.

0.0 Approximately 6 tsunamis occur in the Pacific Basin per

year and only one of these is likely to cause local damage.

There is little chance that a tsunami will form that is large

enough to affect the entire Pacific Basin, including the Antarctic. Such a tsunami may occur only once every 7 to 10 years,

but even then stations in the Antarctic would probably not experience any damage.

0.0 Marine Biota.—The food web of the Antarctic is short, allowing unusually large populations of top carnivores to develop. The key element is krill which are the dominant

zooplankton. Krill serve as an important link between the primary production and the marine mammals and birds. Krill,

which grow to several centimeters in length, are large marine

herbivores (shrimp-like crustaceans) and are found in swarms,

several to hundreds of meters wide. They serve as the prime

food source for seals, squid, penguins, whales, and several other animals. 

0.0 Squid are the predominant cephalopod in the adjacent seas to

GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION
50 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

the continent. They live in open waters and may be concentrated near the Antarctic Convergence.

0.0 Fish stocks include Antarctic cod, icefish, whiting, toothfish,

and silverfish. However, these stocks are believed to be less

abundant and fewer in number of species relative to other

oceans.

0.0 Crabeater seals are the most abundant of the continent and

leopard seals are the largest of such species. Weddell seals are

the most well known because of their proximity to the existing

land bases. Ross seals are the rarest of the Antarctic breeds.

0.0 Southern fur seals and elephant seals are found N and S of

the Antarctic Convergence. To the S of the convergence, these

seals only inhabit the islands N of and along the Antarctic Peninsula.

0.0 Several species of penguins inhabit the continent, including

adelie, which are the most abundant; emperor; chinstrap; macaroni, which breed mostly near the subantarctic islands; and

gentoo.

0.0 Several spieces of whale migrate to the adjacent seas during

the austral summer and have a circumpolar distribution. Baleen

whales, which feed intensively on krill and other zooplankton,

include fin, blue, sei, humpback, and minke. Southern right

whales are occasionally found off the continent, but generally

inhabit more temperate waters. Sperm whales and killer whales

(related to dolphins) are found in the adjoining waters throughout the entire year.

0.0 Bioluminescence.—Bioluminescence is the emission of

light by biological organisms. In the ocean environment, organisms may be stimulated to glow around the hulls and in the

wake of vessels, submerged vessels, small boats, and divers.

This phenomenon is generally infrequent in the Antarctic region, but luminescence can occur in all waters at any time.

Some strong luminescence activity has been reported in ice as

it is broken by icebreakers. It has also been reported along the

Antarctic Convergence, in the Scotia Sea, and around the South

Sandwich Islands, South Georgia Island, the South Orkney Islands, and the South Shetland Islands.

0.0 Krill have been reported to give off a luminescence in the

form of a greenish light. When vessels pass through extensive

areas (swarms) of krill, flashes from the individual crustaceans

have been observed within 100m of the hull against the background color of the water.

Optical Phenomena

0.0 Optical phenomena are common in the region to the S of

50°S and their frequency reaches a maximum in Antarctica.

These phenomena, whose appearance range from intricate geometric patterns to colorful electrical displays, are associated

with the refraction, reflection, or diffraction of light, and electromagnetic activity.

0.0 There is almost no dust or solid particles in the Antarctic air

and the prevailing winds blowing off the continent have small

moisture content. Consequently, the visibility is usually very

good and often exceptional, a fact which, if not appreciated,

may lead the observer into serious error when judging distances. An object which may be thought to be but 5 miles distant

could well be 30 miles away, and mountains have been sighted

at 300 miles.

0.0 Mirages—Abnormal Refraction.—An unusual lapse rate

of temperature (and therefore density as well) with height immediately above the sea (or land) surface produces a distortion

in the appearance of objects near the horizon; such a phenomenon is known as mirage.

0.0 When the surface is relatively cold (and the wind very light)

so that the density of the air decreases rapidly for a short distance above the surface, light rays from objects near the horizon are bent down, the same way in fact as are usually the rays

of the sun when entering the earth’s atmosphere at a low altitude. These objects then appear to have been lifted above their

true positions and hence, seem much closer to an observer. Objects below the horizon may actually become visible and this

effect is known as looming. If the images are also stretched

vertically, this refraction phenomenon is known as towering.

0.0 A further occasional effect produced when the air is appreciably warmer than the sea, is a superior mirage in which an inverted image is seen over the real object. Sometimes an erect

image is seen immediately above and touching the inverted

one. The object and its images in this instance are usually well

defined in contrast with the shimmering object and image of

the inferior mirage. Superior mirage is most often experienced

in high latitudes and wherever the sea surface temperature is

abnormally low. The impression of a greatly expanded ice field

can be created, particularly when great numbers of otherwise

invisible bergs are lifted into view as the stretched upper image

of a superior mirage.

0.0 An inferior mirage, the effect of which is to decrease the distance at which objects are visible in a horizontal direction, is

due to a rapid increase of density with height close to the surface. This may occur when air of comparatively low temperature blows over a warmer sea, or over a tarred road or desert

when a hot sun is beating down on it. In such cases, the light

rays are bent up and away from the surface. This occurs because light rays travel faster through the warm, less dense air at

the surface than through the more dense air above. Coastlines,

vessels, and islands may appear at times to be floating in the air

above a shimmering horizon. Sometimes the hulls of vessels

are either invisible or appear with an inverted image underneath. Inferior mirage is comparatively uncommon at sea and

is more likely to be observed near a coast. This effect may

cause an observer to overestimate the distance to the shore or

nearby objects.

0.0 A case known as stooping causes the visual image of a distant object to be foreshortened in the vertical and is the opposite of towering. This flattening may be so slight that it is not

noticeable, yet it will seriously affect the determination of distances.

0.0 Generally, mirage effects are mostly observed when the sun

is low in altitude.

0.0 On clear days shortly after sunset or before sunrise, green

light is sometimes refracted from the sun’s spectrum. When refractive conditions are suitable, red, orange, and yellow waves

of sunlight are not refracted sufficiently to reach the eye, but

green waves are. The visual result is a green flash in the surrounding sky. In well-developed cases, if the atmosphere is

both abnormally refractive and clear, a fully developed blue

coloration or blue flash can be seen.

0.0 Fata Morguna is a complex mirage that is characterized by

multiple distortions of images, generally in the vertical, so that

such objects as houses are distorted and magnified into fantas-
The Antarctic 51

Pub. 200

tic, tall castles. An unusual density stratification is required to

produce this mirage, namely the joint occurrence, in vertically

adjacent layers, of density gradients that would give an inferior

mirage and a superior mirage.

0.0 Parhelia, mock suns, and Parselenae, mock moons, are quite

common. These images appear as refraction of the sun or

moon, respectively, and take forms such as symmetrically arranged rings or arcs, usually of many colors. Prismatic sunrise

and sunset both appear as a high arch, with the colors of the

spectrum extending from the top of the arch to the horizon, in

the sky opposite the sun.

0.0 Solar Haloes and Lunar Haloes are produced by refraction

and reflection through and from ice crystals. They appear as

rings, mock images, contra images, and other shapes.

0.0 Solar and Lunar Coronas consist of a series of rainbow-colored rings around the sun or moon. They resemble halos, but

have a reverse sequence of the spectrum colors, red being the

color of the outer ring. This reversal sequence is due to the diffraction. They are observed through high cloudiness and their

radius varies inversely with that of the cloud particles.

0.0 The multicolored rainbow and whitish fogbow are due to refraction through water droplets, the colors varying with the size

of the drops. The smaller the drops the lighter the colors and

the nearer the violet end of the spectrum. Hence, the white

rainbows sometimes seen over the Ross Ice Shelf.

0.0 Diffractional phenomena are often similar to those caused by

refraction except for a reversal in the spectrum colors, red being away from the source of light. Several widely observed

phenomena in the Antarctic are due to diffraction. These include the broken bow or glory, which consists of colored rings

around shadows projected against fog banks or clouds.

0.0 Iridescent clouds are brighter than other forms of phenomena

and usually appear as a deep, blue, central tract with banded

margins of vivid purple, orange, green, and other colors.

0.0 Earth shadows, or aerial shadows, are believed to be produced by mountain peaks and take the form of dark blue bands

projected into the sky as straight or curved shadows.

0.0 Other reflection phenomena observed in the Antarctic include iceblink, landblink, water sky, and land sky. Iceblink is a

white or yellowish-white glare cast on the underside of clouds

by considerable amounts of sea ice while landblink is its land

ice counterpart. Water sky and land sky are observed as dark

reflections of open water or land on the underside of an overcast. The pattern formed is known as a sky map. The sharply

contrasting water sky and iceblink may sometimes be observed

side by side from a great distance, strikingly outlining adjacent

surface water and ice.

0.0 Whiteout is a condition in which daylight is diffused by multiple reflection between a snow surface and an overcast sky.

Contrasts vanish and the observer is unable to distinguish the

horizon or any snow surface feature. In addition, depth perception is greatly reduced. As falling snow, drift, fog, and mist are

not involved, a dark object can be seen at any distance. This

condition is a special hazard to low-flying aircraft. 

0.0 Auroral Forms.—Aurorae are among the most beautiful of

all natural phenomena. Their cause, which has attracted study

since the 17th century, is still not fully understood by scientists.

0.0 The generally accepted thesis at the present time is that

streams of electrically charged particles, possibly electrons and

protons, are shot from the flaming surface of the sun with a velocity of a little less than that of light. These particles are believed to be pulled toward the N and S magnetic poles of the

earth, striking the alternated outer atmosphere which may extend up to 800 miles above the earth’s surface. There, the

streams collide with atoms and molecules of the atmosphere,

stripping off outer electrons and causing light-producing states.

There are indications that the greatest auroral activity is associated with sunspots and magnetic disturbances, but this has not

been proven. Aurorae are not visible when the sky is overcast,

during daylight, or when brilliant moonlight obscures the effects.

0.0 The light of the aurora is emitted by the atmospheric gases

when they are bombarded by a stream of electrically charged

particles originating in the sun. As this stream of particles approaches the earth, it is directed towards the two magnetic

poles by the earth’s magnetic field and so it normally enters the

upper atmosphere in high latitudes in each hemisphere. Therefore, the aurora occurs most frequently in two zones girdling

the earth about 20° to 25° from the N and S magnetic poles.

The aurora of the N hemisphere is called Aurora Borealis and

that of the S hemisphere Aurora Australis.

0.0 The emission of the light that is seen as aurora, takes place at

heights above 60 miles. Consequently, the aurora may be seen

at distances of up to 600 miles from the place where it is overhead.

0.0 Auroral rays are always aligned along the direction of the

lines of force of the earth’s magnetic field so that when they

cover a large part of the overhead sky, they appear to radiate

from a point to form a crown or corona. The point from which

they radiate lies in the direction in which the S pole of a freely

suspended magnetic needle (a dip needle) points. The luminance of the normal aurora is below the threshold of color perception of the eye, so the forms appear gray-white in color.

However, a brilliant display may be strongly colored, greens

and reds being predominant. When the aurora is brilliant, with

colors, and the rays have rapid movement, the phenomenon

produces a very magnificent display, beyond description.

0.0 Much of the S auroral zone lies within the continent of Antarctica. This zone extends N into the adjacent oceans, passing

near Macquarie Island, and reaching its lowest latitude, 53°S,

at approximately 140°E. Hence, the Aurora Australis is seen

more frequently over the SE parts of the Indian Ocean and in

Australian waters than at the same latitudes in the South Atlantic Ocean. It is believed to be centered over Wilkes Land and is

usually associated with the moonless Antarctic night.

0.0 While the overhead aurora is mainly confined to the two auroral zones, where it may be seen at some time on every clear

and dark night, there are times when it moves towards the

Equator from each zone. On rare occasions, it has even been

visible in the tropics. Departures of aurora far from its usual

geographical position occur at times of great solar activity,

when large sunspots appear on the sun’s disk. The aurora that

is seen widely over the earth usually follows about a day after a

great flare or eruption has occurred in the central part of the

sun’s disk and is known as the Great Aurora. It is at this time

that observers in lower latitudes may see the aurora, not as the

familiar unspectacular glow on the horizon, but in the many

striking forms that it may assume when it is situated nearly

overhead.
52 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 Solar Activity.—Being closely associated with solar activity, the intensity and frequency of auroral displays are greatest

at the time of the maximum of the 11-year sunspot cycle and

least at the time of sunspot minimum. Especially at the time of

sunspot minimum, the aurora shows a tendency to recur at intervals of 27 days, which is the period of rotation of the sun as

observed from the earth. This suggests that a particular local

area of the sun is the source of a continuous stream of particles,

which is sprayed out, rather like water from the rotating nozzle

of a hose. This stream sweeps across the earth at intervals of 27

days. Marked disturbances in the earth’s magnetic field, which

are called magnetic storms when they are of exceptional severity, are associated with the aurora.

0.0 Saint Elmo’s fire is less frequent than the aurora, but may occur anywhere. It is more likely in summer than in winter and is

best observed at night or under stormy conditions because of

its faintness. Saint Elmo’s fire occurs when static electricity

collects in sufficiently large charges around the tips of pointed

objects. These charges ionize the air in the vicinity and leak off

in faintly luminescent discharges. Eerie flickers of blue light

are observed on the masts of vessels and on airplane wings, often in the vicinity of storms. Sometimes, these discharges are

described as weird greenish glows or as thousands of tiny airlike electrical sparks flickering along the sharp edges of the

surfaces.

Pollution

Ballast Water Management

0.0 Guidelines for ballast water exchange in the Antarctic Treaty

area (the area S of 60°S) provide an interim Ballast Water Regional Management Plan for Antarctica. This interim plan shall

be used until sufficient ballast water management technologies

have been developed, as set out in the International Convention

for the Control and Management of Ships’ Ballast Water and

Sediments. Practical guidelines for ballast water exchange in

this area are, as follows: 

1. The applications of these guidelines should apply to

those vessels covered by Article 3 of the IMO’s International

Convention for the Control and Management of Ships’ Ballast Water and Sediments, taking into account the exceptions

in Regulation A-3 of the Convention. The guidelines do not

replace the requirements of the Ballast Water Management

Convention, but provide an interim Ballast Water Regional

Managment Plan for Antarctica under Article 13(3).

2. If the safety of the ship is in any way jeopardized by a

ballast exchange, it should not take place. Additionally these

guidelines do not apply to the uptake or discharge of ballast

water and sediments for ensuring the safety of the ship in

emergency situations or saving life at sea in Antarctic waters.

3. A Ballast Water Management Plan should be prepared

for each vessel with ballast tanks entering Antarctic waters,

specifically taking into account the problems of ballast water

exchange in cold environments and Antarctic conditions.

4. Each vessel entering Antarctic waters should keep a

record of ballast water operations.

5. For vessels needing to discharge ballast water within

the Antarctic treaty area, ballast water should first be exchanges before arrival in antarctic waters (preferably N of either the Antarctic Polar Frontal Zone or 60°S, whichever is

the furthest N) and at least 200 miles from the nearest land in

water at least 200m deep. If this is not possible for operational reasons then such exchange should be undertaken in waters at least 50 miles from the nearest land in water at least

200m deep.

6. Only those tanks that will be discharged in Antarctic

waters would need to undergo ballast exchange following the

procedures in paragraph 5. Ballast water exchange of all

tanks is encouraged for all vessels that have the potential/capacity to load cargo in Antarctica, as changes in routes and

planned activities are frequent during Antarctic voyages due

to changing meteorological and sea conditions.

7. If a vessel has taken on water in Antarctic waters and

is intending to discharge ballast water in Arctic, sub-Arctic,

or Antarctic waters, it is recommended that ballast water

should be exchanged N of the Antarctic Polar Frontal Zone

and at least 200 miles from the nearest land in water at least

200m deep. If this is not possible for operational reasons then

such exchange should be undertaken in waters at least 50

miles from the nearest land in water at least 200m deep.

8. Release of sediments during the cleaning of ballast

tanks should not take place in Antarctic waters.

9. For vessels that have spent significant time in the Arctic, ballast water sediment should preferably be discharged

and tanks cleaned before entering Antarctic waters (S of

60°S). If this cannot be done, then sediment accumulation in

ballast tanks should be monitored and sediment should be

disposed of in accordance with the ship’s Ballast Water Management Plan. If sediments are disposed of at sea, they

should be disposed of in waters at least 200 miles from the

shoreline in waters at least 200m deep.

MARPOL Special Area

0.0 The Antarctic Area, consisting of the sea area around Antarctica S of latitude 60°00'S, has been designated as a MARPOL Special Area. Any discharge into the sea of oil or oily

mixtures from any ship is prohibited. 

Regulations

Legal Information and Regulations

0.0 Antarctic Treaty.—Below is a summary of the Antarctic

Treaty which was signed by 12 nations at Washington D.C. on

December 1, 1959 and ratified in 1961.

0.0 In the treaty, the seven territorial claimant nations agreed for

a period of 30 years to set aside their claims. However, the treaty is non-expiring and signatory nations must adhere to the

agreements and conventions unless they give a 12-month advance notice that they intend to withdraw.

0.0 Argentina, Australia, Chile, France, New Zealand, Norway,

and the United Kingdom claim land and maritime sectors;

some of the claims are overlapping. Argentina, Australia, and

Chile claim Exclusive Economic Zone rights or similar extending 200 miles seaward from their continental claims, but these

claims are not recognized. The United States and many other

states do not recognize these territorial claims and have made

no claims themselves, although Russia and the United States

reserve the right to do so. No claims have been made in the sector from 90°W to 150°W. Several states with territorial claims

in Antarctica have expressed their intention to submit data to
The Antarctic 53

Pub. 200

the United Nations Commission on the Limits of the Continental Shelf to extend their continental shelf claims to adjoining

undersea ridges. 

0.0 Article I states that Antarctica shall only be used for peaceful

purposes and no military action or testing of weapons can be

carried out.

0.0 Article II gives scientists the freedom of investigation.

0.0 Article III states that all scientific information, observations,

and results shall be accessible.

0.0 Article IV states that the treaty shall not renunciate any previously made territorial claims. It also says that no new claims

or enlargement of existing claims are allowed.

0.0 Article V prohibits nuclear explosions, nuclear waste, and

radio active waste.

0.0 Article VI states that the treaty applies to the area located to

the S of 60°S. It also says that the treaty should not affect the

rights of any nations under international law regarding the high

seas within this area.

0.0 Articles VII and VIII give any of the contracting nations the

right to observe, inspect, and examine any other nation’s work

in order to ensure compliance with the treaty. In addition, nations shall give advance notice of their expeditions and voyages

to the Antarctic.

0.0 Article IX states that regular meetings shall be held and nations may make recommendations concerning the Antarctic.

However, these recommendations must be unanimously

agreed.

0.0 Article X prohibits any activity that is not allowed by the

treaty.

0.0 Article XI states that any disputes between the signatory nations will be peacefully resolved.

0.0 Article XII states that the treaty will be in effect for a minimum of thirty years, but can be amended or modified.

0.0 Articles XIII and XIV state that the treaty shall be subject to

ratification, shall be deposited in the United States archives,

and shall be written in English, French, Russian, and Spanish.

0.0 The following two items that are included in the treaty are of

particular operational importance to mariners:

1. Article VII.3 gives any of the contracting nations the

right to inspect any other nation’s work in order to ensure

compliance with the treaty. This includes the inspection of

all ships discharging, or loading, cargoes or personnel.

2. Article VII.5 requires each contracting party to inform the other contracting parties of expeditions to Antarctica by its ships or “organized in or proceeding from its

territory.”

0.0Planned U.S. government expeditions are reported

through the Department of State by the National Science

Foundation, which funds and manages the United States

Antarctic Research Program.

0.0 Nongovernmental U.S. vessels or nongovernmental expeditions, organized in or proceeding from the U.S.A., should report their plans directly to the Office of Ocean Affairs, Room

5801, Department of State, Washington, D.C. 20520.

0.0 Subsequent agreements since 1959 include the following:

1. The Agreed Measures for the Conservation of Antarctic Fauna and Flora were recommended at the Third Antarctic Treaty Consultative Meeting held at Brussels in 1964 and

were subsequently ratified by the treaty nations.

In the analyses of comparison between Antarctic fauna

and flora with other parts of the world, the relationship to

their environment has sustained little hindrance by man, except in the case of whales. In addition, it was established that

Antarctica offers outstanding research opportunities, due to

its present state of untempered ecology. In parallel, it was also established that the Antarctic fauna, seals and penguins in

particular, are peculiarly vulnerable and suscestible to extermination, willfully or by accidental introduction of disease.

The Antarctic Conservation Act of 1978 (Public Law 95-

541), enacted by the 95th Congress, as amended by the Antarctic Science, Tourism, and Conservation Act of 1996 (Public Law 104-227), is the United States basis for the

ratification of The Agreed Measures. 

Regulations pursuant to U.S. Public Law 95-541 and 104-

227 list Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA), into

which entry is restricted to permitted individuals; Antarctic

Specially Managed Areas (ASMA), into which entry may be

restricted; and Historic Sites and Monuments. These regulations alsod make it unlawful, unless authorized by permit, to

carry out the following: 

a. kill, handle, or import Antarctic animals or birds.

b. introduce species into Antarctica not already native

to the continent.

c. discharge pollutants.

2. The Convention on the Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources 1980 (CCAMLR). 

U.S. Public Law 98-623 (Title 3: Antarctic Marine Living

Resources Convention) provides the legislative authority

necessary to implement the convention. This law makes it

unlawful to harvest marine species in Antarctica and in violation of the convention. The law also directs the Secretary

of Commerce to promulgate regulations pursuant to the convention.

The area to which the new convention applies extends farther N than the area to which the Antarctic Treaty applies.

The treaty covers the area to the S of 60°S, whereas the convention extends N to the Antarctic Convergence, defined in

the convention as being as far N as 45°S. Antarctic marine

living resources are defined as all species of living organisms

found S of the Antarctic Convergence.

By designating all populations, not just harvested ones, as

resources, the convention recognizes the interdependence of

all components of an ecosystem. This broad concept of resources is a significant advance for conservation in international agreements concerning renewable marine resources.

3. Guidelines for visitors to the Antarctic were discussed

in 1979 at the 10th Antarctic Treaty consultative meeting.

Subsequently, the treaty nations adopted a recommendation

(X-8) which is primarily intended to inform tourists and nongovernment expeditions of suitable actions and behavior.

The recommendations included subjects such as disturbing

wildlife, retaining litter, use of sporting guns, introduction of

plants or animals, collecting eggs or fossils, taking care of

historic monuments, and entering restricted areas. Regulations for Antarctic Non-Governmental Expeditions can be

found in 45 CFR Part 673. In addition, the Treaty Parties

agree on Site Specific Guidelines for some commonly visited sites. 

4. In 1988, the signatory nations tried to pass a Mineral

Resources Agreement, commonly referred to as CRAMRA,
54 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

which banned mineral and oil exploration. However, this

agreement was never ratified.

Subsequently, in 1991 at Madrid, representatives of the

treaty nations signed a Protocol on Environmental Protection

to the Antarctic Treaty (Madrid Protocol 1991) that significantly modified environmental standards in Antarctica and

superseded CRAMRA.

The protocol applies to the area, as defined in the treaty, as

that located to the S of 60°S. It prohibits any activity relating

to mineral resources, other than scientific research; it requires an environmental impact assessment of any proposed

activity; and it obliges member nations to devise rules and

procedures relating to liability for damages. A Liability Annex relating to environmental emergencies was agreed upon

by the Treaty Parties in 2005 and will be implemented by

U.S. laws and regulations. 

The protocol has five annexes which describe the procedures for environmental impact assessment, the elaborate

measures for conservation of fauna and flora, the procedures

for waste disposal and management, and the rules concerning disposal of waste at sea and the prevention of marine pollution, and area protection and management. Nongovernmental expeditions are required to undertake an environmental impact assessment pursuant to 40 CFR Part 8 of

the Code of Federal Regulations. 

0.0 Law of the Sea.—In 1982, the Law of the Sea was established which conflicted with the rules and regulations of the

Antarctic Treaty.

0.0 In regard to the Law of the Sea and the Madrid Protocol, it

should be noted that Article VI of the Antarctic Treaty states

“nothing in the present Treaty shall prejudice or in any way affect the rights, or the exercise of the rights, of any State under

international law with regard to the high seas within that area.”

Hence, open access to the territorial waters of the high seas

around Antarctica has been allowed.

0.0 Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA).—Any area,

including any marine area, may be designated as an ASPA to

protect outstanding environmental, scientific, historical, aesthetic, or wilderness values; any combination of those values;

or ongoing or planned scientific research.

0.0 Permits authorizing entry into ASPAs may only be issues in

accordance with the management plan relating to that area or,

in the absence of a management plan, for a compelling scientific purpose which cannot be served elsewhere and which will

not jeopardize the natural ecological system in that Area.

0.0 Antarctic Specially Protected Areas are listed in the accompanying table titled Antarctic Specially Protected Areas

(ASPA). 

0.0 Additional ASPAs have been, and continue to be, established

by the Antarctic Treaty parties. For additional information and

applications concerning permits, contact the National Science

Foundation (NSF), Office of Polar Programs (OPP), 4201 Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia (22230).

0.0 Antarctic Specially Managed Areas (ASMA).—Any area,

including any marine area, where activites are being conducted

or may in the future be conducted, may be designated as an

Antarctic Specially Managed Areas (ASMA) to assist in the

planning and coordination of activities, avoid possible conflicts, improve cooperation between parties, or minimize environmental impacts. An AMSA may contain one or more

ASPAs, entry into which shall be prohibited except in accordance with a permit issued under Article 7. 

0.0 Historic Sites and Monuments (HSM).—Sites or monuments of recognized historic value may be listed as Historic

Sites and Monuments (HSM). Listed HSMs shall not be damaged, removed, or destroyed. 

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA) 

ASPA No. Location Chartlet

101 Taylor Rookery, MacRobertson Land (67°26'S., 60°50'E.) 1

102 Rookery Islands, Holme Bay, MacRobertson Land (67°37'S., 62°33'E.). 1

103 Ardery Island (66°22'S., 110°28'E) and Odbert Island (66°22'S, 110°33'E.), Budd Coast 7

104 Sabrina Island, Balleny Islands (66°54'S., 163°20'E.) 1

105 Beaufort Island, Ross Sea (76°58'S., 167°03'E.) 6

106 Cape Hallett, Victoria Land (72°18'S., 170°19'E.) 1

107 Emperor Island, Dion Islands, Marguerite Bay, Antarctic Peninsula (67°52'S., 68°43'W.) 5

108 Green Island, Berthelot Islands, Antarctic Peninsula (65°19'S., 64°10'W.) 4

109 Moe Island, South Orkney Islands (60°45'S., 45°41'W.) 2

110 Lynch Island, South Orkney Islands (60°40'S., 45°38'W.) 2

111 Southern Powell Island and adjacent islands, South Orkney Islands (60°45'S., 45°02'W.) 2

112 Coppermine Peninsula, Robert Island, South Shetland Islands (63°23'S., 59°24'W.) 3

113 Litchfield Island, Arthur Habour, Anvers Island, Palmer Archipelago (64°46'S., 64°06'W.) 4

114 Northern Coronation Island, South Orkney Islands (60°33'S., 45°36'W.) 2

115 Lagotellerie Island, Marguerite Bay, Antarctic Peninsula (67°53'S., 67°24'W.) 5

116 New College Valley, Caughley Beach, Cape Bird, Ross Island (77°14'S., 166°23'E.) 6
The Antarctic 55

Pub. 200

117 Avian Island, off Adelaide Island, Antarctic Peninsula (67°46'S., 68°54'W.) 5

118 Summit of Mount Melbourne, Victoria Land (incorporating Cryptogram Ridge) (74°21'S., 

164°42'E.) 1

119 Dufek Massif, Davis Valley Pond, and Forlidas Pond (82°27'S., 51°21'W.) 1

120 Pointe-Geoligie Archipelago, Terre Adelie (66°40'S., 140°02'W.) 1

121 Cape Royds, Ross Island (77°33'S., 166°08'E.) 6

122 Arrival Heights, Hut Point Peninsula, Ross Island (77°49'S., 166°39'E.) 6

123 Barwick Valley and Balham Valley, Victoria Land (77°18'S.,161°00'E.) 6

124 Cape Crozier, Ross Island (77°30'S., 169°25'E.) 6

125 Fildes Peninsula, King George Island, South Shetland Islands (62°12'S., 58°56'W.) 3

126 Byers Peninsula, Livingston Island, South Shetland Islands (62°38'S., 61°05'W.) 3

127 Haswell Island, Queen Mary Land (66°31'S., 93°00'E.) 1

128 West shore of Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetland Islands (62°12'S., 

58°27'W.) 3

129 Rothera Point, Adelaide Island (67°35'S., 68°08'W.) 5

130 Tramway Ridge, Mount Erebus, Ross Island (77°31'S., 167°07'E) 6

131 Canada Glacier, Lake Fryxell. Taylor Valley, Victoria Land (77°37'S.,163°03'E.) 6

132 Potter Peninsula,King George Island, South Shetland Islands (62°15'S., 58°41'W.) 3

133 Harmony Point, Nelson Island, South Shetland Islands (62°18'S., 59°14'W.) 3

134 Cierva Point and offshore islands, Danco Coast, Antarctic Peninsula (64°10'S., 60°57'W.) 4

135 Northeast Bailey Peninsula, Budd Coast, Wilkes Land (66°17'S., 110°32'E.) 7

136 Clark Peninsula, Budd Coast, Wilkes Land (66°15'S., 110°36'E.) 7

137 Northwest White Island, McMurdo Sound (78°10'S., 167°25'E.) 6

138 Linnaeus Terrace, Asgard Range, Victoria Land (77°35'S., 161°05'E.) 6

139 Biscoe Point, Anvers Island, Palmer Archipelago (64°49'S., 63°48'W.) 4

140 Parts of Deception Island, South Shetland Islands (62°55'S., 60°39'W.) 3

141 Yikidori Valley, Langhovde, Lutzow-Holmbukta (69°15'S., 39°45'E.) 1

142 Svarthamaren, Muhlig-Hofmannfjella, Dronning Maud Land (71°54'S., 5°10'E.) 1

143 Marine Plain, Mule Peninsula, Vestfold Hills, Princess Elizabeth Land (68°36'S., 78°07'E.) 1

144 Chile Bay (Discovery Bay), Greenwich Island, South Shetland Islands (62°29'S., 

59°41'W.)

3

145 Port Foster, Deception Island, South Shetland Islands (62°58'S., 60°38'W.) 3

146 South Bay, Doumer Island, Palmer Archipelago (64°52'S., 63°36'W.) 4

147 Ablation Valley, Ganymede Heights, Alexander Island (70°50'S., 68°30'W.) 1

148 Mount Flora, Hope Bay, Antarctic Peninsula (63°25'S., 57°01'W.) 1

149 Cape Shirreff, Livingston Island, South Shetland Islands (62°28'S., 60°47'W.) 3

150 Ardley Island, Maxwell Bay, King George Island (62°08'S., 59°08'W.) 3

151 Lions Rump, King George Island, South Shetland Islands (62°08'S., 58°08'W.) 3

152 Western Bransfield Strait off Low Island, South Shetland Islands (63°20'S. to 63°35'S. and 

61°45'W. to 62°30'W.) 4

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA) 

ASPA No. Location Chartlet
56 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

153 Eastern Dallman Bay, Brabant Island, Palmer Archipelago (64°00'S. to 64°20'S. and 

62°50'W. to the inter-tidal zone) 4

154 Botany Bay, Cape Geology, Victoria Land (77°00'S., 162°32'E.) 6

155 Cape Evans, Ross Island (77°38'S., 166°25'E.) 6

156 Lewis Bay, Mount Erebus, Ross Island (77°25'S., 167°28'E.) 6

157 Backdoor Bay, Cape Royds, Ross Island (77°33'S., 166°10'E.) 6

158 Hut Point, Ross Island (77°51'S., 166°38'E.) 6

159 Cape Adare, Borchgrevink Coast, Victoria Land (71°19'S., 170°09'E.) 1

160 Frazier Islands, Wilkes Land, East Antarctica (66°13'S., 110°11'E.) 7

161 Terra Nova Bay, Ross Sea (74°50'S., 164°30'E.) 1

162 Mawson’s Huts, Commonwealth Bay, George V Land, East Antarctica (67°30.5'S., 

142°39.7'E.) 1

163 Dakshin Gangotri Glacier, Dronning Maud Land (70°44.1'S. to 70°45.4'S. and 11°33.5'E. 

to 11°36.5'E.) —

164 Scullin Monolith (67°47'S., 66°42'E.) and Murray Monolith (67°47'S., 66°53'E.), 

MacRobertson Land, East Antarctica —

165 Edmonson Point, Wood Bay, Ross Sea (74°20'S., 165°08E.) 1

166 Port-Martin, Terre-Adelie (66°49'S., 141°23'E.) 1

167 Hawker Island, Vestfold Hills, Ingrid Christensen Coast, Princess Elizabeth Land, East 

Antarctica (68°35'S., 77°50'E.) 1

168 Mount Harding, Grove Mountains, East Antarctica (72°54'S., 75°02'E.) 1

169 Amanda Bay, Ingrid Christensen Coast, Princess Elizabeth Last, East Antarctica (69°15'S., 

76°50'E.) 1

170 Marion Nunataks, Charcot Island, Antarctic Peninsula (69°45'S., 75°15'W.) 1

171 Narebski Point, Barton Peninsula, King George Island (62°14'S., 58°46'W.) —

Antarctica Related Web Sites 

Organization Web address

U.S. Department of State http://www.state.gov

National Science Foundation http://www.nsf.gov

Environmental Protection Agency http://www.epa.gov

Antarctic Treaty Secretariat http://www.ats.aq

Antarctic Conservation Act http://www.nsf.gov/od/opp/antarct/aca/aca.jsp

Council of Managers of National Antarctic Programs http://www.comnap.aq

Scientific Committee on Antarctic Research http://www.scar.org

Commission for the Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources http://www.ccamlr.org

International Association of Antarctic Tour Operators http://www.iaato.org

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA) 

ASPA No. Location Chartlet
The Antarctic 57

Pub. 200

0.0 Further information on Antarctic Specially Protected Areas,

Antarctic Specially Managed Areas, and Historic Sites and

Monuments, including the management plans for these area,

can be found at the following web site: 

0.0 Further information regarding Antarctica can be found in

web sites listed in the table titled Antarctica Related Web

Sites. 

0.0 Operations Support.—Antarctic research is a remote expeditionary activity requiring a support system capable of providing virtually all necessities for living and working in

Antarctica. Such necessities include special cold weather

clothing, food and housing, transportation, utilities, communications, tools, equipment, research instruments and laboratories, and all supplies, particularly fuel, essential for life

support.

0.0 The National Science Foundation (NSF) funds and manages

the entire United States Antarctic Program, obtaining operations support, under contracts, from private sector firms and,

on a reimbursable basis, from the Department of Defense

(DOD) and the Department of Transportation (DOT).

0.0 Major logistic elements currently provided include the operation and maintenance of McMurdo Station and an advance

staging facility in Christchurch, New Zealand; aviation support

on the Antarctic continent; intercontinental air and sealift support between the U.S. and Antarctica; and communications

support. 

0.0 Note.—For information concerning operations and logistics

in the Antarctic; the Antarctic Treaty, including any modifications or amendments; U.S. laws and regulations pursuant to the

Antarctic Treaty; Antarctic Specially Protected Areas; Antarctic Specially Managed Area; Historic Sites and Monuments;

and research bases, questions and correspondence should be

directed to: 

0.0The National Science Foundation (NSF)

0.0Office of Polar Programs (OPP)

0.04201 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 755 

0.0Arlington, VA (22230)

The Antarctic Treaty Committee for Environmental Protection—http://www.ats.aq/e/ep_protected.htm

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA)—Chartlet 1

 The Antarctic Treaty System—Committee for 

Environmental Protection 

http://www.ats.aq/e/ep_protected.htm
 Pub. 200

The Antarctic Treaty Committee for Environmental Protection—http://www.ats.aq/e/ep_protected.htm

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA)—Chartlet 2
Pub. 200 The Antarctic Treaty Committee for Environmental Protection—http://www.ats.aq/e/ep_protecte

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA)—Chartlet 3
60 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0Telephone: 703-292-8030 

0.0Facsimile: 703-292-9081 

0.0 Pollution.—The International Convention for the Prevention

of Pollution from Ships, as modified by the Protocol of 1978

(MARPOL 73/78) is implemented into United States law by

The Act to Prevent Pollution from Ships (33 U.S.C. 1901). The

International Convention includes five annexes. Annexes I, II,

and V are mandatory and the remainder optional.

0.0 Annex I contains regulations concerning the prevention of

pollution by oil.

0.0 Annex II contains regulations concerning the control of pollution by noxious liquid substances carried in bulk.

0.0 Annex III contains regulations concerning the prevention of

pollution by harmful substances carried in packaged forms,

containers, or tanks.

0.0 Annex IV contains regulations concerning sewage from

ships.

0.0 Annex V contains regulations concerning the disposal of

The Antarctic Treaty Committee for Environmental Protection—http://www.ats.aq/e/ep_protected.htm

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA)—Chartlet 4
Pub. 200 The Antarctic Treaty Committee for Environmental Protection—http://www.ats.aq

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA)—Chartlet 5
62 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

garbage from ships and the management of ballast.

0.0 Special Areas and Particularly Sensitive Sea Areas are designated in the Annexes. In these areas more stringent restrictions

are applied to avoid the effects of harmful substances. A Particularly Sensitive Sea Area may lie within a Special Area.

0.0 The Antarctic Area, which is the sea area S of 60°S, has been

designated in the Annexes as a Special Area (1992).

0.0 For further information, see Annual Notice to Mariners No.

1, MARPOL 73/78, and The Act to Prevent Pollution from

Ships (33 U.S.C. 1901).

0.0 In accordance with Regulation 13G of Annex I of the MARPOL Convention, single-hull tankers should be phased out or

converted to a double-hull configuration according to a schedule based on their year of delivery. These requirements are designed to reduce the risk of oil spills from tankers involved in

low-energy collisions or groundings. 

0.0 The types of vessels affected by these regulations and their

phase-out schedule is, as follows: 

1. Category 1—Commonly known as Pre-MARPOL

Tankers, consists of the following types of vessels: 

a. Tankers of 20,000 dwt and over carrying crude oil,

fuel oil, heavy diesel oil, or lubricating oil as cargo.

b. Tankers of 30,000 dwt and over carrying other oils,

which do not comply with the requirements for protectively-located segregated ballast tanks.

The phase out schedule for Category 1 vessels is, as follows: 

a. Vessels delivered on or before 5 April 1982—not allowed to trade after 5 April 2005.

b. Vessels delivered after 5 April 1982—not allowed to

The Antarctic Treaty Committee for Environmental Protection—http://www.ats.aq/e/ep_protected.htm

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA)—Chartlet 6
The Antarctic 63

Pub. 200

trade after the anniversary date, in 2005, of their delivery

date.

2. Category 2—Commonly known as MARPOL Tankers, consists of the following types of vessels: 

a. Tankers of 20,000 dwt and over carrying crude oil,

fuel oil, heavy diesel oil, or lubricating oil as cargo, which

comply with the MARPOL requirements for protectivelylocated segregated ballast tanks.

b. Tankers of 30,000 dwt and over carrying other oils,

which comply with the MARPOL requirements for protectively-located segregated ballast tanks.

The phase out schedule for Category 2 vessels is, as follows: 

a. 5 April 2005 for vessels delivered on 5 April 1977 or

earlier. 

b. Anniversary date in 2005 for vessels delivered after

5 April 1977 but before 1 January 1978

c. Anniversary date in 2006 for vessels delivered in

1978 and 1979.

d. Anniversary date in 2007 for vessels delivered in

1980 and 1981.

e. Anniversary date in 2008 for vessels delivered in

1982.

f. Anniversary date in 2009 for vessels delivered in

1983.

g. Anniversary date in 2010 for vessels delivered in

1984 or later.

3. Category 3—Consists of tankers 5,000 dwt and over

but less than the tonnage specified for Category 1 and Category 2 vessels. 

The phase out schedule for Category 3 vessels is, as follows: 

a. 5 April 2005 for vessels delivered on 5 April 1977

or earlier. 

b. Anniversary date in 2005 for vessels delivered after

5 April 1977 but before 1 January 1978

c. Anniversary date in 2006 for vessels delivered in

1978 and 1979.

d. Anniversary date in 2007 for vessels delivered in

1980 and 1981.

e. Anniversary date in 2008 for vessels delivered in

1982.

f. Anniversary date in 2009 for vessels delivered in

1983.

g. Anniversary date in 2010 for vessels delivered in

1984 or later.

0.0 Single-hull tankers of 5,000 dwt and over are prohibited

from carrying heavy grade oil (HGO) after 5 April 2005. Single-hull tankers of 600 dwt and over but less than 5,000 dwt are

prohibited from carrying HGO after the anniversary of their

The Antarctic Treaty Committee for Environmental Protection—http://www.ats.aq/e/ep_protected.htm

Antarctic Specially Protected Areas (ASPA)—Chartlet 7
64 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

delivery date in 2008. 

0.0 Treaty Parties have endorsed Guidelines for Ships Operating

in Arctic and Antarctic Waters. 

Search and Rescue

0.0 Treaty Parties have recently agreed upon minimum requirements for search and rescue capabilities and insurance for nongovernmental expeditions to the treaty area. These requirements will be implemented by U.S. laws and regulations.

0.0 Masters of vessels operating within the Australian Search

and Rescue Region (SRR) are advised that an Australian Government protocol for ships assisting people in distress at sea is

now in place (2002).

0.0 This protocol sets out important principles that must be recognized to ensure a smooth post-rescue effort while minimizing the disruption to the intended voyage of the rescuing

vessel. It provides guidance to ships’ masters on the processes

to be followed in relation to landing people who have been rescued at sea. Copies of the protocol can be obtained from the

web site listed below.

Seas

Marginal Seas

0.0 (The following information was prepared by the U.S. Naval

Oceanographic Office.)

0.0 The marginal seas are divided geographically, as follows:

1. The Ross Sea Sector (160°E to 120°W).

2. The Amundsen-Bellingshausen Sea Sector (120° to

60°W).

3. The Weddell Sea Sector (70°W to 0°).

4. The Continental Coast Sector (0° to 160°E).

0.0 The Ross Sea Sector.—Drift ice concentration along the

Ross Ice Shelf to the E of Ross Island begins to diminish in late

October and reduces to open water (less than one-tenth ice concentration) by late November. An open-water flaw polynya,

centered at 75°S, 165°E, forms by late November. The ice-free

area off the shelf expands to the N and eventually meets the retreating outer edge of the ice during the second half of January.

Drift ice in the S portion of the Ross Sea drifts NW against

Victoria Land where it persists throughout the austral summer.

Thick ice floes are also advected into the central and easternmost portions of the Ross Sea by prevailing W winds and currents. Sea ice coverage becomes minimal in the middle of

February.

0.0 Reinforced vessels can normally reach the NE end of Ross

Island by the end of December, and all shipping by the third

week of January. The route becomes closed to nonreinforced

vessels in the first week of March and closed to all vessels in

the middle of March. The Ross Sea becomes covered with very

close or compact ice in April.

0.0 In McMurdo Sound, the maximum extent of fast ice in the

approaches to McMurdo Station, on the Hut Point Peninsula, is

normally 30 miles and occurs in the middle of October. However, fast ice continues to thicken until the first part of December when the average winter’s maximum thicknesses are 0.9 to

1.2m at the fast ice edge, 1.2 to 1.8m at several nautical miles

inside the edge, 1.8 to 2.1m off Hut Point, and 2.7 to 3m along

the Ross Ice Shelf. The thickest section of fast ice ever recorded in the sound was 6.4m thick.

0.0 A channel leading through the fast ice to Hut Point is kept

open by icebreakers from the middle of December to early January, depending upon the severity of the winter. Vessels will

normally need icebreaker assistance for a period following the

channel completion. The channel is usually open to all vessels

in late January although, it was open one year as early as 10

December.

0.0 Fast ice begins to deteriorate in late December and to dislodge in late January. By the first week of March, all fast ice is

usually gone except for a narrow strip attached to the shelf.

Soon thereafter, new ice rapidly forms and the sound is frozen

over by late March. 

0.0 Sea ice in the Ross Sea area reaches its maximum extent during late September. The heaviest ice is encountered between

67°30'S and 72°30'S. Multi-year floes, 2.4 to 3.6m thick, drift

into the N central area from the E. Sea ice in the W part of the

Ross Sea is principally first-year ice, 0.6 to 1.2m thick. The

movement of ice during the austral winter is in a N direction

away from the ice shelf, and as a consequence, relatively thin

ice, up to only 0.3m thick, prevails off the shelf front.

0.0 Numerous icebergs occur throughout the Ross Sea. The S

half of the sea is covered by the Ross Ice Shelf, the front of

which varies in height above sea level from 30 to 55m. Tabular

icebergs are periodically calved off the shelf front. Most of

these bergs are between 300 and 3,048m long with an estimated freeboard-to-draft ratio of 1:5. However, icebergs of 16 to

22 miles in length are occasionally formed. The largest berg

observed in the Ross Sea was 100 miles long. The icebergs

drift to the W off the Ross Ice Shelf and then to the N along

Victoria Land. Icebergs may enter McMurdo Sound, but normally they do not drift farther than 77°30'S.

0.0 The W flow of the East Wind Drift is strongly influenced by

the deep indentation of the Ross Sea. One branch of this current passes outside the entrance of the Ross Sea, while another

branch sets S along the sea’s E boundary. The S branch continues W along the Ross Ice Shelf at a rate of 1 to 3 knots and is

then deflected N along the coast of Victoria Land. This outflow

from the Ross Sea rejoins a branch of the East Wind Drift near

Cape Adare. The combined flow then passes between the Balleny Islands and the continent.

0.0 Satellite imagery was used to make observations of sea-ice

drift motion near the Ross Sea along the Getz Ice Shelf, between Cape Colbeck and Mount Siple. The sea ice studied displayed a highly variable motion when observed over 2-day

time intervals with typical speeds ranging from nearly zero to

0.6 knot. In agreement with the circulation pattern, a general W

flow was observed near shore.

0.0 In the S part of the Ross Sea, the ocean tide beneath the Ross

Ice Shelf is dominated by diurnal, harmonic constituents, with

small semidiurnal tidal constituents. Along the N margin of the

ice shelf, near 78°S, the tropic (diurnal spring) tide ranges from

0.9m to more than 2m near the Siple Coast. The amplitudes of

 Protocol for Commercial Shipping Rescuing Persons at 

Sea in or Adjacent to the Australian Search and Rescue 

Region

http://www.dotrs.gov.au/transinfra/

sea_rescue_protocol.htm
The Antarctic 65

Pub. 200

the diurnal tide constituents are larger in the Ross Sea than in

the adjacent S part of the Pacific Ocean, indicating a diurnal

resonance related to the shape of the embayment and the depth

of the sea.

0.0 The main inflow into McMurdo Sound is the Cape Bird Current which reaches Cape Bird as a W flow and turns into the

sound with velocities of up to 3 knots. Direct current measurements (1967) made at a depth of 55m, between Cape Bird and

Beaufort Island, indicate a W current with an average speed of

1 knot and a maximum speed of 2.7 knots. The Cape Bird Current continues along the W coast of Ross Island until it approaches Cape Royds where it joins a strong NW flow from

under the Ross Ice Shelf, near Cape Armitage. However, direct

current measurements made more than 1 mile from the coast

near Cape Armitage indicate a flow towards the Ross Ice Shelf.

The flow along the W side of McMurdo Sound, near the Dailey

Islands, is towards the NW at an average speed of 0.2 knot.

This flow is part of the outflow from the Cape Bird Current

with some addition from the N flow near Cape Armitage. The

surface flow in the center of McMurdo Sound is directed towards the Ross Ice Shelf. It is uniformly slow, usually having a

mean speed of less than 0.1 knot.

0.0 Since a large portion of the Ross Sea is generally covered

with ice, the sea surface temperatures in summer are almost at

MARGINAL SEAS
66 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

the freezing point, ranging from -1.7° to 0.3°C.

0.0 Salinity in the Ross Sea area is strongly influenced by the

amount of melting and freezing that occurs at the sea surface

and beneath the ice shelves. The Ross Sea Shelf water, which

forms primarily from freezing at the sea surface in the W part,

has the highest salinity and density of any sea water in the Antarctic region. The horizontal surface salinity distribution is also

influenced by the clockwise circulation pattern in the Ross Sea,

the highest salinity values being concentrated in the W part.

0.0 The density field is determined primarily by the salinity distribution, hence, only minor horizontal variations in density are

present in the Ross Sea.

0.0 The Amundsen-Bellingshausen Sea Sector.—Ice conditions in the Amundsen Sea and the Bellingshausen Sea are

highly variable from year to year and the N movement of the

outer edge of the drift ice fluctuates. This outer edge normally

reaches its lowest latitude in the Bellingshausen Sea and the

Amundsen Sea during late August and the middle of September, respectively.

0.0 Usually by early November, polynyas develop to the SW of

Alexander Island, to the W of Smyley Island, to the W of the

King Peninsula, and to the N of the Bear Peninsula. These

polynyas expand N and can join with the open water in mild

summers. Sea ice coverage in both of the seas is minimal during early March.

ROSS SEA LOCATOR CHART
The Antarctic 67

Pub. 200

0.0 Palmer Station (64°46'S., 64°03'W.) is normally open to reinforced vessels from the middle of December to the middle of

May and to all vessels from the middle of January to the middle of April. The opening and closing of the approach to Palmer Station varied greatly during the navigation seasons from

1974/75 through 1982/83. The approach opened to reinforced

vessels as early as late October and as late as early February. It

closed to reinforced vessels as early as the middle of April and

as late as the end of June.

0.0 Rothera Station (67°34'S., 68°08'W.) is normally open to

reinforced vessels from early February through the middle of

April.

GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION

Typical Mid-Summer 7/10 Ice Concentration Limit

ROSS SEA GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION
68 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 The current pattern within the Amundsen Sea and the Bellingshausen Sea is typical of the general adjacent seas circulation. The W current follows the coast with an outward cyclonic

flow which eventually merges with the E current near the Antarctic Convergence.

0.0 The surface temperatures in the Amundsen Sea and the Bellingshausen Sea range from -1.7°C, near the coast, to greater

than 1.7°C, near the Antarctic Convergence (62° to 64°S). The

surface shows an expected warming trend to the N of the Antarctic Convergence. The horizontal variations of surface salinities are small.

0.0 The Weddell Sea Sector.—The Weddell Sea contains

throughout the year a large portion of the Antarctic ice cover.

During the austral winter, the ice cover for all of Antarctica

GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION

Speed in knots

McMURDO SOUND GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION
The Antarctic 69

Pub. 200

reaches its northernmost extent to the N of the Weddell Sea.

During the austral summer, most of the W part of this sea is

covered by heavy drift ice. Summer sea ice is normally discharged from the perennial ice regime in an ice tongue extending out to the NE.

0.0 The maximum ice cover is attained during the first week of

September in the Weddell Sea region to the W of 40°W. It is attained during the last week of September in that part to the E of

40°W.

0.0 During the winter period of the mid-1970s, an extensive

open-water polynya formed generally from 5°W to 25°W and

from 63°S to 70°S. Scientists have hypothesized that this recurring polynya was the result of wind divergence and a large

vertical ocean heat flux.

0.0 Flaw leads usually appear during the first half of November.

During most summers, the Weddell Sea is clear of ice to the

coast, between the Greenwich meridian and 20°W. Sea ice becomes minimal in the last week of February.

0.0 Halley Station (75°31'S., 26°56'W.) is usually open to reinforced vessels from early January to the middle of March. During most years, this year-round station can be reached by all

vessels from the middle of January through late February. Further S, Berkner Island can normally be reached by reinforced

vessels from the middle of January to the middle of February.

Only during relatively light ice years can all vessels reach

Berkner Island and then only for a period lasting from late January through the middle of February.

0.0 Level and rafted ice up to 4.9 and 11.9m thick, respectively,

have been encountered in the E part of the Weddell Sea during

the navigation season. A special hazard exists in the lowermost

W part of the Weddell Sea which is sometimes navigable. Ice

floes, consisting of many decades old ice and fast ice, may be

layered with snow, frozen slush, and solid ice up to a thickness

of 24.4m.

0.0 Sea ice and glacier ice (icebergs) drift in a clockwise pattern

about the Weddell gyre (eddy). Sea ice presents the greatest obAMUNDSEN—BELLINGSHAUSEN LOCATOR CHART
70 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

struction to navigation in the W part the sea where it compresses against the Antarctic Peninsula and is forced upward into

pressure ridges. Glacier ice is mostly concentrated within a

zone, 100 miles wide, extending along the continental coast,

the W part of the sea, and the latitude of 60°S.

0.0 The Weddell Sea acts as a collection area for numerous icebergs, some having mammoth dimensions. Giant tabular icebergs are formed when floating glacier tongues, which project

tens of nautical miles into the sea, are broken off, possibly

from the impact of another giant iceberg. An iceberg, 60 miles

long and 40 miles wide, calved from the Amery Ice Shelf in

late 1963 and is believed to have impacted the Trolltunga Ice

Shelf. This shelf then broke off in September 1967 to form a

berg, 57 miles long and 29 miles wide, which in turn impacted

the Larsen Ice Front in March 1968 and supposedly caused the

detachment of another berg, 50 miles long and 20 miles wide.

0.0 The oceanography of the Weddell Sea is strongly influenced

by the presence of the Antarctic Peninsula and the ice shelves.

The mountain barrier, 1,200 to 1,981m high, standing on the

peninsula has a strong effect on the climate and on the wind

driven water and ice circulation in the W part of the Weddell

Sea. Barrier winds blowing along the W side of the sea, winds

blowing from the E along the E side of the sea, and winds reacting to the presence of the Weddell Sea low pressure atmospheric system, cause a cyclonic circulation of the surface

waters. The result is a well-defined cyclonic gyre (eddy) within

the Weddell Sea. Surface currents near the Scotia Ridge have

been determined to set E at a rate of 0.2 knot. A weak flow,

GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION

Typical Mid-Summer 7/10 Ice Concentration Limit

AMUNDSEN—BELLINGSHAUSEN SEA GENERAL SURFACE 

CIRCULATION
The Antarctic 71

Pub. 200

with a rate of less than 0.1 knot, has been determined to set W

in the central portion of the gyre.

0.0 At the E entrance to the Weddell Sea, a narrow current, with

a rate of generally less than 1 knot, flows approximately parallel to Coats Land. The core of this current has a characteristic

width of about 60 miles and is strongest near the edge of the

continental shelf. The current sweeps into the S boundary of

the sea at 77°S before turning N and flowing parallel to the

coast of the Antarctic Peninsula. This current has a broad outflow from the NW corner of the sea that sets in a NE direction

and passes close S of the Scotia Ridge where it merges with

water from the Bellingshausen Sea.

0.0 Tides in the Weddell Sea are mainly diurnal, but mixed tides

can be found at the N extremity of the Antarctic Peninsula.

0.0 The sea surface temperatures near the Ronne and Filchner

Ice Shelves and along the E part of the Antarctic Peninsula are

very near the freezing point in summer due to the coverage of

ice. The temperatures increase toward the E as the E borders of

the Weddell Sea tend to be free of ice.

0.0 Higher surface salinity values in the Weddell Sea are found

near the ice shelves and along the E part of the Antarctic Peninsula. Only minor horizontal variations in density are present in

the Weddell Sea.

0.0 The Continental Coast Sector.—The sea ice reaches its

northernmost extent in late September in this area. Aided by

very strong winds that blow seaward off the continental ice plateau, areas of open water develop in late October off the coast

of Wilkes Land (80°E to 150°E). Polynyas also form to leeWEDDELL SEA LOCATOR CHART
72 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

ward (W side) of glacier tongues, giant grounded icebergs, and

fields consisting of large grounded bergs or consolidated sea

ice. A large polynya usually forms early in Prydz Bay. The N

ice edge rapidly retreats to the S in November and December.

Minimum sea ice coverage occurs during the third week of

February.

0.0 The most accessible area of the Antarctic coastline lies between the Mertz Glacier Tongue and Dumont d’Urville Station (66°40'S., 140°01'E.). The navigation season for this

station normally ranges from the middle of December to late

March for reinforced vessels and from early January to early

March for all vessels.

0.0 Reinforced vessels may normally reach Mirnyy Station

(66°33'S., 93°01'E.) from early January to the middle of March

and all vessels from late January to early March. Davis Station

(68°35'S., 77°58'E.) is normally open to reinforced vessels

from late December to mid-March and to all vessels from midJanuary to mid-February.

0.0 At Mawson Station (67°36'S., 62°52'E.), the navigation season occurs after the fast ice breakout. It lasts from the middle

of January to late March for reinforced vessels and from late

January to early March for all vessels.

GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION

Typical Mid-Summer 7/10 Ice Concentration Limit

WEDDELL SEA GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION
The Antarctic 73

Pub. 200

0.0 Permanent ice conditions exist in Lutzow-Holm Bay and

along the coast from 150°E to 140°E. It is normal for fast ice to

remain attached to ice shelves and ice tongues throughout the

year. Fast ice attains a mean maximum thickness of 1.8m at

Mawson Station and Mirnyy Station, and 2.1m along the Princess Astrid Coast (20°E to 5°E). In the vicinity of Molodezhnaya Station (67°40'S., 45°51'E.), a floe, of fast ice origin,

was reported to be 4m thick. In comparison, a hummocked

floe, of drift ice origin, was reported to have a depth in excess

of 8m.

0.0 Glacier ice, such as an iceberg, occurs throughout the area,

but is much more concentrated in the coastal region. Glacier

ice generally drifts from E to W except between 90°E and 80°E

where it drifts N and then E to the vicinity of 60°S. This coastal

area is known to calve giant icebergs, some up to 300m thick

and 60 miles long.

0.0 The current system along the E continental coast is typified

by a weaker W current near the coast and a stronger E current

CONTINENTAL COAST SECTOR FROM 0° TO 80°E

LOCATOR CHART
74 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION

Typical Mid-Summer 7/10 Ice Concentration Limit

CONTINENTAL COAST SECTOR FROM 0° TO 80°E
The Antarctic 75

Pub. 200

near the convergence zone. The main exception to this general

current structure occurs between approximately 20°E and

40°E. This region represents the E portion of the Weddell Sea

gyre (eddy) where the clockwise current flows toward the continent. It joins water from the West Wind Drift at the convergence zone and from the East Wind Drift near the coast. Other

small projections jutting from the continent, such as Enderby

Land and the Shackleton Ice Shelf, lead to the formation of

much smaller clockwise gyres (eddies). These gyres (eddies)

block the coastal current and usually join the two drift systems.

A strong N flow is generally present near 80° E.

0.0 As with other regions which surround the Antarctic continent, sea temperatures are close to the freezing point near the

icebound coast and increase toward the convergence zone’

larger gradients occur leading to temperatures from 1.1° to

2.2°C. Horizontal variations of salinity and density are small.

CONTINENTAL COAST SECTOR FROM 80°E TO 160°E

LOCATOR CHART
76 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

Ship Reporting System

Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel Rescue (AMVER)

0.0 The Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel Rescue (AMVER)

System is operated by the U.S. Coast Guard to promote safety

of life and property at sea. It is a maritime mutual assistance

organization which provides important aid to the development

and coordination of search and rescue (SAR) efforts in many

offshore areas of the world.

0.0 Merchant vessels of all nations making offshore voyages are

GENERAL SURFACE CIRCULATION

Typical Mid-Summer 7/10 Ice Concentration Limit

CONTINENTAL COAST SECTOR FROM 80° TO 160°E
The Antarctic 77

Pub. 200

encouraged to send movement reports and periodic position reports to the AMVER center in New York via selected radio stations or via INMARSAT.

0.0 Information from these reports is entered into a computer

which generates and maintains dead reckoning positions for

such vessels. Characteristics of vessels that are valuable for determining SAR capability are also entered from available

sources. Appropriate data concerning the predicted location

and SAR characteristics of each vessel is then made available

upon request to recognized SAR agencies of any nation, or persons in distress, for use during an emergency. Such information

is kept strictly confidential and only disclosed for reasons connected with maritime safety.

0.0 Generally, participation in AMVER is voluntary. However,

requirements exist for certain U.S. flag or U.S. interest vessels.

0.0 The U.S. Maritime Administration (MARAD) regulations

state that United States flag merchant vessels of 1,000 grt or

more, operating in foreign commerce, and foreign flag vessels

of 1,000 grt or more, for which an Interim War Risk Insurance

Binder has been issued under the provisions of Title XII, Merchant Marine Act (1936), must report to the AMVER center.

0.0 Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR CH. 1,

Sec. 80.905) states that United States vessels, which transport

more than six passengers for hire, operated more than 200 nautical miles from the nearest land must participate in AMVER

while engaged on a voyage where the vessels is navigated in

the open sea for more than 24 hours.

0.0 Participating vessels must send a Sailing Plan Report, a Position Report, a Deviation Report, and an Arrival Report.

0.0 Departure Reports have been eliminated in favor of the more

common practice of filing a combined Sailing/Departure Report. However, Departure Reports will continue to be accepted

indefinitely.

0.0 A worldwide radio station network of coastal facilities supports AMVER. To ensure that no charge is applied, all AMVER reports should be passed through the specified stations.

0.0 In cases of emergency, all distress messages must be sent to

the nearest radio communications station, not the AMVER

center.

0.0 Note.—For further details of the system, see Pub. 117, Radio

Navigational Aids; and the AMVER Bulletin, which is available from U.S. Coast Guard District Offices, Marine Inspection

Offices, and Captain of the Port Offices.

0.0 Detailed instructions in English and several other languages

are contained in the AMVER Users Manual which may be obtained free of charge from the following address:

0.0 AMVER Maritime Relations Office

0.0 U.S. Coast Guard

0.0 Battery Park Building

0.0 New York, NY (10004)

0.0 USA

South Pacific Voluntary Ship Reporting System (New

Zealand)

0.0 A voluntary ship reporting system has been established for

all vessels operating in the New Zealand Search and Rescue

Region (NZSRR) S of 60°S for the purpose of assisting the

RCCNZ in coordinating SAR operations in that area (60°S to

the S edge of the Ross Sea bounded by 163°E to 131°W).

0.0 All vessels are requested to notify Taupo Maritime Radio upon entry to and departure from the area. Vessels are also encouraged to make daily position reports. The information will

be used for search and rescue purposes only. Contact can be

made, as follows: 

1. INMARSAT-C: 451-200-067 

2. Telephone: 64-4-914-8333

3. E-mail: maritime@kordia.co.nz

South African Ship Reporting System (SAFREP)

0.0 The South African Ship Reporting System (SAFREP) has

been established to identify and monitor the positions and

movements of vessels participating in the system within the

SAFREP area. All vessels operating within the SAFREP area

are welcome to participate in the system, although emphasis is

placed on trading vessels of over 100 grt.

0.0 For further information on SAFREP, see Appendix I.

Chilean Ship Reporting System (CHILREP)

0.0 The Chilean Ship Reporting System (CHILREP) is a voluntary system operated by the General Directorate of the Maritime Territory and Merchant Marine, which is a Directorate of

the Chilean Navy.

0.0 For further information on CHILREP, see Appendix II.

Australian Ship Reporting System (AUSLREP)

0.0 The Australian Ship Reporting System (AUSREP) is compulsory for Australian-registered commercial vessels and for

foreign vessels on voyages between Australian ports. All other

vessels are encouraged to participate when within the AUSREP

area.

0.0 For further information on AUSREP, see Appendix III.
The Antarctic 79

Pub. 200

Appendix I—South African Ship Reporting System (SAFREP)

0.0 The South African Ship Reporting System (SAFREP) has

been established to identify and monitor the positions and

movements of vessels participating in the system within the

SAFREP area. All vessels operating within the SAFREP area

are welcome to participate in the system, although emphasis is

placed on trading vessels of over 100 grross tons

0.0 Vessels within the SAFREP area are requested to provide

regular position reports. This information, which is used to

maintain a computer plot of the vessel’s last position and to

calculate future DRs, is used to:

1. Limit the search area for a rescue at sea.

2. Provide accurate information on shipping resources in

the area, in the event of a marine casualty.

0.0 The SAFREP area is bound by lines joining the following

coordinates:

a. 17°15'S, 11°45'E. (The mouth of the Kunene River—

on the W coast of Africa at the Angola/Namibia border)

b. 17°15'S, 10°00'W.

c. The coast of Antarctica at longitude 10°00'W.

d. The coast of Antarctica at longitude 75°00'E.

e. 50°00'S, 75°00'E.

f. 50°00'S, 45°00'E.

g. 30°00'S, 45°00'E.

h. 30°00'S, 40°00'E.

i. 26°50'S, 40°00'E. 

j. 26°50'S, 32°54'E. (Ponta do Ouro—on the E coast of

Africa at the South Africa/Mozambique border) 

0.0 SAFREP operating principles.—The SAFREP system operates under the assumption that vessels transiting the SAFREP

area will send, at a minimum, the following three basic reports

to MRCC Cape Town:

1. When entering the SAFREP area.

2. When crossing 20°E longitude S of Cape Agulhas.

3. When departing the SAFREP area.

0.0 Vessels wishing to report more frequently are encouraged to

do so by submitting a Position Report (SAFREP PR), as this

will increase the accuracy of the SAFREP computer plot.

0.0 Vessels should be aware that the SAFREP system is a passive reporting system. Should further SAFREP reports not be

received from a vessel, SAR actions will not automatically be

initiated.

Coastal vessels and vessels arriving at and departing from

South African and Namibian ports will make Arrival Reports

(SAFREP AR) and Departure Reports (SAFREP DPR) to the

SAFREPCC at MRCC Cape Town. Ports of South Africa and

Namibia are considered to lie outside the SAFREP area; when

a vessel enters any of these ports, it is considered to have departed from the SAFREP area.

Message requirements.—Vessels participating in the SAFREP system are requested to send the reports listed below in

Types of Reports. All reports should include the system identifier SAFREP and the code for the appropriate report (e.g. SAFREP PR). A report should be sent at least once every 2 days,

especially when significant course and/or speed changes are

made, in order to update the SAFREP computer plot and ensure a quicker response in the event of a maritime emergency.

0.0 Types of Reports.—The requested reports for vessels participating in the SAFREP system are, as follows:

1. Sailing Plan (SAFREP SP)—Sent to the SAFREPCC for any vessel entering the SAFREP area from a

port outside South Africa or Namibia.

2. Position Report (SAFREP PR)—Sent when crossing 20°E longitude S of Cape Agulhas or when the master

considers it necessary for updating the SAFREP computer

plot.

3. Final Report (SAFREP FR)—Sent when leaving

the SAFREP area bound for a port outside South Africa or

Namibia.

4. Arrival Report (SAFREP AR)—Sent within 3

hours of a vessel arriving at a port in the SAFREP area.

5. Departure Report (SAFREP DRP)—Sent within 3

hours of a vessel departing from a port in the SAFREP area.

6. Deviation Report (SAFREP DR)—Sent when the

vessel’s position varies significantly from the position that

would have been predicted from previous reports or as decided upon by the master.

7. The following reports are also sent in the event of a

maritime incident:

a. Maritime Pollutants Report (SAFREP MP)—

Sent in the event of a pollution incident.

b. Dangerous Goods Report (SAFREP DG)—Sent

in the event of the loss of dangerous cargo.

c. Harmful Substance Report (SAFREP HS)—Sent

in the event of the discharge of a harmful substance.

0.0 Message Formats.—All reports should be sent in the standard reporting coded format. All reports should include the

system identifier SAFREP and the code for the appropriate report (e.g. SAFREP SP). All dates and times entered in SAFREP reports are to be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Message formats are given in the accompanying table titled

SAFREP—Message Formats.

SAFREP—Message Formats

Identifier Content SP PR FR AR DPR DR DG HS MP

A/

Name/call sign/MMSI number/flag//—

(for flag, use as defined in Lloyd’s publications)XXXX X XXXX

B/

Time (UT (GMT))//—(date and time of

report 6 digits-day of month 2 digits; hour

and minutes 4 digits)

XXXX X XXXX
80 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

C/

Lat/Long//—(latitude is 4-digit group in

degrees and minutes with N or S; longitude is 5-digit group in degrees and minutes E)

XXXX XXXX

E/ Course//—(true heading is a 3-digit

group) XXX X1 X X

F/ Speed//—(knots and tenths of knots e.g.

155=15.5) XXX X1 X X

G/ Port of departure//(name of last port of

call) X

H/

Date/Time/Position of entry into the

SAFREP area or name of port when departing a port in the SAFREP area//—

(date and time as expressed in B; position

as expressed in C) 

X X

I/ Destination/ETA//—(port and ETA as expressed in B) XXX X X

K/

Date/Time/Position of departure from

SAFREP area or name of the port when

entering a port within the SAFREP area//

—(date and time as expressed in B; position as expressed in C) 

X X1 X2

M/

Radio communications//—(Name(s) or

call sign(s) of coast radio stations and frequencies guarded) X X3 XXX

O/ Draft//—(in meters) X X X1

P/ Pollution details, as described in the Key

below X4 X5 X4

Q/ Defects, damages, deficiencies, and other

limitations//—(brief details) X X6 X6

R/ Pollution, dangerous cargo lost overboard//

X7 X8 X7

S/

Weather//—(sea state (1-9), wind speed

(in knots), wind direction {N/NE/E/SE/S/

SW/W/NW}, and visibility {good/moderate/poor})

XXX XXX

T/ Vessel’s agent//—(name and particulars) X XX9 X9

U/ Vessel size/type//—(vessel’s grt and type) X X X X

V/ Medical personnel//—(doctor, physician’s

assistant, nurse, or NIL) X X

W/ Persons//—(State number of persons on

board) X X

X/ Remarks//—(Any other useful information) X X XX X10 X10

SAFREP—Message Formats

Identifier Content SP PR FR AR DPR DR DG HS MP
The Antarctic 81

Pub. 200

Key

X Required information.

X1 When sailing from a port in the SAFREP area, this information is not required for coastal vessels but is required 

from vessels departing from a port outside South Africa or Namibia.

X2 This information is not required for coastal vessels.

X3 Coastal vessels sailing in the SAFREP area for the first time should include this information.

X4

DG—This information is required if the condition of the vessel is such that there is danger additional losses of

packaged dangerous cargo into the sea.

MP—This information is required in the event of probable discharge.

The following details should be included:

1 Correct technical name(s) of cargo.

2 UN number(s).

3 IMO hazard class(es).

4 Name(s) of manufacturer(s), when known, or consignee(s) or consignor(s).

5 Types of packages, including identification marks. Specify whether portable tanks or tank vehicles, whether

vehicle or freight container, or other transport unit containing packages. Include official registration marks and

numbers assigned to the unit.

6 An estimate of the quantity and likely condition of the cargo.

Information not immediately available should be sent in a supplementary message or messages.

X5

The following details should be included:

1 Type of oil or the correct technical name(s) of the noxious liquid substance on board.

2 UN number(s).

3 Pollution category (A, B, C) for noxious liquid substances.

4 Name(s) of manufacturer(s) of substances, if appropriate, when known, or consignee(s) or consignor(s).

5 Quantity.

X6

The following details should be included:

1. Condition of the vessel.

2. Ability to transfer cargo/ballast/fuel.

X7

The following details should be included:

1 Correct technical name(s) of cargo.

2 UN number(s).

3 IMO hazard class(es).

4 Name(s) of manufacturer(s), when known, or consignee(s) or consignor(s).

5 Types of packages, including identification marks. Specify whether portable tanks or tank vehicles, whether

vehicle or freight container, or other transport unit containing packages. Include official registration marks and

numbers assigned to the unit.

6 An estimate of the quantity and likely condition of the cargo.

7 Whether loss is continuing.

8 Whether lost cargo floated or sank.

9 Cause of loss.

X8

The following details should be included:

1 Type of oil or the correct technical name(s) of the noxious liquid discharges into the sea.

2 UN number(s).

3 Pollution category (A, B, C) for noxious liquid substances.

4 Name(s) of manufacturer(s) of substances, if appropriate, when known, or consignee(s) or consignor(s).

5 An estimate of the quantity of the substances.

6 Whether lost substances floated or sank.

7 Whether loss is continuing.

8 Cause of loss.

9 Estimate of the movement of the discharge or lost substances, giving current position, if known.

10 Estimate of the surface area of the spill, if possible.

X9 Name, address, telex number, and telephone number of the vessel’s owner and representative (charterer, manager, or 

operator of the vessel or their agent).
82 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

0.0 The forward slash (/) should be used to separate each element of the component; the double forward slash (//) should be

used at the end of each component. This facilitates the automatic entry of this information into the SAFREP computer data

base. An example is:

SAFREP PR A/EXAMPLE/XXXX/12345678//B/ ... etc.

Reports should only include those components as listed in

the SAFREP Message Formats table.

0.0 For reports submitted by telex or INMARSAT-C, all typing

should be done in uppercase.

0.0 Transmission of Messages.—SAFREP messages can be

sent through Telkom SA Ltd coast radio stations at Cape Town,

Port Elizabeth, and Durban. 

X10

The following details should be included:

1 Action being taken with regard to the discharge and the movement of the vessel.

2 Assistance or salvage efforts which have been requested or which have been provided by others.

3 The master of an assisting or salvaging vessel should report the particulars of the action undertaken or planned. 

After the transmission of the information referred to in the initial report, as much as possible of the information

essential for the protection of the marine environment as is appropriate should be reported in a supplementary

message as soon as possible. That information should include items P, Q, R, S, and X. The master of any vessel

engaged in or requested to engage in an operation to render assistance or undertake salvage, should report as far as

practicable, using the standard reporting format, the following items:

• HS—Items A, B, C, E, F, M, P, Q, R, S, T, U, and X.

• MP—Items A, B, C, M, P, Q, R, S, T, U, and X.

The master should also keep the coastal state informed of any developments.

Key
The Antarctic 83

Pub. 200

Appendix II—Chile Ship Reporting System (CHILREP)

0.0 The Chile Ship Reporting System (CHILREP) is a voluntary

system operated by the General Directorate of the Maritime

Territory and Merchant Marine, which is a Directorate of the

Chilean Navy. The CHILREP system is a ship reporting system

established with the following objectives:

1. To limit the time between the loss of a vessel and the

initiation of search and rescue action, in cases where

no distress signal is sent out.

2. To limit the search area for a rescue action.

3. To provide up-to-date information on shipping resources available in the area, in the event of a search

and rescue incident.

The coverage of CHILREP and the Chilean maritime search

and rescue area as advised to the International Maritime Organization are identical. The CHILREP area is bounded by the

coasts of Argentina and Chile and lines joining the following

positions: 

a. 18°21.0'S, 70°22.9'W. (Chile/Peru border)

b. 18°21.0'S, 120°00.0'W.

c. 30°00.0'S, 120°00.0'W.

d. 30°00.0'S, 131°00.0'W.

e. The Antarctic coast at 131°00.0'W.

f. 55°22.9'S, 65°43.6'W. (coast)

g. 56°22.8'S, 65°43.6'W.

h. 56°22.8'S, 67°16.0'W.

i. 58°21.1'S, 67°16.0'W.

j. 58°21.1'S, 53°00.0'W.

k. The Antarctic coast at 53°00.0'W.

0.0 CHILREP is a positive reporting system in that, should an

expected report become overdue, actions which include worldwide communications checks, the alerting of ships in the vicinity, and the launching of search aircraft will be initiated.

0.0 CHILREP messages are sent, as follows: 

1. When the vessel is at sea, the report is to be sent

through any Chilean coast radio station which accepts

public correspondance. 

2. When the vessel is in a Chilean port, the report can be

sent, as follows: 

a. Through any Chilean coast radio station which accepts public correspondance. 

b. To Directemar Valparaiso, as follows: 

0.0 Upon departure from a Chilean port or when entering the

CHILREP area, a Sailing Plan (SP) is submitted. The SP is relayed to the CHILREP service, where a computerized plot is

maintained for the vessel position.

0.0 A Position Report (PR) is sent once a day between 1200

and 1600 UT (GMT) so that a report is received every 24

hours.

0.0 Should a vessel at any time be in a position more than 2

hours steaming from the position that would be predicted from

the last SP or PR, then a Deviation Report (DR) must be sent.

Failure to do so will result in the search being concentrated in

the wrong area in the event of a missed report, and the possibility that survivors from a stricken ship may not be found.

0.0 On arrival at the ship’s destination or on departure from the

CHILREP area, a Final Report (FR) is to be sent.

0.0 In addition to the CHILREP system, there is a National Ship

Position System which requires that every foreign vessel bound

for a Chilean port must report its arrival at least 24 hours in advance. When foreign vessels navigate inland waters of the

Chilean Republic they must report their position at 1200 and

2400 UTC. Chilean flag vessels must also report their position

at 1200 and 2400 UTC daily. In all other conditions the system

requires a daily report between 1200 and 1600 UTC.

0.0 The first line of each meassage is always CHILREP followed

by the message type (SP. PR, DR, or FR). The basic CHILREP

format and the required information for each message are contained in the accompanying table titled CHILREP Reports—

Format and Information Required.

0.0 Sailing Plan (CHILREP SP).—The SP contains information necessary to initiate a plot and give an outline of the vessel’s intended passage. An SP should be sent within 24 hours

prior or up to 2 hours after entry into the CHILREP area or departure from a port within the CHILREP area, in accordance

with one of the following scenarios:

1. SP-1 submitted on entering the CHILREP area

2. SP-2 submitted on departure from a port within the

CHILREP area to a port outside the CHILREP area.

The report may be submitted prior to sailing and up to

2 hours after departure.

3. SP-3 submitted on departure from a port within the

CHILREP area to a port within the CHILREP area.

The report may be submitted prior to sailing and up to

2 hours after departure.

4. SP-4 submitted when transiting the CHILREP area

from and to a port not in the CHILREP area.

0.0 Position Report (CHILREP PR).—A PR should be sent

daily between 1200 and 1600 UTC. The PR must reflect the

position, course, and speed of the ship at the time of the report.

If it is necessary to alter the nominated daily reporting time, the

alteration should be shown in the PR sent before the change.

The information contained in the PR will be used to update the

computerized plot.

0.0 Deviation Report (CHILREP DR).—A DR must be sent

should a vessel, at any time, be in a position more than 2 hours

steaming from the position that would be predicted from the

last SP or PR. Line X of the DR should contain the reason for

the deviation (speed reduction due to weather, change of destination, etc.).

0.0 Final Report (CHILREP FR).—An FR contains the information which terminates the vessel’s participation in the

CHILREP system. Line X of the FR must include the words

“Final Report.” An FR should be sent in accordance with one

of the following scenarios:

1. FR-1 submitted prior to or on arrival at a port within

Telephone

56-32-281022

56-32-208474

56-32-298486

Facsimile 56-32-281099

E-mail cbvradio@directemar.cl
84 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

the CHILREP area.

2. FR-2 submitted when a vessel has departed from the

CHILREP area. This report should be sent as soon as

practicable.

0.0 Other reports.—All vessels within the CHILREP system

are requested to report incidents involving the following:

1. Dangerous Goods Report (CHILREP DG).

2. Harmful Substances Report (CHILREP HS).—

Vessels engaged in or requested to engage in an operation to render assistance or undertake salvage should

also send this report.

3. Maritime Pollutants Report (CHILREP MP).—

Vessels engaged in or requested to engage in an operation to

render assistance or undertake salvage should also send this

report.

0.0 Overdue Reports.—To avoid unnecessary search action, it

is important that vessels report at the nominated reporting time

each day and send their FINAL REPORT when leaving the

CHILREP area. If a vessel is unable to pass a position report

due to unserviceable radio equipment or illness of the radio officer, all attempts must be made to pass a signal to this effect

through another vessel, port, or other shore authority, either by

VHF or use of an emergency transmitter.

CHILREP Reports—Format and Information Required

Identifier

Sailing Plan PR DR Final Report DG HS MP

SP-1 SP-2 SP-3 SP-4 FR-1 FR-2

A Vessel name and call sign. X X X X X X X X X X X

B

Date and time of report (6 digits—date (2 digits), hour (2 digits), and minutes (2 digits)).

Reports are to be in Universal

Coordinated Time (UTC), to be

indicated by the suffix Z.

XX XXX

C

Position—Latitude (4 digits in

degrees and minutes) N or S

and Longitude (5 digits in degrees and minutes) W.

XX XXX

D

Geographical position (optional). Used when sailing near the

coast or in inland waters. Give

well-known name(s) of clearly

identifiable landmark(s).

E

True course anticipated until

next reporting time (3 digits).

When more than one course is

to be used, enter Various; this

will be interpreted as being the

normal course(s) a vessel will

follow on that particular passage. If this is not the case clarification should be made.

X X

F

Speed (the anticipated average

speed the vessel will make until

the next report).

X X X X XX X

G Last port of call (when entering

CHILREP area only). X X

H

Date/time (using format shown

in B) and point of entry into

CHILREP system. The point of

entry is the latitude/longitude at

which the vessel is entering the

CHILREP area, or the Chilean

port from which the vessel is

departing.

XXXX
The Antarctic 85

Pub. 200

I Destination and ETA (with

date). X XX

J

Whether a pilot is carried on

the vessel. Notification of pilot

is required when route considers inland waters navigation.

X

K

Date/time (using format shown

in B) and point of exit from

CHILREP system. The point of

exit is the latitude/longitude at

which the vessel is leaving the

CHILREP area, or the Chilean

port the vessel is to arrive at.

XXXX X X

L

Route (the vessel’s intended

track). State whether Great

Circle (GC), Rhumb Line (RL),

or Coastal, with waypoints being followed, expressed in latitude and longitude. Courses are

not required if waypoints are

mentioned.

XXXX X

M

Coast radio stations or maritime communications stations

monitored. Include INMARSAT and SELCALL number, if

fitted. List stations which the

vessel normally works to contact managers, owners, agents,

etc., in addition to the Chilean

maritime communications stations monitored.

X X X X XXX

N

Nominated daily reporting time

(using format shown in B).

Daily reporting times are advised to be made within the

period from 1200 to 1600 UTC.

XXXX X

O Draft.

P Cargo (brief identification). X1 X2 X1

Q Defects or other limitations. X X3 X3

R Reports of any pollution seen. X4 X5 X4

S Weather conditions in the area. X6 X6 X6

T Vessel’s agents. X7 X7 X7

U Vessel’s type and size. X X X

V Medical personnel carried. X X X X

W Number of persons on board.

X Remarks. X X X X X8 X9 X9 X10 X10

CHILREP Reports—Format and Information Required

Identifier

Sailing Plan PR DR Final Report DG HS MP

SP-1 SP-2 SP-3 SP-4 FR-1 FR-2
86 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

CHILREP Key

X Required information. Other designators may be included at the discretion of the Master or when relevant to the type of 

report being sent.

X1

DG—This information is required if the condition of the vessel is such that there is danger additional losses of

packaged dangerous cargo into the sea.

MP—This information is required in the event of probable discharge.

The following details should be included:

1 Correct technical name(s) of cargo.

2 UN number(s).

3 IMO hazard class(es).

4 Name(s) of manufacturer(s), when known, or consignee(s) or consignor(s).

5 Types of packages, including identification marks. Specify whether in portable tanks or tank vehicles, or

packaged in vehicle, freight container, or other transport unit containing packages. BA NP281(2) 2007/2008 edition

6 An estimate of the quantity and likely condition of the cargo.

Information not immediately available should be sent in a supplementary message or messages.

X2

The following details should be included:

1 Type of oil or the correct technical name(s) of the noxious liquid substance on board.

2 UN number(s).

3 Pollution category (A, B, C, or D) for noxious liquid substances. 

4 Name(s) of manufacturer(s) of substances, if appropriate, when known, or consignee(s) or consignor(s).

5 Quantity.

Information not immediately available should be sent in a supplementary message or messages.

X3

The following details should be included:

1. Condition of the vessel.

2. Ability to transfer cargo/ballast/fuel.

Information not immediately available should be sent in a supplementary message or messages.

X4

The following details should be included:

1 Correct technical name(s) of cargo.

2 UN number(s).

3 IMO hazard class(es).

4 Name(s) of manufacturer(s), when known, or consignee(s) or consignor(s).

5 Types of packages, including identification marks. Specify whether in portable tanks or tank vehicles, or

packaged in vehicle, freight container, or other transport unit containing packages. BA NP281(2) 2007/2008 edition

6 An estimate of the quantity and likely condition of the cargo.

7 Whether lost cargo floated or sank.

8 Whether loss is continuing.

9 Cause of loss.

Information not immediately available should be sent in a supplementary message or messages.

X5

The following details should be included:

1 Type of oil or the correct technical name(s) of the noxious liquid discharges into the sea.

2 UN number(s).

3 Pollution category (A, B, C, or D) for noxious liquid substances.

4 Name(s) of manufacturer(s) of substances, if appropriate, when known, or consignee(s) or consignor(s).

5 An estimate of the quantity of the substances.

6 Whether lost substances floated or sank.

7 Whether loss is continuing.

8 Cause of loss.

9 Estimate of the movement of the discharge or lost substances, giving current position, if known.

10 Estimate of the surface area of the spill, if possible.

Information not immediately available should be sent in a supplementary message or messages.
The Antarctic 87

Pub. 200

X6

When reported, the following items are recommended:

Pressure (Pa) (4 digits).

Wind direction and force in knots (5 digits).

Air and water temperature, when available, in °C.

Dew point (in degrees and tenths) (3 digits) in °C.

Vessels which anticipate passing through areas of severe weather conditions or are experiencing severe weather are

urged to report their position at more frequent intervals.

X7 Name, address, telex, and telephone number of the vessel’s owner and representative (charterer, manager or operator of 

the vessel, or their agent).

X8 Include the reason for the deviation (speed reduction due to change ion weather, change of destination, etc.).

X9 Must include the words Final Report.

X10

The following details should be included:

1 Actions being taken with regard to the discharge and the movement of the vessel.

2 Assistance or salvage efforts which have been requested or which have been provided by others.

3 The master of an assisting or salvage vessel should report the particulars of the action undertaken or planned.

Information not immediately available should be sent in a supplementary message or messages.

CHILREP Key
The Antarctic 89

Pub. 200

Appendix III—Australian Ship Reporting System (AUSREP)

0.0 The Australian Ship Reporting System (AUSREP) is compulsory for Australian-registered commercial vessels and for

foreign vessels on voyages between Australian ports. All other

vessels are encouraged to participate when within the AUSREP

area.

0.0 The objective of the AUSREP system is to contribute to the

safety of life at sea by:

1. Limiting the time between the loss of a vessel and the

initiation of SAR action, in cases where no distress signal is

sent out.

2. Limiting the search area for a SAR action.

3. Providing up-to-date information on all shipping resources available in the area, in the event of SAR action.

0.0 The AUSREP area, and Australian SAR region, covers the

coast of Australia, as well as the coast of Antarctica between

75°E and 163°E, and extends N to approximately 6°S at its W

limit and to 12°S at its E limit. The limits are best seen in the

accompanying graphic.

0.0 The system is operated by the Australian Maritime Safety

Authority (AMSA) through AusSAR, specifically the Rescue

Coordination Center Australia (RCC Australia).

0.0 On departure from an Australian port or on entering the

AUSREP area, the following procedures are applicable:

1. Masters are to send a Sailing Plan (SP) to RCC Australia.

2. A computerized plot is maintained of the vessel’s estimated position.

3. Position updates can be done by either of the following methods:

a. INMARSAT-C polling is mandatory for all vessels participating in AUSREP. Masters should not send position reports while the ship is being polled. All costs

associated with INMARSAT-C polling are borne by AMSA. 

b. PRs should only be sent where INMARSAT-C

polling is not available or when RCC Australia directs a

master to do so. When required, PRs should be sent at a

convenient time between 2200 UTC and 0800 UTC, as

nominated by the master. The interval between PRs

should not exceed 24 hours. 

4. On arrival at the destination or on final departure from

the AUSREP area, a Final Report (FR) should be sent to

RCC Australia.

5. Should a vessel at any time be in a position more than

2 hours steaming from the position that would be predicted

from the last SP or PR, a Deviation Report (DR) should be

sent to the MRCC.

6. All dates and times used in AUSREP reports are to be

in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

0.0 Sailing Plan (SP).—The SP is sent up to 24 hours prior to

joining the AUSREP system, with the following exceptions:

1. At ports within the REEFREP area, the SP must be

sent prior to departure.

2. At other Australian ports, the SP may be sent up to 2

hours after departure.

3. When entering the system from sea at an ocean

boundary, the SP may be sent 24 hours prior to entering the

area or up to 2 hours after crossing the boundary.

The SP contains information necessary to initiate a plot and

give an outline of the intended passage. If a vessel does not sail

within 2 hours of the time stated in the SP, then that SP must be

canceled and a new one sent.

The AUSREP report format for an SP is given in the accompanying table.

0.0 Position Report (PR).—INMARSAT-C polling is mandatory for all vessels participating in AUSREP. Masters should not

send position reports while the ship is being polled. 

0.0 When INMARSAT-C polling is not available or when RCC

Australia directs a master to do so, PRs should be sent at a convenient time between 2200 UTC and 0800 UTC, as nominated

by the master. The interval between PRs should not exceed 24

hours. 

0.0 If for any reason communication is not possible via INMARSAT-C or via the AMSA HF DSC station, the required information must be passed by alternative means to RCC Australia.

These means may include telephone or facsimile. 

0.0 AUSREP PRs are sent automatically and regularly when the

terminal is polled by RCC Australia. 

0.0 The information contained in the PR will be used by RCC

Australia to update the plot. The PR must reflect the position

and course of the vessel at the designated reporting time. However, the speed should be the anticipated speed until the next

report time.

0.0 The ETA at port of destination or AUSREP area boundary

should always be confirmed in the last PR of a passage. It may

also be amended in any PR whenever the Master is aware of a

revised ETA.

0.0 The PR is normally automatically processed by RCC Australia, but may not be seen by an operator. If the PR contains important additional safety information that requires the

immediate attention of the operator, the word “ALERT” should

be placed in Format Field X of the PR. The word “ALERT”

should be used only to identify important safety information

for immediate action.

0.0 The AUSREP report format for a PR is given in the accompanying table.

0.0 Deviation Report (DR).—A DR must be sent to RCC Australia if a vessel, at any time, is in a position more than 2 hours

steaming from that which would be predicted from the last SP

or PR. A DR can also be sent when any other voyage details

are altered. The reason for the deviation should be included in

Format Field X of the DR. 

Failure to send an appropriate DR may have a negative effect

on SAR operations. If the vessel is in distress and has not sent

Telephone: 61-2-6230-6880 

Facsimile: 61-2-6230-6868 

Address: GPO Box 2181

Canberra ACT 2601

Australia 

Internet: http://www.amsa.gov.au 
90 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

out a distress message, the AUSREP procedures may result in

RCC Australia initiating an air search to locate the vessel. The

search aircraft will start looking in the area related to the vessel’s route and speed as indicated in the SP and subsequent

PRs. If the vessel has not submitted a DR when there is a

change in route and speed, the search aircraft may be unable to

find any survivors. It is in the vessel’s best interest to keep

RCC Australia up-to-date on all voyage details.

The AUSREP report format for a DR is given in the accompanying table.

0.0 Final Report (FR).—An FR is sent, as follows:

1. For vessels en route overseas and departing the AUSREP area, the FR should be send at the AUSREP boundary.

2. For vessels ending a voyage at an Australian port

within the REEFREP SRS area, the FR must be sent at the

last REEFREP reporting point.

3. For vessels ending a voyage at any other Australian

port, the FR can be sent within 2 hour’s steaming of the port

or pilot station. Under no circumstances should the FR be

sent more than 2 hours prior to arrival.

As an alternative, the FR may be telephoned to RCC Australia immediately after berthing, but not more than 2 hours

after arrival. If it is known that the vessel is to anchor or

berth where telephone facilities are not available, the FR

should be sent via INMARSAT-C or, if not available, via HF,

with an initial call on HF DSC. 

The AUSREP report format for an FR is given in the accompanying table.

0.0 Sending an AUSREP report.—AUSREP reports can be

sent, as follows:

1. In an Australian port.—All reports should be made

from the vessel directly to RCC Australia, in order to avoid

delays that may be associated with using intermediate agencies. Collect telephone calls, facsimile messages, or INMARSAT-C may be used to send an SP or an FR in port.

2. Via INMARSAT.—Reports must be addressed RCC

AUSTRALIA and sent via the Pacific Ocean Region (POR)

or Indian Ocean Region (IOR) satellites to Perth Land Earth

Station (LES) using LES codes 212 and 312 respectively.

These procedures apply only to AUSREP messages. Calls

are free of charge when submitted within the AUSREP area. 

INMARSAT-C messages sent to AUSREP using Special

Access Code (SAC 1243) through Perth LES (POR Satellite

Code 212 or IOR Satellite Code 312) will be reverse charged
The Antarctic 91

Pub. 200

to RCC Australia. If INMARSAT-C reports are not sent using SAC 1243 via Satellite Code 212 or Satellite Code 312, it

is likely that the message will not be received by RCC Australia and charges will apply to the ship. 

INMARSAT-B, INMARSAT-M, or FLEET 77-fitted Ship

Earth Stations will be charged for messages sent via INMARSAT-B, INMARSAT-M, FLEET 77, or broadband to

RCC AUSTRALIA. 

While participating in AUSREP, vessels should ensure that

their INMARSAT equipment remains active in the

LOGIN mode at all times.

The preferred method of submitting an AUSREP report is

via INMARSAT-C using the previously-described polling

option as opposed to sending the reports manually.

3. Via the AMSA HF DSC Network.—Messages sent

via the AMSA HF DSC Network will be free of charge. The

initial contact through the AMSA HF DSC station is made

by using a DSC safety priority call to MMSI 005030001.

The AUSREP message can then be passed on an appropriate

radiotelephone frequency. All reports sent by voice should

include the mandatory fields, including the identifying letter. 

0.0 Polling.—INMARSAT-C polling is mandatory for all vessels participating in AUSREP. Polling involves RCC Australia

sending a signal to the ship’s INMARSAT-C terminal to

prompt an automatic position report, which includes the ship’s

position. 

0.0 By inserting the word “POLL” in Section N of the SP, a master indicates the ship is available to be polled using INMARSAT-C. Masters should not send PRs if polling is being used.

0.0 Masters will still be required to enter the word “POLL” in

the SP for any voyage where polling is available. Masters must

provide the number of the INMARSAT-C terminal to be polled

in Section N of the SP. Masters are asked to use the same terminal each time they are polled for AUSREP. 

0.0 Sailing Plans, Deviation Reports, and Final Reports must

still be submitted as normal.

Non-reporting to AUSREP (NOREP).—In the case of a

foreign vessel departing on an overseas voyage from an Australian port, if the Master does not intend to send AUSREP Position Reports, this fact must be indicated in the SP by the

inclusion of the word NOREP in place of the nominated daily

reporting time in Field N; amplifying remarks may be included

in Field X. Under this option, RCC Australia will not undertake SAR action unless specific information is received which

indicates an air search is warranted. However, a NOREP vessel

must still comply with the mandatory REEFREP reporting requirements when the vessel enters the REEFREP area. 

0.0 Overdue AUSREP Reports.—AUSREP is a positive reporting system. If a PR, when polling is not being used, or an

FR is not received by RCC Australia within 2 hours of the expected time, action is taken to determine the vessel’s location

and confirm the safety of the crew. It should be noted that in

some parts of the AUSREP area, the ability to conduct an air

search may be restricted by aircraft range limitations.

0.0 To avoid unnecessary search action it is most important that

vessels report at the nominated reporting time each day and

send their FR when leaving the AUSREP area. If a vessel is unable to pass a PR or an FR, all attempts must be made to pass a

message to this effect through another vessel, a harbor, or other

shore authority either by VHF, signaling lantern, or emergency

transmitter.

0.0 The action taken by RCC Australia if a report is not received

as expected will depend on the prevailing circumstances, but

will generally include the following: 

1. Internal checks to establish if the vessel’s report has

been received by RCC Australia.

2. For INMARSAT-equipped vessels, an attempt to contact the vessel directly.

3. Attempts to contact the vessel via HF DSC to the vessel’s MMSI number.

4. Extensive communication checks with Australian and

overseas CRS, owners, agents, and other ships are carried out

to trace the last sighting or contact with the vessel.

0.0 By the time 21 hours have elapsed, search planning will be in

progress and details included in NAVAREA X and facsimile

weather broadcasts. By the time the report is 24 hours overdue,

positive SAR action will have been initiated to locate the vessel. It should be noted that resources available for an air search

decrease with the distance from an Australian base and that the

times may differ if the vessel is participating in INMARSAT-C

polling.

0.0 Reports to AMVER.—While participating in AUSREP,

masters may also wish their reports to be forwarded for inclusion in the AMVER system operated by the U.S. Coast Guard.

This should be indicated by including the word “AMVER” in

Format Field Y in each message. 

0.0 An AMVER report will only be forwarded if a vessel is in

the AUSREP area and is currently participating in the AUSREP system.

0.0 Reports to other reporting systems.—Reports from ships

to other reporting systems (JASREP, etc.) are not forwarded by

RCC Australia. Ships are requested to pass these reports direct.

0.0 REEFVTS interaction.—The following applies to ships

transiting through the Great Barrier Reef and Torres Strait: 

1. Ships must report to REEFVTS. 

2. Where the ship advises it is an AUSREP-reporting

vessel, regular position reports are then automatically forwarded to RCC Australia. When the vessel departs the

REEFVTS area, the vessel should revert to reporting directly

to RCC Australia. Vessels participating in AUSREP will

continue to be polled while transiting the REEFVTS area.

3. When a vessel departs a port in the REEFVTS area

and intends to report to AUSREP upon exiting the REEFVTS area, a Sailing Plan should be sent to RCC Australia

within 2 hours of departure from the port.

4. If the vessel is an AUSREP-reporting vessel and arriving at a port within the REEFVTS area, the master should

advise REEFVTS that it is the Final Report for REEFVTS

and AUSREP. REEFVTS will pass this information automatically on to AUSREP on the ship’s behalf.

0.0 Further information about REEFVTS can be found in Pub.

127, Sailing Directions (Enroute) East Coast of Australia and

New Zealand. 

0.0 Procedures for reporting to REEFVTS are provided in the

Great Barrier Reef and Torres Strait Vessel Traffic Service User Manual available from AMSA and Maritime Safety Queen-
92 The Antarctic

Pub. 200

sland, as well as at the following web sites: 

1. Marine Safety Queensland: http://www.msq.qld.gov.au/Publications

2. AMSA: http://www.amsa.gov.au/Shipping_Safety/ REEFVTS/User_Manual.pdf

AUSREP Reporting Format

Field Meaning Type of Report

SP PR DR FR

A Vessel name, call sign, and IMO number. X X X X

B Date/time of position (UTC). X X

C Position (latitude and longitude). If within 2 miles of a REEFREP reporting point, the

name of the reporting point. X X

E Course. If in REEFREP area, the name of the next reporting point, including any

alternative route, if applicable, may be substituted. RXA

F Speed (vessel’s anticipated average speed, in knots and tenths of knots, until next

report). If in REEFREP area, the ETA at the next reporting point may be substituted. X/R X A

G Name of last non-Australian port of call. (See Note 1 below.) A

H Date/time (UTC) and point of entry into AUSREP area (point is either the Australian

port of departure or the latitude/longitude of crossing the AUSREP area boundary). X

I Next foreign (non-Australian) destination and ETA. (See Note 2 below.) A

J

1. Coastal pilotage (Yes/No).

2. Last name of pilot.

3. License number of pilot.

R A

K

Date/time (UTC) and point of exit from the AUSREP area (the point is either the

latitude/longitude of crossing the area boundary or the Australian port at which the

vessel is to arrive).

X AX

L

1. Name of final reporting point for REEFREP SRS area, or 

2. AUSREP route information (vessel’s intended track—state rhumb line or coastal,

great circle, or composite with limiting latitude).

If both are provided, put the REEFREP information first and separate from the

AUSREP information with a slash (/). 

X/R A

M Radiocommunications arrangements. State in full the names of stations and frequencies guarded, including MMSI and INMARSAT numbers (A, B, C, F77, etc.). X A

N

Insert word “POLL” if ship is available to be polled by INMARSAT-C. If not, enter 

nominated date and time of next report, in UTC, and the reason the ship cannot be 

polled. 

XXX

O Draft, fore and aft, in meters and tenths of meters. R

P 1. Normal name of cargo. 

2. Is cargo classified as hazardous (Yes/No)? R A

Q Defects or other limitations such as damage, failure, or breakdown affecting the safety

of the vessel. A A

R Pollution (or reports of any seen). A A

U Vessel type, length (in meters), and gross tonnage. X 

V Medical personnel carried. X

X Remarks. AAX

Y Request to relay a report to AMVER. (See Note 3 below.) A A A A
The Antarctic 93

Pub. 200

Key:

1. X—Required field.

2. R—Vessels transiting the REEFREP Ship Reporting System should also include these fields.

3. A—Include if appropriate.

Notes:

1. Required when entering the AUSREP system from overseas. 

2. Required when leaving the AUSREP system. 

3. Place the words “PASS TO AMVER” in Format Field Y; do not separate the letters in the word “AMVER” by

spaces, as this may disrupt the computer processing. Masters should note that an AMVER report will only be

forwarded if a vessel is in the AUSREP area and is currently participating in the AUSREP system.

AUSREP Reporting Format

Field Meaning Type of Report

SP PR DR FR
95

Pub. 200

PART II
96

Pub. 200
Pub. 200

1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
99

Pub. 200

SECTOR 1 

THE WEDDELL SEA—CAPE NORVEGIA TO JOINVILLE ISLAND

1.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Weddell Sea, on the N

coast of Antarctica. The descriptive sequence is E to W along

the coast from Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island.

General Remarks

1.1 The Weddell Sea (72°00'S., 45°00'W.), which indents the coast of Antarctica between Cape Norvegia and the

Antarctic Peninsula, is one of two great seas in Antarctica.

Backed in many areas by mountains, ice shelves and glaciers

line most of the coast. The shoreline is relatively smooth, except on the W side, where many small islands lie scattered

along the coast.

1.1 The sea is covered with drift ice which extends outward or

shrinks back with the seasons, varying by as much as 30 miles,

daily.

1.1 The Continental Shelf extends seaward for about 45 miles

from the ice shelf fronting the E side of Weddell Sea, and, at

one point on the S side, it extends about 340 miles N from the

Filchner Ice Shelf. On the W side, the Continental Shelf lies

beneath the ice shelf, except at the N end of the Antarctic Peninsula where it extends about 45 miles seaward.

1.1 Entrance to the Weddell Sea is best gained along a route running parallel to the 10°W meridian. Once along the coast, the

route leads in a SW direction and parallel to the ice front. In

summer months, the belt of sea ice is relatively narrow in this

area and there is not the influence of ice pressure produced by

currents and topographic projections, which exists in the W

part of the sea. Departure from the Weddell Sea is best accomplished by reversing the route of entry.

1.1 Due to ice conditions, the W part of the Weddell Sea is impassable.

1.1 Meteorological conditions are variable in the Weddell Sea,

often hindering vessel operations.

1.1 Winds—Weather.—The N limit of the drift ice, which varies from year to year, profoundly influences the climatic conditions of the Weddell Sea. Other contributing factors are the

continent and its source of cold air, the warm seas from the N,

and the extent of the sea ice. Temperatures are particularly affected by the drift ice density and winds.

1.1 In winter, temperatures drop rapidly and usually remain between 0° and -15°C, occasionally dropping into the -30° to -

40°C range. The lowest temperatures in the winter normally

occur in clear, calm weather.

1.1 Wind, weather, and temperature changes are more rapid and

violent in the winter months. 

1.1 During the summer, mean temperatures are at or about 0°C

for 1 to 4 months, at times rising to between 5° and 10°C on

the Antarctic Peninsula. The highest temperatures for the continent occur along the N fringes of the Antarctic Peninsula and

the neighboring islands.

1.1 The average wind velocity is 16 knots, ranging in summer

from calm to 30 knots. Winds are strongest during spring, particularly in September. Clouds and precipitation occur with N

winds, and clear skies and a drop in temperature accompany S

winds. In summer, if light winds are combined with a drop in

temperature, rapid freezing will result. Also, in summer, surface water temperatures are generally below 0°C with isothermal and isohaline conditions existing to great depths. The layer

of relatively warm water that exists in other areas is noticeably

absent.

1.1 A semipermanent low over the Weddell Sea combined with a

semipermanent high centered over the continent causes E

winds along the coast.

1.1 A succession of depressions moving W to E and then N, with

well-defined cyclonic ridges between them, characterize the area's circulation patterns. Depressions enter the Weddell Sea

along three main routes. Between the NE tip of the Antarctic

Peninsula and the South Orkney Islands; across the Antarctic

Peninsula with their centers lying to the N of Marguerite Bay;

and across the Antarctic Peninsula with their centers lying S of

Marguerite Bay.

1.1 If the edge of the drift ice lies farther S than usual in a particular winter, depression tracks may occur farther to the S.

1.1 Along the narrow high pressure wedge of the Antarctic Peninsula, the atmosphere is unstable; hence, abrupt changes and

irregularities in all climatic elements are characteristic of the

W part of the Weddell Sea.

1.1 Precipitation generally occurs as ice or snow. In summer,

measurable amounts of rain are recorded at the Antarctic Peninsula. Blizzards occur infrequently in December and January,

and more often in February and March.

1.1 Ice.—Ice conditions in the Weddell Sea are generally un-favorable. Drift ice is composed of fragments of level ice, hummocky floes, and icebergs. The N limit varies as much as 300

miles in different years. This limit exceeds that of other Antarctic areas and fluctuates as much as 30 miles daily.

1.1 About 85 percent of the drift ice melts each year. The following year, the drift ice is predominantly first-year replacement ice with a thickness of only 1.5m. Constituents of the

drift ice are influenced unequally by wind and current, resulting in differential movement that has a decisive effect on the

composition and stability of the ice cover.

1.1 Prevailing E winds prompt a W current with a velocity of

less than 1 knot. The current sets SW at the E entrance and

flows parallel to the coast and along the Filchner Ice Shelf before being deflected N. Farther out in the Weddell Sea, the current changes direction. The wind and current force the ice to

the W, along the E coast of the Antarctic Peninsula. The ice

jams along the coast, being subjected to great pressure from the

current, and eventually works its way N.

1.1 Floes are more heavily compressed here than elsewhere

along the Antarctic coasts, rendering the SW part of the Weddell Sea unapproachable in any season. In late summer, the NE

and E central parts of the sea are most likely navigable, but ice

conditions are extremely variable.

1.1 Katabatic winds, caused by surface cooling pushing outward

from the land, carry drift ice away from the immediate vicinity
100 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

of the ice shelves.

1.1 Icebergs, the products of numerous glaciers and ice fronts,

may be encountered in all parts of the Weddell Sea. In 1969,

two giant icebergs, one 25 miles wide and 55 miles long and

the other 38 miles wide and 62 miles long, were reported in the

Weddell Sea.

1.1 Tides—Currents.—The tides in the Weddell Sea, as in the

rest of the Antarctic Ocean, are predominantly diurnal, characterized by one HW and one LW each tidal day. At the N extremity of the Antarctic Peninsula, mixed tides are present. The

range of tide varies from 0.6m in the N limits of the sea to 3m

in the W part of the sea.

1.1 The tidal currents tend to flood in a counter clockwise direction and ebb in the reverse.

1.1 A belt of clockwise eddies, known as the Antarctic Circumpolar Current or West Wind Drift, transports large volumes of

water E and NE around Antarctica. Along the coast of the continent, E or SE winds prevail, resulting in a W current known

as the East Wind Drift. Since these are associated with clockwise eddies they eventually turn N.

1.1 One clockwise eddy is a semipermanent feature of the Weddell Sea. Its rotation sets W and is then forced N, due mostly to

the configuration of the W coast of the Weddell Sea, specifically the protuberance of the Antarctic Peninsula. The current sets

W and is then directed between NE and E, joining with the

Antarctic Circumpolar Current in the N part of the Weddell

Sea. A small branch of the current leads NW through Joinville

Strait, eventually becoming part of the current system of the

Bellinghausen Sea.

1.1 Depths—Limitations.—Depths in the Weddell Sea are generally greater than 3,600m. The 500, 800, and 1,000m curves

extend from the Antarctic Peninsula to Coats Land, between

72°S and 73°S. The 900m curve is irregular, extending S at one

point to the E limit of the Filchner Ice Shelf, between 35°W

and 40°W. To the E of this area, the bottom shoals gradually to

Coats Land, where the continental shelf is comparatively narrow and irregular, with the 500m curve lying close to the coast.

On the W side of the Weddell Sea, soundings indicate the existence of a broad shelf. To the S of the 500m curve, a series of

level terraces occur with depths of 270 to 475m. The bottom is

composed mostly of blue, glacial mud approx-imating red clay.

1.1 Caution.—The charted areas of the Weddell Sea have not

been completely surveyed and most of the data is of reconnaissance nature only.

1.1 When approaching the NW and W parts of the sea from high

latitudes, ice may trap a vessel and subject its hull to regions of

high pressure. Therefore, mariners must use extreme care when

navigating in these waters.

1.1 The Larsen Ice Shelf N of Robertson Island (65°10'S.,

59°35'W.) has collapsed in an approximate WNW direction as

far as the solid ground of the Antarctic Peninsula, leaving a

large expanse of sea exposed. This area is encumbered by old

ice, many ice floes, and recent formations of sea ice, all of

which are highly influenced by tidal currents. The face of the

ice shelf S of Robertson Island must be considered unsafe due

to frequent calving. 

1.1 Although the area between Robertson Island and Cape Longing is free of fast ice, navigability of this area cannot be determined due to lack of surveys. 

1.1 All the inlets and bays of the Antarctic Peninsula whose

coastlines consist entirely or partially of ice or ice fronts have

suffered significant ablation landward and exhibit deformation.

Calving from the ice has also accelerated, exposing uncharted

land and rocks. This is particularly significant along the N

coast of Hope Bay (see paragraph 1.34) and along the ice shelf

of the Petrel Cove roadstead (see paragraph 1.37). The contours displayed on the radar screen in these cases may cause

confusion and uncertainty in the vessel’s position. 

Cape Norvegia to the Filchner Ice Shelf

1.2 The E coast of the Weddell Sea includes Queen Maud

Land which extends W from Cape Norvegia to the E end of the

Filchner Ice Shelf, in Coats Land.

1.2 Cape Norvegia (71°20'S., 12°18'W.), on the E side of the

Weddell Sea, is prominent and the land rises to a height 500m

close SE of it. Stranded icebergs have been reported stretching

to the SW of the cape in depths of up to 221m, but greater

depths lie E of this area.

1.2 The cape is fronted by an ice shelf, about 50 miles wide,

which is called Riiser-Larsen. An angle is formed at the cape

and a large bight is contained SW of Seal Bay. Two small islands lie at this point and may best be seen on the chart.

1.2 The Princess Martha Coast (72°00'S., 7°30'W.), in Queen

Maud Land, is fronted by a cliffed ice face, 21 to 36m high.

The W part of the coast consists of the Riiser-Larsen Ice Shelf,

an extensive ice mass. The shelf leads SW from Cape Norvegia

to Lyddan Island. An inlet, extending 8 miles S, indents the

shelf, 20 miles SW of Seal Bay. Depths within the inlet are unknown and two islands lie at the head.

1.2 The Kraul Mountains (73°30'S., 14°10'W.), standing 60

miles from the coast, are surrounded by the Riiser-Larsen Ice

Shelf. They form a chain of peaks and nunataks, rising to an elevation of 1,199m.

1.2 Lyddan Island (74°25'S., 20°45'W.), ice-covered, lies at the

SW end of the Riiser-Larsen Ice Shelf, about 25 miles from

Queen Maud Land. It is about 45 miles long and has three narrow arms.

1.2 Coats Land (77°00'S., 27°30'W.) encompasses the E coast

of the Weddell Sea between 20°W and 36°W, where it joins the

E end of the Filchner Ice Shelf. Contained within Coats Land

are the Caird Coast and the Luitpold Coast, presenting a near

continuous ice cliff to the sea.

1.2 The Stancomb-Wills Glacier (75°18'S., 19°00'W.) leads

NE from Coats Land, becoming the extensive the StancombWills Glacier Tongue (75°00'S., 22°00'W.) to the SW of Lyddan Island.

1.2 Caird Coast (76°00'S., 24°00'W.) leads SW to the W limit

of the Hayes Glacier. Within this coast are the Brunt Ice Shelf,

the Dawson-Lambton Glacier, and the Hayes Glacier.

1.2 Brunt Ice Falls (75°55'S., 25°00'W.) extends 50 miles along

the Caird Coast to where the steep ice-covered shore descends

to the Brunt Ice Shelf (75°40'S., 25°00'W.). This shelf borders

the coast between the Stancomb-Wills Glacier Tongue and the

NE end of the Dawson-Lambton Glacier.

1.3 McDonald Ice Rumples (75°28'S., 26°18'W.) is a severely disturbed glacial area lying on the N side of the Brunt

Ice Shelf. It descends from ice-covered hills, 305 to 610m high,

and terminate at the sea in perpendicular ice walls, 120 to
Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 101

Pub. 200

153m high. Crevasses and pressure ridges are present within

the area. A small bay lies N of the glacier and is open to N

winds. Within the bay, the glacial ice descends to about 1m

above sea level. The seaward end of the glacial face extends

about 17 miles SW. A sounding of 146m found in this bay indicates that the glacier is aground and is moving upward.

1.3 Halley Bay (75°24'S., 26°30'W.) indents the ice shelf to the

W of McDonald Ice Rumples, 18 miles SW of Lyddan Island.

A least depth could not be determined (1984) in the bay because, like much of the coast, it had not been accurately surveyed. Halley, a permanently-manned station of the British

Antarctic Survey, is situated in the vicinity of the bay. This station is continually moving due to the motion of the ice.

1.3 Tottan Hills, standing more than 200 miles E of Halley Bay,

were reported (1981) to be visible from the station.

1.3 The Dawson-Lambton Glacier (76°08'S., 26°45'W.) is a

huge glacial out-flow lying about 30 miles SSW of Halley Bay.

It is heavily crevassed and broken, rises to elevations of 900 to

1,200m, and forms a 30-mile front with a floating tongue.

1.3 The Hayes Glacier (76°16'S., 27°54'W.), discovered in

1967 and charted as part of the Dawson-Lambton Glacier,

leads SW to the border of the Luitpold Coast.

1.3 The Luitpold Coast (77°30'S., 32°00'W.) is that part of

Coats Land lying between the Hayes Glacier and the E end of

the Filchner Ice Shelf. The coast attains a height of 610m and

slopes gradually to an unbroken ice cliff, 9 to 30m high. About

25 miles SW of the Hayes Glacier and about 0.4 mile seaward

of the ice front, an angle (76°41'S., 30°25'W.) of the ice wall

exists in a depth of 114m. Many large icebergs, showing tidemarks, have been reported grounded in this area.

1.3 An inlet, 12 miles long, indents the ice shelf, 55 miles SW of

the Dawson-Lambton Glacier. In 1984, depths within this inlet

were unknown.

1.3 From this point, the ice shelf leads SW for 60 miles to Vahsel

Bay (Duke Ernst Bay) (77°49'S., 35°07'W.). The E side of this

bay is bounded by nunataks and glaciers.

1.3 The Schweitzer Glacier and the Lerchenfeld Glacier, which

lead W, join with the Penck Glacier, which descends to the N.

These glaciers then extend 8 miles NW as an ice tongue into

Vahsel Bay. Two huts are reported to stand in an indentation on

the N side of the Schweitzer Glacier.

1.4 General Belgrano II is a base station surmounting a

small rock outcrop with an elevation of 400m. It is situated at

the junction of the Schweitzer Glacier, the Lerchenfeld Glacier,

and the Penck Glacier and overlooks Vahsel Bay.

1.4 The Littlewood Nunataks are a group of four lichen-covered

rock outcrops, each about 45m wide and brick-red in color,

which are located between the Schweitzer Glacier and the

Lerchenfeld Glacier. Bertrab Nunatak is a bare rock, 530m

high, standing SW of the Lerchenfeld Glacier.

1.4 The coast leads W for 5 miles from the ice tongue formed by

the glaciers and then S for about 10 miles to the Wiedenmann

Glacier. The Moltke Nunataks, forming a chain standing in a

N/S line, rise along this stretch of coast, 8 miles SW of the ice

tongue.

1.4 A glacier, 15 miles long, lies S of the Moltke Nunataks and

extends to the E end of the Filchner Ice Shelf.

1.4 The coast in the vicinity Vahsel Bay is reported to be unstable and calfing of ice occurs.

1.4 A glacier was reported (1955) to be in motion in the vicinity

of Vahsel Bay. Deep fissures and deformations were noted in

the ice shelf which was 41m high. Many tabular icebergs were

also reported in this area.

The Filchner Ice Shelf to the Bowman Peninsula

(The Lassiter Coast)

1.5 The S coast of the Weddell Sea extends W from the E

end of the Filchner Ice Shelf and encompasses Berkner Island

and the Ronne Ice Shelf.

1.5 The Filchner Ice Shelf (79°00'S., 40°00'W.) extends about

130 miles in a general W and WSW direction, between Vahsel

Bay and Berkner Island, and S for over 200 miles. It is fed by

three glaciers, Slessor, Recovery, and Support Force.

1.5 The Slessor Glacier and the Recovery Glacier lie on either

side of the Shackleton Range (80°40'S., 26°00'W.). This mountain range, standing on the SE side of the Filchner Ice Shelf,

rises to an elevation of 2,010m and extends in an E/W direction

for about 85 miles.

1.5 The Slessor Glacier, about 75 miles long and 50 miles wide,

flows W into the Filchner Ice Shelf, on the N side of the range.

The Recovery Glacier, about 60 miles long and 40 miles wide

at its mouth, flows W into the Filchner Ice Shelf, to the S of the

range. The Support Force Glacier, a major glacier in the Pensacola Mountains, flows N into the ice shelf.

1.5 The Pensacola Mountains (83°45'S., 55°00'W.), rising on

the S side of the ice shelf, is a range which extends about 280

miles in a NE/SW direction. This range is located in the E part

of Edith Ronne Land (83°00'S., 60°00'W.), which forms the inland border of the Filchner Ice Shelf and the Ronne Ice Shelf.

1.5 The huts of the former Shackleton Station are reported to

stand about 34 miles W of Vahsel Bay.

1.5 The General Belgrano Station, an Argentinean base, is situated about 20 miles W of the former Shackleton Station. A

beacon, 42m high, and a flagpole stand at the site. The beacon

consists of an iron tripod with a slatted yellow and black topmark. A black wooden tripod, with a black square topmark,

was reported (1962) to stand about 1 mile W of the station.

1.5 About 60 miles W of Vahsel Bay, the ice shelf projects N in a

promontory that is 30 miles wide and 15 miles long. The NE

side of this promontory is indented by a crevasse that extends

about 18 miles S. The site of the former Ellsworth Station,

marked by huts, is situated on the E side of the entrance to the

crevasse. The W side of the promontory trends 27 miles S and

SW to Gould Bay.

1.5 Gould Bay (78°00'S., 45°00'W.) lies at the junction of the

Filchner Ice Shelf and Berkner Island. It is the southernmost

part of the Weddell Sea that is accessible to ships. The bay is

about 20 miles wide and is reported to offer a suitable place to

land a wintering party.

1.5 Berkner Island (79°30'S., 47°30'W.), lying at the W end of

the Filchner Ice Shelf, is ice-covered, about 200 miles long,

and about 85 miles wide. It rises to an elevation of 975m.

1.5 General Belgrano III (77°54'S., 45°59'W.), a base administered by Argentina, was reported to have been deactivated in

1983.

1.5 Hemmen Ice Rise (77°57'S., 49°46'W.), 11 miles long and 2

miles wide, extends from the NW extremity of Berkner Island

in the Ronne Ice Shelf.
102 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

1.5 Caution.—Large ice floes calved from the Filcher Ice Shelf

have beached on Belgrano Shoals NE of Berkner Island. The

beached floes are impeding the general circulation of the sea

ice in this area, affecting navigation as far as Vahsel Bay, the

Filcher Ice Shelf, and the approaches to Berkner Island. 

1.6 The Ronne Ice Shelf (78°30'S., 61°00'W.) is the larger of the two major ice shelves located at the head of the Weddell Sea. It extends NW from Berkner Island to the S end of the

Antarctic Peninsula. The shelf is bordered to the W by

Ellsworth Land and covers an estimated area of 329,914 km2.

1.6 A penguin rookery lies about 34 miles NW of Gould Bay, N

of Berkner Island. Close W of the rookery, an inlet indents the

ice shelf and extends 2 miles S.

1.6 The Ronne Ice Shelf leads NW for about 60 miles, where it

is fronted by numerous ice peaks, and then trends uneventfully

NW for 180 miles to the Bowman Peninsula.

1.6 The Orville Coast (75°45'S., 65°30'W.) is the land bordering the W side of the Ronne Ice Shelf between Cape Adams, at

the S end of the Bowman Peninsula, and Cape Zumberge, to

the S. The coast is entirely icebound within the ice shelf.

1.6 Cape Zumberge (76°14'S., 69°40'W.), a steep and rocky

cape, is located on the W side of the Ronne Ice Shelf.

1.6 Information for this part of the Weddell Sea is limited as it is

the least accessible by vessels due to the concentration of drift

ice.

The Antarctic Peninsula

1.7 The Antarctic Peninsula (69°30'S., 65°00'W.) is the

area at the NW end of the Ronne Ice Shelf where the coast

turns sharply N. It is the major peninsula of the continent, extending from Prime Head, at its N extremity, to a line between

Cape Adams and a point located on the mainland coast, S of

the Eklund Islands.

1.7 The peninsula consists of a snow-covered plateau, 1,067m

high, in its N part and gradually increases to an elevation of

3,658m in its S part. The plateau is broken occasionally by

snow-covered peaks. The cliffs on the W side of the plateau are

dissected by numerous glaciers and ice falls which descend to

the coastal limits. Numerous bays and indentations form the W

shore which, for the greater part, is covered by piedmont ice.

Many islands, islets, and rocks lie seaward of the cliffs. The E

coast is broken by valley glaciers that fill long fjords, the seaward approaches of which are inaccessible by vessels due to an

extensive shelf ice formation fringing the greater portion of the

E shore.

Palmer Land (West Coast)

1.8 Palmer Land (71°30'S., 65°00'W.) is that part of the

Antarctic Peninsula lying S of a line joining Cape Joremy and

Cape Agassiz. It includes the Lassiter Coast, the Black Coast,

and the Wilkins Coast between Cape Adams and Cape Agassiz.

1.8 The Lassiter Coast (73°45'S., 62°00'W.) is that part of the E

coast of Palmer Land extending between Cape Adams and

Cape Mackintosh. Glaciers are an integral part of the terrain in

this vicinity with many leading E into the Weddell Sea.

1.8 The Bowman Peninsula (74°47'S., 62°22'W.), located at the

S end of Palmer Land, is 25 miles long and 15 miles wide in its

N and central portions. It leads in a N/S direction, is ice-covered, and narrows toward the S where it terminates at Cape Adams.

1.8 Cape Adams marks the N entrance point of Gardner Inlet, at

the N end of the Ronne Ice Shelf.

1.8 Mount Austin (74°53'S., 63°10'W.), a conspicuous rocky

mass, stands at the head of Gardner Inlet and rises to an elevation of 955m.

1.8 Nantucket Inlet (74°35'S., 61°45'W.), ice-filled, is 6 miles

wide and 13 miles long. It is bounded on the S side by the

Bowman Peninsula and on the N side by the Smith Peninsula.

This inlet is fed from the NW by the Johnston Glacier. Mount

Owen, 1,105m high, stands at the head of this inlet. The S side

of the entrance to the inlet is formed by the ice free face of the

coastal piedmont. Open water leads, bordering the fringing

coastal ice, reportedly appear less frequently to the S of the inlet.

1.8 The Smith Peninsula (74°25'S., 61°15'W.), ice-covered, is a

dog-legged peninsula which is 10 miles wide and 25 miles

long. Cape Fiske forms the easternmost extremity of this peninsula.

1.8 Keller Inlet, ice-filled, is 10 miles wide at its mouth. This inlet lies N of the Smith Peninsula and indents the coast for about

12 miles in a NE direction. Like many inlets along this peninsula, it is glacier-fed.

1.8 Mount Nash (74°14'S., 62°20'W.), 1,295m high, stands 13

miles WNW of Keller Inlet and 12 miles NNE of Mount Owen.

1.8 Wright Inlet, lying between Cape Little and Cape Wheeler,

is engulfed with ice that is fed by the Swann Glacier and the

Waverly Glacier.

1.8 Mount Tricorn (73°58'S., 61°45'W.), a distinctive massif,

has a vertical rock face, 1,612m high, and stands at the head of

Wright Inlet. It is generally snow-free while the interior land in

the vicinity is completely snow-covered.

1.8 Howkins Inlet (73°40'S., 60°54'W.) lies 18 miles N of Cape

Wheeler. Arctowski Peak, standing 8 miles WSW of the head

of this inlet, is isolated, snow-covered, and 1,410m high.

1.8 Howkins Inlet is entered between Lamb Point and Cape

Brooks. It was reported (1973) that an ice front extended into

the Weddell Sea at this point and completely encompassed all

the inlets in this area. Lamb Point is low and ice-covered. Cape

Brooks is fronted by steep, conspicuous walls which rise to a

height of 465m.

1.9 New Bedford Inlet (73°22'S., 61°15'W.), located N

of Howkins Inlet, is a large, pouch-shaped, and ice-filled bay. It

is 10 miles wide, 13 miles long, and extends between Cape

Brooks and Cape Kidson. The N and S shores of this inlet

present almost vertical and ice free piedmont cliffs and the

head is fed by glaciers. The rock walls of the glaciers are evenly cut and, to a large degree, are ice free. The head of the inlet

is marked by a distinctive and isolated massif. This massif is

entirely snow-covered and rounded on its W side, but rocky

and snow-free on its E slopes where it terminates in a sharp,

projecting cape. The ice in the inlet is undulating with many

rifts and crevasses.

1.9 Court Nunatak (73°22'S., 61°36'W.), which is 3 miles long

and 685m high, stands close E of a glacier, on the W side of

New Bedford Inlet. Mount Barkow rises at the E end of the
Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 103

Pub. 200

ridge that separates the glaciers near the head and rises to an elevation of 1,390m.

1.9 Mount Grimminger (73°18'S., 62°18'W.), rising NE of

Mount Barkow, is cone-shaped, mostly ice-covered, and

1,680m high.

1.9 The high, rocky coastal piedmont extends to the S of New

Bedford Inlet and loses its cliff-like face, assuming the aspect

of a continuous slope. Widely scattered peaks rise in the interior and areas of level country lie between them.

1.9 Cape Kidson, located on the N side of New Bedford Inlet, is

an abrupt rock scarp, 300m high.

1.9 Mossman Inlet, narrow and ice-filled, recedes 10 miles N between Cape Kidson and Cape Deacon, on the S side of the

Kemp Peninsula.

1.9 The Kemp Peninsula (73°08'S., 60°15'W.) is that part of the

mainand extending E at the N limit of the Lassiter Coast. This

irregular ice-covered peninsula extends 26 miles in a N/S direction and is 5 to 12 miles wide. It projects E between the

heads of Mason Inlet and Mossman Inlet and rises to an ele-vation of 305m. Cape Deacon, ice-covered, is located at the S end

of the peninsula. The N end of the peninsula is low, ice-covered, and known as Cape Mackintosh.

1.9 On the N side of Kemp Peninsula, E of Cape Mackintosh,

Mason Inlet indents the coast and extends 15 miles in a SW direction. This inlet is ice-filled and fed by the Clowes Glacier

which enters from the W. Cape Mackintosh marks the N limit

of the Lassiter Coast and the S limit of the Black Coast.

1.9 The Black Coast (71°45'S., 62°00'W.) extends 130 miles N

from Cape Mackintosh to Cape Boggs. Glaciers are common

along the S part of this coast with very few glaciers in the N

part.

1.9 Violante Inlet (72°35'S., 61°05'W.), large and ice-filled, is

16 miles long and 12 to 15 miles wide. It is entered between

Cape Fanning, on the N side, and Cape Herdman, on the S side.

The Maury Glacier, 4 miles wide, and the Defant Glacier, 2

miles wide at its mouth, flow, respectively, ENE and ESE into

the inlet.

1.9 On the S side of this inlet, close E of the Maury Glacier,

Mount Reynolds rises to an elevation of 1,128m. It is snowcapped and marked by a large massif. The walls of the massif

are composed of a series of aretes, having bare rock on the

steep lower slopes and snow on the heights. They are surmounted by a network of connecting sharp peaks and ridges.

Inland from this massif, numerous glaciers descend from the

high interior and flow between the mountain masses of the

coastal range.

1.9 Pullen Island (72°35'S., 60°57'W.) is snow-covered, 5 miles

long, and rises to a height of 495m at its N end, about 5 miles E

of the glacial wall in the inlet. This island is distinctive because

of its precipitous, ice-free cliffs on the N side and its gentle

slopes on the S side. The slopes terminate in a long, low terrace

which extends S close to the piedmont shores of the inlet.

1.10 The Merz Peninsula (72°15'S., 61°05'W.), irregular

and ice-covered, extends about 15 miles in an E/W direction

and is 25 miles wide. It lies between Hilton Inlet and Violante

Inlet, on the E coast of Palmer Land.

1.10 Cape Christmas is abrupt and rises to a height of 320m. Cape

Fanning marks the entrance to Wust Inlet.

1.10 Wust Inlet (72°20'S., 60°50'W.) is 2 to 5 miles wide and icefilled. Schott Inlet leads N and indents the Merz Peninsula

about 17 miles N of Violante Inlet. Flagon Point marks the S

side of the entrance into Schott Inlet and is surmounted by two

peaks, 293 and 395m high. 

1.10 At the E edge of the ice front, about 7 miles E of Flagon

Point, Butler Island rises to an elevation of 183m. It is 6 miles

wide, circular, and ice-covered.

1.10 At the NE end of the Merz Peninsula, a smaller peninsula

leads N and forms a headland, 271m high. This headland is icecovered, surmounted by small rock outcrops, and is known as

Cape Darlington.

1.10 Hilton Inlet (71°57'S., 61°20'W.) is ice-filled, 12 miles

wide, and 22 miles long. It leads between Cape Darlington and

Cape Knowles. The Gruening Glacier, a broad glacier, descends in a SE direction between steep, rocky walls into the

NW part of the inlet. The Kellogg Glacier, 9 miles long, leads

SE and joins with the Gruening Glacier, close inland of the

head of Hilton Inlet. Another unnamed glacier flows into the

inlet from the S.

1.11 The Condor Peninsula (71°46'S., 61°30'W.) encompasses that part of the Black Coast between Hilton Inlet and

Odom Inlet. Cape Knowles, located at the S end of the peninsula, rises to an elevation of 320m.

1.11 Cape MacDonald, a distinctive headland, forms the S side of

the entrance to Odom Inlet and is composed of a vertical, bare

rock wall. It reaches the maximum height of 430m at the N end

where it descends in a perpendicular cliff to the sea ice. A

snow-free nunatak, with an identical outline, stands close S of

this entrance point.

1.11 Cape Bryant (71°12'S., 60°55'W.) is located about 20 miles

N of Cape MacDonald. The coast between is indented by three

inlets, Odom, Lamplugh, and Palmer.

1.11 Odom Inlet trends SW for about 10 miles. Many rocky peaks

stand at the head of this inlet between which numerous glaciers

descend to the sea. This inlet widens as it recedes from the entrance.

1.11 O'Sullivan Peak (71°26'S., 62°06'W.), 1,768m high, stands

about 11 miles W of the N arm of Odom Inlet, near the S end

of an ice-covered ridge.

1.11 Mount Jackson (71°23'S., 63°22'W.) dominates the upland

in the S part of Palmer Land. This remarkable massif is a vast

cirque open to the N. From the S and E, it presents a steeple

summit, 4,191m high, which stands majestically above the

high plateau. On the N side, it is flanked by another peak,

about 1,000m lower in elevation. A range of mountains rises E

of Mount Jackson and flanks the coast. 

1.11 Cape Howard is located at the terminus of the Snyder Peninsula, between Odom Inlet and Lamplugh Inlet. The cape is

marked by a high, flat-topped and snow-covered promontory

which has steep snow-free cliffs on its S face and a distinctive

pyramidal-shaped rock at its lowest extremity.

1.11 Lamplugh Inlet indents the coast for 7 miles between Cape

Howard, to the S, and Cape Healy, to the N. This inlet narrows,

from a width of 5 miles at the entrance, to a width of about 1

mile, at the head. Several large, rocky masses, with steep

slopes, stand above the piedmont at the head of the inlet.

1.11 The Foster Peninsula is high, ice-covered, and protrudes

from the coast to the N of Lamplugh Inlet. It terminates in

Cape Healy, at the S end, and Cape Musselman, at the N end.
104 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

1.11 Cape Healy is composed of a prominent, square-shaped rock

with a stepped profile on its S face. Cape Musselman is located

4 miles N of Cape Healy, on the S side of the entrance to Palmer Inlet. Between Cape Healy and Cape Musselman, the coastal

piedmont has extensive ice falls descending E to the sea ice

which is about 15m above sea level.

1.11 Palmer Inlet, rectangular-shaped, indents the coast for about

8 miles and is ice-filled. Its shores are formed by almost vertical cliffs of the piedmont with many bare and rocky walls.

1.11 Marshall Peak (71°09'S., 61°32'W.), standing 6 miles inland of Palmer Inlet, rises to an elevation of 1,207m. This peak

is ice-covered, except for its rocky NE side.

1.11 Cape Bryant, located at the N side of Palmer Inlet, is a high,

snow-covered and dome-shaped cliff with a dimpled skyline.

1.11 The Black Coast leads 27 miles NW and N from Cape Bryant to Cape Sharbonneau.

1.12 Mount Hill (70°56'S., 61°42'W.), 945m high, stands

23 miles NW of Cape Bryant and is marked by a thin cap of

bare rock at its summit.

1.12 Cape Sharbonneau rises 8 miles NE of Mount Hill, at the S

entrance to Lehrke Inlet. This cape is formed by a rounded,

snow-covered headland.

1.12 Morency Island lies offshore, about 10 miles NW of Cape

Bryant. This island is 213m high and rocky, with steep cliffs on

its E side and gentle slopes on its W side.

1.12 Steele Island, 12 miles long and 10 miles wide, lies 8 miles

NE of Cape Bryant. It is snow-covered and rises to an elevation

of 488m. The deep slopes of the island are crevassed, but no

rock outcrops are visible. Like Butler Island, Steele Island lies

at the edge of the ice shelf, on the W side of the Weddell Sea.

1.12 Lehrke Inlet (70°49'S., 61°45'W.) is 8 miles wide and recedes SW for 17 miles. It is ice-filled and entered between

Cape Sharbonneau, on the S side, and Cape Boggs, on the N.

Many massive ridges and peaks stand close inland from the

head of this inlet and steep ice falls descend to the coastal low

lands. An islet, 12m high, lies off the mouth of the inlet.

1.12 The Eielson Peninsula, rugged and mainly snow-covered,

borders the NW side of Lehrke Inlet. It is 20 miles long, about

10 miles wide, and terminates at Cape Boggs. This cape is

composed of an ice-capped headland, with precipitous cliffs of

igneous rock, and is 762m high. It forms the coastal abutment

of the Eternity Range foothills.

1.12 Mount Thompson (70°40'S., 62°21'W.), standing at the SW

end of the Eielson Peninsula, is 1,692m high. Dolleman Island,

396m high, lies 8 miles E of Cape Boggs. It is rounded and icecovered.

1.12 Cape Boggs forms the N extremity of the Black Coast at its

junction with Wilkins Coast.

1.13 The Wilkins Coast (69°40'S., 63°00'W.) extends between Cape Boggs and Cape Agassiz, the N limit of Palmer

Land.

1.13 Eternity Range (69°46'S., 64°34'W.) stands inland of the

Wilkins Coast and trends in a N/S direction for about 28 miles.

Mount Faith, Mount Hope, and Mount Charity are the three

most prominent features of this range.

1.13 Mount Hope (69°46'S., 64°34'W.), 2,859m high, is the central and highest peak of the Eternity Range. It is flanked by

Mount Faith, 2,652m high, rising 9 miles N and Mount Charity, 2,682m high, rising 11 miles S.

1.13 Dyer Plateau (70°30'S., 65°00'W.), broad and ice-covered,

lies W of the Eternity Range and rises to an elevation of

1,067m. The Eland Mountains, another range, stands at the S

end of the Wilkins Coast, to the E of the Eielson Peninsula. It

extends for about 20 miles in a NE/SW direction and rises to an

elevation of 2,440m.

1.13 Smith Inlet (70°25'S., 62°00'W.) indents the coast and extends 15 miles W. The Clifford Glacier flows into the E end of

this inlet. It is a broad glacier, about 40 miles long, and flows in

an ESE direction through the gap lying between the Eland

Mountains and Mount Tenniel, which is 1,625m high.

1.13 Cape Collier, a broad and ice-covered projection, marks the

N side of the entrance to Smith Inlet. Numerous snow-covered

nunataks and ridges, up to 762m high, stand on the slopes of

the piedmont in this vicinity and rise steeply from the sea ice.

At the entrance to Smith Inlet, depths of 36.6m lying off Cape

Collier and 110m off Smith Inlet have been recorded.

1.13 The coast trends 17 miles N and NW from Cape Collier to

James Nunatak, which is conical and rises to an elevation of

410m. Lewis Point, located 5 miles N of James Nunatak, is

marked by rocky exposures on its N side and surmounted by an

ice-covered dome, 510m high. This point is located at the S

end of the mouth of the Anthony Glacier.

1.14 Ewing Island (69°54'S., 61°13'W.) lies 20 miles E of

Lewis Point at the S end of the Larsen Ice Shelf. This island is

ice-covered and dome-shaped. It is 8 miles in diameter and rises to an elevation of 305m.

1.14 The Anthony Glacier flows in an ESE direction to the coast,

close NW of Lewis Point.

1.14 Stefansson Strait (69°26'S., 62°25'W.) is ice-filled, 35

miles long, and 3 to 10 miles wide. It leads between the Wilkins Coast and Hearst Island. The shelf ice in the straight varies. It was reported (1940) that shelf ice in the N part was 146m

above sea level, while it was only 15m above sea level in the S

part.

1.14 The highlands, to the E of the Eternity Range, descend in a

maze of lower peaks and an ice-covered plateau which is bordered by hills, up to 1,524m high. A broad coastal piedmont

extends to the E of these mountains and reaches the coast in

steep ice cliffs, up to 610m high.

1.14 Cape Rymill, the NE point of the coastal piedmont, is located 14 miles above the S entrance to Stefansson Strait. It is

faced by a steep, metamorphic rock cliff, 457m high, which

projects out from the ice cap.

1.14 Rhino Rock, black and steep, stands 6 miles SSW of Cape

Rymill and rises to an elevation of 1,219m. It forms the E extremity of a rounded and rocky massif, 1,524m high. This massif extends inland for about 7 miles and its W end is buried

beneath the continental ice. Rhino Rock is located 4 miles W

of the cliffed edge of the piedmont and appears to be separated

from its parent mass by a low column.

1.14 Hearst Island (69°25'S., 62°10'W.) lies on the E side of Stefansson Strait, 4 miles E of Cape Rymill. This island is 36

miles long, 7 miles wide, and has no visible rock outcrops. It is

ice-covered, domed-shaped, and rises to an elevation of 366m.

The W side of the island is steep and crevassed. The sea ice

fronting the E side of the island is usually widely broken into

pressure ridges and contains many icebergs.
Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 105

Pub. 200

1.14 The coast trends NNW for about 9 miles from Cape Rymill

to Cape Reichelderfer (69°22'S., 62°43'W.), a rounded and icecovered headland. A nearly vertical rock cliff, known as DeBusk Scarp, is located 4 miles W of the cape. It is 2 miles long

and rises to an elevation of 300m.

1.14 The coast to the N of Cape Reichelderfer is indented by an

inlet. The N side of the inlet, which is 5 miles long, is bordered

by Finley Heights. The Bingham Glacier feeds into the inlet

from the W. This glacier crosses Palmer Land, extending from

the coast of the Weddell Sea to the coast of Marguerite Bay. It

is about 8 miles wide at the E entrance and rises in steep ice

falls from the ice shelf, which is 45m above sea level, to an elevation of 2,134m, near the meridian of 64°30'W. Its N and S

flanks are marked by high peaks with numerous tributary glaciers entering from the bordering highlands.

1.14 Finley Heights, to the N of the Bingham Glacier, fronts the

ice shelf and forms a stretch of rugged coast, about 7 miles

long. It rises to a prominent, snow-covered and rocky mass,

1,070m high.

1.14 Cape Hinks (69°12'S., 63°07'W.), located at the NE end of

Finley Heights, is formed by a low, dark, and rocky cliff, 222m

high.

1.14 The Lurabee Glacier, lying on the N side of Finley Heights,

is about 5 miles wide. It extends in a SW direction for 10 miles

where it joins the major transverse rift crossing Palmer Land.

1.14 Cape Keeler is located 20 miles N of Cape Hinks. The coast

between is distinctive and is formed by a series of low fault

troughs which are bordered by vertical rock walls and terminate in low, steep faces.

1.14 Scripps Heights surmount the peninsula extending between

the Lurabee Glacier and the Casey Glacier. Its peaks are rugged and largely ice-covered. The heights terminate at Cape

Walcott, an ice-covered headland, 625m high.

1.14 Casey Inlet, lying close N of Cape Walcott, is fed from the

W by the Athene Glacier and the Casey Glacier. The Athene

Glacier is 10 miles long and merges with the terminus of the

Casey Glacier, which is 6 miles long.

1.14 From Casey Inlet, the coast extends 7 miles and is formed by

Miller Point, Cape Mayo, and Cape Keeler.

1.14 Miller Point, low and black, is formed by bare rock. It is

232m high and forms the termination of a rocky and ice-covered mass. Between this rocky mass and Cape Mayo, a small

glacier trends NW for about 15 miles and merges with the

highland ice which inundates the tableland.

1.14 Cape Mayo, a bare and rocky cliff, is the terminus of a flat,

snow-covered tableland which is 435m high. A narrow glacier

lies between the rocky walls of Cape Keeler and Cape Mayo. It

trends NW for about 15 miles and merges with the snow-covered tableland.

1.14 Cape Keeler, 518m high, has a flat and tent-shaped summit

which slopes gently to the E in slate cliffs. This cape forms the

S side of the entrance to Revelle Inlet.

1.14 The coast to the N of Cape Keeler trends NW along the inlet

and consists of a high snow-covered tableland. It has steep

cliffs through which bare rock is occasionally seen. Revelle Inlet lies between Cape Keeler and Cape Agassiz. It is broad, icefilled, and 15 miles long.

1.14 Cape Agassiz, 130m high, is located at the terminus of the

Wilkins Coast and Palmer Land. It is formed by a narrow icedrowned spur which extends between Revell Inlet and Mobiloil

Inlet.

1.14 The Larsen Ice Shelf (67°30'S., 62°30'W.), located in the

NW part of the Weddell Sea, is 300 miles long. It extends N

along the E coast of the Antarctic Peninsula from close S of

Hearst Island to Cape Longing. The ice shelf encompasses the

N extremity of Palmer Land and almost the entire length of

Graham Land. At one point, this shelf is about 120 miles wide.

A protrusion in the ice shelf occurs about 55 miles NE of

Hearst Island. At this point, the ice extends E for about 23

miles from the general contour of the shelf.

1.14 Gipps Ice Rise (68°46'S., 60°56'W.) is 10 miles long, 9.5

miles wide, and stands 270m above the ice shelf. It is located

on the Larsen Ice Shelf, 35 miles NE of Hearst Island, and is

bounded by ice cliffs on all sides. Depths along the edge of the

ice shelf range from 610m, at the N end of the protrusion described above, to a least depth of 60m, close E of Cape Longing.

Graham Land (West Coast)

1.15 Graham Land (66°00'S., 63°30'W.) is that part of the

Antarctic Peninsula lying N of a line between Cape Jeremy and

Cape Agassiz. It includes the Bowman Coast, the Foyn Coast,

the Oscar II Coast, the Nordenskjold Coast, and the Trinity

Peninsula.

1.15 The Bowman Coast (68°10'S., 65°00'W.), the southernmost

coast of Graham Land, extends 80 miles N from Cape Agassiz,

at the extremity of the Hollick-Kenyon Peninsula, to Cape

Northrup. Several inlets mark the shore of Bowman Coast and

are all engulfed by the Larsen Ice Shelf.

1.15 Mobiloil Inlet, which is ice-filled, leads SW between the

Hollick-Kenyon Peninsula, to the SE, and Rock Pile Point, to

the NW. The Hollick-Kenyon Peninsula is 40 miles long, icecovered, and leads from the main mountain mass of the Antarctic Peninsula. It separates Casey Inlet from Mobiloil Inlet.

1.15 Glaciers radiate from a wide roadstead, located to the W of

Mobiloil Inlet, into the interior of the Palmer Peninsula. One of

these glaciers flows E to the head of the inlet. Along the Bowman Coast, these glaciers are separated by rocky ice-covered

peninsulas. The locus of these glaciers is known as the Traffic

Circle. It is located S of Mount Ptolemy and is marked by a

conspicuous beehive-shaped nunatak, known as Hub Nunatak.

1.15 On the N side of the inlet, a peninsula extends E for 10 miles.

It is marked by Rock Pile Peaks, 1,109m high, which consists

of many sharp peaks and ridges standing prominently above

the ice sheet that envelopes its lower heights. The E extremity

of the peninsula is formed by Rock Pile Point, an ice-covered

and rocky cape, which has several bare rock faces and is 244m

high.

1.15 Solberg Inlet lies between Rock Pile Peaks, to the S, and the

Joerg Peninsula, to the N. It is 5 to 18 miles wide, ice-filled,

and trends about 14 miles in a general W direction to the continental plateau escarpment. A remarkable cirque mountain

stands at the head of the inlet and reaches an elevation of

1,372m. The terrain at the head is composed of a maze of

jagged, snow-covered peaks which extend in wild confusion to

the summit of the continental plateau. Between these peaks,

heavily crevassed ice falls fill the lower slopes. These glacierfilled valleys have steep gradients and trend in a jumbled pattern toward the continental plateau.
106 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

1.15 Trail Inlet, lying 15 miles N of Solberg Inlet, is entered between Three Slice Nunatak and Cape Freeman. This inlet recedes SW for 15 miles and is ice-filled.

1.15 A glacier, about 3 miles wide, lies close W of Solberg Inlet

and trends SW, in a remarkable series of terraced ice falls, to

the continental plateau, which is 1,676m high at this point. On

the W side of the plateau, similar ice falls descend sharply and

extend SW to the NE part of Neny Fjord, on the Fallieres

Coast. The S wall of the glacier is formed by a group of rounded ridges, inundated by highland ice, which gradually descends to the coast and forms a peninsula. This peninsula,

known as the Joerg Peninsula, is about 15 miles long, 3 to 5

miles wide, and projects E toward the Weddell Sea. It is mostly

bare on the N side where the rocky faces are too steep for snow

to lodge upon them. The N side is indented by a number of

small coves at the head of which are many gaps. Small glaciers,

widely crevassed, descend from the heights through these gaps.

The peninsula is submerged by highland ice which rests as a

thin cap on the heights. The seaward termination of the peninsula is formed by a large, rocky mass which attains an elevation

of 1,067m. Pylon Point, the E slopes of which are completely

glacerized, projects seaward and forms a low, rolling ice cape.

The shelf ice at the E side of this point rises 61m above sea level and is heavily crevassed.

1.15 Three Slice Nunatak (68°02'S., 64°57'W.), mostly snowcovered, stands 4 miles NE of Pylon Point. This feature, which

is about 2 miles long and 1 mile wide, is very distinctive and

serves as an excellent landmark. A serrated ridge, with three

prominent slices, forms its long axis.

1.15 The shelf ice lying E of this nunatak is badly crevassed and

at a distance of 5 miles, attains a height of only 18m above sea

level.

1.15 Seligman Inlet is broad and extends 6 miles inland. Choyce

Point and Cape Freeman form the N and S entrance points, respectively, of this inlet. At the S side of the entrance, three narrow glaciers break through the vertical rock wall in diverg-ent

directions. Cape Freeman is formed by a low ice-covered spur

with a prominent dome-shaped nunatak standing at its E end.

Choyce Point, 910m high, is ice-capped and rocky.

1.15 Blackface Point, located 3.3 miles NW of Cape Freeman, is

a precipitous headland with exposed black rock at its extremity.

1.15 The S side of Seligman Inlet is bounded by steep, rocky

cliffs, over 910m high. The Lewis Glacier and the Ahamann

Glacier, separated by Cape Church, flow between the rock

walls into this inlet.

1.15 Tonkin Island, 518m high, lies about 11 miles NE of Cape

Freeman. This island is narrow and ice-capped. Its S end is

formed by a bare rock in the shape of a pyramid, about 1 mile

long. Close N of the pyramid, a snow-covered ridge, 411m

high, extends N for about 2.5 miles.

1.15 Francis Island lies 12 miles ENE of Choyce Point and has an

irregular shape. This island is 7 miles long, 5 miles wide, and

rises to an elevation of 707m. It is mainly ice-covered, but has

several rock exposures and rocky peaks. Like Tonkin Island, it

is encompassed within the ice shelf.

1.15 Tent Nunatak, a conspicuous and pyramidal rock, stands 6

miles N of Choyce Point and marks the S limit of Whirlwind

Inlet. It is 0.5 mile in diameter and emerges from the ice shelf,

1 mile from the S entrance of the inlet.

1.15 Whirlwind Inlet is wide and consists of two bays. A prominent series of narrow glaciers and broken ice falls, known as

the Whirlwind Glaciers, descends from the N, W, and SW

through its vertical rock walls to the ice shelf.

1.15 Cape Northrup forms the N end of the inlet and also marks

the N limit of the Bowman Coast. This cape consists of a conspicuous rocky bluff, 1,160m high, which is mostly ice free

and has nearly vertical sides.

1.15 The Foyn Coast (66°40'S., 64°20'W.) trends 87 miles in a

NE direction from Cape Northrup. It is marked by a continuous

range of sharp snow-covered peaks with steep slopes and ridges.

1.15 Mamelon Island lies 11 miles ENE of Cape Northrup. It is

mostly ice-covered with a smooth and rounded summit.

1.15 Hodges Point, located 6 miles ENE of Cape Northrup, is

rocky and terminates in an impressive black cliff. This point

has twin summits, 940 and 960m high.

1.15 The Hess Glacier leads E to the ice shelf, 12 miles N of Cape

Northrup. It is dominated on the S side by Mount Thora-rinsson, a pyramidal peak, 860m high. This peak is one of the most

distinctive features along the coast.

1.16 Mill Inlet, entered between Monnier Point and Cape

Robinson, lies 13 miles N of the Hess Glacier. Karpf Point, located on the N side of this inlet, is formed by a turret-shaped

bluff, 1,503m high, and is mainly ice free. It marks the term-ination of the inland plateau escarpment. A small rock nunatak

stands 1 mile SSE of this point.

1.16 Cape Chavanne, located at the head of the inlet, is a prominent and partly ice-free bluff. Its S extremity stands at the

mouth of the Breitfuss Glacier and is formed by a conspicuous,

elongated dome. The N side of the inlet is flanked by the Cole

Peninsula, which is 15 miles long and 8 miles wide. This peninsula is ice-covered, except for several rocky spurs which radiate from Mount Hayes.

1.16 Mount Hayes, a plateau-type mountain, rises to a height of

1,140m and stands at the base of the peninsula. Cape Robinson, forming the seaward end of the peninsula, is a rounded

and ice-covered promontory.

1.16 Between Cape Robinson and Cape Alexander, Cabinet Inlet,

which is ice-filled and fed by glaciers, extends NW for about

36 miles. Spur Point, Balder Point, and Cape Casey are headlands projecting from the W side of the inlet.

1.16 Stanley Island, 520m high, lies 4 miles NE of Spur Point.

Ice-free cliffs descend to the ice shelf from its summit which

stands at the W end. The true Antarctic Circle crosses the S extremity of this island in 66°33'S.

1.16 Cape Casey, located 9 miles N of the island, is formed by a

prominent, partly ice-free promontory which rises 753m above

the level of the ice shelf. An island, 792m high, lies about 3

miles NW of this cape. 

1.16 Cape Alexander forms the S end of the Churchill Peninsula.

This ice-covered peninsula extends about 30 miles in a SE direction.

1.16 The Oscar II Coast (65°45'S., 62°30'W.) extends 97 miles

NE from Cape Alexander to Cape Fairweather and is indented

by several inlets. The Jason Peninsula, a prominent projection,

extends E from the coast.

1.16 The Hektoria Glacier, consisting of a series of long bays,

forms the N portion of this coast. The bays are bordered by

steep, rugged, and rocky peninsulas. The coast, to the S of the
Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 107

Pub. 200

glacier, is formed by the steep slopes of several pyramidshaped peaks and ridges which front the inland plateau. A few

steep glaciers flow from the high interior between these peaks

and ridges.

1.16 Adie Inlet extends SW for 25 miles at the S end of the Oscar

II Coast. It leads between Astro Cliffs, located on the Churchill

Peninsula, and Veier Head, located on the Jason Peninsula.

Gulliver Nunatak, 575m high, stands on the N side of this inlet

and is long and narrow. It has rugged and mainly ice free sides

and rises steeply to a flattened ice-free summit. Gemini Nunatak and Borchgrevink Nunatak stand 5 miles and 10 miles, respectively, NNE of Gulliver Nunatak.

1.16 Mount Fritsche (66°00'S., 62°42'W.), 987m high, stands

NW of Borchgrevink Nunatak. This mountain is rugged, steep,

and marks the N side of Richthofen Pass. The pass is 6 miles

wide at its mouth and extends W for about 15 miles. It reduces

the width of the peninsula, in the vicinity of Leroux Bay on the

W coast, to about 25 miles. The pass is completely filled with

glacier ice which flows E from the high plateau between the

steep rock walls.

1.16 Philippe Rise stands E of this area and extends SE for about

10 miles. It consists of a low snow-covered promontory, 7

miles wide, which rises to an elevation of 395m at the W end.

Medea Dome, snow-covered and 350m high, stands at the E

end of this promontory.

1.17 The Jason Peninsula extends 33 miles E from Philippe

Rise and reaches to within 3 miles of the Weddell Sea. The E

terminus of this peninsula is formed by Cape Framnes. The

current in the vicinity of this cape has been reported to set NNE

at a velocity of 1 knot.

1.17 Stratton Inlet, which is ice-filled, indents the S side of the

peninsula, E of Veier Head. Standring Inlet, which is also icefilled, indents the N side of the peninsula.

1.17 Chapman Point (65°55'S., 61°20'W.) and Tashtego Point,

located 21 miles NW, form the entrance to Scar Inlet which is

22 miles long and ice-filled.

1.17 Cape Disappointment forms the E end of the peninsula that

separates Scar Inlet from Exasperation Inlet. This cape is fronted by snow-free cliffs and rises to an elevation of 225m.

1.17 Exasperation Inlet is ice-filled and divided by Delusion Point

and Caution Point into numerous bays which are fed by glaciers.

1.17 Foyn Point, located N of Exasperation Inlet, is surmounted

by a peak, 525m high.

1.17 The Evans Glacier, lying N of Foyn Point, flows between

Whiteside Hill and Shiver Point. It forms a bay, about 4 miles

wide, which indents the coast and extends about 15 miles to

join with the Hektoria Glacier. With Flanders Bay on the W

side, the Evans Glacier reduces the width of the peninsula to

about 12 miles at this locality.

1.17 Cape Fairweather, 705m high, is located at the N end of the

Oscar II Coast and flanked by glaciers. This cape is ice-covered, except for several rocky exposures along its SE and E

sides.

1.17 The Nordenskjuold Coast (64°30'S., 60°30'W.) is that portion of Graham Land lying between Cape Fairweather and

Cape Longing, 61 miles NE. It consists of a high ice-covered

tableland with steep slopes. This striking tableland is known as

the Detroit Plateau.

1.17 A group of islands, lying S of the Nordenskjuold Coast, consists mainly of Robertson Island, Lindenberg Island, and the

Seal Nunataks.

1.17 Robertson Island, the largest and easternmost of the group,

lies 32 miles ESE of Cape Fairweather and is about 10 miles

long and 7 miles wide. It is dome-shaped and snow-covered

with several high pillar-shaped rock masses. The summit at the

S end of the island is 396m high.

1.17 Christensen Nunatak, standing within the Seal Nunataks

group, rises to an elevation of 299m, about 1 mile N of Robertson Island.

1.17 Lindenberg Island, with a sugarloaf appearance, lies 11

miles N of Robertson Island. It is about 1 mile in diameter,

200m high, and dark. A number of low snow-covered rocks extend up to about 1 mile NE of this island. The island is volcanic although no evidence of volcanic activity has occurred

since 1902.

1.18 Seal Nunataks is a chain, which consists of 14 main

islets, that extends 30 miles NW from Robertson Island.

1.18 Oceana Nunatak, about 1 mile long, lies close off the NW

extremity of the island. It is formed by rugged and black lava

mass. Castor Nunatak, 1 mile long, lies about 1 mile from the

W side of the island and has a high summit on its SE side. Hertha Nunatak, a low and featureless rock, is about 1 mile long

and lies 2 miles NW of Castor Nunatak. Arctowski Nunatak, 1

mile long, lies about 2 miles N of Hertha Nunatak and has a

high summit at its E end. Gray Nunatak, 0.5 mile long, lies

about 1 mile NW of Arctowski Nunatak and has a high summit

at its E extremity. Donald Nunatak, lying close W of Gray Nunatak, is lower and has no distinctive features. Bruce Nunatak,

lying 1 mile NW of Donald Nunatak, is formed by a dark and

high-ridged rocky mass, 3 miles long.

1.18 Dallmann Nunatak and Bull Nunatak, both 0.5 mile long, lie

2 miles NW and 3 miles SW, respectively, of the W extremity

of Bruce Nunatak. Unnamed rocks lie about 3.5 miles N and 1

mile S of Dallmann Nunatak. Pedersen Nunatak, the westernmost of the group, lies 8 miles NE of Cape Fairweather. All of

these nunataks are snow-free and of volcanic origin.

1.18 From Cape Fairweather, the Nordenskjuold Coast leads NE

for about 45 miles to the Sobral Peninsula. This stretch of coast

is uneventful.

1.18 Sentinel Nunatak, standing 16 miles NNE of Cape Fairweather, is high, black, and pyramidal in shape. It marks the S

side of the Dryglaski Glacier. This glacier is 18 miles long and

flows SE from the Herbert Plateau.

1.18 Tillberg Peak, 610m high, is ice free and stands on a ridge

that runs E from Foster Plateau toward Sentinel Nunatak. Ruth

Ridge, black and rocky, runs in a N/S direction to the N of the

Dryglaski Glacier. It is 1.5 miles long and terminates in a peak

at its S end. This ridge forms the S end of Detroit Plateau and

marks the change in direction of the plateau escarpment along

the E coast of Graham Land, turning W to form the N wall of

the Dryglaski Glacier.

1.18 Cape Worsley is located E of Ruth Ridge and fronts the ice

shelf. This cape is dome-shaped, 225m high, and has snow-free

cliffs on its S and E sides.

1.18 The Sobral Peninsula trends NE for 20 miles and then extends S from the main coast for 11 miles, terminating at Cape

Sobral. This cape is partly ice free and appears from the air to
108 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

be an island.

1.18 A deep fiord, walled by glaciers, indents the Sobral Peninula and extends inland for 30 miles into the Antarctic Penin-sula. 

1.18 Larsen Inlet, 11 miles wide at its mouth, recedes for 14 miles

and is filled with an ice shelf, broken and crevassed in many

places. It is entered between Cape Sobral and Cape Longing, a

rocky point. A deep fiord, leading E, indents the middle of this

inlet.

1.18 Cape Longing forms the N end of the Nordenskjuold Coast

and also the N limit of the Larsen Ice Shelf. A depth of 331m is

reported to lie about 5 miles E of Cape Longing and is the

shoalest depth charted along the Larsen Ice Shelf.

1.19 The Trinity Peninsula (63°37'S., 58°20'W.) is that

portion of Graham Land lying N of a line between Cape Longing and Cape Kater (63°46'S., 59°54'W.).

1.19 Cape Dubouzet forms the NE extremity of the peninsula. Between this cape and Cape Roquemaurel, 50 miles SW, the land

is comparatively low and covered with a continuous ice sheet

with occasional rock outcrops. Numerous rocky islets and submerged reefs lie offshore and extend up to 10 miles seaward.

These waters have not been thoroughly surveyed and caution

must be exercised when approaching the coast. The most

prominent peaks in this vicinity are Mount Bransfield, 762m

high; Mount Jacquinot, 474m high; and Mount D'Ur-ville,

1,083m high.

1.19 Prince Gustav Channel (63°50'S., 58°15'W.) divides the

mainland from the Ross Island group. It is about 80 miles long

and varies in width from 9 miles, between Bald Head and Vega

Island, to 14 miles, between Cape Longing and Nygren Point at

the S entrance. Three uncharted islands of considerable size

were reported to lie within this channel. The center of the channel can be navigated safely in deep water as far S as 64°06'S,

where passage is blocked by a permanent ice shelf. In January

1985, a vessel secured alongside this ice shelf. Vessels may

pass on either side of Carlson Island in safety, but are advised

to pass not less than 1 mile off Pitt Point due to the existence of

uncharted shoals lying close inshore. It was reported that

strong tidal currents, sometimes with rates in ex-cess of 2

knots, set up and down the channel. The N flow was reported to

be the most pronounced and in addition, strong ed-dies were

observed in the vicinity of the W side of Carlson Is-land. Caution should also be taken in the vicinity of Cape Lachman as a

drying spit extends about 180m N from the shore, a depth of

17m lies within 1 mile NE of the cape and a bank, with a depth

of less than 55m, extends 2 miles farther NE into the channel.

1.19 On the W side of the channel, Cape Longing forms the end

of a large pear-shaped peninsula. This peninsula is connected

to the mainland by Longing Gap, a low valley, which is faced

with snow-free cliffs, up to 180m high. On the E side of the

peninsula, a small and rocky cliff rises to a summit, 340m high.

The remainder of the E side as well as the N side are entirely

covered by ice.

1.19 Tower Peak, standing 5 miles NW of Longing Gap, is 830m

high and has a rocky exposure which stands out clearly from

the evenly contoured ice field.

1.19 The Sjuogren Glacier, lying 19 mile NW of Cape Longing, is

about 15 miles long. It flows SE from Detroit Plateau and enters the channel in the form of a tongue. This glacial tongue is

5 to 7 miles wide and extends E to the vicinity of Persson Island. Mount Hornsby, a prominent and snow-capped mountain, backs the glacier.

1.19 Mount Wild, a sharply defined rocky ridge with several

peaks, has a summit, 926m high. A small nunatak stands on the

glacial tongue, about 6 miles ENE of this ridge.

1.19 From Mount Wild, the coast leads N for about 13 miles to

Mount Roberts. This peak is 955m high and has a dark, mostly

ice-free summit with a flat sloping top.

1.19 The Aitkenhead Glacier lies N of Mount Roberts and leads

10 miles E from Detroit Plateau to Prince Gustav Channel,

close N of Alectoria Island. This latter island is less than 1 mile

long, 107m high, low, and nearly ice free. 

1.19 Mount Bradley has a pyramidal peak, 835m high. It stands N

of the Aitkenhead Glacier, at the S end of a ridge which descends from the Detroit Plateau.

1.19 A least channel depth of 7.3m is reported to lie close W of

Pitt Point.

1.19 Caution.—Although it has been reported (2007) that Prince

Gustav Channel and its S approaches are free of fast ice, exreme care must be taken when navigating in this area due to the

incomplete nature of the surveys. 

1.19 Depths in the approaches to Prince Gustav Channel have

been reported (2007) to be less than charted. 

1.20 Pitt Point (63°51'S., 58°24'W.) consists of a promontory, 84m high, which is located 40 miles above the S entrance

of the channel. The Victory Glacier, gently sloping, is 8 miles

long and lies close N of the point. Azimuth Hill, standing 6

miles N of Pitt Point, is a low and rocky outcrop, 85m high.

1.20 Between Cape Longing and Azimuth Hill, the coast consists

of an almost continuous line of ice cliffs backed by an escarpment of rock or ice that rises towards Detroit Plateau.

1.20 The Russell East Glacier lies on the N side of Azimuth Hill.

It is 6 miles long, 3 miles wide, and leads in an E direction.

Mount Canicula is formed by two peaks, 825 and 890m high. It

stands 3 miles E of Sirius Knoll, on the divide which separates

the Russell East Glacier from the Russell West Glacier.

1.20 Long Island, 3 miles long, lies SE of Azimuth Hill. Its summit, 113m high, rises at the N end and is surmounted by a

cairn. Cugnot Ice Piedmont is 15 miles long and 3 to 6 miles

wide. It leads NE from the Russell East Glacier to Eyric Bay

and is bounded on the N side by the Louis Philippe Plateau.

1.21 Louis Philippe Plateau, occupying the central part of

the Trinity Peninsula, is 11 miles long, 5 miles wide, and rises

to a height of 1,370m.

1.21 Church Point is located 11 miles NE of Azimuth Hill and S

of Cugnot Ice Piedmont. It is surmounted by a dark, distinctive

rocky peak, 340m high. Camp Hill, small and ice free, stands 2

miles E of the point and is 120m high.

1.21 Red Island, lying 2.5 miles SSE of Church Point, is prominent, ice free, and 1 mile in diameter. It is circular, flat-topped,

and has reddish cliffs of volcanic rock which rise to an elevation of 495m. An isolated, rocky pillar, 494m high, stands NW

of this island. It resembles a monument and is prominent from

the NE and SW.

1.21 A depth of 66m is charted about 4 miles ESE of Red Island.

A depth of 1.1m is reported to lie about 3.5 miles SE of Red Island. A depth of 16.8m was reported (1982) to lie about 1.8
Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 109

Pub. 200

miles SE of Red Island.

1.21 Crystal Hill fronts the coast 3.5 miles E of Camp Hill. It is

ice free, 150m high, and forms the summit of the headland lying between Camp Hill and Bald Head. McCalman Peak,

standing 3 miles N of Criptal Hill, is 550m high and forms the

summit of a ridge.

1.21 Bald Head is located 3.5 miles NE of Crystal Hill. This

headland is bare, ice free, and 152m high. Several islands lie

off the coast between Crystal Hill and Bald Head including

Egg Island, Tail Island, Eagle Island, Corry Island, and Vortex

Island.

1.21 Egg Island, lying 1 mile SE of Crystal Hill, is 442m high.

Tail Island, 171m high, lies 1 mile E of Egg Island. Both of

these islands are shaped like mounds, surrounded by extensive

scree slopes, and almost ice free.

1.21 Eagle Island, the largest of the group, is square-shaped and

about 4 miles in diameter. Its NE extremity rises to a flattopped peak, with an ice-free summit, 560m high. The N side

of the island is ice free, except for a small glacier lying about

midway. The S part of the island has an ice cap, 150 to 300m

high. Scree cliffs and low rocks border the S side of this ice

cap.

1.21 Corry Island, 2 miles long and 508m high, is separated from

Eagle Island by a channel, 0.3 mile wide. It is rounded, icecapped, and fringed by cliffs and steep scree slopes which are

broken in places by ice falls. Vortex Island is the smallest of the

group. It is 0.5 mile long and has a jagged rocky peak, 244m

high. A penguin colony is located on its NE side.

1.22 The E side of Prince Gustav channel is formed by

James Ross Island and Vega Island.

1.22 James Ross Island is 40 miles long and 1,629m high. This island, which is part of the James Ross Island Group, is sep-arated into two sections by a neck of land extending from the SW

corner of Croft Bay to the NE corner of Rohss Bay. The SE

portion of the island, which is the larger of the two parts, rises

at the center in the form of Mount Haddington. The island rock

underlying the ice cap is mainly volcanic and, where visi-ble,

appears as dark wall-like cliffs. There is no dominating ice cap

in the NW part, but mountainous masses, known as Massey

Heights, rise to elevations of 360 to 940m.

1.22 The remainder of the coast of the island is described later.

Although the defined entrance begins at Nygren Point, for our

purposes the description will begin at Cape Foster.

1.22 Cape Foster is located at the S end of James Ross Island, 7

miles SE of Nygren Point. Trending NW for 2 miles from this

cape, the coast is indented by Carlsson Bay. The Tait Glacier

backs the head and a prominent, rocky headland projects from

the N shore of the bay.

1.22 Caution.—A dangerous rock has been reported (2006) in an

approximate position about 1.3 miles WSW of Cape Foster. 

1.22 Large masses of drifting ice are a hinderance to navigation S

of James Ross Island. Large numbers of ice floes have beached

S of James Ross Island. 

1.23 Nygren Point (64°23'S., 58°13'W.), located 3 miles

WNW of Carlsson Bay, is rocky and marks the actual S entrance to Prince Gustav Bay. The coast trends 7 miles NNW

from this point to Cape Broms. This stretch of the coast appears conspicuous because of the alternating ice falls flowing

from the high interior and the bare, rocky cliffs.

1.23 A large bay, about 10 miles wide, lies between Cape Broms

and Cape Obelisk and is known as Ruohss Bay. The W coast of

James Ross Island in this vicinity is broken by a series of semicircular valleys with almost perpendicular walls of red and

black basalt. The inland ice cap slopes to the sea between projecting rock masses which present vertical faces.

1.23 About 7 miles NNW of Cape Broms, Persson Island, 1.5

miles long, rises to an elevation of 213m and marks the E end

of the Sjuogren Glacier Tongue. Some conspicuous and rocky

cliffs, known as Tumbledown Cliffs, front the channel, 3 miles

N of Cape Obelisk. Holluschickie Bay, lying 6 miles NNE of

these cliffs, is entered between Kotick Point, on the S side, and

Matkah Point, on the N.

1.23 Lagrelius Point, located 3 miles N of Matkah Point, is long

and narrow. It is 48m high, flat-topped, and has vertical sides.

1.23 From Lagrelius Point, the coast extends NE for 13 miles to

Cape Lachman, the N extremity of James Ross Island. It is indented by a series of bays with variegated, perpendicular cliffs.

1.23 Carlson Island, ice free and less than 1 mile in diameter, lies

about 1.5 miles N of Lagrelius Point. Cliffs and scree slopes

lead steeply to its summit which is flat-topped and 299m high.

The coast trends 4 miles NE from the island and recedes inland

for 2 miles between Rink Point and Stoneley Point. Brandy

Bay indents the coast, 4 miles NE of Stoneley Point.

1.23 Cape Lachman forms the N end of James Ross Island and

the W entrance point of Herbert Sound. A small square-shaped

headland is located near the NE end of Prince Gustav Channel.

It is 97m high and is separated from the mountains, to the S, by

a low and flat-topped scree spur.

1.23 Prince Gustav Channel terminates in the vicinity of Vega Island, close E of the N end of James Ross Island. This channel

has never been known to be ice free. It is reported that three

sections lying in this area have been found to be recently frozen over and apparently open during the summer. One section

lies in the strait between a group of six islands, located N of

Vega Island, and the mainland. Another section lies in the area

to the NNW of Cape Lachman and the third lies within Herbert

Sound, between The Naze and Vega Island. The three sections

lie where the channel is narrow and strong currents are likely.

1.23 Farther S, there is strong indication that the water has remained frozen for several summers.

1.23 The Antarctic Peninsula, to the NE of Prince Gustav Channel, is indented by Eyrie Bay and Duse Bay. Eagle Island,

Tongue Rocks, a group of volcanic rocks, and Beak Island lie

off the entrances to these bays.

1.24 Beak Island, lying 0.5 mile NE of Eagle Island, is arcshaped and 4 miles long. This island is 358m high, rocky, and

ice free. Its SE part is separated from the W part by a ridge,

88m high, which rises to a bluff at the S extremity. It was reported that good anchorage, in a depth of 26m, can be taken

within a bay on the N side of the island, about 0.2 mile offshore. A good landing was also reported to exist on a sloping

beach of volcanic sand.

1.24 Eyrie Bay, lying 6 miles W of Beak Island, is entered close N

of Jade Point. This bay is 2.5 miles wide at its mouth and recedes for 3 miles. Jade Point is rocky and slopes gently with its

lower part covered in greenish-tinged ice.

1.24 Cain Nunatak and Abel Nunatak are located W of Eyrie Bay,
110 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

at the S end of Broad Valley. This valley is glacier-filled and

lies on the S side of the Laclavegre Plateau (Laclavere Plateau).

1.24 View Point, located E of Eyrie Bay, forms the W entrance

point of Duse Bay and rises to an elevation of 150m. The shore

in the vicinity of this point consists of steep dark-colored

mountain slopes.

1.24 Duse Bay, 7 miles wide, lies between the W side of the

Tabarin Peninsula and View Point. This bay recedes about 3.5

miles N and is nearly rectangular in shape. Two islands lie

within the bay, close to the S shore, and three other islands of

ice-free appearance lie close to the seaward end of the S entrance point. Theodolite Hill, 680m high, stands 5 miles W of

the NW corner of the bay has a small, rocky outcrop on its

summit.

1.24 The Tabarin Peninsula (63°32'S., 57°00'W.), is 5 to 12

miles wide and 12 miles long, between Duse Bay and Hope

Bay. Along the W side of this peninsula, a series of rock buttresses, known as Seven Buttresses, front the coast and extend

for 4 miles. These buttresses are 150m high and separated by

narrow ice falls. Buttress Hill, standing 2 miles E of the northernmost buttress in the series, is 690m high, flat-topped, and

has steep rock cliffs on its W side.

1.24 Cape Burd, located 2 miles S of Seven Buttresses, is a low,

rocky cliff forming the SW extremity of the Tabarin Peninsula.

1.24 From Cape Burd, the coast leads E for 4.5 miles to a bay

which indents the coast and extends inland for 2 miles. Depths

of 23.8 and 12.1m are reported (1980) to lie about 1.5 miles S

and 1 mile S, respectively, of the entrance to this bay.

1.24 Cape Green, the SE extremity of the Tabarin Peninsula, is located 2.5 miles ESE of the bay. A depth of 40m was reported

(1980) to lie about 3.3 miles S of this cape.

1.25 Herbert Sound (63°53'S., 57°40'W.), 16 miles long,

leads S from Prince Gustav Channel, between James Ross Island and Vega Island, to Cape Lamb. The sound then leads E to

its SE entrance where it joins Erebus and Terror Gulf. In 1982,

this sound was navigated for the first time. Passage was made

in both directions with little ice being encountered. Depths of

150 to 400m were reported to lie in the center of the channel.

1.25 Caution.—Depths in Herbert Sound have been reported

(2007) to be less than charted. 

1.25 The N entrance lies between Cape Lachman and Keltie

Head, which is rounded and has vertical cliffs rising to a small

ice dome, 190m high.

1.25 Lachman Crags (Lachmans Crags), an escarpment, extends

in a N/S direction and rises to an elevation of 620m. It stands

on the W side of the sound, 3 miles SSW of Cape Lachman.

1.25 Croft Bay indents the coast, 8 miles S of Lachman Crags, on

the SW side of the sound. Dreadnought Point forms the W entrance point of this bay and Stark Point forms the E entrance

point. Dobson Dome, standing W of the bay, is a prominent

mountain. It is snow-covered, dome-shaped, and 948m high.

1.25 Caution.—Depths in Croft Bay have been reported (2007)

to be less than charted. 

1.25 From Croft Bay, the sound leads NE to the area lying N of

The Naze. The sound narrows to a width of 2 miles in this area

and is obstructed by numerous rocks and islets.

1.25 Between Cape Lachman and Cape Obelisk, 28 miles SSW,

the coast is indented by a number of bays. These bays are separated by headlands which are fringed by rocky cliffs with extensive scree slopes. Brand Bay lies 6 miles SW of Cape Lachman and provides safe anchorage with a good holding ground

of thick, gray mud. It offers easy access to the hinter-land and

good protection, especially from N gales. Although ice collects

in this bay, it rarely becomes packed during the summer

months. It is reported that an orange hut stands on the SW side

of the entrance to the bay and is clearly visible, except when

covered with snow. Landing can be carried out by shal-low inflatable craft.

1.25 The Naze, a peninsula, extends N from Terrapin Hill and

forms the SE end of Herbert Sound. Terrapin Hill, 545m high,

is rounded and reddish in color. Comb Ridge, forming the NE

end of The Naze, rises to an elevation of 105m.

1.25 The E side of Herbert Sound is bordered by Vega Island. The

strait leads S and then E, uneventfully, for about 15 miles to

where False Island Point forms the S extremity of a peninsula

extending into the sound.

1.26 False Island Point is connected to the main part of Vega Island by a narrow, low, and gravel spit. From a distance,

this point appears to be separated from the main island.

1.26 A line between Comb Ridge and False Island Point indicates

the SE end of the sound and the entrance to Erebus and Terror

Gulf. Humps Island (Humps Islet) lies 4 miles SSE of Combs

Ridge. It is 0.5 mile long and has two summits rising near its W

end, the tallest being 187m high.

1.26 Vega Island, the northernmost of the Ross Island Group, is

about 16 miles long and 5 miles wide. It is high, precipitous,

and has tower-like rocks. The lower falls of eruptive rock are

plateau-like in form and brown in color.

1.26 Sandwich Bluff, located close W of the center of Vega Island, is a flat-topped mountain, 610m high, which is broken

sharply at its W side by a steep, dark bluff. From the N, this

bluff appears as a sandwich because of a horizontal snow-holding band of rocks on the cliffs.

1.26 Cape Well-Met, a dark and conspicuous headland, projects

from the N coast, near the middle of the island. Devil Island,

21m high, lies close to the N shore in the vicinity of this cape.

It has steep stone sides and is ice free.

1.26 Caution.—Depths off the shore of Devil Island have been

reported (2007) to be less than charted. 

1.26 Cape Gordon is located 6.5 miles SE of Devil Island. A rock,

1m high, lies about 6.5 miles E of this cape and is surrounded

by a shoal area which may best be seen on the chart.

1.26 A rock lies about 0.5 mile offshore, 5 miles SW of Cape

Gordon. Another rock lies 1.5 miles E of the cape, 4 miles NE

of False Island Point.

1.26 The SE side of James Ross Island fronts the Erebus and Terror Gulf and is marked by numerous glaciers. Trending S and

SE from The Naze, the coast is fronted by steep cliffs which

rise to a mostly ice-covered plateau.

1.26 Skep Point (64°03'S., 57°18'W.), high and ice free, resembles a beehive from offshore. A shallow rock lies 2 miles ESE

of this point.

1.26 Ula Point, ice-covered and low, lies 4.5 miles SE of Skep

Point. Lonely Rock, lying 2.8 mile ESE of Ula Point, is 46m

long, isolated, and prominent.
Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 111

Pub. 200

1.26 The area leading between the SE end of Herbert Sound and

Erebus and Terror Gulf is not fully surveyed.

1.26 A depth of 15.8m was reported (1980) to lie about 1.3 miles

E of Humps Island. Depths of 7.6m and 14m were reported to

lie within 2.3 miles of each other, about 12 miles SE of Humps

Island. It was reported (1982) that anchorage could be taken in

a depth of 15.8m to the S of Comb Ridge. However, shallow

depths were reported to lie about 2 miles SW of this anchorage

area.

1.26 An unexamined depth of 32.9m is believed to exist about

23.5 miles ESE of Humps Island. 

1.26 Between Ula Point and Cape Gage, 5 miles SSE, the Coley

Glacier flows inland and extends 5 miles E to the gulf.

1.26 Cape Gage, located S of the glacier, is a rocky promontory

which forms the E extremity of James Ross Island. This cape

also forms the W side of the N entrance to Admiralty Sound.

1.27 Admiralty Sound (64°20'S., 57°10'W.) extends in a

NE/SW direction and separates Seymour Island (Isla Marambio) and Snow Hill Island (Isla Cerro Nevado) from James

Ross Island. It has a width of about 1 mile at the narrows. The

W entrance to the sound is divided by Lockyer Island into two

forks, each with a width of about 2 miles. The sound has not

been surveyed although a depth of 129m was reported to lie in

its center, off Hamilton Point. No vessel has navigated the

sound which is sometimes ice locked during the entire year. It

is reported that strong tidal currents set through the sound.

1.27 The description of the sound is from N to S. It covers the W

side as far as Cape Foster, located beyond the limits of the

sound, and then proceeds to the islands.

1.27 Caution.—Depths in Admiralty Sound have been reported

(2007) to be less than charted. 

1.27 The coast, to the SW of Cape Gage, trends for 5 miles to

Ekeluof Point which is high, rocky, and forms the N entrance

point of Markham Bay.

1.27 Between Ekeluof Point and Hamilton Point, the S entrance

point, three glaciers flow into the bay. The northermost glacier

is about 1 mile wide and enters the bay between steep, rocky

headlands. The central glacier, known as the Gourdon Glacier,

is similar in size and form to the N glacier. It enters the bay between Saint Rita Point, a steep and rocky outcrop, on the N

side and Rabot Point, high and rocky, on the S side. The Hobbs

Glacier, the southernmost, is about 2 miles wide and has a lateral moraine on its higher slopes.

1.27 Hamilton Point consists of a headland, 5 miles long, the S

end of which forms the N limit of the narrows of Admiralty

Sound. A narrow, perpendicular ridge of rock, which is shaped

like a tower, stands prominently on the high cliffs of Hamilton

Point.

1.27 The coast between Hamilton Point and Cape Foster, 13 miles

WSW, is occupied by the Swift Glacier which terminates at the

sea edge in steep ice cliffs. The Watchtower, a prominent and

rocky feature, stands 4 miles W of the S end of Hamilton Point.

It consists of a rocky mass which is steep-sided, flat-topped,

isolated, and 400m high.

1.27 The coast then trends SW to Cape Foster and is fronted by

three headlands. Jefford Point, the most prominent headland,

consists of a rock cliff surmounted by ice.

1.27 Lockyer Island, lying at the SW end of Admiralty Sound, is

2.5 miles long and rises to an elevation of 460m. From the N,

this island appears as a precipitous wall of dark tuffs capped by

an ice dome from which several small glaciers descend to the

sea in sheer, vertical cliffs.

1.28 Snow Hill Island (Isla Cerro Nevado) (64°30'S.,

57°15'W.) is located E of Lockyer Island and lies SE of James

Ross Island, from which it is separated by Admiralty Sound. It

is about 20 miles long and about 6 miles wide. The island is entirely snow-capped, except at the NE extremity which, for a

distance of 3.5 miles, consists of a rugged projection with

steep, lofty cliffs of olivine-basalt. A low shore fronts the NW

side of this snow-free projection. Anchorage may be taken

about 90m off this low shore in a depth of 11m with a rocky

bottom and good holding ground. The E side of the projection

is perpendicular and offers no landing place.

1.28 The ice cap is extensive, hilly with deep depressions, and attains a maximum elevation of 300m. The inland ice terminates

toward the sea in a vertical wall, which, on the E side, is from 1

to 6m high. On the E side, where the ice cap meets the bare and

rocky walls of the N projection, a deep ravine exists and a running stream is found here in the summer months. The ice cliff,

for a distance of 0.5 mile to the S of the ravine, is only 0.9m

high and rests on the beach at LW. The ice cliff increases in

height to 6m several miles to the S, but appears to be floating.

Depths reported along the ice edge vary from 7 to 54m. The

range of tide observed here was reported (January 1935) to be

1.5m. Vessels may moor to the low ice face, but calving may be

a problem.

1.28 Anchorage may be taken about 0.5 mile from the E part of

the ice cliff, at a point lying about 5 miles from the NE extremity of the island where the ice cap is about 3m above sea level.

This anchorage is reported to have a depth of 13.7m with a

mud bottom. Anchorage can also be taken in depth of 29m,

gravel and rock, about 1 mile from the ice cliff.

1.28 The bottom is reported to be irregular to the S and E of Snow

Hill Island, which indicates volcanic structure.

1.28 The interior ice dome lying opposite the NE extremity of the

island rises to a large, wide shoulder which is about 150m

above the sea level.

1.28 A beacon stands on the NE extremity of Snow Hill Island. It

consists of a triangular framework tower, 5.2m high, with three

horizontal panels painted yellow and orange.

1.28 The mean temperature at Snow Hill Island, during a period

of twenty months, was reported to be -11.7°C. The prevailing

winds were SW and these were also the strongest and coldest.

Winds from the SW prevail 38 percent of the year and, during

some months, 50 percent of the time, with an average velocity

of 32 mph. Winds from this quarter blowing during the winter

months had an average velocity of 20 mph. The stronger the

winds from this direction, the lower the temperature. The mean

temperature when SW winds were blowing was reported to be

more than 2° below normal.

1.28 Winds from the N and NNW are strong and, once started, are

usually of long duration. These are foehn winds which bring

warm weather, but they are not common. Winds from the NE

are comparatively strong and cold. Calm periods usually raise

the temperature above the normal, but bring a wide daily variation in temperature.

1.28 During the summer months, the temperature does not drop
112 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

below -17.8°C. The absolute minimum temperature of -41.7°C

was recorded in the month of August and the absolute max-imum temperature of 9.4°C was also recorded during August.

Such irregularities are characteristic of this region due to the

existence of the semipermanent low pressure area in the Weddell Sea and to the unstable equilibrium of the high pressure area over the plateau of the Antarctic Peninsula.

1.28 Caution.—Large masses of drifting ice are a hinderence to

navigation S and SE of Snow Hill Island. Large numbers of ice

floes have beached S of Snow Hill Island. 

1.29 Picnic Passage, a strait, is about 0.5 mile wide and 1.5

miles long. It separates Snow Hill Island from Seymour Island

to the NE. Strong currents and tide rips exist in this channel

which shoals to depths of less than 2m in the center LW. The

bottom deepens steeply on the NW side of the channel. Seymour Island is 8 miles long and 4 miles wide. It is entirely

snow-free and has a remarkable appearance. The N portion of

the island consists of a level, extensive plateau which reaches

an elevation of 180m. Below this smooth plateau, terraces occur which contain valleys and small irregular knolls of hard

rock. Cross Valley, which cuts through the island from E to W,

has a bottom which is not much above sea level. This valley

opens at Penguin Point, on the E shore, and into an unnamed

bay lying close E of Bodman Point, on the W shore. A strip of

deeply dissected land extends between Penguin Point and the

NE extremity of the island. The SW portion of the island presents an appearance that is in marked contrast to the smooth

surfaces of the N portion. The S half of the island has a pecu-liar ribbed appearance, being low and deeply dissected, with

many low hills. Low, perpendicular, and rocky cliffs border the

shore, but there are many landing places where the gorges

slope gradually to the sea.

1.29 Penguin Point, located on the E side of Seymour Island, is

the site of the Vice Comodoro Marambio base, an Argentinean

station. Anchorage may be taken in a depth of 22m about 1

mile off this point.

1.29 Several beacons are reported to stand 3 miles NNE of Penguin Point and at the NE end of the island.

1.29 Cape Wiman, low and rocky, forms the N extremity of the island. Bodman Point, a projection, is located on the W side of

the island, 5 miles SW of this cape.

1.30 Cockburn Island, lying at the NE end of Admiralty

Sound, is circular, 1 mile in diameter, and consists of a high

plateau. This plateau has steep slopes and is surmounted on its

NW side by a peak which is 450m high and pyramidal-shaped.

The island is almost entirely ice free. A bold ridge of rock,

which resembles a tower, stands on the NE edge of the plateau.

It is conspicuous and appears prominently in the profile of the

island. A beach fronts the N extremity of the island. Colonies

of penguins and cormorants are reported to inhabit the slopes

of the island.

1.30 It was reported (1963) that anchorage in this area is not recommended because sustained offshore winds can blow the drift

ice into the area and force the ship upon the lee shore. However, anchorage was taken (1963) on the W side of Seymour Island. A vessel obtained anchorage in a depth of 54m, thick

mud and gravel, about 4 miles SW of Bodman Point. It was reported (1963) that anchorage can also be taken in a depth of

16m, thick mud and gravel, about 4 miles SSW of Bodman

Point. These anchorages lying off the W side of the island were

reported to appear well-protected from all direc-tions except

the N.

1.30 It was also reported (1963) that anchorage had been taken in

a depth of 10m about 4 miles S of Cape Wiman. However, a

tidal current, with an estimated rate of 2 knots, was reported to

set NE/SW along the SE coast of the island.

1.30 According to a preliminary survey, shoals were reported to

lie off Cape Wiman. It was also reported that the area between

Cockburn Island and Bodman Point appeared to be extensively

shoaled.

1.30 It is reported that access to the N coast of Seymour Island is

doubtful without the use of an icebreaker. Ice conditions

around the island are changeable and dependent on wind direction. There is considerable ice movement along the S coast of

the island.

1.30 Currents generally set ESE and WSW in the vicinity of the

island with velocities of up to 1 knot. However, currents of 3 to

4 knots have been observed near the SW extremity of Seymour

Island where Picnic Passage separates the island from Snow

Hill Island.

1.30 Directions.—It was reported that passage to a bay on the

NW side of Seymour Island was attempted by rounding Cape

Wiman. The cape was passed 3 miles to the N and then an attempt was made to steer SW. Depths shoaled to less than 20m

on this course that lead between Cockburn Island and Seymour

Island. At this point, the vessel turned back on a NE course until the 180m curve was reached. A W course was then steered,

passing Cockburn Island 4 miles to the N. With the left tangent

of this island bearing 126° and the right tangent of Cape Gordon, on Vega Island, bearing 349°, the vessels changed course

to 177°. A passage, with considerable depths, was then found

by steering S, midway between James Ross Island and Cockburn Island. The bottom shoaled gradually from depths of over

365m lying between Cape Gage, on James Ross Island, and

Cockburn Island to 15.8m at the anchorage area located 4 miles

SSW of Bodman Point.

1.30 Caution.—Large masses of drifting ice are a hinderence to

navigation SE and E of Seymour Island. 

1.31 Erebus and Terror Gulf (63°55'S., 56°40'W.) lies on

the SE side of the extremity of the Antarctic Peninsula. It is

bordered on the NE side by Joinville Island and on the SW side

by the James Ross Island Group. This gulf is noted for heavy

ice conditions and variable currents. Many icebergs have been

observed streaming into the gulf. A SW current, setting at 4

knots, has been observed at times in the gulf. In the vicinity of

the Danger Islands, strong currents and whirlpools have been

reported seen, which render steering difficult and dangerous.

The gulf has not been thoroughly surveyed, but depths of 183

to 366m were reported to lie between the NW extremity of Joinville Island and the latitude of 65°S.

1.31 An unexamined patch, with a depth of 32.9m, was reported

to lie about 11.5 miles N of Ula Point in position 64°01'S,

56°30'W. In the N section of the gulf, a depth of 40.2m was reported (1982) to lie in position 63°42'S, 55°48'W.

1.32 Antarctic Sound (63°20'S., 56°45'W.), about 30

miles long and 7 to 12 miles wide, separates the NE end of the
Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 113

Pub. 200

Antarctic Peninsula from the Joinville Island Group. At the SE

end of this sound, the passage narrows and is obstructed by Rosamel Island, Andersson Island, and Jonassen Island. There is a

depth of 45.7m in the NW entrance to the sound and depths of

over 549m in its central part. A depth of 36.6m lies in the SE

entrance to the sound.

1.32 The sound is usually blocked by ice. On the few occasions

when the sound has been reported to be ice free, it was observed that heavy drift ice streamed through the narrow passage with the impetus of winds and current.

1.32 A vessel reported (1985) that the entire Antarctic Sound, to

the N of Rosamel Island, was essentially ice free and navigable

during operations between 27 February and 12 March. However, there were some icebergs and drift ice during that period.

1.32 An Argentinean pilot reported that the Antarctic Sound is

free of ice when there is a N wind and the N part of the passage

is navigable. The S part of the sound is usually not navigable in

winter because of ice accumulation.

1.32 In the winter of 1969-1970, an Argentinean Army Officer,

stationed at a base in Hope Bay, reported that the sound was

navigable on a year-round basis. The N part of the passage being ice free almost continuously and the S entrance being ice

free in N winds. 

1.32 According to charted information, adequate mid-channel

depths, avoiding the rocks and shoal areas, can be found by

steering through the sound on a course of 326° and passing 1

mile off Cape Scrymgeour. The N approach to the sound

should be made from the NE, passing 9 miles off D'Urville Island in order to avoid the rocky shoal areas lying NW and W of

it.

1.32 Zaelaee Rocks (62°57'S., 57°15'W.), lying about 17 miles

NW of D'Urville Island, should be approached from the N with

care. This group of rocks, both visible and submerged, should

be given a berth of at least 1.5 miles.

1.33 Fridtjof Sound, lying at the SW side of the entrance to

Antarctic Sound, separates the Tabarin Peninsula from Andersson Island and Jonessen Island. It leads N for 6 miles, is 2

miles wide, and has a least charted depth of 51.2m lying near

the N end. A small islet or nunatak lies on the W side of the

sound, 5.5 miles NNE of Cape Green, and caution is advised

when navigating in this area.

1.33 It was reported (1935) that when the S part of the Antarctic

Sound is blocked by heavy ice, safe passage can be found within Fridtjof Sound for vessels with drafts up to 4.2m.

1.33 Gamma Hill, standing 5 miles N of Cape Green, rises to an

elevation of 300m. Andersson Island lies on the E side of the

sound and has a summit, 1,829m high.

1.33 Jonesson Island, separated from Andersson Island by Yalour

Sound, is 2.5 miles in diameter and circular. Chaucheprat

Point, the NW extremity of the island, is populated by a penguin colony at the foot of a scree slope. A cirque is located on

the N side of the island which has the appearance of a large

quarry.

1.33 Andersson Island and Jonesson Island are plateau-shaped

with ice caps falling in gentle slopes to the sea and ending as

ice cliffs. Overfalls lie close off the NW extremity of Andersson Island.

1.33 Cape Scrymgeour, the E extremity of Andersson Island, is

formed by a prominent promontory. It consists of an irregular

mass of volcanic tuff rising perpendicularly out of the sea. This

mass forms a lofty precipice and extends inland to the high plateau of the island.

1.33 Shoals were reported (1963) to lie N of the base of Cape

Scrymgeour and close above the parallel of 63°30'S.

1.33 Yalour Sound, leading between Andersson Island and Jonassen Island, is 1 mile wide and 4 miles long. Two small rocks

lie within this strait and a depth of 7m is reported to lie in the

NE entrance.

1.33 Rosamel Island, 356m high, lies 3.5 miles E of Cape Scrymgeour. This island rises in precipitous cliffs of volcanic rock to

a summit that is flat and mainly ice free.

1.33 The following is a description of the NE end of the Antarctic

Peninsula, along the W side of the Antarctic Sound:

1.33 From Fridtjof Sound, the coast trends 3.5 miles NW to a bay.

This bay recedes 0.8 mile and has a least depth of 29.3m in its

entrance. Brown Bluff, 745m high, stands 1 mile SW of the

head of the bay. This mountain is ice-capped, flat-topped, and

has a prominent cliff, formed of reddish-brown volcanic rock,

on its N face.

1.33 Trepassey Bay (63°28'S., 56°58'W.), less than 1 mile wide,

lies 4 miles N of Brown Bluff and several mountains stand between them. Stone Point is located 3.5 miles N of this bay and

marks the SE entrance to Hope Bay.

1.34 Hope Bay is entered between Stone Point and Sheppard Point, 1.7 miles NW, and extends 2.5 miles SW. A shelf

extends 0.2 mile S from the NE part of the bay and its bottom

slopes abruptly to depths of over 180m. Depths in the entrance

gradually decrease to 24m, about 0.3 mile offshore. Numerous

rocky and shoal areas lie close inshore.

1.34 Within the bay, depths of 110 to over 180m lie in the middle

and depths of 18.2 to 40m lie in the SW part. The W part of the

bay has only been partially surveyed and caution is advised in

this area. A depth of 4.5m is reported to lie about 180m S of

Sheppard Point.

1.34 The bay was reported (1963) to be open to shipping on an

annual basis. It is estimated that a period of accessibility, from

early December to late April, exists under ordinary conditions

for ships which are not ice-strengthened.

1.34 Along the S side of Hope Bay, foul ground and shoals extend

up to 0.3 mile offshore and ice cliffs, 150 to 300m high, back

the coast.

1.34 Grunden Rock lies 160m offshore, 0.8 mile W of Stone

Point. It is 12.5m high and about 90m long. Several other

rocks, uncovered and awash, extend up to 0.2 mile N of Grunden Rock.

1.34 Grunden Rock Light (63°24'S., 56°58'W.) is shown from a

metal framework tower and marks the NW part of the island.

This light is reported to be unreliable.

1.34 An anchorage area, with a depth of 40m, lies 0.3 mile NW of

Grunden Rock, off the entrance to Hut Cove. A range, bearing

214°, indicates the approach from seaward to the roadstead.

Anchorage areas, with depths of 24 and 110m, are also reported to lie 0.2 mile NW and 0.2 mile W, respectively, of the

above anchorage roadstead. Although vessels are protected

from SW and WSW winds by anchoring close inshore, it is recommended that large vessels anchor outside the 90m curve.

1.34 Caution.—In early spring or late summer, care should be

taken because the approaches to the anchorage areas may be
114 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

blocked by bergy bits. This condition is also likely in areas

where depths are less than 90m.

1.34 A rock, awash, is reported to lie close E of the westernmost

anchorage area in position 63°24'50''S, 56°58'46''W.

1.35 Hut Cove (63°24'S., 56°59'W.), lying 1 mile W of

Stone Point, is entered between Grunden Rock and Seal Point.

Seal Point is located at the seaward end of a peninsula, which

forms the W side of the cove, and is fronted by rocks. A landing place is located close SE of this point.

1.35 The depths within the cove decrease to 1.8m close to the

shore. The cove has not been completely surveyed and appears

to be generally foul. Jagged Rocks, a group of rocks, extends

for about 200m in a NE/SW direction and lies centered about

180m off the W shore of the cove, 0.3 mile SE of Seal Point.

Several rocks, awash, front the NE end of this group.

1.35 Esperanza, an Argentinean base, is situated on the peninsula,

close S of Seal Point. It consists of a barracks and several huts,

and is fronted by a small pier. A tower, situated near an observation spot, stands in the vicinity of the S end of the peninsula.

1.35 Eagle Cove (63°24'S., 57°00'W.), entered on the W side of

Seal Point, has a least depth of 6.4m lying in its E side. Rocky

cliffs line the coast in this vicinity and a former British base

was situated at the top of the rocky area near the piedmont.

1.35 At the head of Hope Bay, the Depot Glacier, a large valleyglacier with a lateral moraine, terminates at the water's edge in

a high, vertical cliff. This glacier is fed by the highland ice

sheet which extends for a considerable distance to the S.

1.35 Caution.—For information on the dangers caused by glacial

ablation in the Hope Bay area, see paragraph 1.1. 

1.36 Mount Flora, standing 0.7 mile SW of the head of

Hope Bay, is 520m high and has a well-defined cirque, facing

NE.

1.36 Whitten Peak, standing 0.5 mile W of the head of Hope Bay,

is 445m high and pyramidal shaped.

1.36 Mount Taylor, 998m high, and Twin Peaks, 752m high, stand

W of Hope Bay and are both prominent.

1.36 On the W side, the Arena Glacier flows NE from Mount Taylor and enters the bay 2 miles SW of Sheppard Point.

1.36 Sheppard Point, the NW entrance point of the bay, is surmounted by Sheppard Nunatak, which is conical and 59m high.

Anderson Nunatak, 183m high, stands 1 mile W of this point

and rises above the coastal ice cliffs of the N shore.

1.36 The piedmont area in this vicinity is subject to sudden, high

winds. It was reported that downslope winds from the SW have

been recorded with velocities of up to 150 knots.

1.36 At Hope Bay, the MHWS is 2.7m and the MLW is -0.5m. It

was reported (1963) that the tidal range is 3.7m. During a 23-

hour period, the currents were observed to be weak and variable.

1.36 Cape Dubouzet, located 7 miles N of Hope Bay, forms the

NE extremity of the Antarctic Peninsula. It also forms the NW

entrance point of Antarctic Sound.

1.36 Mount Bransfield is a prominent ice-covered cone from

which two rocky spurs lead NE and ENE to the coast. A group

of moraines lies between the two spurs and at the foot of a glacier which descends directly from the cone.

1.36 Koerner Rock, lying 3.5 miles SSW of Cape Dubouzet, is a

small but conspicuous outcrop.

1.37 The Joinville Island Group lies at the E extremity of

Antarctic Sound. The largest islands being Dundee, Joinville,

Bransfield, and D'Urville.

1.37 Dundee Island (63°30'S., 55°55'W.) is ice-covered and lies

at the S end of the group. It is roughly circular, 14 miles long,

and has a maximum width of 11 miles. The NE part of this island is low and smooth while a mountain of volcanic rock, covered by an ice cap, rises to an elevation of 590m in the S part.

Cape Purvis forms the S extremity of the island and consists of

a high bluff. Welchness, located at the W extremity of the island, consists of a low, gravel spit which projects 1 mile W

from a line of morainic ice-free hillocks. A light is reported to

be shown from a structure, 9m high, standing in the vicinity of

this spit.

1.37 A shoal patch, with a depth of 1.8m, was reported (1975) to

lie about 3 miles SW of Welchness.

1.37 At the NW end of the island, a low and flat rocky beach

fronts the ice face. The face is 12m high forms the terminus of

the ice cap which descends in a gentle slope from the higher interior. Several patches of exposed rock, brownish-green in color, can be observed where the snow mantle is thin.

1.37 Ski Beacon, 5.5m high, stands 1.3 miles NE of Welchness.

This beacon was reported (1982) to be destroyed.

1.37 A radiobeacon is reported to be situated 1.5 miles E of

Welchness, in the vicinity of Petrel, an Argentinean base,

which consists of several huts. Petrel Cove lies close NE of the

base. Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 62m about 0.7 mile

NNW of the base. In the approach to this anchorage, the depths

shoal rapidly from about 550 to 90m and then gradually level

off. The maximum tidal range is 2.4m. It was reported (1963)

that during a 27-hour period, a current in the anchorage area set

SSW with an average velocity of 0.3 knot and a maximum velocity of 0.5 knot. Care should be taken as this anchorage affords little protection against NE gales due to the low elevations of Dundee Island and Joinville Island. The estimated access to this area is from the middle of December until the end

of March.

1.37 The N side of the island, fronting Active Sound, consists

mainly of ice cliffs but in some places there are beaches and

exposed rock. From the W extremity of the island, a continuous ice cliff fronts the coast. Two rocks, known as Eden

Rocks, lie off the E extremity of the island. Puget Rock, fronted by submerged rocks, lies close E of Eden Rocks, 2 miles E

of the island.

1.37 Caution.—For information on the dangers caused by glacial

ablation in the Petrel Cove area, see paragraph 1.1. 

1.38 Paulet Island (63°35'S., 55°47'W.), lying 3 miles SE

of Dundee Island, is circular and 1 mile in diameter. This island

is ice free with steep rocky and scree slopes rising to its summit

which is 353m high. It is composed of volcanic rock and has

the appearance of a crater. A cone, fronted by a gravel beach,

stands on the NE side of the island. It is backed by a lake which

is nearly at sea level and fills a cirque cutting into the island. A

large penguin colony and a small shag colony are situated near

this lake. A beacon, 2m high, stands on the island at an ele-vation of 100m.

1.38 Currents, with rates of 2 to 3 knots, have been recorded to

the W of Paulet Island and S of Dundee Island.

1.38 Active Sound leads ENE from Antarctic Sound and joins the
Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 115

Pub. 200

Firth of Tay, which separates Joinville Island and Dundee Island. This sound has an average width of 2 miles and its shores

are fronted by ice cliffs. A reef extends about half way across

the sound from the NW extremity of Dundee Island. A rock

lies in the center of the sound at the E end where it joins Gibson Bay and the Firth of Tay. This sound was reported to be ice

locked.

1.38 The Firth of Tay, 12 miles long and 6 miles wide, leads in a

NW/SE direction from the NE end of Active Sound. Active

Reef extends for about 1 mile into the firth from the NE side of

Dundee Island. A depth of 37m lies close N of Active Reef in

position 63°22'S, 55°49'W.

1.39 Joinville Island (63°15'S., 55°45'W.) is the largest of

the group, being 40 miles long and 12 miles wide. This island

is completely ice capped and rises to Mount Tholus, the summit, which is 823m high. Smooth glacial slopes extend from

Mount Tholus and are broken by a series of undulating hills.

Mount Percy, 765m high, stands 6.5 miles E of Mount Tholus.

The S coast of the island leads along Active Sound and the

Firth of Tay.

1.39 D'Urville Monument (63°25'S., 56°18'W.), standing at the

SW end of the island, rises abruptly and is 576m high. An unidentified bay indents the coast of the island, 9.5 miles NE of

the monument, and a rock, awash, lies within it. Nodule Nunatak stands inland from the bay and is prominent, isolated, and

440m high.

1.39 Gibson Bay, lying at the junction of Active Sound and Firth

of Tay, indents the S side of Joinville Island and recedes for 1.5

miles. The interior slopes above this bay are irregular and crevassed. The shore of the bay is formed by ice cliffs, up to 18m

high. Near the head of the bay, an island is reported to lie about

1 mile offshore.

1.39 The peninsula located to the E of Gibson Bay is surmounted

by Mount Alexander, which consists of several summits and

rises to an elevation of 595m. Haddon Bay, lying E of this peninsula, extends 2.5 miles N but has not been surveyed.

1.39 Tay Head (63°21'S., 55°34'W.) is located 6 miles E of

Mount Alexander, at the end of a narrow peninsula, and fronted

by several small islets and rocks. Moody Point is located 13

miles E of Tay Head. The coast between is fringed by numerous rocks and small islands. Two rocks, known as Williwaw

Rocks, lie about 1 mile SE of Moody Point. Scud Rock, iso-lated, and Brash Island, also isolated, lie 4 miles S and 6 miles

SE, respectively, of Moody Point. Brash ice is reported to be

frequently found in the vicinity of Brash Island.

1.39 The Danger Islands (63°26'S., 54°41'W.) is a chain, consisting of seven islands, which trends in a NE/ SW direction

within 15 miles ESE of Moody Point.

1.39 Darwin Island (63°26'S., 54°46'W.), the largest in the

chain, is 1 mile long and 80m high. Dixie Rock, the smallest island of the chain, is an isolated stack, 35m high. Other islands

in the chain include Brash Island, Earle Island, and Beagle Island. A beacon, 2m high, is reported to stand on the northeasternmost island of the chain. The area in the vicinity of these islands is difficult to access due to the large number of tabular

icebergs found aground in the shallow waters.

1.39 The coast extending for 5 miles SW of Moody Point is

formed by a single glacier which descends from the interior

heights to a cliffed face, 30m high, at the water's edge.

1.39 Fitzroy Point is located 10 miles N of Moody Point. Depths

of 29 to 102m lies within 1.8 miles of this stretch of the coast.

Foul ground, with several rocks and islets, fronts Fitzroy Point

and extends up to 2.5 miles SE and 1 mile offshore.

1.39 Fitzroy Point, which forms the NE extremity of Joinville Island, is low. Fliess Bay, lying close W of the point, and Ambush

Bay, lying 5 miles further W, have not been surveyed. A dangerous rock is reported to lie 0.3 mile offshore, between these

two bays.

1.40 Etna Island, lying 5 miles NNW of Fritzroy Point, is

0.3 mile long and 0.3 mile wide. This island is 49m high and

can be identified by its summit which is cone-shaped and resembles a volcano. The N end of the island descends to the sea

in a long slope while the S end abruptly drops from the summit

to a low plateau. A horizontal band of stones, which is ice free

and appears black from a distance, aids in distinguish-ing this

island. Several reefs, above-water, have been reported to extend up to 0.5 mile N and W from the island and it should be

given a berth of at least 1 mile.

1.40 King Point forms the NW entrance point of Ambush Bay.

Patella Island lies 2 miles NW of this point and is small, about

75m high, and prominent. A submerged rock is reported to lie

about 0.5 mile SSE of the island.

1.40 Several islets and rocks lie off the coast between King Point

and Rockpepper Bay and extend up to 1.5 miles offshore.

Rockpepper Bay is entered close E of Borcal Point and recedes

to the S. The E side of the bay is fronted by numerous small islets and rocks.

1.40 Papua Island, circular and about 0.3 mile in diameter, lies 3

miles WNW of Boreal Point. A large number of gentoo penguins have been sighted on this island.

1.40 The NW shore of Joinville Island fronts Larsen Channel.

1.40 Saxum Nunatak (63°10'S., 56°02'W.) is 430m high and isolated. When viewed from the S, this nunatak appears domeshaped while from the N, it appears as a conspicuous, rocky

wall.

1.40 A small islet lies at the NE end of Larsen Channel, N of Saxum Nunatak and 0.5 mile off the N shore of Joinville Island.

1.40 Madder Cliffs (63°18'S., 56°29'W.), formed of reddish

rock, rise steeply from the sea and attain a height of 305m.

1.40 Suspiros Bay, lying close SW of Madder Cliffs, indents the

coast of Joinville Island and recedes E for 1.5 miles. An island

is reported to lie 0.2 mile off the S side of this bay. Another island, 0.4 mile long, is reported to lie 0.5 mile SW of the N entrance point. Anchorage may be obtained in the S part of the

bay. It is reported that anchorage may also be taken between

the two islands over a bottom of sand, mud, and stones.

1.40 It was reported (1963) that shoals were observed to lie to the

W of Suspiros Bay, N of Cape Kinnes.

1.40 Balaena Valley, located E of Suspiros Bay, is ice filled and

gently slopes toward the bay.

1.40 Cape Kinnes, the W extremity of Joinville Island, is located

3.5 miles S of Suspiros Bay and fronts the Antarctic Sound.

1.41 Larsen Channel, 10 miles long and 1 to 2.5 miles

wide, lies in a NE/SW direction and separates Joinville Island

from D'Urville Island. This channel has never been reported to

be ice free and has a least reported depth of 88m. Rocks and islets extend up to 1.3 miles offshore along both sides of the E
116 Sector 1. The Weddell Sea—Cape Norvegia to Joinville Island 

Pub. 200

entrance. Two islets lie close off the N shore of Joinville Island,

at the NE end of the channel. Overfalls were reported (1963) to

exist about 0.5 mile NW of the westernmost islet. A shoal, with

a depth of 9.1m, lies about 2 miles off Joinville Island, 2 miles

NW of Boreal Point.

1.41 D'Urville Island (63°05'S., 56°20'W.), the northernmost of

the Joinville Island Group, is 17 miles long and 305m high. It

has a smooth and unbroken ice cap which terminates at the

coast in high cliffs. Several islets and rocks extend up to 7

miles seaward of this island.

1.41 Turnbull Point, the W extremity of the island, is exposed,

rocky, and fronted by numerous rocks and islets. Hope Island,

the largest of a group of islands, lies centered about 6 miles W

of this point. This island is 31m high and a rock lies about 3

miles SSW of it. Care should be taken when navigating in this

area.

1.41 The coast trends 12 miles SE from Turnbull Point to the S

extremity of D'Urville Island. Burden Passage separates the

SW side of the island from Bransfield Island. This channel is

2.5 miles wide and extends from Antarctic Sound, at the NW

end, to Larsen Channel, at the SE end. It is unsurveyed, but icebergs indicate the presence of considerable depths within this

passage.

1.41 The coast of D'Urville Island forms the side of Larsen Channel and several rocks and islets extend up to 0.5 mile offshore.

Medley Rocks, a group of reefs, front the NE end of the island

and extend up to 2.5 miles offshore. Another group of islets,

rocks, and reefs lies 2 miles S of Medley Rocks and extends up

to 1.5 miles E from the shore.

1.42 The Wideopen Islands (63°00'S., 55°49'W.), located

4.5 miles E of Medley Rocks, consists of two isolated rocks lying on the N side of the E approach to Larsen Channel.

1.42 Two other rocks and a shoal patch, with a depth of 18.5m, lie

2.5 miles E and 9 miles E, respectively, of the Wideopen Islands.

1.42 An islet, 11m high, lies 11.5 miles NE of Wideopen Islands.

A spit, with a depth of 20.1m, and a reef, covered to an unknown extent, lie 9.5 miles NNE and about 7 miles NNW, respectively, of the Wideopen Islands.

1.42 An islet, 0.3 mile long, lies 0.8 mile N of the coast of D'Urville Island, 5.5 miles W of Medley Rocks.

1.42 From the NE end of D'Urville Island, the coast trends W for

12 miles to Cape Juncal, the NW extremity of the island. Foul

ground extends up to 1 mile W and 2 miles N of this cape.

Southtrap Rocks, located about 4 miles W of the cape, and

Northtrap Rocks, located about 5.5 miles NW of the cape, lie

near the approach to the Antarctic Sound and caution is advised when transiting in this area.

1.42 A group of rocks, existence doubtful, was reported to lie

about 5.5 miles WNW of Cape Juncal.

1.42 Montrol Rock lies 1 mile off the coast, 3 miles E of Cape

Juncal. It is the largest of a group of above and below-water

rocks which lie off the N coast of D'Urville Island. Harris Rock

and a below-water rock lie 1.5 miles N and about 4 miles NNE,

respectively, of Montrol Rock.

1.42 Bransfield Island (63°11'S., 56°36'W.), low and ice-covered, lies with its NE extremity located 3 miles SW of D'Urville Island. This island is 4.5 miles long, 3 miles wide, and is

separated from D'Urville Island by Burden Passage. Between

this island and Cape Dubouzet, on the mainland, Antarctic

Sound is about 9 miles wide.

1.42 The W and N coasts of the island are generally foul with below-water rocks extending up to about 1 mile offshore in places. Knobble Head, a conspicuous rock exposure, forms the E

extremity of the island. Several islets lie within 1.5 miles N of

this point. Shoal patches, each with a depth of 20m, lie about 2

miles SE and 2 miles SSE, respectively, of this point. The

northernmost of these patches is position approximate.

1.42 Archibald Point, exposed and rocky, is located at the SW

side of the island. Shoals, with depths of 0.9 and 14.6m, lie 1.5

miles W and 3.5 miles SW, respectively, of this point.

1.42 A beach, on which a penguin colony is situated, fronts the

NE side of the island.
Pub. 200

2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
119

Pub. 200

SECTOR 2 

THE SOUTH ORKNEY ISLANDS AND THE SOUTH SHETLAND ISLANDS

2.0 Plan.—This sector describes the South Orkney Islands from

E to W between Laurie Island and Coronation Island. It also

describes the South Shetland Islands, SW from Clarence Island

to Deception Island.

General Remarks

2.1 The South Orkney Islands (60°35'S., 45°30'W.),

surrounded by ice, lie about 265 miles ENE of the Joinville Islands. The group consists of two principal islands, Laurie Island and Coronation Island, and a number of smaller islands

which are all covered with snow and ice. The islands, as a rule,

are enveloped in low mist and fog and stranded icebergs are

usually encountered in all directions from them. Grounded

bergs are generally encountered on the N side of the islands

and indicate the nearness of land due to the narrow extent of

the continental shelf on that side. Old bergs should be avoided

due to disintegration. Grounded bergs should be given a wide

berth since they may mask the shoals on which they have been

stranded and may also be in the process of breaking up.

2.1 Many rocks are covered with ice and vessels may come upon

them suddenly without warning as depths of 36 to 55m have

been reported to lie close alongside these sunken dangers. No

kelp is found near these islands. Vessels should keep a lookout

for areas of broken and discolored water which should be

avoided.

2.1 The South Shetland Islands (62°00'S., 57°00'W.), consisting of a group of more than 20 islands and islets, extend 270

miles in an ENE/WSW direction between the parallels of

61°00'S and 63°22'S, and the meridians of 53°50'W and

62°50'W.

2.1 The islands are largely volcanic and their N coasts are fronted by islets, rocks, and breakers while their S coasts are almost

entirely clear of dangers.

2.1 The islands remain mostly ice covered all year round. However, after midsummer, a few tracts that are free of snow carry

lichens and mosses and, in some places, these may be supplanted by small patches of grass.

2.1 Winds—Weather.—The Weddell Sea Drift approaches the

islands from the SW and brings cold water, drift ice, and bergs.

The climate is cold, with a mean annual temperature of -4°C, a

mean summer temperature of 0°C, and a mean winter temperature of -10°C.

2.1 The prevailing winds are from the W quadrant. Winds from

the S are cold and bring large masses of drift ice. The warmest

winds blow from the NW and N, carrying fog and dense moisture.

2.1 Gales may reach storm force in the vicinity of the islands

and are liable to persist for long periods. September is the

worst month for high winds. Snow occurs about 20 days per

month in all seasons, but the average cloud cover is more broken in winter than for the rest of the year.

2.1 Ice.—The concentration of the drift ice is dependent upon

the winds, since a heavy swell causes the ice cover to break up

and become more widely dispersed.

2.1 The islands lie within the probable mean limit of drift ice except during the summer months, from January to March. For

the greater part of the remainder of the year, the South Orkney

Islands are entirely surrounded by ice. Their S coasts, particularly the E parts, become icebound before the complete envelopment of the islands.

2.1 During winter, the South Shetland Islands are entirely ice

bound. The W and N parts of Bransfield Strait are usually clear

of ice by November and remain open until March. In exceptional seasons, Deception Island may remain icebound.

2.1 Tides—Currents.—Currents may attain rates of up to 4

knots within the various straits leading between the islands and

small bergs, moving under their influence, may seriously hamper navigation. In the vicinity of the South Orkney Islands, the

predominant current is reported to set NE.

2.1 The currents set W along the N coasts of the South Shetland

Islands and E along the S coasts. All the straits, except Nelson

Strait, are fringed with rocks and due to the strong currents setting in and across them, are dangerous for low-powered vessels. The current that sets W along the N coast has been

observed to flow even during gales from the opposite direction

and rates of 5 to 6 knots have been recorded at times. A current

with a rate of 4 knots was observed during the flood in the narrow channel leading between Spine Islet and Coronation Island. Currents with rates of about 3.5 knots were observed

within Washington Strait and Lewthwaite Strait.

2.1 Tide rips are very common, particularly in the straits and

channels leading between the various island, and are especially

noticeable during calm weather. Tides along the N coasts of the

South Shetland Islands are very irregular, there being at times

HW for 24 hours. At other times, HW remains for about 3 or 4

hours and then the ebbs flows again. Generally, there is one

flood and one ebb every 24 hours.

2.1 In most of the harbors, the tide rises 2.4 to 2.7m, but a spring

tidal rise of 3.6m has been observed in Hero Bay. Winds have a

marked effect upon the current, not only raising the tides beyond their normal levels but also effecting the period and velocity of the tidal currents. Near the entrance to Bransfield

Strait, the tidal currents are strong and variable and a current

setting NW with a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots has been experienced

in the SW part of the strait. At the NE entrance, a current that

sweeps around Joinville Island as it flows from the Weddell

Sea may be encountered. This current usually divides, one

branch flowing NE toward the South Orkney Islands and the

other NW to where it joins the South Shetland Islands, producing eddies.

2.1 Caution.—The charting of the waters in the vicinity of the

South Orkney Islands is inadequate, being based principally on

running surveys.

2.1 All the inlets and bays of the South Orkney Islands and the

South Shetland Islands whose coastlines consist entirely or

partially of ice fronts have suffered significant ablation landward and exhibit deformation. Calving from the ice has also
120 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

accelerated, exposing uncharted land and rocks. This is particularly significant along the ice shelf of Maxwell Bay (Dan

Samuel Bay) (paragraph 2.23). The contours displayed on the

radar screen in these cases may cause confusion and uncertainty in the vessel’s position. 

2.1 Numerous bergs may be carried through the straits and narrow channels by the strong currents, often restricting navigation within these waters.

2.1 “Red Dot Areas” and “Red Dot Points” have been identified

by remote-sensed gravity data as containing depths which may

be potential hazards to navigation. The areas, which lie NW, N,

and NE of, as well as within, the South Shetland Islands, and

the predicted depths (plus or minus 250m) within them, are

best seen on the chart. Mariners are advised to navigate with

caution in these areas. 

The South Orkney Islands

2.2 Laurie Island (60°44'S., 44°37'W.), located at the E

end of the South Orkney Islands, is 12.5 miles long and lies in

an E/W direction.

2.2 The E end of the island is formed by Cape Dundas, which is

229m high. The peninsula leading to this cape slopes gradually

to a low plateau, rising again to a hill at the E extremity. It is

joined to the mainland by a neck of land, 90m wide. Rocks and

ledges front the SW side of this peninsula and seas break

heavily over the rocks which lie up to about 1 mile E of it.

2.2 A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, lies about 1.6 miles NNE of

Cape Dundas. Hart Rock, 10m high, lies 3.2 miles NNE of the

cape and another rock lies about 2 miles WNW of it. Care

should be taken when approaching this area.

2.2 Fitchie Bay, lying 2.5 miles SW of the Ferrier Peninsula, is 3

miles wide.

2.2 Graptolite Island (60°44'S., 44°28'W.) lies at the NE end of

Fitchie Bay and a small islet is located 1.3 miles SW of it. A

submerged wreck lies about 0.7 mile WSW of this island and a

patch of discolored water is reported to lie 1 mile SSE of it.

2.2 A rock, with a depth of 2m, and a shoal, with a depth of 18m,

lie about 1.5 miles SE and 1.7 miles ESE, respectively, of Cape

Dundas. Another shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, lies in the SE approach to the bay, 1.5 miles SSW of Cape Dundas.

2.2 Aitken Cove, lying close SW of Fitchie Bay, is separated

from Methuen Cove, to the SW, by Cape Whitson. Several conspicuous serrated ridges are located on the W side of Aitken

Cove and a small glacier fronts the head. Cape Whitson is very

exposed and is fronted by a continuous ice cliff. Rocks, belowwater and awash, lie within 1.5 miles SE of this cape. Murray

Island, 18m high, lies 1.2 miles E of the cape.

2.2 Mill Cove, 0.6 mile wide, extends for about 0.6 mile in a N

direction. Its E side, 244m high, is fringed by rocks which rise

abruptly to a cliff. A terminal glacier, fronted by an ice cliff, is

located at the head. It fills a narrow column and extends N to

Brown's Bay. Valette Island, 0.3 mile long, lies in the entrance

of the cove, close to the W shore. Depths of 37 to 55m lie in the

center of the cove, but its N part is shoal in the middle.

2.2 Florence Rock, 24m high, lies 0.5 mile S of Valette Island

and a small islet lies close NE it. Two rocks, the northernost of

which is 6m high, lie 0.5 mile ESE of Florence Rock. A shoal,

with a depth of 9.1m, and another rock lie about 0.5 mile SSE

and 0.3 mile NW, respectively, of Florence Rock.

2.2 Point Rae, the NE entrance point of Scotia Bay, is located

0.5 mile W of Valette Island.

2.2 Ailsa Craig, a precipitous island, is 169m high and lies 1

mile SSW of Florence Rock.

2.2 Scotia Bay (60°46'S., 44°40'W.), lying near the SE extremity of the Mossman Peninsula, is entered between Point Rae and

Cape Murdoch. Depths of 53 to 119m lie about 1 mile NE of

Cape Murdoch. Shoals, with depths of 29 and 31m, lie 0.9 mile

NE and 1.1 miles NNE, respectively, of the cape.

2.2 It is reported that strong S winds cause many icebergs to lie

in the approaches to Scotia Bay.

2.2 Five rocks lie offshore between Point Rae and Point Davis;

however, the survey data for this area is extremely limited. It

was reported that a least depth of 12.8m lies in the vicinity of

these rocks.

2.2 Point Davis is located 1.2 miles WNW of Point Rae and

cliffs extend inland to the coast at this point. Two below-water

rocks, over which heavy seas break, lie about 0.3 mile S of this

point. A rock, with a least depth of 1.8m, was reported to lie

about 0.5 mile WNW of Point Davis.

2.2 Point Moreno, the E entrance point of a cove, is located 1.2

miles NW of Point Davis and fronted by a ledge that extends

up to about 90m S. The cove, which is 0.3 mile long, has

depths of 9 to 18m that decrease toward the shore. A shoal,

with a depth of 1.8m, lies 0.2 mile NW of Point Moreno.

2.2 Anchorage in Scotia Bay is not recommended because the

bay is exposed and it is too restricted within the cove. However, temporary anchorage may be taken in depths of 14 to 18m

near the middle of the entrance to the cove. The masts of a radio station are reported to stand near the head of the cove.

2.2 Point Martin (60°47'S., 44°41'W.) is located 1.4 miles S of

the cove, on the E coast of the Mossman Peninsula. Depths of

less than 5.5m lie up to 0.4 mile offshore and the entire coast

between the cove and Cape Murdock, 2.4 miles SE, is lined

with cliffs. Two rocks, one marked by a beacon, lie about 1.3

miles NNW of Point Martin.

2.2 Two islets lie between Point Martin and Cape Murdock, 1

mile SE. Numerous below and above-water rocks lie within 0.5

mile of the cape.

2.2 Buchan Bay recedes for 0.5 mile between the two forks of

the the Mossman Peninsula and its shores are fronted by numerous rocks.

2.2 Cape Hartree, 155m high, is formed by a jagged saw-toothed

promontory which is located 1.5 miles SW of the Mossman

Peninsula.

2.2 Wilton Bay, 1.3 miles long, lies 2 miles NNW of the westernmost fork of the Mossman Peninsula. Cape Davidson, the S

extremity of the Mackenzie Peninsula, forms the NW entrance

point of this bay. A group of below and above-water rocks extends up to 0.3 mile S of this cape and the outermost is 11m

high. Another rock, 12m high, lies about 0.3 mile W of the

cape.

2.3 The Mackenzie Peninsula (60°45'S., 44°48'W.),

steep and rocky, forms the W end of Laurie Island and is 366m

high. Its W side, which has several indentations, leads NW

from Cape Davidson to Route Point, the NW extremity.

2.3 Cape Roca is located 1.8 miles NW of Cape Davidson and

an unnamed cape lies midway between them. A group of rocks

front the coast, 0.2 mile N of Cape Davidson and several rocks
Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 121

Pub. 200

lie up to 0.4 mile SSW of the unnamed cape. Another rock

fronts the shore, close S of Cape Roca.

2.3 A group of prominent rocks lies N of the Mackenzie Peninsula. Nigg Rock, fringed by numerous small rocks, is the innermost of this group. It is 155m high and lies 0.5 mile off Route

Point.

2.3 Eillium Island, 201m high, lies 0.5 mile NNW of Nigg Rock.

An islet, 46m high, and a rock lie 0.2 mile NW and 0.5 mile E,

respectively, of this island.

2.4 Jessie Bay is entered between Cape Robertson, located on the Mackenzie Peninsula, and Cape Mabel, located on

the Price Peninsula. This bay is 4.5 miles long, 3.5 miles wide,

and Uruguay Cove lies at its head. Rocks, with depths of less

than 1.8m, have been reported to lie in the middle of the bay,

ENE of Route Point.

2.4 Uruguay Cove, about 0.5 mile wide and 0.5 mile long, is

open to the sea on the N side and open to the SE across the low,

narrow isthmus which separates it from Scotia Bay. A conspicuous and sugar-loaf shaped hill, 40m high, stands near the head

of the bay and projects through the glacier which extends to the

sea.

2.4 Mount Ramsay (60°44'S., 44°44'W.), 474m high, stands on

the W side of Uruguay Cove and is one of the highest peaks on

Laurie Island.

2.4 Mount Lola (60°44'S., 44°43'W.) is 171m high and another

peak, 270m high, rises close E of it.

2.4 Uruguay Cove has general depths of 11 to 26m. Shoal patches, with depths of 6.4 and 11m, lie 0.5 mile NW and 0.4 mile

NW, respectively, of Mount Lola. Another shoal patch, with a

depth of 8.4m, is reported to lie about 0.3 mile SSW of Mount

Lola.

2.4 Cape Mabel forms the N extremity of the Pirie Peninsula

which is narrow and trends 3 miles N from the main island.

This peninsula separates Jessie Bay from Brown's Bay. Cliffs

extend along the coast in the vicinity of the cape. Islets lie 0.5

mile NW and 0.5 mile N of the cape.

2.4 Mabel Island (60°44'S., 44°42'W.), 180m long, lies 1.5

miles NW of Cape Mabel.

2.4 Brown's Bay, 1.5 miles wide, is entered between Thomson

Point, located on the Pirie Peninsula, and Cape Geddes, located

at the N end of the Ferguslie Peninsula. Several islets and a below-water rock lie off the E coast of the Pirie Peninsula and

front this bay.

2.4 Cape Geddes, located at the N end of the Ferguslie Peninsula, is faced by a cliff, 152m high, and fronted by crushed rocks.

2.4 The depths within Brown's Bay have not been completely

surveyed and are reported to vary between 18m, near to the

shore, and 143m, in the E part of the center of the entrance.

Rudmose Rocks, lying 0.8 mile N of Cape Geddes, are rounded, ice worn, and may be seen above the surface of the water.

Numerous other rocks lie close offshore between Rudmose

Rocks and Cape Geddes.

2.4 Macdougal Bay, lying NE of the Ferguslie Peninsula, is not

recommended for anchorage. The Watson Peninsula flanks the

E side of this bay and Cape Valavielle, 43m high, forms its N

extremity. Numerous rocks front the N coasts of the peninsula

and lie up to 0.5 mile offshore. The outermost rock, 4.6m high,

lies about 0.5 mile NW of Cape Valavielle.

2.4 Marr Bay and Mackintosh Cove, unsurveyed, lie E of the

Watson Peninsula and are separated by a projection of land the

N extremity of which is known as Fraser Point. Several exposed rocks front this point and a rock, 4.6m high, lies about 2

miles NE of it.

2.4 Cape Dundas is located 3.4 miles SE of Mackintosh Cove.

The coast between is marked by several protruding points of

land, each of which is fronted by numerous rocks and islets.

2.5 The Weddell Islands (60°39'S., 44°51'W.) and Saddle Island (60°38'S., 44°50'W.) lie 4.5 miles N and 5.7 miles

N, respectively, of Route Point, on Laurie Island.

2.5 The Weddell Islands consist of two islands and a number of

rocks. Two rocks, awash, and several below-water rocks lie

close SW of the easternmost island and seas break over this entire area. Scapa Rock, 20m high, lies 0.5 mile N of the westernmost island.

2.5 Saddle Island, 2 miles long, is nearly divided into two parts

by a narrow channel filled with boulders. This island has twin

summits, the tallest being 427m high and standing at the E end.

A glacier lies on the S side of the island and forms a prominent

landmark. Numerous rocks lie off the W side of the island and

off the E extremity. A small rocky cove indents the N side of

the island is used for landing.

2.5 There are depths of 37 to over 360m in the waters lying between Laurie Island and the Weddell Islands. A least depth of

29m is reported to lie in the W end of the passage leading between the Weddell Islands and Saddle Island. Care should be

taken when navigating within 1 mile S of the Weddell Islands.

2.5 Washington Strait, 3 miles wide, leads between Laurie Island, on one side, and Frederiksen Island and Powell Island on

the other. A depth of 73m lies in the S part of the strait and

lesser depths are reported to lie in the N part. The strait was observed to be free of dangers, except for shoal depths of 16.4

and 18.3m which were reported to lie 1.3 miles S and 2.3 miles

SE, respectively, of the S end of Frederiksen Island. However,

strong tidal currents and tide rips may be expected in this strait

and grounded icebergs are frequently encountered here. Extreme care should be taken when navigating in this strait and its

approaches as several islands lying in this vicinity are reported

to have been incorrectly charted.

2.5 Several islands, the largest of which are Fredriksen and Powell, lie on the W side of the strait. 

2.5 Fredriksen Island (60°44'S., 44°59'W.), 2.5 miles long and

0.5 mile wide, is rocky with steep slopes. It has no ice covering

except for a few patches of permanent snow. The summit of

this island rises at the N end and 244m high. The N extremity

of the island, which is known as Cape Barlas, is fronted by several above-water rocks. Numerous rocks and islets lie close off

the E and W sides of the island, within about 1 mile of the

cape.

2.5 A channel, with a least depth of 14.6m, lies close to the W

side of Fredriksen Island and permits passage between this island and Powell Island, but considerable discolored water has

been reported to exist on the W side of this strait.

2.5 Powell Island (60°41'S., 45°03'W.), lying close NW of Fredriksen Island, is 7 miles long and about 1.5 miles wide. The N

extremity of this island is formed by Cape Faraday and its N

part consists of glaciers. John Peaks, up to 415m high, rise near

the S end of the island and are snow-covered.

2.5 Numerous rocks front the E shore of the island and a rock,
122 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

with several below-water rocks lying within 0.2 mile N of it,

lies about 0.8 mile ESE of Cape Faraday.

2.5 A group, consisting of seven rocks, and a below-water rock,

which sometimes beaks, lie about 0.8 mile WSW and 1 mile

SW, respectively, of Cape Faraday. A group of rocks fronts

Cape Disappointment, the W extremity of the island, and lies

up to 0.8 mile offshore. An islet lies almost midway between

Capes Disappointment and Faraday.

2.5 Caution.—The S part of Powell Island, which includes John

Peaks, Christoffersen Island, Michelson Island, Fredriksen Island, and the adjacent islets all lie within a designated specially

protected area. They are considered to support vegetation,

birds, and mammals, representative of the South Orkney Islands.

2.6 Michelson Island lies near the S end of Powell Island

and is connected to it by a narrow isthmus of boulders, intermittently submerged. This island is 0.6 mile long, 38m high,

and several islets lie close off its NE end. A smaller and unnamed island, encompassed by foul ground, lies off the S end

of Michelson Island. Grey Island, 0.2 mile long and 43m high,

lies about 0.5 mile S of this unnamed island. Two small islets

lie off the E end of Grey Island and foul ground extends up to

0.2 mile S of it.

2.6 Ellefsen Harbor is entered between Michelson Island and

Christoffersen Island, 0.3 mile W. This harbor extends for 0.2

mile and has depths of 12.8 to 25.6m in the middle, decreasing

toward the shore. Although small, the harbor has good holding

ground and is sheltered. Across the entrance, a chain of abovewater rocks extends for about 0.4 mile SSE from the S end of

Christoffersen Island. The southernmost rock is 27m high and

a rock, awash, lies close ESE of it.

2.6 The approaches to the harbor from the S and SE have not being fully surveyed and extreme care must be exercised. Entrance to the harbor may be made via a channel lying near the

W side of Michelsen Island. This channel is about 180m wide

and has depths of 11 to 24m. A dangerous rock lies in the entrance to the harbor, about 0.3 mile off the S extremity of

Christoffersen Island.

2.6 Falkland Harbor, suitable only for small craft, is entered 0.4

mile NW of Ellefsen Harbor and is mostly foul.

2.6 Lewthwaite Strait separates Powell Island from Coronation

Island, to the W. This strait is 2.5 miles wide, but its navigable

width is reduced to about 1 mile by rocks lying on each side

and grounded icebergs are reported to be frequently found

here. Extreme care should be taken when navigating in the approaches and within the strait as many of the small islands in

this vicinity have been reported to be incorrectly charted. A tidal current setting SW at a rate of 2 to 2.5 knots was experienced (1982) at a position about 8 miles NNE of the strait.

2.7 Several islands, the largest being Coronation Island,

lie on the W side of Lewthwaite Strait. In addition, a group,

known as the Robertson Islands, extends from the SE extremity

of Coronation Island. This group includes Atriceps Island,

Skilling Island, Steepholm Island, Matthews Island, and Coffer

Island.

2.7 Atriceps Island (60°47'S., 45°09'W.), 1 mile long, is the

southernmost of the group and South Cape forms the S extremity of this island. Vessels should navigate with extreme care in

the areas lying to the S and SE of this cape as the salient points

are frequently obscured by large icebergs and several shoal areas extend up to 3.6 miles S and 1.5 miles E from the island.

2.7 Skilling Island (60°46'S., 45°09'W.) is small and lies close

N of Atriceps Island. A rocky area lies between these islands

and rocks extend up to 0.8 mile ESE from this island.

2.7 Steepholm Island (60°46'S., 45°09'W.), along with two

smaller unnamed islands, lies close N of Skilling Island. An

above-water rock and a rock, awash, lie about 0.7 mile E of

these islands.

2.7 Matthews Island, the largest of the Robertson Islands, is

horseshoe shaped and separated from Coronation Island, to the

N, by The Divide, a narrow passage. Whale Bay is located at

the W end of The Divide.

2.7 Coffer Island (60°45'S., 45°08'W.), lying close E of Matthews Island, is 105m high. Anchorage can be taken in a depth

of 27m to the S of this island, but the berth is exposed to the E.

2.7 Coronation Island (60°37'S., 45°35'W.), the largest of the

South Orkney Islands, extends for 25 miles in an E/W direction

and is 3 to 8 miles wide. This island is mainly ice covered and

comprises many bays, glaciers, and peaks. The highest peak,

Mount Nivea, rises to an elevation of 1,265m and stands on the

E side of the central part of the island. The ridge of this peak

descends to the sea in steep, rocky ridges that terminate in bold

headlands, except on the N and NW coasts, where the ice cap

descends in a gentle slope to the water's edge. Deacon Hill, a

conspicuous and ice-covered peak, is 330m high. It forms the

most prominent landmark when approaching from the N or S.

2.7 Orwell Bight (60°43'S., 45°23'W.), about 5 miles wide, indents the S coast of the island and is bounded on the W side by

Signy Island. The coast in this vicinity is rocky and steep with

ice falls and glaciers.

2.8 Whale Bay (60°44'S., 45°11'W.) leads to the W end

of The Divide and as far as Saunders Point, 4.5 miles NW. The

coast is fronted by many islands and rocks which extend up to

about 0.5 mile offshore. This area, which was surveyed in

1965, is considered to be free of dangers to within 1.5 miles of

the coast.

2.8 A depth of 37m lies in the entrance to Whale Bay and anchorage can be obtained in a depth of 33m within its NE corner, near The Divide.

2.8 Schist Point (60°43'S., 45°14'W.) is fronted by a small islet.

2.8 Amphibolite Point (60°41'S., 45°21'W.), located 1 mile

NW of Schist Point, is conspicuous and pyramidal-shaped.

2.8 Olivine Point (60°40'S., 45°29'W.) is located 5 miles ESE of

Saunders Point. The coast between is fronted by numerous islands and dangers which extend up to 0.5 mile offshore. A survey was made of this vicinity to within 2 miles of the shore and

vessels approaching any closer should do so with care.

2.8 Reid Island (60°41'S., 45°30'W.) lies at the E side of the entrance leading into Iceberg Bay (60°39'S., 45°30'W.) at the

head of which lies Sunshine Glacier (60°38'S., 45°30'W.).

This glacier is 3 miles long, 2 miles wide, and flows in a S direction. It is the largest glacier on the S coast of Coronation Island and terminates in ice cliffs, up to 60m high.

2.8 Iceberg Bay is entered between Olivine Point and Cape

Hansen (60°40'S., 45°35'W.). The bay has depths up to 183m

lying in the center, but it shoals at the W end where there are

several islets and rocks.
Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 123

Pub. 200

2.8 Shingle Cove (60°39'S., 45°34'W.), small and sheltered, lies

in the NW corner of the bay. Landing on the beach at the SW

side of this cove is reported to be usually easy. This cove is one

of the few places in the vicinity from which access to the interior of Coronation Island can be made. A large cairn, 76m high,

stands on the rocky spur which forms the SW side of the cove.

2.8 Marshall Bay (60°39'S., 45°38'W.) lies between Cape

Hansen and Cape Vik (60°40'S., 45°40'W.). This bay is 2

miles wide and has depths of 54 to 165m; however, caution is

necessary as drying rocks are located throughout the bay up to

0.75 mile off the NE shore of the bay. A small rock lies 0.5

mile SW of Cape Vik.

2.8 Lynch Island (60°39'S., 45°36'W.), 33m high, lies on the E

side of the bay and is designated as a Specially Protected Area.

2.8 Laws Glacier (60°38'S., 45°38'W.), a confluent glacier system, flows into Marshall Bay.

2.9 Signy Island (60°43'S., 45°38'W.), 4 miles long and

less than 3 miles wide, lies close S of the middle of Coronation

Island from which it is separated by Normanna Strait

(60°40'S., 45°38'W.). This strait is 1 mile wide at its narrowest

part, deep, and mostly clear.

2.9 North Point (60°41'S., 45°38'W.), the N extremity of Signy

Island, is fronted by foul ground which extends up to 0.2 mile

offshore. The island is fringed by numerous islets and above

and below-water rocks; however, there are several good anchorages that are sheltered from the wind and have good holding ground.

2.9 Tioga Hill (60°44'S., 45°39'W.), 279m high, stands on the

W side of the island and forms the summit. Robin Peak, 262m

high, is the highest peak on the N side of the island. This hill is

rocky with sheer cliffs on its E side. Jane Peak, 205m high, has

a rocky turret and rises at the head of Borge Bay (60°43'S.,

45°37'W.).

2.9 The Oliphant Islands (60°45'S., 45°36'W.) is a group consisting of several small islands, islets, and rocks, which lies

close S of Gourlay Point (60°44'S., 45°36'W.).

2.9 Dove Channel (60°45'S., 45°36'W.) leads through this

group in a general E/W direction and is obstructed by many

reefs and shoals. A rock, awash, lies 0.3 mile NE of Gourlay

Point and a shoal, with a depth of 9.4m, lies close ESE of it.

Another shoal, with a depth of 5m, lies 0.6 mile SE of Gourlay

Point.

2.9 Clowes Bay (60°44'S., 45°38'W.) is entered between the

Oliphant Islands and Confusion Island (60°44'S., 45°38'W.),

1.3 miles W. Several islets and rocks front the N coast of this

bay and lie up to about 0.2 mile offshore. The bay is divided by

a chain of shoals which extend S from its head to an above-water rock lying 0.8 mile SE of Confusion Island. 

2.10 Moe Island (60°45'S., 45°42'W.) lies off the SW end

of Signy Island from which it is separated by Fyr Channel

(60°44'S., 45°41'W.). This channel has a depth of 9.1m, but

rocks lie in both its SE and NW entrances. A shoal patch, with

a depth of 4.3m, lies in the SE approach to the channel, 0.5

mile W of Confusion Island. Passage through the channel is

recommended for boats only. Moe Island has been designated a

Specially Protected Area.

2.10 Mariholm Island (60°45'S., 45°42'W.), 26m high, is the

largest of a group of islands which lies about 0.5 mile S of Moe

Island. Numerous obstructions front this island. A rock, with a

depth of 3.6m and over which the sea often breaks, lies 0.3

mile E of Mariholm Island. Another rock, with a depth of 7m,

lies 0.9 mile S of Confusion Island and a shoal patch, with a

depth of 16.4m, lies 0.5 mile SE of it. A shoal, with a depth of

15.5m, lies about 1.5 miles SW of Mariholm island. Vessels

navigating in this area are advised to pass to the S of all of

these dangers.

2.10 Several irregular patches, in which the depths decrease rapidly from about 100m, lie S of Mariholm Island. The southernmost patch, with a least depth of 27m, lies about 3.5 miles

SSW of Oliphant Island.

2.10 Porteous Point (60°44'S., 45°41'W.) and Jebsen Point

(60°43'S., 45°41'W.) are separated by an unnamed bay which

has several rocks fronting its E side. A rock, with a depth of

3.5m, has been reported (2007) to lie about 0.25 mile SW of

Jebsen Point. Cummings Cove lies on the NE side of the point

and has a beach at its head.

2.10 Port Jebsen, formed by a cove, lies close N of Jebsen Point.

A stranded wreck is reported to lie at the head of this cove. Jebsen Rocks lie up to about 0.5 mile NW and N of the point.

2.10 The Flensing Islands (60°42'S., 45°41'W.), a group of four

island, lies about 1 mile N of Jebsen Rocks. The southernmost

island is 0.3m high, the central island is 3.3m high, and the other two islands are 1.2m high.

2.10 A below-water rock, foul ground, and an unexamined area

front the coast between the Flensing Islands and North Point.

2.10 Spindrift Rocks (60°42'S., 45°40'W.), a group of rocks, lies

close off the coast, 0.9 mile SW of North Point. The rocks are

ice free and a attain a height of about 15m. 

2.10 Paal Harbor (60°43'S., 45°36'W.) lies between Rethval

Point (60°44'S., 45°36'W.) and Polynesia Point (60°43'S.,

45°36'W.). This inlet has depths of 18 to 31m in its entrance.

2.10 Borge Bay (60°43'S., 45°37'W.) lies between Bernsten

Point, at the S side, and Balin Point, at the N side. Vessels are

advised to approach this bay from the NE. A light is reported to

be shown from a structure standing 0.1 mile S of Bernsten

Point.

2.10 Outer Island lies 0.4 mile ESE of Bernsten Point and is surrounded by foul ground which extends up to about 0.2 mile offshore on the N side.

2.10 Bare Rock, 5.8m high, and Small Rock, 0.3m high, lie 0.2

mile NE and 0.3 mile N, respectively, of Bernsten Point; an uncharted islet lies SE of Small Rock. Numerous shoals, with

depths of 6.4 to 11.3m, lie in the E approach to the N part of

the bay. The outermost shoal, with a least depth of 8.8m, lies

about 0.4 mile ENE of Balin Point.

2.11 Three Lakes Valley (60°42'S., 45°37'W.), which

contains three freshwater lakes, lies between Mirounga Flats

and Jane Peak. Mirounga Flats is a small and partially enclosed

tidal area that is located in the inner, NW corner of the bay.

Jane Peak is a conspicuous nunatak, 205m high, which rises on

the W shore of the bay.

2.11 A disused pipeline, a beach on which landing can be effected, and a stream from which freshwater can be obtained lie on

the W side of the bay.

2.11 Factory Cove (60°43'S., 45°37'W.) is the site of Signy, a

permanently-manned British Antarctic Survey Station. A radio

station, with several masts, and a meteorological station stand
124 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

on the E side of the cove. The station is fronted by a small pier

and a slipway that are both accessible except at LW.

2.11 A stranded wreck is reported to lie on the beach at the cove.

Anchorage may be obtained in a depth of 26m about 0.3 mile S

of Balin Point and in a depth of 7.3m within the cove. It is reported that a vessel anchored in a depth of 36.6m about 0.3

mile N of Outer Island.

2.11 Powell Rock (60°42'S., 45°36'W.), with a least depth of

0.3m, lies about 0.4 mile NNE of Balin Point.

2.11 Stygian Cove (60°42'S., 45°37'W.) is small, shallow, and

fronted by numerous reefs. The outermost reef lies 0.2 mile NE

of Berry Head (60°42'S., 45°37'W.). This reef dries 0.3m and

a shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, lies close E of it.

2.11 Caution.—When navigating in the vicinity of Borge Bay,

care should be taken as many of the shoals have not been fully

examined.

2.12 Gerd Island (60°40'S., 45°44'W.), 16m high, lies 1

mile W of Stene Point (60°39'S., 45°42'W.). A clear passage,

about 0.8 mile wide, leads between this island and Coronation

Island. A drying rock lies about 0.3 mile SSW of Gerd Island. 

2.12 The entrance to Norway Bight (60°37'S., 45°49'W.) lies between Mansfield Point (60°39'S., 45°44'W.) and Meier Point

(60°38'S., 45°54'W.). The shores of this bight are completely

covered by glaciers.

2.12 The Gosling Islands (60°39'S., 45°55'W.), a scattered group

of islands and rocks, lies close S and W of Meier Point. Anchorage can be taken in depths of 18 to 36m on the W side of

Norway Bight and clear of the islands and rocks.

2.12 The Monk Islands (60°40'S., 45°55'W.), a group of very

small islands and rocks, lies 2 miles S of Meier Point. The tallest island is 7.3m high and rocks extend up to 0.5 mile N and

0.5 mile S from it. Foul ground fronts the coast extending between Meier Point and Cheal Point (60°38'S., 45°59'W.). 

2.12 The W coast of Coronation Island, between Return Point

(60°38'S., 46°01'W.) and Penguin Point (60°31'S., 45°56'W.),

is fronted by a series of rocky cliffs over which the highland ice

spills in the form of ice falls and hanging glaciers.

2.12 Fulmar Bay (60°37'S., 46°01'W.), 1 mile wide, lies between

Return Point and Moreton Point (60°37'S., 46°02'W.). An ice

cliff, 49m high, rises within this bay and twin peaks, 635m

high, stand close E of it.

2.12 Monroe Island (60°36'S., 46°03'W.), 299m high, is the largest and easternmost of the Larsen Islands (60°36'S.,

46°03'W.). The northernmost of this group of islands is 241m

high.

2.12 Nicolas Rocks (60°34'S., 46°06'W.), a chain, extends seaward from the NW extremity of the Larsen Islands group.

2.13 Sandefjord Bay (60°37'S., 46°03'W.) is large and has

depths of 9 to 33m. The S entrance is about 1 mile wide, but

the width of the navigable channel is reduced considerably by

numerous rocks.

2.13 Sandefjord Peaks (60°37'S., 45°59'W.) consist of three

mountains, the tallest being 636m high.

2.13 Sphinx Rock (60°37'S., 46°05'W.) lies close SW of Monroe

Island.

2.13 The Twins (60°37'S., 46°04'W.), two rocks lying close together, are located 0.4 mile SE of Sphinx Rock. It is reported

that tide rips occur to the W of these rocks.

2.13 Numerous above and below-water rocks lie in the NW part

of the bay and may best be seen on the chart. Mainsail Rock

(60°37'S., 46°03'W.), the most conspicuous, is 17.4m high.

2.13 Depths of 26 to 33m lie in the S entrance of the bay and decrease towards the head. The N entrance of the bay is narrowed

by Spine Island (60°36'S., 46°02'W.) which lies between

Monroe Island and Coronation Island. A channel, about 180m

wide, leads through the N entrance and W of Spine Island

where depths of 14.6 to 37m can be found. The channel leading

to the E of the island is not recommended.

2.13 Anchorage can be obtained in depths of 9 to 12m in the N

part of the bay and S of Mainsail Rock. It was reported (1950)

that a vessel anchored 0.6 mile SSW of Mainsail Rock. However, anchoring within Sandefjord Bay was not recommended,

except in calm weather, as the berths were subject to strong tidal currents. Anchorage can also be obtained in depths of 26 to

33m in the S entrance to the bay.

2.13 Tidal currents, with rates of 3 to 4 knots, have been experienced in the navigable channels and tide rips have been reported to be numerous. In addition, ice was reported to be very

troublesome with small bergs and growlers continually drifting

in and out.

2.13 Numerous islands and dangers lie W of Coronation Island.

2.13 Melson Rocks (60°31'S., 46°10'W.), which attain a height of

30m, lie 7 miles W of Penguin Point. A rock, on which the sea

breaks, is reported to lie about 5.5 miles W of these rocks.

2.13 Caution.—It has been reported that rocks, dangerous to navigation, lie about 3.5 and 4.5 miles WNW of Melson Rocks. 

2.13 Despair Rocks (60°33'S., 46°10'W.) lie 3 miles S of Melson

Rocks. These rocks extend 0.5 mile SSE and the sea sometimes

breaks over them.

2.13 Lay-brother Rock (60°34'S., 46°13'W.), awash, lies about

1.8 miles SW of Despair Rocks.

2.13 Sorlle Rocks (60°37'S., 46°15'W.) lie 3 miles S of Laybrother Rock and attain a height of 19m.

2.13 Vessels navigating in this area should not approach within 1

mile of the above dangers.

2.14 The Inaccessible Islands (60°34'S., 46°44'W.), a

group of small and precipitous islands, lies 22 miles W of Penguin Point. The southernmost island is 293m high, the middle

island is 226m high, and the northernmost island 160m high.

The channels leading between the islands are mostly clear, but

many off-lying rocks fringe the shores and landing is difficult.

2.14 Several small islets and rocks lie up to 0.8 mile offshore, 1 to

2 miles S of Penguin Point. Several other islets lie 1 mile further S.

2.14 The Governor Islands (60°30'S., 45°56'W.), a chain of islands and rocks, extends up to 1.5 miles N of Penguin Point.

The largest island of this chain is 117m high and the outermost

one is 17m high. Depths of 33 to 35m are reported to lie 1.8

miles N of Penguin Point. A shoal, with a depth of 26m, is reported to lie about 5 miles N of Penguin Point.

2.14 Tonsberg Cove (60°32'S., 45°55'W.) lies 1 mile SE of Penguin Point. From this cove, the coast extends ENE for 6 miles

to Conception Point (60°31'S., 45°41'W.) and is fronted by

many rocks.

2.14 Bridger Bay (60°33'S., 45°51'W.), semicircular and 2.5

miles wide, lies close W of Tickell Head (60°32'S., 45°48'W.).

2.14 Conception Point, the N extremity of Coronation Island, is
Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 125

Pub. 200

located 4 miles NW of Prong Point (60°32'S., 45°34'W.). Foul

ground, on which an islet lies, extends up to 0.8 mile N and 1.5

miles W of Conception Point. A patch, with a least depth of

27.4m, lies about 2 miles N of this point.

2.15 Ommanney Bay (60°33'S., 45°32'W.), 2 miles wide,

lies between Prong Point and Foul Point (60°32'S., 45°29'W.)

and has depths of 37 to 44m. A rock lies in the SE portion of

the bay, about 1 mile SW of Foul Point and 0.5 mile offshore.

A glacier is located at the head of the bay.

2.15 The coast between Foul Point and Cape Bennett (60°37'S.,

45°13'W.) is cliffy in places and is fronted by numerous islets

and rocks which extend up to 1.5 miles offshore.

2.15 An islet, 107m high, and another islet, 29m high, lie close N

and 1.5 miles E, respectively, of Foul Point. Many below-water

rocks and foul ground lie between these islets.

2.15 The coast between Foul Point and Palmer Bay (60°37'S.,

45°20'W.) is fronted by many rocks which extend up to 1.5

miles offshore. Depths of 46 to 66m lie to seaward of these

rocks. Palmer Bay recedes for about 1 mile and is 2 miles wide.

This bay has a cliffy coast and two rocks lie on its W side,

close offshore. Anchorage is not recommended within the bay.

2.15 From the E entrance point of Palmer Bay, the coast trends E

for 2.5 miles to Cape Bennett and is rugged. A group of islets

extends 1 mile N from a point located 2 miles W of Cape Bennett.

2.15 The coast extends 6 miles S from East Cape (60°38'S.,

45°11'W.) and is broken and irregular with cliffy bays.

2.15 Rayner Point (60°39'S., 45°10'W.) is located 1 mile SE of

East Cape. The coast between is formed by several rugged outcroppings with glacial slopes and foul ground extends up to

about 0.5 mile offshore.

2.15 Gibbon Bay (60°39'S., 45°11'W.) lies 1.3 miles S of Rayner

Point. A high cliff stands at its head and foul ground fringes its

S and W sides.

2.15 The Turret (60°40'S., 45°09'W.), a prominent headland,

forms the S entrance of point of the bay and is 462m high. Anchorage can be taken in depths of 33 to 55m within the bay.

However, this bay is too open to afford any protection from

winds and is frequently filled with drifting ice.

2.15 Spencer Harbor (60°41'S., 45°09'W.) lies 1.5 miles S of

The Turret. This inlet has depths up to 90m lying close offshore and affords little protection.

2.15 Petter Bay (60°43'S., 45°10'W.) lies 0.5 mile S of Spencer

Harbor and has depths of 19 to 66m. However, this bay is not

recommended for anchorage as it is too open to afford any protection except from the W. A group of islets, up to 35m high,

lies within this bay, about 3 miles S of The Turret.

Matthews Island (60°45'S., 45°09'W.), 2 miles long, is separated from Coronation Island by The Divide, a narrow passage.

2.15 Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 27m close off the S

side of Coffer Island (60°45'S., 45°08'W.), but this roadstead

is not recommended.

The South Shetland Islands—The Northeastern

Group

2.16 Clarence Island (61°12'S., 54°05'W.), the easternmost island of the South Shetland Islands, lies 215 miles W of

the Inaccessible Islands.

2.16 Cape Bowles (61°19'S., 54°06'W.), the S extremity, is

formed by a precipitous cliff. Mount Irving, 1,924m high, rises

2 miles N of Cape Bowles.

2.16 Cape Lloyd (61°07'S., 54°01'W.), marked by a light, is the

N extremity and slopes to the sea from the summit of a peak,

1,389m high. Tide rips have been reported to occur off this

cape.

2.16 Sugarloaf Island (61°11'S., 54°00'W.) is the northernmost

of two islands which lie about 1 mile off the E side of the island.

2.16 Between Humble Point (61°11'S., 54°08'W.) and Chinstrap Cove (61°14'S., 54°11'W.), several islets lie within 2

miles of the W coast of the island.

2.16 Escarpada Point (61°17'S., 54°14'W.) forms the SW extremity of the island and is fronted by shoal patches on its SW

side.

2.16 Cornwallis Island (61°04'S., 54°28'W.) lies 13 miles WNW

of Clarence Island and is separated from it by Prince Charles

Strait (61°05'S., 54°35'W.), which is clear and has depths of

18 to 42m.

2.17 Elephant Island (61°10'S., 55°14'W.), 24 miles long,

lies in an E/W direction with Cape Valentine, the NE extremity,

located 19 miles W of Cape Lloyd. The E part of this island is

formed by an ice-covered plateau, 457m high, with steep

slopes that end in rocky cliffs or glacier faces, up to 90m high.

Cape Valentine, consists of a rocky cliff, 244m high, and is

fronted by an islet. A shoal depth of 5m lies about 0.7 mile

ENE of Cape Valentine. 

Pinnacle Rock (61°06'S., 54°47'W.), 122m high and resembling a castle, lies 1 mile offshore, midway between Cape Valentine and Cape Belsham (61°05'S., 54°53'W.). A reef, on

which the sea breaks, connects this prominent rock with the N

coast.

2.17 From Cape Belsham, which has a notched peak and is 244m

high, the N coast extends 14 miles W and consists of rocky

cliffs which fall steeply to the water's edge. The coast then extends 4.5 miles SW to Cape Lindsey (61°06'S., 55°29'W.), the

W extremity of the island. Numerous rocks and islets front this

stretch of coast and lie up to about 3 miles offshore.

2.17 Gibbous Rocks (61°03'S., 54°59'W.) lie 4 miles NW of

Cape Belsham and Borcegui Island (61°03'S., 55°09'W.), 6m

high, lies 1.5 miles offshore, 5 miles farther W. 

2.17 Rodman Cove (61°07'S., 55°28'W.), located 3 miles NE of

Cape Lindsey, has a narrow, sandy beach lying at the foot of its

steep cliffs. Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 18m within

this cove. The shores of Elephant Island offer little protection

from the wind or sea and landings can only be made during

calm weather.

2.17 Cape Yelcho (61°03'S., 55°22'W.) forms the NW extremity

of the island. Minstrel Point (61°04'S., 55°25'W.), located 2

miles SW of the cape, lies at the foot of Hammer Hill

(61°04'S., 55°21'W.).

2.17 The Seal Islands (60°58'S., 55°24'W.), a group of small islands and rocks, lies about 8 miles N of Cape Lindsey. Anchorage may be taken in a depth of 14m off the S side of the

islands, but this roadstead is not recommended as below-water

ledges and rocks have been reported to exist in this area. Shoal

patches, with depths of 6.4 and 18m, are reported to lie about 9
126 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

miles NW and 5 miles ENE, respectively, of the Seal Islands.

2.17 Sealers Passage (61°02'S., 55°23'W.) lies between Cape

Yelcho and the Seal Islands. Shoal patches, each with a depth

of 18.3m, lie in this passage, 2 miles NNW and 2 miles NNE of

Cape Yelcho.

2.18 West Reef (61°05'S., 55°36'W.), surrounded by foul

ground, consists of a chain of shallow rocks which extends up

to about 6 miles W from Cape Lindsey. Vessels are advised not

to navigate in this area except in very calm weather.

2.18 Stinker Point (61°13'S., 55°23'W.) is located 8 miles SSE of

Cape Lindsey. Beaches, which lie close N and between 0.5 and

1 mile SE of this point, uncover at LW, but their approaches are

encumbered by numerous rocks.

2.18 Cruiser Rocks (61°13'S., 55°28'W.), a group of rocks, extends up to 4 miles seaward between Cape Lindsey and Cape

Lookout (61°16'S., 55°12'W.).

2.18 Table Bay (61°09'S., 55°24'W.) lies S of the peninsula of

which Cape Lindsey, a headland, forms the seaward extremity.

From this cape, the coast trends generally SE for 14 miles to

Cape Lookout and consists mostly of rocky cliffs and hanging

glaciers. Numerous islets and rocks front this stretch of coast

and lie up to about 3 miles offshore.

2.18 Cape Lookout is formed by a steep bluff, 238m high, and

marked by a beacon. Anchorage may be taken in a depth of 9m

within a small bay lying on the W side of this cape. The bay is

fronted by a small spit which extends between two high rocks.

A large glacier rises between two massive shoulders near the

shoreward end of the spit.

2.18 Rowett Island (61°17'S., 55°13'W.), 1 mile long, lies 1 mile

S of Cape Lookout. It has steep slopes and several jagged

peaks.

2.18 Mount Pendragon (61°15'S., 55°14'W.), the summit of the

island, is 973m high and rises 1.5 miles NW of the cape.

Mount Elder, another prominent peak, stands 3 miles farther

NNE.

2.18 The SE side of Elephant Island is mostly occupied by Endurance Glacier (61°10'S., 55°08'W.), which extends between

the slopes of Mount Elder and Muckle Bluff (61°09'S.,

54°52'W.), located 12 miles NE of Cape Lookout.

2.18 Walker Point (61°08'S., 54°42'W.) is located 6 miles E of

Muckle Bluff and fronted by foul ground. A below-water ridge

extends between Elephant Island and Clarence Island, but has

not been surveyed.

2.19 Gibbs Island (61°28'S., 55°34'W.), 400m high, lies

16 miles SW of Elephant Island. This island has a thick snowcap and a pronounced dip near its middle. A small and crescent-shaped promontory stands close SE of the main part of the

island. A prominent peak, 262m high, rises on this promontory. 

2.19 The Spit (61°29'S., 55°30'W.), a short and narrow isthmus,

is composed of boulders, up to 21m high, and connects the

promontory to the main part of the island. Landing during calm

weather may be made on a small beach on the S coast of the island.

2.19 Caution.—A depth of 7.5m has been reported (2007) to lie

about 2 miles off the N side of Gibbs Island, about 3 miles NW

of its E extremity. 

2.19 Aspland Island (61°28'S., 55°55'W.), 3 miles long and

734m high, lies 5 miles W of Gibbs Island.

2.19 Eadie Island (61°28'S., 55°57'W.), less than 1 mile long and

450m high, lies close SW of Aspland Island and may be connected to it.

2.19 O'Brien Island (61°30'S., 55°58'W.) lies 1.5 miles SW of

Eadie Island and has three sharp peaks. The middle peak forms

the summit of the island and is 420m high.

2.19 Bridgeman Island (62°04'S., 56°44'W.), 240m high, lies 38

miles SW of O'Brien Island. This island is volcanic and appears as a truncated pyramid. Its summit is inclined to the S

and covered with snow. The reddish-brown coasts of the island

are nearly vertical on the N side and sloping on the S side.

Cliffs face the shores of the island. Those on the N and W sides

have a yellow appearance and rise almost sheer from the sea

while those on the S and E sides are red and rise more gradually towards the summit. Dangers fronting the island are reported

to all lie within 0.2 mile of the shores.

The South Shetland Islands—The Southwestern

Group

2.20 King George Island (62°00'S., 58°15'W.) lies with

North Foreland, its NE extremity, located 28 miles WNW of

Bridgeman Island. This island is fronted by numerous rocks

and reefs. It is mostly covered with ice through which a few

prominent nunataks rise.

2.20 Caution.—Depths within 5 miles of the coast between Martins Head (62°11'N., 58°14'W.) (see paragraph 2.27), on the S

side of King George Island, and Barnard Point (62°46'S.,

60°21'W.) (see paragraph 2.44), on the S side of Livingstone

Island, have been reported (2007) to be less than charted. 

2.20 Venus Bay (61°55'S., 57°54'W.) lies between North Foreland and False Round Point (61°54'S., 58°02'W.).

2.20 Esther Harbor (61°55'S., 57°59'W.), an inlet, lies at the W

side of the head of the bay. Brimstone Peak, a steep and yellow

bluff, forms the NE entrance point and Esther Nunatak forms

the SW. A group of three small islets lies near the SW shore of

the inlet and extends for about 1 mile in an E/W direction.

These islets are 9m high and lie about 0.2 mile from the land

ice which rests on a shelving, rock platform. Esther Harbor was

formerly described as a good anchorage, but it has not been recently surveyed and is not presently recommended, even for

small craft.

2.20 Foul ground, lying up to 1.8 miles offshore, fronts the coast

between North Foreland and Cove Rock (61°54'S., 57°51'W.)

and the SW side of Ridley Island. Foul ground, lying up to 1.3

miles offshore, also fronts the coast between False Round Point

and Round Point.

2.20 Ridley Island (61°51'S., 58°03'W.), 254m high, is located 2

miles N of False Round Point and foul ground lies inbetween.

2.20 The coast trends 12.5 miles SW and W from False Round

Point to Round Point (61°56'S., 58°28'W.). The waters lying

off this stretch of the coast have not been fully surveyed.

2.20 Owen Island (61°56'S., 58°26'W.) and Jagged Island

(61°54'S., 58°29'W.) lie about 1 mile E and 2.5 miles NNW, respectively, of Round Point. A rock, 12m high, lies 2 miles SW

of Jagged Island.

2.20 Tartar Island (61°56'S., 58°29'W.) lies 0.5 mile NW of

Round Point. A chain of rocks, lying between 2 and 8 miles
Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 127

Pub. 200

offshore, extends along the E part of the N coast of King

George Island. Numerous rocks and islets lie in this area and

great care must be used. 

2.20 Davey Point (61°58'S., 58°34'W.), conspicuous and rocky, is

located 3 miles SW of Round Point.

2.20 Caution.—The N coasts of the islands in the South Shetland

group are fringed by numerous rocks and reefs. Vessels should

only approach these shores with extreme care. It is reported

that the changes of depths in this area are sudden and give no

warning of the dangers.

2.21 Stigant Point (62°02'S., 58°45'W.), 64m high and

conspicuous, is located 10 miles W of Round Point. Foul

ground lies off the coast in this vicinity and extends up to 2

miles offshore.

2.21 From this point, the coast extends for 15 miles SW to Fildes

Strait (62°14'S., 59°00'W.), being heavily glaciated.

2.21 The Flat Top Peninsula (62°13'S., 59°02'W.), located 1

mile N of the SW extremity of King George Island, is fluted on

its W side.

2.21 Numerous rocks and islets front the NW coast of the island.

The Atherton Islands (62°06'S., 58°29'W.), two prominent islands, lie centered 8 miles SW of Stigant Point and attain

heights of 40 and 44m.

2.21 Caraquet Rock (62°07'S., 59°02'W.) lies 4 miles WSW of

Bell Point (62°07'S., 58°53'W.) and Square End Island

(62°10'S., 58°59'W.) lies 3.3 miles NNE of the Flat Top Peninsula.

2.21 Sinbad Rock (62°10'S., 59°02'W.) lies 1.3 miles WNW of

Square End Island and a below-water rock is reported to lie,

position approximate, about 2.5 miles WNW of the Flat Top

Peninsula.

2.21 Fildes Strait leads between the N extremity of Nelson Island

(62°18'S., 59°03'W.) and the SW extremity of King George Island. The N entrance of this strait is foul and narrow and is

navigable only by small boats. The tidal currents within the

strait are reported to be so strong that passage is not recommended.

2.21 Several beaches, formed mostly of black sand and gravel,

fringe the shores of the strait. Some scanty vegetation, consisting of thick-bladed tufts of coarse grass, grows on these beaches.

2.21 The NW side of the entrance to the strait is fronted by several dangers including Upton Rock (62°12'S., 59°08'W.), Nancy

Rock (62°13'S., 59°06'W.), Withem Island (62°14'S.,

59°09'W.), and Weeks Stack (62°14'S., 59°03'W.).

2.21 Nelson Island (62°18'S., 59°13'W.), 11 miles long and 7

miles wide, is completely ice covered and has no conspicuous

summit. A few bare rock exposures lie near the coastal ice

cliffs. This island is completely fronted by many islets and

rocks.

2.21 Duthoit Point (62°19'S., 58°50'W.), the E extremity of Nelson Island, forms the S entrance point of Fildes Strait.

2.21 Lone Rock (62°21'S., 58°50'W.), 3m high, lies 2 miles SW

of Pig Rock (62°19'S., 58°48'W.), 65m high, at the S end of an

area of rocks and foul ground which extends SE from Duthoit

Point. A below-water rock is reported to lie, position approximate, about 2.3 miles ESE of Duthoit Point; a shoal depth of

8.5m is reported (2009) to lie abour 0.8 mile WSW of the below-water rock. 

2.22 Edgell Bay (62°16'S., 58°59'W.), mostly unsurveyed,

lies 4 miles N of Duthoit Point. Spiro Hill (62°16'S.,

59°00'W.), 122m high and prominent, stands at the head of this

bay. Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 42m about 0.8 mile

SE of Rip Point (62°15'S., 58°59'W.), the NW entrance point

of the bay.

2.22 Two Summit Island (62°15'S., 58°57'W.), 43m high and

conspicuous, lies 1.3 miles NE of Rip Point and 0.3 mile S of

Halfthree Point (62°14'S., 58°57'W.), the NE entrance point

of Fildes Strait.

2.22 An isolated shoal patch, with a least depth of 11m, lies about

0.7 mile SW of the W extremity of this island. A narrow drying

reef, about 0.3 mile long, lies 1.4 miles SSW of the W extremity of this island.

2.22 An unnamed point, located 1 mile SW of the W extremity of

the island, projects into the W side of Edgell Bay and an area

of shallow foul ground extends up to about 0.2 mile seaward

from it. This foul area fronts the coast to the W of the point and

extends up to about 0.3 mile offshore. Several rocks front this

stretch of coast and lie up to 2.5 miles offshore.

2.22 Harmony Point (62°19'S., 59°15'W.) forms the W extremity of the island and the N entrance point of Harmony Cove. An

extensive shoal area, with a least depth of 3m, lies about 4.5

miles WNW of this point. A shoal patch, with a depth of 10m,

is reported to lie about 3.5 miles W of this point.

2.22 A beacon stands 0.2 mile E of the point and a racon is reported to be situated between them.

2.22 Folger Rock (62°16'S., 59°15'W.), above-water, lies 2.5

miles N of Harmony Point.

2.22 Harmony Cove (62°19'S., 59°12'W.), lying on the W side of

the island, is a small inlet. Its shores consist of low, rocky

shelves which are backed by rocky mounds. Extensive penguin

rookeries are situated in the vicinity of these mounds. This inlet provides no protection from the swell and is not recommended as an anchorage.

2.22 The Toe (62°20'S., 59°11'W.), marked by a beacon, forms

the S entrance point Harmony Cove. 

2.22 Inca Point, a prominent headland, is located 1.3 miles E of

Harmony Point. It is formed by a double rock and surmounted

by a hut.

2.23 Ross Point (62°21'S., 59°08'W.) is located 4 miles SE

of Harmony Point. The water lying to the E of a line joining

these points has a light-green appearance, but this is believed to

be due to the reflection from the glacier forming the coastline.

2.23 Shoals extend up to about 0.5 mile S of Harmony Point and

foul ground extends up to about 0.5 mile offshore, for 1 mile E

of the point. Numerous above and below-water rocks, some of

which break heavily, lie on this area of foul ground. The S

coast of Nelson Island between Ross Point and Duthoit Point, 8

miles ENE, is fringed with rocks.

2.23 Grace Rock (62°22'S., 59°01'W.), the southernmost of these

rocks, lies 1 mile offshore, 3.5 miles ESE of Ross Point.

2.23 Maxwell Bay (Dan Samuel Bay) (62°15'S., 58°51'W.) lies

between the SW end of King George Island and the NE side of

Nelson Island. It is entered between Stranger Point (62°16'S.,

58°37'W.) and Duthoit Point, the E extremity of Nelson Island.

2.23 Tu Rocks (62°14'S., 58°53'W.), a group consisting of three

conspicuous islets, lies 2.3 miles SSW of Nebles Point

(62°12'S., 58°52'W.). One of these islets is 4m high ;d the other
128 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

two are 10m high.

2.23 Ardley Island (62°13'S., 58°56'W.), 72m high, lies with

Braillard Point, its NE extremity, located 0.8 mile WNW of Tu

Rocks. The W end of this island is joined to the mainland by a

drying spit. A light is reported to be shown from a structure,

6m high, standing near the E end of this island. A hut stands on

the N side of the island.

2.23 Suffield Point (62°12'S., 58°55'W.), a conspicuous bluff, is

located 1 mile N of Braillard Point.

2.23 Lapidary Point (62°12'S., 58°56'W.) is located 0.4 mile

WSW of Suffield Point and Rocky Cove lies between them.

2.23 Caution.—For information on the dangers caused by glacial

ablation in the Maxwell Bay area, see paragraph 2.1. Depths in

Maxwell Bay are reported (2007, 2009) to be less than charted. 

2.23 Jasper Point (62°11'S., 58°54'W.) is located 0.4 mile NE of

Suffield Point and Norma Cove lies between them. This point

is faced by cliffs which are composed of black and buff rocks

with numerous veins of red and green jasper.

2.23 A stranded wreck is reported to lie close to the shore, 0.3

mile NE of Jasper Point.

2.23 Ardley Cove lies 1 mile WSW of Suffield Point; a lighted

beacon, 3m high, stands on the shore at its W end.

2.23 Teniente Marsh, a Chilean scientific station fronted by a

small pier, and Bellingshausen, a Russian station, are situated

at the head of this cove. An aeronautical radiobeacon is reported to be situated close N of the latter base.

2.23 Great Wall, a Chinese station, is situated close S of Ardley

Cove and a quay, used by small craft, lies close to it. Artigas, a

Uruguayan station, is situated in the vicinity of Jasper point.

2.23 Anchorage, with good holding ground, can be taken in a

depth of 48m, mud, about 0.5 mile SW of Suffield Point. An

airstrip is situated 1 mile N of Ardley Cove.

2.24 Collins Harbor (62°11'S., 58°51'W.), an inlet, can

accommodate several large vessels. Anchorage can be taken in

depths of 22 to 29m near the head. A survey indicated that the

bottom near the middle of the entrance is irregular. When entering, vessels should favor the W side of the entrance in order

to avoid a shoal, with a depth of 3m, lying 2.3 miles ENE of

Suffield Point.

2.24 A spit, with depths of 9 to 18m, extends NNW from the E

entrance point to the above shoal. A patch, with a depth of

13m, lies 2.3 miles ENE of Suffield Point.

2.24 Marion Cove (62°13'S., 58°48'W.) lies 2 miles SE of Collins Harbor. A shoal area, with depths of 2 to 6m, extends 0.3

mile NW from its S entrance point. A shoal patch, with depths

of 7 to 9m, and an islet, 2m high, lie about 0.4 mile NNW and

0.5 mile ENE, respectively, of its S entrance point.

2.24 Noel Hill (62°14'S., 58°46'W.), a prominent slate knob, is

255m high and stands on the S side of this cove.

2.24 Foul ground and several below and above-water rocks lie on

the N side of the cove, near its head. The cove is partly surrounded by ice cliffs, but beaches front both sides of the entrance and a shingly promontory stands on the S side of the

entrance. Several hills, up to 95m high, rise behind the beach

on the S side.

2.24 Foul ground fronts the N entrance point and a conspicuous

square rock, 34m high, lies near the coast, 0.3 mile NNE of it.

A group of rocks, one of which dries, lies 0.2 mile offshore, 1

mile E of the N entrance point. A shoal, with a depth of 6m,

lies 0.2 mile farther ENE.

2.24 Anchorage by large vessels can be taken about 0.4 mile NE

of the S entrance point; anchorage by small vessels can be taken near the head of the cove.

2.24 Potter Cove (62°14'S., 58°42'W.) lies 2 miles SE of Marion

Cove from which it is separated by a small peninsula.

2.24 Three Brothers Hill (62°15'S., 58°41'W.), 196m high,

stands in the vicinity of this cove. It is very conspicuous and

has been described as the neck of an extinct volcano.

2.24 Florence Nunatak (62°13'S., 58°37'W.), 281m high, rises

2.5 miles NE of Three Brothers Hill.

2.24 The cove is entered between an unnamed point, located 0.5

mile S of Three Brothers Hill, and Winship Point (62°15'S.,

58°44'W.), 1.5 miles WNW.

2.24 A light is shown from a metal structure, 8m high, standing

on the E side of the entrance to the cove, 0.3 mile NW of Three

Brothers Hill. 

2.24 The coast trends 0.9 mile N from the E entrance point to a

point located 0.2 mile NNW of Three Brothers Hill. It then extends 0.4 mile E to a stream on the E side of which stands a

small, green pump house. The ruins of a jetty lie close E of the

stream, but the beach in this vicinity slopes and is free from obstructions. This beach is reported to be the site of a colony of

elephant seals. The low coast, with four huts standing along it,

then continues ENE until it reaches an ice cliff. This ice cliff,

which is 30 to 49m high, extends 0.6 mile N and then 1.5 miles

WSW. Over time, the position of the face of the ice cliff is reported to change.

2.24 From the SW end of the ice cliff, a stony beach, backed by

steep and snow-clad hills, extends 0.9 mile SSW to the W entrance point of the cove. A prominent outcrop stands midway

along this beach and a lagoon forms in the shingle by the ice

cliff during the summer. A reef, which dries 2m in places, extends 0.2 mile from the shingle beach, opposite the N end of

the lagoon. An area of foul ground, with numerous rocks, lies

N of this reef. A rock, 8m high, lies 0.2 mile offshore, about

0.2 mile S of the lagoon.

2.24 Three above-water rocks, the tallest being 14m high, lie on a

drying, rocky ledge which extends 0.2 mile S from the W entrance point of the cove. Two rocks, 22 and 23m high, lie 0.3

mile farther W and are prominent. Between the rocky ledge

and these two rocks, a small beach fringes the shore and can be

used as landing by boats, but care should be taken as many

small reefs lie in the vicinity of the ledge.

2.24 It was reported that a vessel anchored in a depth of 31m,

black soft mud, near the head of the cove. This anchorage berth

was reported to be sheltered, except from SE winds, and appeared to afford better holding ground than farther seaward.

Vessels can also anchor about 0.3 mile NNW of the pump

house with their sterns made fast to bollards on the shore. Such

vessels should anchor with their sterns about 0.2 mile offshore.

However, care must be taken as this places the stern of the vessel between two shoals, each with a depth of 6m.

2.24 Continual falls may be expected from the ice cliff during the

melt season and the cove often becomes filled with brash ice

and blocks of stranded ice, making landings difficult. Potter

Cove is recommended as a harbor of refuge, with good anchorage, during bad weather.
Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 129

Pub. 200

2.25 Admiralty Bay (62°10'S., 58°25'W.), lies between

Demay Point and Martins Head (62°11'S., 58°14'W.), a prominent headland. The bay is irregular and contains three inlets;

Ezcurra (62°10'S., 58°34'W.), Mackeller (62°05'S.,

58°28'W.), and Martel (62°05'S., 58°22'W.). These inlets and

the bay offer shelter from all winds and provide anchorage in

moderate depths.

2.25 The entrance of the bay is clear and depths over 360m extend

to the entrance to Martel Inlet.

2.25 Demay Point rises to The Tower, a prominent peak, the summit of which is formed by a square nunatak, 345m high. Telefon Point is located 1.8 miles SW of Demay Point and Telefon

Rocks, up to 24m high, lie 1 mile E of it. Sentry Cove, a small

inlet, indents the S side of Demay Point.

2.25 The shores along both sides of the bay are covered with glaciers. On the E side, Vieville Glacier extends from Vaureal

Peak (62°11'S., 58°18'W.) to Point Hennequin (62°08'S.,

58°24'W.), 4.5 miles inside the bay. A sandy beach, on which a

landing can be made, extends 0.8 mile N from this point. On

the W side, glaciers slope from the heights to the water's edge

between Demay Point and Point Thomas (62°10'S.,

58°30'W.), 4 miles inside the bay.

2.25 Sphinx Hill (62°11'S., 58°27'W.) stands close to the shore,

midway between Demay Point and Point Thomas. This peak is

conspicuous, isolated, black, and 145m high.

2.25 The coast is fronted by foul ground as far as 1.5 miles ESE

of Point Thomas. Napier Rock (62°10'S., 58°26'W.), 5m high,

lies 1.5 miles SE of Point Thomas. Shoals, with depths of 7 and

6m, lie 2.1 miles SE and 1.9 miles SE, respectively, of Demay

Point.

2.25 A light is shown from a metal tower with a gallery, 6m high,

standing in the vicinity of Point Thomas. A hut is situated near

this light.

2.25 Ezcurra Inlet is entered between Point Thomas and Denais

Stack (62°08'S., 58°30'W.), a conspicuous rocky stack, lying

1.5 miles N. Dufayel Island (62°10'S., 58°34'W.) occupies the

center of this inlet. The W end of this island is fringed by a

shoal which has depths of 6 to 8m and extends up to 0.2 mile

offshore. The outer edge of this shoal is steep-to and slopes

abruptly to a depth of 37m. Vessels usually enter the inlet by

passing to the N of the island and leave by passing to the S.

2.25 Cardozo Cove (62°10'S., 58°37'W.) and Goulden Cove

(62°11'S., 58°38'W.) indent the SW end of the inlet. These

coves both have glaciers at their heads and are separated by

Rhyolite Head, a prominent headland. Herve Cove (62°11'S.,

58°33'W.) and Monsimet Cove (62°11'S., 58°34'W.), two

small indentations, lie on the S side of the inlet, S of Dufayel

Island.

2.25 Anchorage is available in a depth of 18m to the SW of the island. The holding ground is good, but the shelter is poor as

squalls can blow from all directions. Care must also be taken to

avoid a shoal, with a depth of 6m, lying 0.2 mile W of the island.

2.25 Lange Glacier (62°07'S., 58°30'W.) reaches the W side of

Admiralty Bay between Denais Stack and Crepin Point

(62°06'S., 58°29'W.), 2.5 miles N.

2.25 Admiralen Peak (62°06'S., 58°30'W.), 305m high and

prominent, rises 1 mile SW of Crepin Point.

2.25 Wegger Peak (62°06'S., 58°31'W.), 304m high and prominent, stands 0.8 mile N of Admiralen Peak.

2.25 Cockscomb Hill (62°05'S., 58°30'W.), 141m high and conspicuous, rises 1 mile N of Crepin Point.

2.26 Mackeller Inlet is entered between Crepin Point and

Plaza Point (62°06'S., 58°26'W.), 1.8 miles E. A shoal, with a

depth of 2m, lies 0.5 mile WNW of Plaza Point. Depths of over

35m extend as far as the head of this inlet, but shoals, with a

least depth of 4m, extend W from the Keller Peninsula

(62°05'S., 58°26'W.) to the W side of the inlet.

Martel Inlet is separated from Mackeller Inlet by the Keller

Peninsula which is surmounted by several peaks, up to 305m

high. The inlet is divided by an extensive shoal area, with

depths of less than 11m, which extends 0.8 mile SSE from the

middle of its NW side. A below-water rock lies on this shoal

area, 1.3 miles NW of Plaza Point. The shores of this inlet are

fringed by numerous rocks. It has been reported (2009) that the

N shore of Martel Inlet lies from 0.3 to 0.5 mile N of its charted position. 

2.26 Visca Anchorage (62°05'S., 58°24'W.) lies at the W side of

the head of Martel Inlet and is divided by a small peninsula.

This latter peninsula is 48m high and its summit is surmounted

by a cairn.

2.26 Stenhouse Bluff (62°04'S., 58°24'W.), a headland, forms the

SE end of the peninsula. O'Connors Rocks, up to 0.9m high, lie

about 0.2 mile off the SW part of the peninsula, 0.2 mile W of

the headland. A shoal area, with depths of 5 to 11m, extends up

to about 0.3 mile S from the headland. A rock, with a depth of

4m, lies about 0.2 mile ESE the headland.

2.26 Sea Leopard Patch (62°05'S., 58°24'W.), with a least depth

of 18m, lies 0.4 mile SSW of Stenhouse Bluff.

2.26 Above-water rocks extend up to about 0.2 mile S from Plaza

Point. A shoal, with a depth of 7m, lies about 0.2 mile ESE of

Plaza Point. A shoal, with a depth of 5m, extends about 0.2

mile into the inlet, 0.7 mile NE of Plaza Point.

2.26 A meteorological station, which was abandoned in 1961, is

situated on the W side of Martel Inlet and an anemometer tower, 21m high, stands close N of it. A grave, marked by a cairn

surmounted by a wooden cross, is situated 0.2 mile NW of this

tower.

2.26 Convenient anchorage can be taken in a depth of 31m, mud,

about 0.3 mile ENE of the tower. The holding ground is good,

but this roadstead is subject to violent squalls and strong

winds. Sheltered anchorage is obtainable on the SE side of

Martel Inlet within Lussich Cove (62°06'S., 58°21'W.). The

berth has depths of 8 to 29m over a bottom of glacial mud.

2.26 Ternyck Needle (62°05'S., 58°16'W.), a prominent black

nunatak, projects through the glacier on the NE side of the inlet, 4.8 miles ENE of Plaza Point.

2.26 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly, up to 3°, has been reported to exist within Martel Inlet, close E of Plaza Point.

2.27 Lions Rump (62°08'S., 58°07'W.) is located 5 miles

ENE of Martins Head. The coast between consists of a conspicuous and rocky cliff, up to 277m high, which is composed

of dark gray columns of basalt.

2.27 Legru Bay (62°10'S., 58°12'W.) lies between Loe Head

(62°09'S., 58°08'W.) and Martins Head. The beaches in this vicinity are steeply shelving and composed mainly of coarse

shingle. Low Head is located 1.5 miles S of Lions Rump and

the coast between is fringed by foul ground which extends up
130 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

to 0.5 mile offshore. Shallow rocks, positions approximate, are

reported to lie about 0.8 mile and 1 mile SE of Low Head.

2.27 King George Bay (62°06'S., 58°05'W.) is entered between

Turret Point and Lions Rump, 5.5 miles SW. Its shores consist

of low and level ice faces, fronted by shingle beaches. This bay

is deep, but a number of islets and rocks obstruct its W side.

These include Twin Pinnacles (62°08'S., 58°06'W.), Growler

Rock (62°07'S., 58°08'W.), Martello Tower (62°06'S.,

58°08'W.), and Stump Rock (62°05'S., 58°08'W.).

2.27 Vessels have taken temporary anchorage in a depth of 37m

about 1 mile W of Deacon Peak (62°06'S., 57°54'W.); in a

depth of 42m about 0.4 mile NE of Twin Pinnacles; and in a

depth of 62m about 0.4 mile E of Growler Rock.

2.27 Vessels have also anchored, free from ice, in a depth of 37m

about 1 mile W of Penguin Island. Winds blowing from the W

at 25 to 30 knots were experienced in this anchorage, but the

shelter proved satisfactory. This anchorage was also considered

to be good during E winds.

2.28 Penguin Island (62°06'S., 57°54'W.), which is prominent, marks the E entrance to King George Bay. Deacon Peak,

a volcanic cone, forms the summit of this island and is 166m

high. The N part of the island consists of a plateau, 15m high,

in which an extinct crater lies.

2.28 Penguin Island is separated from Mersey Spit (62°05'S.,

57°55'W.) by a narrow strait which is obstructed with belowwater rocks. The shores of the island are formed by large boulders and landing is difficult in all but calm weather. Depths of

less than 6m extend up to 0.4 mile W of the island and depths

of less than 18m extend up to 1 mile SW of Turret Point. A

shoal, with a depth of 15m, lies about 4 miles E of the island.

Anchorage can be obtained in depths of 15 to 36m, black gravel and sand, to the W and SW of Penguin Island. Irregular

depths were reported to lie 4 miles ENE of the E extremity of

the island and rapid shoaling was reported to occur about 1

mile ENE of the island. It is recommended that great care be

used when approaching the E side of the island and vessels

should not anchor here. Anchorage can also be taken in a depth

of 42m on the W side of the bay, about 0.5 mile N of Twin Pinnacles.

2.28 Mersey Spit lies 1 mile SW of Three Sisters Point

(62°04'S., 57°53'W.) and is located on the E side of a small

promontory. Turret Point, the E entrance point of the bay,

forms the W extremity of this promontory.

2.28 Sherratt Bay (62°02'S., 57°50'W.) lies between Penguin Island and Cape Melville. Penola Island (62°02'S., 57°51'W.) is

small and lies within this bay.

2.28 Cape Melville (62°02'S., 57°37'W.), 183m high, forms the E

extremity of King George Island. This cape consists of a narrow, level, and rocky tongue which is backed by cliffs.

2.28 Melville Peak (62°01'S., 57°41'W.), 549m high, rises about

3 miles W of the seaward extremity of the cape.

2.28 Between Cape Melville and North Foreland, 7 miles N, the

coast consists of sheer, crumbling cliffs with numerous rock

falls and landslides of great size. This stretch of coast is fringed

by rocks, reefs, and foul ground, which extend up to about 0.8

mile offshore, and should be given a wide berth.

2.28 Rocks, on which the sea breaks continuously, lie 0.8 mile S

and 1.5 miles NE of Cape Melville. Rocks and foul ground extend up to 1.5 miles offshore between the cape and North Foreland.

2.28 Vessels are advised to pass at least 3 miles off Cape Melville.

2.29 Foreland Island (61°57'S., 57°39'W.), 24m high, lies

3.5 miles SSE of North Foreland and Middle Island (61°58'S.,

57°38'W.) lies 1.5 miles farther S.

2.29 Simpson Rocks (61°58'S., 57°23'W.), up to 9m high, lie 7

miles NE of Cape Melville and should be given a wide berth. A

navigable channel leads between Simpson Rocks and Hauken

Rock (62°01'S., 57°33'W.), the outermost group of rocks lying

NE of Cape Melville.

2.29 Nelson Strait (62°20'S., 59°18'W.) leads between Nelson Island and Robert Island (62°24'S., 59°30'W.). It is deep and

clear, particularly on the E side. However, this passage is not

recommended, except in clear weather, due to strong tidal currents, tide rips, and a difficulty in identifying local features.

2.29 Parry Patch (62°17'S., 59°22'W.), with a least depth of 6m,

lies in the W approaches, about 3.5 miles WNW of Harmony

Point. Several shoals lie close NW, W, and SW of this shoal

patch. After passing Table Island (62°21'S., 59°49'W.), Nelson Strait forms the shortest route leading to Potter Cove or

Admiralty Bay, especially in November and December. The

strait and its E end are clear of dangers while some shoal patches lie at the W end. These include Mellona Rocks (62°18'S.,

59°30'W.), Liberty Rocks (62°19'S., 59°27'W.), and Salient

Rock (62°22'S., 59°20'W.). These rocks lie on the SW side of

the strait and are among the outermost dangers. Foul ground

fronts the NE shore of Robert Island and extends between 1.5

and 2.5 miles offshore. A shoal patch, with a least depth of

10m, lies about 3.5 miles W of Harmony Point.

2.29 Caution.—Depths in Nelson Strait are reported (2007,

2009) to be less than charted. 

2.30 Robert Island, 11 miles long, lies in a NW/SE direction and is 6 miles wide at its E end. This island is completely

ice covered and has no prominent peaks or other features. Only

the SW and NW extremities of the island appear free of the enveloping snow and ice. The N coast of the island is fringed by

foul ground.

2.30 From Robert Point (62°28'S., 59°23'W.), the SE extremity

of the island, the E coast extends N for 5 miles and then WNW

for 6 miles to Newell Point (62°20'S., 59°32'W.). This stretch

of the shore is fronted by numerous rocks. A beacon is reported

to stand on Robert Point.

2.30 From Newell Point, the coast extends W for 2.5 miles to a

promontory. A shoal, with a depth of 6.4m, lies about 4 miles

NNE of Newell Point. Foul ground extends up to about 4 miles

seaward from the N side of Robert Island.

2.30 Clothier Harbor (62°22'S., 59°40'W.), an inlet, lies close W

of the promontory and is completely surrounded by a maze of

islets and rocks, many of which are below-water. Hence, extreme care must be exercised when approaching this area.

2.30 A rock, with a least depth of 1.5m, lies near the middle of the

harbor and restricts the area available for anchoring. However,

the roadstead can accommodate about nine small vessels. This

anchorage has depths of 7 to 9m over a blue-clay bottom. Generally, one tide occurs every 24 hours with a rise of about 2.9m,

but at times the tides are irregular.

2.30 Heywood Island (62°20'S., 59°41'W.) lies about 2 miles

NW of Clothier Harbor.
Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 131

Pub. 200

2.30 Fort William (62°23'S., 59°43'W.), a conspicuous cape,

forms the W extremity of the island. It is 90m high and comparatively free of ice and snow. A light is shown, between 15

November and 15 May annually, from a structure, 3m high,

standing on this cape.

2.30 The Coppermine Peninsula (62°22'S., 59°43'W.) is flattopped and its SE part is irregular and sloping. Fort William

forms the extremity of the NW part of this peninsula. The entire area in the vicinity of the Coppermine Peninsula has been

designated a Specially Protected Area.

2.30 Tide rips have been reported to extend up to about 0.2 mile

W, S, and SE of Fort William. Two rocks, awash, with an

above-water rock between them lie about 0.5 mile SSE of the

cape.

2.31 Coppermine Cove (62°23'S., 59°42'W.) lies on the

W coast of Robert Island, close SE of Fort William.

2.31 The Triplets (62°24'S., 59°41'W.), a three-pointed peak,

stands 1.8 miles SE of Fort William and surmounts the SE entrance point of the cove.

2.31 A bay indents the SW side of Robert Island and is entered

about 1 mile SE of The Triplets. Numerous above and belowwater rocks fringe the SW entrance point of this bay and extend up to 0.2 mile offshore. Anchorage can be taken in a depth

of 40m on the W side of this wide bay, about 0.9 mile E of The

Triplets. However, depths of less than 10m lie up to 0.3 mile

from the coast, close NE of this anchorage. There are no

known dangers on the E side of this bay.

2.31 Edwards Point (62°29'S., 59°30'W.), located 3.3 miles

WSW of Robert Point, forms the S extremity of the island and

also the N entrance point on the SE side of English Strait. A

light is shown, between 15 November and 15 December annually, from a structure, 4m high, standing on the point.

2.31 English Strait (62°27'S., 59°38'W.) leads between Robert

Island and Greenwich Island (62°31'S., 59°47'W.). It is deep

and clear throughout, but the tidal currents are strong and variable and a dangerous NE set has been experienced. The NW

entrance is encumbered with many islets and rocks. The outermost of these dangers is a rock, awash, which has been reported to lie about 17.5 miles NW of Fort William. The sea breaks

heavily on this rock and its position is reported to be doubtful.

2.31 In the narrowest part of the strait, between Passage Rock

(62°23'S., 59°45'W.) and Fort William, overfalls, which are

dangerous to boats, occur. In addition, eddies have been reported to exist at times close to Fort William.

2.31 Table Island lies 2.5 miles NW of Fort William and is the

most prominent object in the approaches to the strait. This island, 181m high, is perfectly level and its sides resemble a

wall. A prominent cleft is located in the upper part of the NE

end of the island. A rock, with a least depth of 8m, lies about

0.5 mile NE of Table Island.

2.31 Caution.—Depths in English Strait are reported (2007) to be

less than charted. 

2.32 The Watchkeeper (62°18'S., 59°49'W.), a low rock,

lies 2.3 miles N of Table Island and has below-water rocks,

which break, located about 0.5 mile W and 0.3 mile N of it.

Another rock, awash, was reported to lie about 1 mile N of The

Watchkeeper.

2.32 Asses Ears (62°19'S., 59°45'W.), a group of islets, lies 1.8

miles NE of Table Island. The northwesternmost islet of this

group presents the appearance which suggests the name.

2.32 Monica Rock (62°20'S., 59°44'W.), 2m high, stands at the S

end of a shoal, with a least depth of 4m, which lies 1.5 miles

SSE of Asses Ears. Other shoal patches are reported to lie

within 0.3 mile of this rock.

2.32 Turmoil Rock (62°21'S., 59°47'W.), awash, lies 0.8 mile SE

of Table Island.

2.32 Chaos Reef (62°22'S., 59°46'W.) extends between Turmoil

Rock and Passage Rock (62°23'S., 59°45'W.). A rock, 1m

high, lies on the reef. Passage Rock is 18m high and lies 0.3

mile W of Fort William. Several dangers lie between Turmoil

Rock and Passage Rock and foul ground extends up to 0.5 mile

farther SSE.

2.32 Cheshire Rock (62°22'S., 59°45'W.), 1m high, lies 0.2 mile

SSE of Passage Rock.

2.32 Bowler Rocks (62°21'S., 59°50'W.) lie 0.5 mile SE of Table

Island with Holmes Rock (62°23'S., 59°50'W.) and Stoker Island (62°24'S., 59°51'W.) lying 1.5 and 2.5 miles, respectively,

farther SSW. The area in the vicinity of these rocks has not

been examined.

2.32 Morris Rock (62°23'S., 59°48'W.), 53m high, lies 1.4 miles

S of Table Island and is the northernmost of a scattered group

of islands, rocks, and foul ground known as the Aitcho Islands.

2.32 The Aitcho Islands (62°24'S., 59°47'W.) lie on the SW side

of English Strait and extend 3.5 miles SE between Morris Rock

and Cecilia Island (62°25'S., 59°43'W.), which is 60m high.

This group also includes Jorge Island (62°23'S., 59°46'W.),

Emeline Island (62°24'S., 59°48'W.), and Sierra Island

(62°24'S., 59°48'W.).

2.32 Dee Island (62°26'S., 59°47'W.), lying 1 mile off the N

coast of Greenwich Island and 3 miles SW of Fort William, has

a prominent double summit. Burro Peaks, 191m high, is prominent and rises near the S side of the island.

2.33 Greenwich Island (62°28'S., 59°48'W.), lying SW of

Robert Island, consists of two parts which are joined by a narrow isthmus. This island is entirely ice capped and rocky bluffs

along the coasts form capes which project beyond the glaciers.

The N coast of the island is fronted by foul ground and should

not be approached within 5 miles.

2.33 Mount Plymouth, 634m high, stands near the center of the N

part of the island. Two black and conspicuous peaks stand on

the W side of the N part of the island. Greaves Peak (62°28'S.,

59°59'W.), the westernmost, is 239m high and has sharp, double-pointed peak. Crutch Peak (62°28'S., 59°56'W.), 277m

high, has a rocky peak and stands 1.5 miles E of Greaves Peak.

2.33 The N coast of the island between Canto Point (62°27'S.,

59°44'W.) and Duff Point (62°27'S., 60°02'W.), the W extremity, is fronted by foul ground and several small islands which

lie up to 5 miles offshore. These small islands include Ongley

Island (62°26'S., 59°54'W.) and Romeo Island (62°23'S.,

59°55'W.).

2.33 Discovery Bay (62°29'S., 59°43'W.) is entered on the W

side of English Strait, between Canto Point and Ash Point

(62°29'S., 59°39'W.), 2.3 miles SE. This bay recedes for 2.5

miles and is mostly fringed by ice cliffs that are backed by featureless snow slopes, up to 300m high.

2.33 Ash Point consists of a low, rounded, and ash-covered promontory. It is steep-to with no off-lying dangers. A beacon, 6m
132 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

high, stands on the point.

2.33 Poisson Hill (62°29'S., 59°39'W.), a rocky outcrop, is located 0.4 mile SSE of Ash Point. It is 80m high and marked by a

beacon.

2.33 Lopez Nunatak (62°29'S., 59°39'W.), steep-sided and 253m

high, stands 1 mile SSE of Ash Point.

2.33 Good anchorage may be obtained in a depth of 40m, mud

with good holding ground, about 0.6 mile NNW of Fuente

Rock (62°30'S., 59°41'W.). Good anchorage can also be taken

about 0.3 mile WSW of Gonzalez Island (62°29'S.,

59°40'W.).

2.33 It is reported that tanker vessels anchor within the bay lying

between the Guesalaga Peninsula (62°29'S., 59°40'W.) and

Ash Point, where there is a jetty, 21m long, and several stern

mooring posts.

2.34 Capitan Prat, a Chilean base, is situated at the head of

Iquique Cove (62°29'S., 59°40'W.). Three radio masts, the

tallest of which is 26m high, stand close to the base.

2.34 The Guesalaga Peninsula forms the NW side of this cove. It

is low, shingle-covered, and surmounted by a prominent wooden cross and a small chapel. The cove, which lies NE of

Gonzalez Island, forms a sheltered harbor for boats. Numerous

rocks and reefs lie within the cove, in the entrance, and in the

approaches. Local knowledge is advised. Boats without local

knowledge should proceed with great care and should keep as

close as possible to the N side of Gonzalez Island in order to

avoid most of the dangers.

2.34 Ferrer Point (62°30'S., 59°42'W.), ice free, is 47m high and

fringed by many islets and rocks which extend up to 0.4 mile N

of it. Fuente Rock, 9m high, lies about 0.4 mile N of the point

and is marked by a beacon.

2.34 Canto Point, 61m high, has four conspicuous, rocky outcrops

at its extremity. This point is fringed, on its E side, by numerous off-lying rocks and shoals. These dangers include Bonert

Rock (62°27'S., 59°43'W.), which is 6m high, and Ibar Rocks

(62°27'S., 59°43'W.), the outermost, which are 1m high and lie

0.7 mile ESE of the point. A shoal, with a depth of 8m, is reported to lie about 0.3 mile E of Ibar Rocks.

2.34 From Canto Point, the W shore of the bay trends S for 1 mile

and then ice cliffs extend SSW for 2.5 miles. This stretch of

coast is fringed by foul ground which extends up to 0.5 mile

offshore.

2.34 Tenorio Rock (62°28'S., 59°44'W.), 1m high, lies about 1.5

miles SSW of Canto Point.

2.34 Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 31m, mud, about 1.3

miles SSW of Ash Point. Anchorage was also reported to have

been taken in a depth of 48m, thick mud, off the base with the

E tangent of the NE extremity of Greenwich Island bearing

342° and the W tangent of the peninsula, which is located 2.5

miles SSW of Ash Point, bearing 191°.

2.35 Yankee Harbor (62°32'S., 59°47'W.), an inlet, lies

on the W coast of Greenwich Island and is formed by volcanic

debris.

2.35 Glacier Bluff (62°32'S., 59°48'W.) forms the N entrance

point and Spit Point (62°32'S., 59°48'W.), marked by a beacon, forms the S entrance point. Foul ground and several shallow shoals are reported to lie up to about 0.3 mile S of Glacier

Bluff. Foul ground is also reported to fringe the NE side of Spit

Point. A rock, the position of which is doubtful, is reported to

lie about 1 mile S of Spit Point.

2.35 A lofty escarpment of volcanic rocks stands close SE of the

harbor and a glacier extends to the harbor shore. The harbor

can accommodate several vessels, but it provides very little

protection from heavy offshore gusts, particularly during E

winds.

2.35 Anchorage can be taken, in 31m, brown ash, about 0.2 mile

E of Spit Point; in 29m, about 0.4 mile E of Spit Point; and, in

42 to 47m, about 0.5 mile E of Spit Point. Although the anchor

sinks deeply into the bottom, the holding ground is reported to

be unreliable.

2.35 Hospital Point (62°32'S., 59°47'W.) is located 0.5 mile E of

Glacier Bluff and a patch, with a depth of 15m, lies about 0.2

mile S of it. A rocky spit, with depths of less than 15m, extends

about 0.2 mile S from the point. Rocks, awash, and depths of

less than 6m lie up to 0.2 mile from the SE side of the harbor,

near its S end. The harbor is otherwise clear of dangers to within 0.2 mile of the shore.

2.35 Anchorage has also been taken in a depth of 59m, mud bottom, SE of Triangle Point (62°32'S., 59°51'W.). This anchorage was taken with Spit Point bearing 073.5° and Triangle

Point bearing 311°.

2.35 The rocky spit and shoals lying across the entrance protect

the inner part of the harbor from rough seas and high winds.

Anchorage can also be taken, in 31m, E of Triangle Point and

about 1 mile W of Spit Point.

2.35 Caution.—It has been reported (2007) that depths in Yankee

Harbor and its approaches are less than charted. It has also

been reported (2007) that the coastline on the E side of Yankee

Harbor has extended up to 0.4 mile E due to glacial retreat. 

2.36 Sartorius Point (62°34'S., 59°39'W.), the S extremity

of the island, is located 2.5 miles WSW of Fort Point.

2.36 Ephraim Bluff (62°34'S., 59°43'W.), located 2 miles W of

the point, forms the N entrance point of the SE entrance to McFarlane Strait. Reefs extend up to 0.5 mile S from this bluff.

2.36 Santa Cruz Point (62°31'S., 59°33'W.), the NE extremity of

Greenwich Island and the S entrance point at the SE end of English Strait, is located 3.5 miles SE of Ash Point.

2.36 Fort Point (62°33'S., 59°35'W.), conspicuous, is located 3

miles S of Santa Cruz Point.

2.36 Hardy Cove (62°32'S., 59°35'W.) lies between Santa Cruz

Point and Fort Point.

2.36 McFarlane Strait (62°32'S., 59°55'W.), lying between

Greenwich Island and Livingston Island, is wide and clear at its

S entrance, but narrow and foul at its N entrance. Except for

small vessels with local knowledge, passage through this strait

is not recommended. The tidal currents are strong, sometimes

attaining rates of 5 or 6 knots, and there are numerous tide rips

and eddies.

2.36 The outermost danger in the NW approaches to the strait is a

small, above-water rock which lies about 7.5 miles NW of Duff

Point, the E entrance point at N end. Other dangers, consisting

of below-water rocks, lie between 4.5 miles SW and 3 miles

SSW of the above-water rock.

2.36 Pyramid Island (62°26'S., 60°06'W.), 206m high, lies about

2 miles NNE of Williams Point (62°28'S., 60°09'W.). It is

conspicuous and has vertical sides. An unexamined shoal, with

a reported least depth of 14.6m, lies about 2 miles NW of this
Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 133

Pub. 200

island.

2.36 The Zed Islands (62°26'S., 60°10'W.) lie 1.5 miles NW of

Williams Point. The westernmost and tallest of these islands is

290m high.

2.36 Eliza Rocks (62°26'S., 60°14'W.), up to 8m, lie about 1 mile

WSW of the Zed Islands.

2.36 Caution.—Depths in McFarlane Strait are reported (2007,

2009) to be less than charted. 

2.37 The Meade Islands (62°27'S., 60°05'W.) lie close S

of Pyramid Island, in the middle of the N entrance of the strait.

2.37 Cone Rock (62°27'S., 60°07'W.), 6m high, and Channel

Rock (62°28'S., 60°05'W.), above-water, lie about 1 mile

NNW and 0.8 mile S, respectively, of the Meade Islands. A

beacon, 5.5m high, stands on Channel Rock.

2.37 Foul ground extends up to 1 mile E of Williams Point and

constricts the passage, to the W of Meade Islands, to a navigable width of only about 0.3 mile.

2.37 Cave Island (62°27'S., 60°04'W.) lies close within the entrance of the strait near the E end of the Meade Islands.

2.37 Entering the strait from the SE and after passing Fort Point,

vessels can easily identify Ephraim Bluff. This high bluff has

one or two prominent outcroppings of dark rock on its S side.

Below-water rocks lie off this bluff and extend up to about 0.5

mile offshore. Below-water rocks also front Triangle Point, the

outer N entrance point of Yankee Harbor.

2.38 Livingston Island (62°36'S., 60°30'W.), 39 miles

long, extends in an E/W direction and is 2 to 19 miles wide.

The E part of this island is very mountainous and ice capped,

except on the steep slopes which form the coast. Between these

slopes, ice cliffs descend to the water's edge. Several prominent

and rugged peaks, partly ice free, extend across the island with

broad ice-filled depressions between them. The coast of the island consists of exposed rock ridges and glacier fronts. The

westernmost part of the island is very low and flat while, in

sharp contrast, the E part has wild mountainous topography.

2.38 Mount Bowles (62°37'S., 60°12'W.), the most prominent

summit, stands 10 miles W of Renier Point.

2.38 Mount Friesland (62°40'S., 60°12'W.), 1,788m high, is

prominent and stands in the interior of the E part of the island.

2.38 Bays indent all sides of the island, except the SE coast which

consists of one continuous ice face.

2.38 Renier Point (62°37'S., 59°48'W.), the SE extremity of the

island, forms the SE entrance point of McFarlane Strait. This

point is massive, ice free in summer, and gives the appearance

of a bent needle from a distance.

2.38 Rugged Rocks (62°37'S., 59°48'W.), up to 1.5m high, extend about 1 mile NW from Renier Point. A reef, awash, lies

0.3 mile NW of these rocks. A rock, existence doubtful, lies

close to the shore, 0.5 mile SW of the point.

2.38 Caution.—Depths with 5 miles of the coast between Martins Head (62°11'N., 58°14'W.), on the S side of King George

Island (see paragraph 2.20) and Barnard Point (62°46'S.,

60°21'W.), on the S side of Livingstone Island (see paragraph

2.44), have been reported (2007) to be less than charted. 

2.39 The N side of the entrance to Moon Bay (62°35'S.,

60°00'W.) is formed by Edinburgh Hill (62°33'S., 60°01'W.),

a conspicuous and volcanic knob. This knob consists of a pillar, 95m high, which rises out of the sea and is connected to the

shore by a narrow spit of loose rocks. Several below-water

rocks lie close to the shore, near this knob.

2.39 Half Moon Island (62°36'S., 59°55'W.), 101m high, lies in

the SE part of this bay. Anchorage may be taken in depths of

13 to 27m within a cove lying on the E side of this island.

However, the holding ground is not considered to be very good

and several rocks lie close off the entrance points of the cove.

Teniente Camara, an Argentinean base, stands on the island,

but was reported to be inactive. A beacon surmounts a small

peak, 40m high, which stands near the SE extremity of the island.

2.39 Moon Bay is deep and affords protection from all winds except those from the E quadrant. Numerous rocks, awash, lie up

to 0.4 mile off the S shore of the bay as far as about 3 miles W

of Renier Point.

2.39 Inott Point (62°32'S., 60°00'W.) is located 5.8 miles SSE of

Williams Point (62°28'S., 60°09'W.) and is backed by Sharp

Peak (62°32'S., 60°04'W.), 425m high. Samuel Peak, another

prominent hill, rises 2.5 miles WSW of Sharp Peak.

2.39 Dragon Cove (62°28'S., 60°08'W.), a small inlet, lies on the

W side of McFarlane Strait, 1 mile SSE of Williams Point.

Lister Cove, another small inlet, lies 2 miles farther SE.

2.39 The N coast is fronted by many dangers and vessels should

give it a wide berth.

2.39 Hero Bay (62°31'S., 60°27'W.) lies between Williams Point

and Black Point, a rocky headland, 15 miles W. Numerous islets and rocks lie within this bay to the S and SW of Desolation

Island.

2.39 Siddons Point (62°33'S., 60°26'W.), a conspicuous promontory, is located in the middle of the S shore of this bay.

2.39 Desolation Island (62°28'S., 60°22'W.) lies in the E part of

Hero Bay, about 5 miles W of Williams Point. From a distance,

this island presents an unusual appearance of stratification

which is caused by chasms in the black rock being filled with

snow.

2.39 Cape Danger (62°27'S., 60°23'W.), the N extremity of Desolation Island, is located 5 miles W of Williams Point and is

180m high. A group of below-water rocks lies 0.4 mile N of

this cape. These rocks are very dangerous in calm weather, especially since the tidal currents in this vicinity set strongly in

both directions.

2.40 Craggy Island (62°28'S., 60°19'W.) forms the NE

side of Blythe Bay (62°28'S., 60°20'W.). A below-water rock,

existence doubtful, is reported to lie about 0.6 mile E of this island.

2.40 Cora Cove (62°28'S., 60°21'W.), a boat harbor, lies on the

NW side of Blythe Bay. A small pond and a well, from which

good water has been obtained, are situated in the vicinity of

this cove.

2.40 A group of small islands and rocks, including Wood Island

(62°29'S., 60°19'W.) and Indian Rocks (62°29'S., 60°17'W.),

extends S and E from the S extremity of Craggy Island.

2.40 Anchorage may be taken in a depth of 18m within Blythe

Bay, but the holding ground is uncertain. Vessels should not

anchor in depths of less than 15m as the bottom in shallower

depths is foul. Great care should be taken when selecting a

berth as although the bottom feels soft, it may consist of only

rocks covered with seaweed.
134 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

2.40 Gales from the NW are infrequent along this coast, but they

are violent and vessels should seek shelter within Blythe Bay.

2.41 The Dunbar Islands (62°29'S., 60°12'W.), a group of

small islands, lie between 1.5 miles and 2.5 miles SW of Williams Point. A chain of above-water rocks, lying 1 mile N of

Siddons Point, extends NW into the bay and terminates in a

rock, awash, which is located 5 miles E of Black Point

(62°29'S., 60°43'W.).

2.41 Chapman Rocks (62°30'S., 60°29'W.) and Lynx Rocks

(62°32'S., 60°32'W.) lie 3.5 miles NNW and 3.3 miles W, respectively, of Siddons Point. A bay lies between Black Point

and Cape Shirreff, 3.5 miles NW, and Fortin Rock (62°29'S.,

60°44'W.), which is conspicuous, lies in its center.

2.41 Half Moon Beach (62°29'S., 60°47'W.) lies on the E side of

Cape Shirreff. A dangerous ledge of rocks has been reported to

lie about 0.5 mile E of this cape.

2.41 A below-water rock, which breaks heavily, is reported to lie

about 3 miles E of Cape Shirreff and an underwater obstruction

is reported to lie about 1.2 miles N of Black Point.

2.41 Shirreff Cove (62°28'S., 60°48'W.), which is sheltered, lies

on the W side of Cape Shirreff.

2.41 San Telmo Island (62°28'S., 60°49'W.) lies on the W side of

the entrance to the cove and provides protection. The best anchorages lie close NE of this island and 0.2 mile SE of it.

These berths have depths of 33 to 40m over a good bottom of

blue clay.

2.41 Winds from the NW blow directly into Shirreff Cove and, if

of any strength, cause the sea to break heavily across the entrance. It is reported that a swell usually sets into the cove,

causing vessels to roll considerably.

2.41 Barclay Bay (62°33'S., 60°58'W.) lies on the N coast between Cape Shirreff and Start Point (62°35'S., 61°13'W.), 14

miles SW. This bay recedes for about 4 miles and is reported to

be filled with numerous below-water rocks. Dangers are reported to front the E and S coasts and extend up to 2 miles offshore. Anchorage within this bay is not recommended.

2.41 Campastri, a group of two rocks, lies about 5 miles SW of

Cape Shirreff and two other rocks are reported to lie about 2.5

miles S of this group.

2.42 Window Island (62°34'S., 61°07'W.) lies 2.5 miles

NE of Start Point. A small islet and a rock are reported to lie

close S and about 0.3 mile W, respectively, of this island. An

unnamed island, existence doubtful, is reported to lie about 2

miles N of Start Point.

2.42 A group of stranded ice floes has been reported to extend up

to 3 miles NNE of Start Point and may indicate that shoals are

located in this area. Areas of foul ground lie NW of Start Point

and extend up to 0.8 mile offshore. These areas also extend

ENE as far as Window Island and SW to Barclay Bay.

2.42 The Byers Peninsula (62°38'S., 61°05'W.) is located W of a

line joining Cutler Stack (62°36'S., 60°59'W.) and Stackpole

Rocks (62°41'S., 60°58'W.), which lie 2.5 miles WNW of Elephant Point (62°41'S., 60°52'W.).

2.42 Vietor Rock (62°41'S., 61°06'W.) lies close offshore, 2.5

miles E of Devils Point (62°40'S., 61°11'W.).

2.42 Long Rock (62°42'S., 61°11'W.), a detached above-water

rock, lies 1 mile SSW of Devils Point and Conical Rock

(62°43'S., 61°11'W.) lies 1.3 miles S of it.

2.42 Anchorage may be obtained on the S side of the Byers Peninsula, 4.5 miles ESE of Devils Point.

2.42 New Plymouth (Puerto Echeverria)(62°37'S., 61°12'W.)

consists of a bay which is entered between Start Point and

Rugged Island (62°38'S., 61°15'W.), 2 miles SSW. This bay

may be identified by Eddystone Rocks (62°36'S., 61°23'W.)

which are prominent and lie 4.5 miles W of Start Point.

2.42 The Pointers (62°36'S., 61°19'W.), a group of below-water

rocks, lies 2 miles E of Eddystone Rocks and 2 miles N of

Cape Sheffield (62°37'S., 61°19'W.), the NW extremity of

Rugged Island.

2.42 The head of the bay is obstructed by Astor Island (62°39'S.,

61°11'W.) and areas of foul ground. This bay is not recommended as a harbor as it is exposed to NW winds, which send

in a heavy sea, and the bottom consists mostly of rock and is

very foul.

2.43 Morton Strait (62°42'S., 61°14'W.) has a navigable

channel, less than 1 mile wide. This channel has a least depth

of 12.8m, but local knowledge is essential for safe passage.

Numerous tide rips and whirlpools have been reported to occur

at the S entrance of this strait. In addition, strong tidal currents

set through the strait and navigation is hazardous.

2.43 Hell Gates (62°40'S., 61°11'W.), a chain of above and below-water rocks and islets, extends across the strait between

Livingston Island and Snow Island. Passage through this chain

of dangers should be attempted only with local knowledge.

2.43 Svip Rocks (62°35'S., 61°38'W.) is a group of below-water

rocks, existence doubtful, which is reported to lie in the NW

approach to the strait, about 7.5 miles W of Cape Sheffield, the

NW extremity of Rugged Island.

2.43 Snow Island (62°47'S., 61°23'W.) lies 4 miles SW of Livingston Island from which it is separated by the strait. This island is entirely ice capped and presents no distinctive rock

outcrops. Numerous islets, rocks, and reefs surround the island

and vessels should approach it with great care. Foul ground extends up to 4 miles seaward from the W side of this island.

2.43 Tooth Rock (62°52'S., 61°24'W.), jagged and 85m high, lies

1.3 miles S of Cape Conway (62°51'S., 61°24'W.).

2.43 Knight Rocks (62°50'S., 61°35'W.), located 1 mile apart, lie

2.3 miles WSW of Monroe Point (62°49'S., 61°30'W.) which

is located 4 miles NW of Cape Conway.

2.43 Castle Rock (62°48'S., 61°34'W.), the largest and most conspicuous rock lying off the W side of the island, is 177m high

and Keep Rock lies close SW of it.

2.43 From Devils Point, the S coast extends in a series of small

bays to Barnard Point (62°46'S., 60°21'W.). This point is located 24 miles ESE of Devils Point and forms the S extremity

of Livingston Island. That part of this stretch of coast extending between Devils Point and South Bay (62°40'S., 60°28'W.)

is low and conspicuous due to the black rocks which form several bold headlands. The shore is fringed by a number of rocks

which lie up to about 1 mile seaward. A shoal, with a depth of

13.7m, lies about 2 miles SW of Barnard Point.

2.44 Bond Point (62°41'S., 60°48'W.) is located between

Hetty Rock (62°40'S., 60°44'W.) and Elephant Point

(62°41'S., 60°52'W.), 1.8 miles WSW. Three shallow rocks lie

about 1.8 miles S of Bond Point and an islet, position approximate, is reported to lie about 3 miles ESE of Elephant Point. A
Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 135

Pub. 200

depth of 1.6m lies about 0.5 mile ESE of Bond Point; a depth

of 4.4m lies about 1 mile ESE of Bond Point. 

2.44 Walker Bay (62°38'S., 60°42'W.), which has not been examined, lies between Hannah Point (62°39'S., 60°37'W.) and

Hetty Rock, 3.5 miles W.

2.44 South Bay (62°40'S., 60°23'W.), 2.5 miles wide, extends NE

between high, rocky slopes. An islet lies 0.5 mile off Hannah

Point, the NW entrance point of this bay. Several rocks and an

area of foul ground also front this point. A bank, with a least

depth of 27m, lies about 2.3 miles SE of Hannah Point.

2.44 The bay is open to S and SW winds which often bring in

quantities of drift ice. High ice cliffs prevent landing in the bay,

but temporary anchorage may be taken.

2.44 An unnamed point, fronted by two small islets, projects into

the bay from the N shore, 4 miles E of the NW entrance point.

A prominent rock pillar stands on the E shore, 2.3 miles E of

the point. Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 31m, speckled

gray mud, about 0.3 mile W of this pillar. A small islet lies

close to the shore, about 0.3 mile NE of this pillar. Two other

small islets lie close together, about 0.5 mile SSE of the pillar.

2.44 Johnsons Dock (62°40'S., 60°22'W.), a small cove, lies at

the NE end of South Bay and directly under Mount Bowles

(62°37'S., 60°12'W.). The entrance to the cove is not easy to

identify, but its E entrance point is formed by a prominent perpendicular cliff. The cove provides safe anchorage for six or

seven vessels, moored in a nest, and has depths of 16 to 24m.

Local knowledge is advised.

2.44 False Bay (62°43'S., 60°22'W.) is entered between Barnard

Point and Miers Bluff (62°43'S., 60°27'W.), the S extremity of

the Hurd Peninsula (62°41'S., 60°23'W.). Huntress Glacier

lies at the head of this bay. A conspicuous rock stands on the E

side of the Hurd Peninsula, 2 miles NE of Miers Bluff. Anchorage can be taken on each side of the bay, 0.3 mile E or 1.5

miles E of this conspicuous rock.

2.44 Barnard Point is fronted by numerous rocks, which extend

up to about 1 mile W and S, and several small islets lie close

off Miers Bluff. An area of foul ground extends up to 0.3 mile

SW of Miers Bluff.

2.44 From Barnard Point, the coast trends NE for 17 miles to Renier Point and consists of a continuous ice face.

2.44 Needle Peak (62°44'S., 60°11'W.), 308m high, stands on the

coast, about 5 miles NE of Barnard Point. Its summit is sharp,

pointed, and black. A small cove lies close NE of this peak, but

it has not been surveyed.

2.44 Caution.—During thick weather, vessels should use care not

to confuse False Bay with South Bay, which is entered close

NW of the Hurd Peninsula.

2.45 Deception Island (62°57'S., 60°38'W.) lies 10 miles

SW of Barnard Point. It is volcanic in origin and forms one of

the most remarkable crater islands in the world.

2.45 Mount Pond (62°57'S., 60°33'W.), 550m high, rises on the

E side of the island and Mount Kirkwood (63°00'S.,

62°39'W.), 467m high, rises near the middle of the S side.

2.45 The E coast of the island is fringed, for 4 miles, by an ice face.

A smaller ice face fringes part of the S coast and is fronted by an

area of foul ground which extends up to 0.5 mile seaward. A few

rocky islets lie close to the shores on all sides of the island. Several

sandy beaches fringe the shores, particularly on the N side and at

each end of the ice face on the E side. In other parts, the shore is

steep-to and formed by cliffs. The W and SW coasts of the island

are reported to be fronted by shallow depths. A shoal, with a least

depth of 9.1m, lies off the W coast of the island, close NW of Collins Point (63°00'S., 60°35'W.), and another shoal, with a depth of

4.6m, lies close off the N side of the island.

2.45 Port Foster (62°57'S., 60°39'W.), a crater-like basin, is entered through Neptunes Bellows (63°00'S., 60°34'W.), a narrow passage which lies on the SE side of the island.

2.45 Entrance Point is located on the S side of this passage and

Fildes Point, the N entrance point, consists of a prominent,

sheer cliff, 91m high. Vessels may anchor outside this entrance

in depths of 22 to 54m.

2.45 Ravn Rock, with a depth of 2.4m, lies in the center of the entrance to the passage; the existance of this danger is now

doubtful as recent surveys (2008) have found greater depths at

its location. The channel leading between this rock and Entrance Point is narrow and obstructed by foul ground. The

channel leading between the rock and Fildes Point is deep but

only about 200m wide. A prominent stranded wreck was reported to lie close N of Entrance Point. Uncharted dangers

have been reported (2008) to extend up to 0.1 mile seaward for

a distance of 0.5 mile S of Entrance Point. 

2.45 Within Neptunes Bellows, the depths rapidly increase to more

than 90m. The tidal currents attain rates of up to 1.3 knots at

springs and turn at about the times of HW and LW, by the shore.

2.45 Petes Pillar (63°00'S., 60°33'W.), a precipitous steep-to

rock, is 48m high and lies close offshore, 0.4 mile E of Fildes

Point. It is separated from the vertical cliff that forms the N

shore of the passage by a narrow neck of drying rocks.

2.45 Secure anchorage, during W gales, can be obtained in a

depth of 25m, cinders and stones, about 1.5 miles E of Collins

Point. Secure anchorage, during E gales, can be obtained in a

depth of 45m, cinders, in the lee of the island and about 2.3

miles NW of New Rock.

2.45 New Rock (63°01'S., 60°44'W.), 105m high, is prominent

and lies about 1 mile SW of the island. It has been reported

(2009) to lie 0.6 mile SSE of its charted position. 

Neptunes Window (62°59'S., 60°33'W.), a narrow gap, lies

between two rock pillars at the top of a cliff in a small cove.

This cove lies on the NW side of a bay which is located between Petes Pillar and South East Point (62°59'S., 60°31'W.).

2.45 Stanley Patch (62°59'S., 60°38'W.), a rocky shoal, has a

least depth of 27m and lies 1.8 miles NW of Collins Point.

2.45 Whalers Bay (62°59'S., 60°34'W.) is entered between

Fildes Point and Penfold Point, 0.5 mile NW. Anchorage can

be obtained in depths of 64 to 91m, loose cinders, within the

bay, but the holding ground is not good.

2.45 Pendulum Cove (62°56'S., 60°36'W.), lying on the NE side

of Port Foster, provides shelter. Vessels can anchor in depths of

20 to 29m, muddy ashes, about 100m offshore, but this berth is

exposed to W and NW winds and the holding ground is poor.

2.45 A wreck is reported to lie close to the S shore of this cove.

2.45 Grumete Light is shown from a structure standing 2.2 miles

WNW of Collins Point. When approaching Neptunes Bellows, the

hill, on which this structure stands, appears in the shape of a flat

pyramid, showing up clearly against the snowy slopes behind it.

2.45 Wensleydale Beacon (62°57'S., 60°42'W.), surmounting a hill,

is situated on the W side of Port Foster, 4 miles NW of Collins

Point. A lighted beacon stands 1.3 miles SSW of this beacon.

Sail Rock (63°02'S., 60°57'W.), 28m high, lies about 6.5
136 Sector 2. The South Orkney Islands and the South Shetland Islands 

Pub. 200

miles WSW of New Rock. It is pyramidal-shaped and resembles a ship under sail when viewed from a distance. However, it

appears more like a house with a gable roof from closer inshore. This rock is 305m long, 152m wide, and has steep, perpendicular sides. A shoal, with a depth of 17m, lies about 0.4

mile SW of this rock.

2.45 Lavebrua Island (63°02'S., 60°35'W.), 97m high, lies 1.5

miles E of South Point. The island is reported (2008) to lie 0.1

mile N of its charted position. 

2.45 Caution.—The SW and W coasts of Deception Island, between a point about 1.5 miles WNW of Lavebrua Island and a

point about 3 miles further WNW, then continuing N for about

4.3 miles, has extended about 0.25 further seaward. 

2.45 Depths surrounding the island may also be significantly less

than charted. 

2.46 Boyd Strait (62°50'S., 62°00'W.) leads between

Snow Island and Smith Island. It is wide, free of dangers, and

deep.

2.46 Smith Island (63°00'S., 62°30'W.), 18 miles long and 4

miles wide, lies 42 miles W of Deception Island. This island is

conspicuous due to its tall peaks and striking appearance.

2.46 Mount Foster (63°00'S., 62°33'W.), 2,103m high, has a triple peak and is snow-covered.

2.46 Mount Pisgah (62°57'S., 62°29'W.), 1,859m high, stands 4

miles NE of Mount Foster and is also snow-covered.

2.46 Mount Christi (62°55'S., 62°24'W.), 1,250m high, stands 3

miles NE of Mount Pisgah.

2.46 The coasts of the island are rugged and are faced by sheer, black

cliffs while the high lands behind them are completely snow-covered. The W coast between Gregory Point (62°55'S., 62°33'W.)

and Cape James (63°06'S., 62°45'W.), the S extremity, is formed

by prominent, vertical cliffs, 610 to 914m high.

2.46 Van Rocks (63°06'S., 62°50'W.), consisting of two small

groups of conspicuous pointed rocks, lies 2 miles W of Cape

James.

2.46 Cape Smith (62°52'S., 62°19'W.), the N extremity of the island, is fringed by foul ground and the entire N coast is fronted

by breakers which extend up to 2 miles offshore.

2.46 A patch, with a least depth of 42m, lies 31 miles WSW of

Cape Smith and another patch, with a least depth of 36m, lies

about 2 miles, position doubtful, N of it.

2.47 Low Island (63°17'S., 62°09'W.) lies with Cape

Wallace (63°13'S., 62°15'W.), its NW extremity, located 14

miles SE of Smith Island. This island has a low elevation and is

almost entirely covered with snow, only a few rocks being visible. The entire N and W coasts of the island are fronted by foul

ground between Cape Hooker (63°18'S., 61°59'W.), the NE

extremity, and Cape Garry (63°21'S., 62°16'W.), the SW extremity. Several rocks front the N and W sides of the island and

lie up to 2.5 miles offshore. The E side of the island has not

been fully examined, but a patch, with a depth of 16.4m, is reported to lie about 5 miles SSW of Cape Hooker. Another

patch, with a depth of 36.6m, is reported to lie about 33 miles

WSW of Cape Garry.
137

Pub. 200

3. 

The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea—Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
139

Pub. 200

SECTOR 3 

THE BELLINGSHAUSEN SEA AND THE AMUNDSEN SEA—JOINVILLE ISLAND TO CAPE 

COLBECK

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the coast of Antarctica from

Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck, including the Bellingshausen

and Amundsen Seas. The descriptive sequence is W to E.

General Remarks

3.1 Bransfield Strait (63°00'S., 59°00'W.) separates the

South Shetland Islands from the Trinity Peninsula (63°37'S.,

58°20'W.). This strait is about 60 miles wide at its NE end and

narrows to a width of 24 miles between Low Island and Hoseason Island, at its SW end.

3.1 The Antarctic Peninsula is nearly 800 miles long and separates the Weddell Sea from the Bellingshausen Sea.

3.1 The E side of James Ross Island is generally inaccessible

due to drift ice. The W side is accessible for a period in summer, but there are few places where it is possible to land on the

mainland.

3.1 Winds—Weather.—As the circumpolar trough lies across

the central part of the Antarctic Peninsula there is a significant

climatic change from N to S. Winds from the SW prevail at

Hope Bay while SE winds are dominant at Marguerite Bay. At

the Argentine Islands, the winds are more variable with about

the same frequency blowing from the N and S. Hope Bay experiences frequent SW gales while SE gales are common at Marguerite Bay. Gales are less frequent at the Argentine Islands.

3.1 Tides—Currents.—The predominant direction of the current in most parts of the Bransfield Strait is towards NE. However, the current sets towards the SW on the S side of the strait.

The currents, particularly those setting towards the NW, sometimes attain rates of 3 knots.

Joinville Island to Cape Kitter

3.2 Joinville Island (63°15'S., 55°45'W.), the largest of

the Joinville Island group, is fully described in paragraph 1.39.

3.2 Cape Dubouzet (63°16'S., 57°01'W.) is located 12 miles W

of the W extremity of Joinville Island. From this cape, the coast

extends WNW for about 7 miles to Prime Head (63°13'S.,

57°17'W.), the N extremity of the Trinity Peninsula (63°37'S.,

58°20'W.), and then WSW for 17 miles to Cape Legoupil

(63°19'S., 57°55'W.). It is irregular due to seasonal changes in

the ice cliffs which extend to the sea from the high inland

slopes.

3.2 Gourdin Island (63°12'S., 57°18'W.) lies 1 mile N of Prime

Head. Column Rock, a prominent pinnacle rising almost sheer

from sea level, lies 1.7 miles N of this island. Lafarge Rocks, a

group of rocky islets, lies 6.5 miles SW of Gourdin Island and

an isolated rock lies about 4 miles W of them.

3.2 Casy Island (63°14'S., 57°30'W.) lies 1 mile offshore, 5.5

miles SW of Gourdin Island. A depth of 152m, over a bottom

of mud and small stones, was reported to lie between this island and the coast.

3.2 The Duroch Islands (63°18'S., 57°54'W.) lie within an area

of foul ground which extends up to 2.5 miles seaward of Cape

Legoupil.

3.2 A beacon, 4m high, stands on an islet, 0.8 mile NW of Cape

Legoupil. A racon is reported to be situated at this beacon.

3.2 It was reported that good anchorage could be taken about 0.4

mile N of the beacon.

3.2 At Cape Legoupil, the ice cliffs are 3 to 9m high and are

backed by a few crevasses. General Bernardo O'Higgins, a

Chilean base station, is situated in the vicinity of this cape.

3.2 An anchorage berth, which can be used in calm weather, lies

within Covadonga Harbor (63°19'S., 57°55'W.), close off the

station and 0.3 mile ESE of the beacon. However, the bottom

consists of rock and the holding ground is bad. In addition,

large icebergs, which separate from the glaciers to the E, are

set by strong currents through the islets and provide a hazard to

vessels in this roadstead.

3.2 In good weather, anchorage can be taken in a depth of 37m,

mud and sand, in the middle of a cove lying on the SE side of

the W extremity of Cape Legoupil.

3.3 Montravel Rock (63°09'S., 58°02'W.) lies about 11

miles NNW of Cape Legoupil and is marked by a beacon, 4m

high. A racon is reported to be situated at this beacon.

3.3 The area lying to the S and W of the beacon should be navigated with care as there are many dangers. Shoal patches, each

with a depth of 11m and over which the sea breaks, lie about 5

miles NE and 3.5 miles WSW of the beacon. A shoal, with a

least depth of 22m, lies about 5 miles ENE of the beacon and

breakers have been reported to occur about 1 mile W of it.

Rocks, 1.5 and 1.8m high, lie 3.5 miles SW and 4.5 miles SE,

respectively, of Montravel Rock.

3.3 The dangers in this area are separated from Peralta Rocks,

which lie 5.5 miles SW of Montravel Rock, by a clear and deep

channel.

3.3 The Cockerell Peninsula (63°24'S., 58°08'W.) is located 7

miles SW of Cape Legoupil and consists of a rounded headland

which is joined to the mainland by a narrow isthmus. Huon

Bay, which recedes for about 2.5 miles, lies between this peninsula and the cape.

3.3 The Tupinier Islands (63°22'S., 58°16'W.), a group of nine

small islands surrounded by foul ground, extends up to 4 miles

NW of the Cockerell Peninsula.

3.3 Cape Roquemaurel (63°33'S., 58°56'W.) is located 24

miles WSW of the peninsula and a shoal, with a depth of 31m,

is reported to lie about 8 miles NW of it.

3.3 Astrolabe Island (63°17'S., 58°40'W.), 564m high, lies with

its S extremity located 16 miles WNW of the Cockerell Peninsula. A bay indents the N side of this island, but it has not been

surveyed.

3.3 A group of three islets lies with the westernmost located 3.5

miles ESE of the E extremity of the island and is surrounded by

foul ground. A shoal, with a depth of 18m, is reported to lie

about 1.5 miles W of the westernmost islet. A rock, awash, lies
140 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

about 8 miles SW of the W end of Astrolabe Island.

3.3 Jacquinot Rocks lie at the N edge of an area of foul ground,

about 2 miles WNW of Astrolabe Island. A below-water rock,

existence doubtful, is reported to lie about 10 miles WSW of

the island. A shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, is reported to lie

about 10 miles NW of the island.

3.3 Hombron Rocks lie about 3 miles offshore, 8 miles NE of

Cape Roquemaurel, and are fronted by several reefs. Molina

Rocks lie about 5.5 miles ESE of Astrolabe Island and a shoal

patch, with a depth of 18m, lies close NW of them.

3.3 Young Point (63°36'S., 58°55'W.) is located 3.5 miles S of

Cape Roquemaurel. Bone Bay, which is 3 miles wide at its entrance, indents the coast close S of this point. Blake Island,

which is narrow and about 1 mile long, lies in the center of the

approach to this bay and is fringed by foul ground on its W

side. Whaleback Rocks lie about 1.5 miles W of this island.

From the head of this bay, the Trinity Peninsula extends 18

miles to Prince Gustav Channel.

3.3 Cape Kjellman (63°44'S., 59°24'W.) is located 12 miles

SW of the S entrance point of Bone Bay and is fringed by below-water rocks. The stretch of coast extending 6 miles ENE of

this cape is fronted by numerous islets and dangers. Several

hills, 305 to 1,158m high, stand along the Trinity Peninsula in

this vicinity.

3.3 Cape Kater (63°46'S., 59°54'W.) is located 13 miles WSW

of Cape Kjellman; Charcot Bay indents the coast between

them. Almond Point projects from the head of this bay at the E

side of White Cloud Glacier. Webster Peaks, a group of four

rocky hills, rises 5 miles WSW of this glacier and attains a

height of 1,065m. 

3.3 Two glaciers flow into the bay. McNeile Glacier flows N to

the SE side of Almond Point while Andrew Glacier flows ENE

to the W shore, about 5 miles S of Cape Kater.

3.3 Anchorage, sheltered from W winds, may be taken in a depth

of 32m, shingle, about 0.5 mile off the W side of the bay.

3.3 The aspect of this entire part of the coast is a high ice-covered plateau in the interior with glaciers flowing toward the

coast and forming a continuous ice platform out of which only

a few rocky points project.

Cape Kater to Anvers Island

3.4 Lanchester Bay (63°55'S., 60°06'W.) is entered between Wennersgaard Point, located 5 miles SSW of Cape Kater, and Havilland Point, 7 miles WNW. Chanute Peak stands on

the E side of this bay and Temple Glacier covers the E side of

Wright Ice Piedmont which extends to Cape Andreas

(64°00'S., 60°43'W.), 20 miles W.

3.4 Cape Page is located 2 miles W of Havilland Point; Short Island lies close offshore, 3.5 miles further SW.

3.4 Palmer Archipelago (64°15'S., 62°50'W.), consisting of a

number of islands, lies off the Davis Coast (64°00'S.,

60°00'W.). The principal islands are Tower, Trinity, Hoseason,

Liege, Brabant, Anvers, and Wiencte. These islands are separated from the mainland by a continuous channel which, from

N to S, bears the names Orleans Strait (63°50'S., 60°20'W.),

Gerlache Strait (64°30'S., 62°20'W.), and Bismarck Strait

(64°51'S., 64°00'W.).

3.4 Depths of up to 366m are reported to lie 7 miles N of the extremities of the islands. Gerlache Strait is clear in the vicinity

of Brabant Island and has depths of 212 to 914m. Shoaling occurs in the vicinity of Anvers Island and the depths decrease to

less than 180m in some places within the strait.

3.4 Tower Island (63°33'S., 59°51'W.), 305m high, lies 10.5

miles N of Cape Kater.

3.4 Condyle Point (63°35'S., 59°48'W.) is located 1.5 miles E

of the S extremity of this island and Cape Dumoutier is located

2.3 miles farther NE. Foul ground fringes the E, S, and W sides

of this island and extends up to 1.5 miles offshore. A foul

ground area also fronts the N side of the island. It is about 2.5

miles wide and extends up to 5 miles seaward.

3.4 Dumoulin Rocks (63°26'S., 59°47'W.) lie close N of Cape

Leguillou. Kendall Rocks, consisting of several pillar-shaped

islets, lie 5 miles NNE of Tower Island and have been reported

to attain a height of 133m.

3.4 Ohlin Island, 170m high and 1.5 miles long, lies 5 miles

WNW of Tower Island. Two islets and a below-water rock lie

centered about 1 mile W of this island. Three islets and a below-water rock lie between 2 and 3 miles WSW of the island.

3.4 Caution.—The area lying ESE of Tower Island has not been

completely surveyed and vessels should exercise great care

when navigating in this vicinity.

3.5 Gilbert Strait (63°38'S., 60°16'W.) separates the

dangers lying W of Tower Island from Cape Neumayer

(63°42'S., 60°34'W.). An air survey (1957) of the strait and the

area lying between Tower Island and Cape Kater revealed the

existence of many uncharted dangers. However, a survey

(1984) reported that a passage, 3 miles wide and clear, leads

through the strait.

3.5 A research vessel reported (1977) that a clear passage led

through Gilbert Strait along the meridian of 60°28'W, but

passed through unsurveyed areas.

3.5 Trinity Island (63°45'S., 60°44'W.), 15 miles long and 7.5

miles wide, lies 20 miles W of Cape Kater. Tower Hill, its summit, is 1,125m high and formed by a distinctive sharp cone. A

small island, 186m high, lies close off the rugged NW extremity of Trinity Island.

3.5 The SW part of the island is formed by an ice-covered tableland, the S extremity of which is known as Stottsburg Point.

Spert Island, 160m high, lies close W of the W extremity of the

island and several above and below-water rocks lie up to about

1.8 miles N and NW of its N end.

3.5 Farewell Rock (63°52'S., 61°01'W.), a rocky reef, lies close

off the SW end of Spert Island. A rock, awash, lies 2.5 miles

WNW of this reef. Banks, with least depths of 31 and 44m, lie

6 miles SW and 9 miles WSW, respectively, of the beacon.

3.5 Caution.—Three small islets, surrounded by foul ground,

are reported to lie about 3.5 miles NE of Cape Wollaston, the

NE extremity of Trinity Island. A dangerous area, about 1.5

miles in diameter, is reported, existence doubtful, to be centered about 3 miles ENE of this cape.

3.5 Several dangers are reported to lie up to 5 miles seaward of

the W coast of Trinity Island.

3.5 Breakers have been seen 3 miles W and 3.7 miles SW of

Cape Wollaston. 

3.5 Vessels are advised not to approach within 5 miles of the N

shore of Trinity Island as the area has not been completely surveyed and foul ground is reported to exist.
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 141

Pub. 200

3.6 Mikkelsen Harbor (63°54'S., 60°47'W.) indents the

S coast of Trinity Island, E of Stottsburg Point. This inlet has

general depths of 46 to 164m. Anchorage can be taken, in a

depth of 82m, fine clay, on a bank lying about 0.5 mile from

the glacier at the head. Anchorage may also be taken, in a

depth of 18m, about 0.2 mile SE of D'Hainaut Island, which

lies in the center of the harbor. The bottom consists of a thin

layer of mud over rock, with moderate holding ability. The harbor provides shelter from winds from E, through N, to WSW,

but a rough sea sets in during S and SW winds. The flood current swts NE, at a rate of 1 knot, while the ebb current sets SW

at a similar rate. Drift ice and bergs set in from the SW and frequent calving of the glacier often renders this anchorage undesirable.

3.6 Klo Rock, with a least depth of 1.5m and on which the sea

breaks, lies in the middle of the harbor. In addition, several other rocks obstruct the approaches to the harbor. Two beacons,

each 30m high, stand on an islet, 9m high, which lies near the

middle of the harbor, on the W side.

3.6 Orleans Strait leads between Trinity Island and the Danco

Coast (64°42'S., 62°00'W.). This passage is about 4 miles

wide, but is restricted to a navigable width of 2 miles. Vessels

should pass to the S of the rocks lying off the SE side Trinity

Island but may pass either side of a rock located near the middle of the channel. A shoal, with a depth of 2.4m, lies about 2.5

miles SE of Awl Point, the SE extremity of Trinity Island. A

rock, awash, lies about 3.5 miles further SE of Awl Point. 

3.6 Chionis Island (63°53'S., 60°38'W.), 127m high, lies about

1.2 miles SE of Trinity Island. A dangerous rock, existence

doubtful, is reported to lie about 4.5 miles SE of this island.

3.6 A clear and navigable channel, 1.3 miles wide, leads through

Orleans Strait. It passes S of Chionis Island and connects Gilbert Strait Gerlache Strait.

3.6 Austin Rocks (63°26'S., 61°04'W.) lie centered about 13

miles NW of Trinity Island. This group attains a height of 42m

and extends about 3 miles in a NE/SW direction. Ice floes frequently ground in the vicinity of the rocks. 

3.6 Hoseason Island (63°44'S., 61°44'W.), 529m high, lies 19

miles W of Trinity Island and is marked by two snow-covered

summits. Cape Barrow, the NE extremity of the island, is faced

by a steep cliff and backed by gentle slopes which rise toward

the N summit of the island. This cape is fronted by several

rocks which extend up to 1 mile seaward. A below-water rock,

existence doubtful, is reported to lie about 1.3 miles NNW of

the cape. Cetacea Rocks and an islet, 65m high, lie centered 2.5

miles SE of the cape.

3.6 From Cape Barrow, the coast of the island extends 7 miles to

Angot Point, its S extremity. Numerous small islets and rocks,

both above and below-water, front the shores of this island.

3.6 Cape Possession, 259m high, is the W extremity of Chanticleer Island, which lies close off the W extremity of Hoseason

Island. Numerous above and below-water rocks partially surround this island.

3.7 Intercurrence Island (63°55'S., 61°24'W.) is the

northernmost and largest of the Christiania Islands (63°57'S.,

61°27'W.). Babel Rock, 58m high, is one of two rocks which

lie close N of this island and is surrounded by foul ground. The

W and S shores of the island are fronted by foul ground which

extends up to 2.5 miles seaward.

3.7 Small Island, 335m high and 1 mile in diameter, lies within

the foul ground area close off the S shore. This island is reported to have a sphinx-like appearance when viewed from some

directions. Several above-water rocks and a rock, awash, lie up

to 1.5 miles SE of the island.

3.7 Two rocks, which break and are fringed by foul ground, are

reported to lie about 5 miles E of Small Island. Chance Rock, a

below-water rock, is reported to lie, position approximate,

about 6 miles E of Small Island.

3.7 Diamonen Island, 171m high, is located 5 miles ESE of

Small Island and a rock, 1.2m high, lies 0.8 mile NNW of it.

3.7 A shoal, with a depth of 11m, and a dangerous rock, are reported to lie about 8 miles ESE and 1.5 miles W, respectively,

of Small Island. A foul ground area, about 2.5 miles long, lies

7.5 miles NE of Intercurrence Island and extends in a N/S direction.

3.7 The Danco Coast is that portion of the Antarctic Peninsula

forming the shore between Cape Kater and Cape Renard

(65°01'S., 63°46'W.), 130 miles SW.

3.7 From Cape Kater, the Danco Coast trends 21 miles SW and

W to Cape Andreas (64°00'S., 60°43'W.).

3.8 Cape Sterneck (64°04'S., 61°02'W.) is located 23

miles SW of Cape Andreas and the coast between is regular

and unbroken. The shore is fringed by numerous small rocks,

especially close N and S of this cape.

3.8 Cape Sterneck is formed by a bold and dark-colored cliff,

460m high. It is the NW extremity of a promontory and forms

the SW limit of the Davis Coast. Monument Rocks, up to 55m

high, lie 3 miles NNE of the cape and numerous small islets

and rocks lie between them.

3.8 The Danco Coast appears as a continuous ice slope, broken

only by several protruding rock masses. The plateau, rising farther inland, attains heights of 1,220 to 1,830m.

Hughes Bay (64°13'S., 61°20'W.), 22 miles long, irregularly

indents the coast and recedes for about 8 miles. The shores of

this bay are completely ice-covered except for several rocky

headlands. The ice extends inland to the base of some irregular

mountains which have steep snow-free slopes.

3.8 Cierva Cove lies 6 miles SSE of Cape Sterneck and a hut

surmounts its S entrance point. An islet lies 1 mile NW of the S

entrance point. A beacon, 6m high, noted as destroyed on the

chart, stands on an islet lying 2 miles N of the S entrance point.

3.8 Brialmont Cove lies 4 miles SSW of Cierva Cove and is entered between Charles Point and Spring Point. Alcock Island

lies on an area of foul ground which fronts the W side of

Charles Point.

3.8 Good anchorage can be taken in depths of 25 to 30m about

0.3 mile NNE of Spring Point, but strong winds often blow

from the SSE. Primavera, an Argentinean base station, is situated in the vicinity of Brialmont Cove.

3.8 Midas Island, Moss Island, and Apendice Island, together

with a number of shoals, lie up to 4 miles W of this stretch of

coast and can be best seen on the chart.

3.8 Sprightly Island (64°17'S., 61°04'W.) lies 0.5 mile NW of

Spring Point and Roget Rocks, surrounded by foul ground, lie

3.8 miles SW of it.

3.8 Tournachon Peak, 859m high, rises 1.5 miles SSW of Spring

Point and is prominent.

3.8 Salvesen Cove (64°24'S., 61°20'W.) lies about 9 miles SSW
142 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

of Spring Point and indents the coast for 2 miles. Ice rises in a

series of terraces to the E of this cove. The S shore of the cove

rises to a high, rugged ridge, with several rocky outcrops and

ice-capped peaks, which extends inland to the plateau. Between Spring Point and this cove, the coastal ice cliff is fringed

by numerous small, rocky islets. The S shore of the cove is

formed by large glacier cliffs which extend NW for 7 miles to

Cape Murray.

3.9 Cape Murray (64°21'S., 61°38'W.) is formed, in reality, by Murray Island (Bluff Island). This island has a number

of extensive rocky exposures which are conspicuous and extend vertically down to the shore. Several islands, the largest

being about 2 miles long, lie close off this cape and may best

be seen on the chart.

3.9 Graham Passage, about 0.5 mile wide and 4 miles long, separates the island of Cape Murray from the mainland. Cape

Murray Bay, a small and sheltered harbor, is formed between

Cape Murray and a small island lying close N. Anchorage may

be taken in a depth of 36m within the E part of this harbor.

However, deeper water lies in the W part and a depth of 110m

with no bottom has been reported.

3.9 The Reclus Peninsula (64°33'S., 61°47'W.), high and rocky,

forms the W side of Charlotte Bay. The Gaston Islands, 58 and

81m high, lie 1 mile WNW and 1 mile NNW, respectively, of

this peninsula. A beacon, 6m high, surmounts the higher island. Several shoals lie close SE of these two islands.

3.9 Cape Anna (64°35'S., 62°26'W.), marked by a beacon, is located 18 miles SW of the peninsula and Wilhelmina Bay

(64°38'S., 62°10'W.), a large indentation, lies between them.

The head of this bay is fronted by several rocky masses, with

numerous valley glaciers, and an extensive ice cliff. Several

large islands lie in the E part of the bay and Plata Passage, a

navigable channel, leads between them and the high ice-covered mainland.

3.9 Caution.—A depth of 5.3m lies about 0.75 mile ENE of the

beacon on Cape Anna. 

3.9 Nansen Island, 6 miles long and the largest within the bay,

lies 5 miles SW of the Reclus Peninsula and two small islands

lie close off its N extremity.

3.9 Brooklyn Island lies 1 mile offshore, about 1 mile SE of

Nansen Island. It is 3 miles long, high, and ice-covered. Wyck

Island, 1 mile long, lies 1 mile S of the W extremity of this island.

3.9 Foyn Harbor (64°33'S., 62°01'W.) lies within Wilhelmina

Bay. It is located on the E side of Nansen Island and is bordered by several small islands and rocks which lie on the E side

of the entrance. Anchorage can be taken in depths of 27 to

36m, rocky bottom with poor holding ground, in this harbor.

However, this anchorage is not recommended due to the calving of the high glacier face and violent SE winds which have

often been experienced in the bay.

3.9 Caution.—The tidal range in the vicinity of Nansen Island is

about 1.3m. However, the tides are reported to be of a peculiar

nature and very irregular.

3.10 Pelseneer Island (64°39'S., 62°13'W.), 2 miles long,

lies in the center of the bay and about 2 miles from the head.

This island has three summits, formed by needle-like peaks,

from which icy slopes extend to the water's edge and terminate

in vertical ice cliffs. A small island lies about 4 miles WSW of

this island and is located in the center of the entrance of a wide

cove.

3.10 Delaite Island, 2 miles long, lies 2 miles W of Nansen Island.

A small islet and a below-water rock lie close off the S extremity of this island.

3.10 Emma Island, with several sharp peaks, lies 3 miles E of

Cape Anna. A rock is reported to lie about 1 mile N of this island.

3.10 Louise Island, small and ice-capped, lies 1.5 miles ESE of

Cape Anna.

3.10 Brabant Island (64°15'S., 62°20'W.) lies on the NW side of

Gerlache Strait. It extends 33 miles in a N/S direction and is

about 16 miles wide. The Solvay Mountains rise along the E

side of the island. A rocky ice-covered spur projects S from

these mountains and ends in Mount Buckle, a conspicuous

summit, 1,030m high. From Mount Buckle, the SE part of the

island is formed by glacier slopes. Lagrange Peak, 452m high,

stands 8 miles NE of Mount Buckle and backs a flat-topped

rocky headland.

3.10 Buls Bay indents the center of the E shore of the island and

recedes for about 3 miles. A large glacier lies at the head of this

bay and is fronted by several rocks. The rounded and prominent summits of the Solvay Mountains stand above the bay and

attain heights of up to 1,520m. D'Ursel Point, small and ice

free, forms the S entrance point of the bay. Although this bay

has not been thoroughly surveyed, it was reported that anchorage could be taken close behind an island lying in the entrance.

Strong winds, which sweep off the glacier at the head, have

been experienced within this bay.

3.10 Pampa Island (Hunt Island), a large island, lies close to the

shore, about 3 miles NE of Buls Bay.

3.10 Lecointe Island (64°16'S., 62°03'W.), the largest of a group

of three islands, lies 6 miles NE of Buls Bay. A light is reported

to be shown from a structure standing on the N extremity of

Guesalaga Island, the easternmost island of this group.

3.10 From Buls Bay, the coast trends generally NNE to Spallanzani Point, the NE extremity of Brabant Island, and is indented

by several small bays and coves. Harry Island, steep and snowcapped, lies close to the coast in the vicinity of Spallanzani

Point and has perpendicular cliffs on its W side. A small channel, with several arms, lies on the W side of this island and is

not recommended for use. Bernard Rocks lie in the middle of

this channel, between Harry Island and Spallanzani Point.

3.11 Two Hummock Island (64°08'S., 61°42'W.), lying 8

miles SW of Small Island, presents a convex appearance with a

smooth snow mantle. Two pyramidal-shaped rocky nunataks

project through the snow and their summits form a range which

extends in the direction of the length of the island. The shore of

the island is formed by ice cliffs, fronted by narrow strips of

bare rock at the water's edge. Wauters Point, the N extremity of

the island, is formed by a conspicuous and snow-covered cape.

3.11 Auguste Island, 1 mile long, lies 3.5 miles NE of Two Hummock Island. It is flat-topped, with steep slopes, and is mostly

free of snow. Landing may be made on the rocky shore of the

NW part of this island.

3.11 Cobalescou Island lies 0.8 mile ESE of the SE extremity of

Two Hummock Island. It is free of snow and has two flat sum-
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 143

Pub. 200

mits, surmounted by broken rocks, each 25m high.

3.11 The Christiania Islands lie 5.5 miles NW of Two Hummock

Island and are separated from it by Croker Passage. This passage deep, clear of dangers, and joins Gerlache Strait, at its S

end, being reported to be the safest and best approach to the

latter channel.

3.11 Liuege Island (64°02'S., 61°55'W.) lies 4 miles NW of Two

Hummock Island. The Brugmann Mountains, forming the

highest land, rise in a steep range along the E side of this island. Neyt Point, a prominent projection, is located on the E

shore of the island, 1 mile SE of the N extremity, and marks the

end of this range of irregular peaks. Mount Allo, 305m high,

stands near this point. It is formed by a conspicuous sharp cone

and is completely covered by snow. Anchorage can be taken

about 1 mile SW of Neyt Point.

3.11 Moureaux Point, the N extremity, forms the seaward end of a

narrow peninsula which is joined to the island by a rather high

and narrow isthmus. Three islets lie about 1 mile offshore,

close W of the point, and foul ground is located in this vicinity.

A shoal patch, with a depth of 18m, is reported to lie, position

approximate, about 5.5 miles NE of Moureaux Point.

3.11 Yoke Island, 72m high, lies 3 miles WSW of Moureaux

Point and is surrounded by foul ground.

3.12 Chauveau Point (64°05'S., 62°02'W.), the W extremity of the island, is bordered by numerous islets, rocks, and

reefs. The channel leading between Liege Island and Brabant

Island is obstructed by many islets and rocks. Davis Islet, the

largest of these, almost entirely blocks the channel and forms

two narrow passages. The northernmost passage is about 0.3

mile wide and may be transited by small vessels. Such vessels

should stay close to Liege Island in order to avoid the dangers

fringing Davis Island. Several shoals front the S shore of this

island and lie up to 0.5 mile seaward.

3.12 The N coast of Brabant Island trends generally NW for 7

miles then N for 5 miles to Duclaux Point which forms the W

entrance point of Bouquet Bay (64°03'S., 62°10'W.). This

large bay is reported to be foul.

3.12 Cape Cockburn, the E extremity of the Pasteur Peninsula, is

formed by a high, rocky cliff. This cliff extends 5 miles to Cape

Roux, the W extremity. Depths of less than 9m are reported to

lie up to 1.5 miles off this stretch of coast and two rocks,

awash, lie on a foul ground area, which breaks, about 4.5 miles

NW of Cape Roux.

3.12 From Cape Roux, the W shore of the peninsula trends SW

for 4 miles to Point Metchnikoff, the N entrance point of Guyou Bay (64°05'S., 62°35'W.). This bay recedes SE for about 3

miles and the land at its head is much lower than that in the N

part of the peninsula. Claude Point, a prominent vertical rock,

forms the S entrance point of the bay. This bay is encumbered

with numerous awash, above, and below-water rocks. Foul

ground fronts Claude Point and extends up to 1.3 miles offshore.

3.12 Astrolable Needle (64°08'S., 62°36'W.) stands 1 mile S of

Claude Point. This pointed monolith, 104m high, is visible

from a great distance.

3.12 From Claude Point, the coastal range rises as a snow-covered

ridge and extends S for 8 miles to Mount Parry. This peak is

2,432m high and dominates this part of the coast.

3.12 Duperre Bay (64°27'S., 62°41'W.), 3 miles long and 1 mile

wide, contains a large glacier which descends from the heights

of the interior mountains.

3.12 The W shore of the Pasteur Peninsula terminates in Lehaie

Point. The W coast of Brabant Island is fronted by rocks and

has not been thoroughly surveyed. Vessels navigating in this

vicinity should exercise extreme care.

3.12 From Lehaie Point, the coast extends SE for 5 miles to Strath

Point, the S extremity, above which stands Victoria Peak. This

conspicuous summit is cone-shaped and 485m high.

3.12 From Cape Anna, the coast extends SW for 3 miles and is indented by Orne Harbor (64°37'S., 62°32'W.), a bay. This bay

affords shelter from winds and swells. Anchorage can be obtained within this bay, but there is no protection from drift ice.

3.12 From Orne Harbor, the coast extends SW for 2 miles to

where a conspicuous, black nunatak rises near the shore. It then

trends 7 miles S and 3 miles W to Beneden Head (64°46'S.,

62°42'W.). Steep glacial slopes extend into the interior, with

occasional rocky outcrops, from this headland.

3.13 Errera Channel (64°42'S., 62°36'W.) separates

Ronge Island from the mainland. Ronge Island lies with

Georges Point, its N extremity, located 8 miles SW of Cape

Anna.

3.13 Cuverville Island and Danco Island lie within this channel,

1.5 miles SE of Georges Point and 2.8 miles E of the S extremity of Ronge Island, respectively. A dangerous submerged rock

lies about 0.4 mile NNW of the N extremity of Cuverville Island. Danco Island is fronted by rocks which extend up to 0.2

mile offshore; an above-water shingle patch lies 0.3 mile E of

it.

3.13 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 26m, off the E part of

the N end of Danco Island. However, vessels using this anchorage have reported some difficulty with icebergs being swept

through the channel by the tidal current which attains a rate of

3 knots.

3.13 Mount Tennant, a conspicuous peak, is 688m high and rises

in the N part of Ronge Island.

3.13 The Orne Islands and several above-water rocks lie on an area of foul ground which extends up to 1.3 miles N of Georges

Point. Ferrer Rocks lie 1 mile W of Ketley Point, the W extremity of Ronge Island, and a shoal, with a least depth of

3.7m, is located close S of them. Useful Island, marked by a

beacon, lies 2.8 miles W of Ketley Point and rocks extend up to

about 1 mile ENE of it.

3.13 Andvord Bay (64°50'S., 62°39'W.), which lies between

Beneden Head and Duthiers Point, extends 11 miles in a general SE direction. The S end of this bay is divided into two small

inlets which trend E and S for about 2.5 miles. Depths within

the main part of the bay are deep with the exception of a small

indentation along the E shore, 5.5 miles SE of Beneden Head.

Anchorage may be taken as is convenient in depths of up to

73m. The shore at the head of the bay is formed by the cliffed

face of a broken glacier which descends from the NE shoulder

of Mount Theodore.

3.14 Meko Harbor (64°50'S., 62°33'W.), a small bay, indents the E shore of Andvord Bay. Two small coves lie on the S

side of this bay at the base of steep slopes which ascend to the

summit of Forbes Point. The harbor provides anchorage and

has general depths of 55 to 90m. Shoals, with depths of less
144 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

than 5.5m, fringe the shores.

3.14 A below-water rock, fringed by foul ground, lies close to the

E shore of Andvord Bay, 3 miles NW of this harbor. Several

coves indent the E shore of the bay to the S of Meko Harbor. A

rock, awash, lies, position doubtful, close off the N entrance

point of the southernmost of these coves.

3.14 The Coughtrey Peninsula, which terminates to the N in

Duthiers Point, separates Andvord Harbor from Paradise Harbor. Mount Hoegh, Dallmeyer Peak, and Mount Inverleith,

1,820m high, stand on this peninsula and slope S toward the

plateau.

3.14 Waterboat Point (64°49'S., 62°51'W.) is located 1.5 miles

SW of Duthiers Point. Small vessels may anchor SW of this

point.

3.14 Presidente Gonzalez Videla, a Chilean base, is situated in the

vicinity of Waterboat Point. It was reported (1973) to be

closed. 

3.14 Molina Point is the NE extremity of Lemaire Island. Aguirre

Passage, which is deep, separates this island from Waterboat

Point.

3.14 Paradise Harbor (64°51'S., 62°54'W.), a wide bay, indents

the coast to the SW of Andvord Bay. It lies S of Lemaire Island

and E of Bryde Island. Anchorage may be taken in a depth of

82m, clay with poor holding ground, in the harbor. The head of

the harbor terminates in Skontorp Cove.

3.14 Ice constantly moves through the passage leading between

the mainland and Lemaire Island. It often changes direction

with the two daily tides, which attain rates of up to 3 knots, and

vessels anchored here should be on constant alert. However,

the tidal currents prevent the ice in the bay from freezing, even

in winter months.

3.14 A light is reported to be shown from a pyramidal-shaped

tower, 4m high, standing on O'Neill Point, the N extremity of

Lautaro Island. This island is 58m high and lies at the W entrance to Bryde Channel, 1.5 miles W of Lemaire Island. It was

reported that this light is often unreliable and is obscured to the

S by high land.

3.14 Leith Cove and Skontorp Cove indent the E side of Paradise

Harbor. The Coughtrey Peninsula projects from the N entrance

point of this cove and a beacon stands at its N end. Anchorage

can be taken in a depth of 40m, rock with good holding ground,

within Skontorp Cove, 0.6 mile NE of Garzon Point.

3.14 Oscar Cove is entered between Garzon Point and Stoney

Point, 1.5 miles W. A beacon, 7m high, stands on the latter

point. Mascies Cove lies on the N side of Ferguson Channel,

1.5 miles W of Oscar Cove.

3.14 Almirante Brown, an Argentinean base, is situated in the vicinity of the Coughtrey Peninsula.

3.14 Bruce Island (64°54'S., 63°08'W.), 320m high, lies in the W

entrance of Ferguson Channel and is separated from a peninsula by a deep channel. Mount Banck, a prominent peak, stands

on this peninsula. Boutan Rocks, up to 5m high, lie about 1.3

miles SW of this island. 

3.15 Wiencke Island (64°50'S., 63°25'W.) lies SE of Anvers Island and is separated from it by Neumayer Channel.

Throughout the length of this island, three mountain ranges

slope in a SE direction down to Gerlache Strait. Nemo Peak,

864m, and Nipple Peak, form the NE range. Wall Range rises

in the center of the island. The Fief Mountains stand at the SW

end of this range and include Savoia Peak, the summit of the island, which is 1,435m high. A striking, serrated range of

mountains rises NW of the central range and is separated from

it by a wide valley. This range has Noble Peak standing at its

NE end and Jabet Peak standing at its SW end.

3.15 Vazquez Island (64°55'S., 63°25'W.), 103m high, lies close

SE of Principal Point, the SE extremity of Wiencke Island. A

rock, 0.3m high, lies about 0.5 mile SW of this island and a

rock, awash, is located 1 mile W of it.

3.15 Fridtjof Island (64°53'S., 63°22'W.), 136m high, lies, along

with two small islets, about 1 mile off the E coast of Wiencke

Island. Bob Island, 145m high, lies 3 miles SSW of this island

and is marked by a beacon.

3.15 Capstan Rocks, up to 10m high, lie about 0.5 mile S of Bob

Island. A framework beacon, equipped with a radar reflector,

stands near the E extremity of these rocks.

3.15 Breakwater Island, 33m high, lies close offshore, 5 miles S

of Cape Astrup, the N extremity of Wiencke Island.

3.15 Cape Astrup is formed by a bold, round, and black-colored

headland which is surmounted by an even sheet of ice. This

sheet flows into the water on both sides of the cape. A rock,

with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.3 mile N of the

cape.

3.15 Neumayer Channel, which separates Anvers Island from

Wiencke Island and Doumer Island, is entered, at its NE end,

between Felicie Point, the S extremity of Lion Island, and Cape

Astrup.

3.16 Damoy Point (64°49'S., 63°32'W.), located 3.5 miles

SW of Noble Peak, is the W extremity of a peninsula which

forms the N side of Port Lockroy. Casabianca Island, 46m

high, lies 0.2 mile offshore, 0.5 mile NE of the point. A beacon

stands near the E side of this island and another beacon stands

near the N extremity of the peninsula. Anchorage may be taken

in depths of 22 to 36m about 0.2 mile NE of Casabianca Island

or in a depth of 54m about 0.3 mile E of the same island.

3.16 Dorian Bay lies on the N side of the isthmus at the root of the

peninsula which forms the N side of Port Lockroy. This bay is

difficult to enter and may only be used by vessels with drafts of

less than 4m. There are depths of 5 to 5.8m within the bay over

a bottom of soft mud. A reef, which nearly covers at HW, extends almost entirely across the entrance to the bay from its W

entrance point. A narrow channel, with a depth of 2.7m, leads

between the E end of the reef and the E entrance point of the

bay. A hut is reported to stand on the S shore of the bay. Another hut, with a marker, is reported to stand near the SW end of

the bay. An airstrip situated in the vicinity of Damoy Point is

occasionally used. Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 73m

about 0.2 mile E of the beacon standing on Casabianca Island.

3.17 Port Lockroy (64°49'S., 63°30'W.), lying on the W

side of Wiencke Island and NE of Doumer Island, is one of the

best harbors in this region. It affords good shelter, with moderate depths, in good holding ground. This harbor is entered between Flag Point, on the N side, and Lecuyer Point, 0.5 mile

SSE, and extends E for about 0.8 mile. The W half of the S side

of the harbor is encumbered by two islands and two islets. The

passages leading between these obstructions are reported to be

foul. Goudier Island, with Bills Island located close NE, lies

close off a small peninsula on the SW side of the harbor. Two
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 145

Pub. 200

islets, both bare, lie about 0.4 mile W of Bills Island. A channel, 0.2 mile wide, passes N of these islets and into the inner

part of the harbor which can only be used by small craft. Alice

Creek, in the inner part, has a reef extending E at least halfway

across its entrance.

3.17 The ocean swell does not penetrate into the harbor and rocks

protect it from drifting icebergs. However, loose ice may be experienced due to calving of the glacier face which skirts the

harbor shore. Vessels may approach the harbor through either

Neumayer Channel or Peltier Channel which are usually ice

free due to the currents. The N shore is formed by steep ice

slopes which descend from the serrated hills. These slopes

have vertical faces at the water's edge, 140 to 185m high. The E

shores are marked by Smith Point and Besnard Point.

3.17 Goudier Island is fronted by a wharf, 4.5m long, which has a

least depth of 0.9m alongside. However, it is reported to be in

poor condition. A cairn stands on this island and a beacon

stands on Bills Island.

3.17 The outer part of the harbor provides anchorage, but the bottom is rocky and the holding ground is not good during E

winds. When entering the harbor, vessels should pass to the N

of the islands and then proceed along the ice edge of the N

shore. Good anchorage may be taken in a depth of 16.5m, mud,

about 0.3 mile NE of Bills Island. Anchorage may also be taken in a depth of 18m, mud, about 0.2 mile of Besnard Point

which is located at the E side of the harbor.

3.17 Port Lockroy is usually ice locked until the middle of December, but it affords an excellent harbor during the months of

January, February, and March. However, winds from the S may

block the entrances with loose drift ice.

3.17 Doumer Island lies in the S entrance of Neumayer Channel

and is separated from Wiencke Island by Peltier Channel. This

island is dominated by a snow-covered pyramid, 508m high,

which rises steeply from the head of South Bay.

3.17 South Bay is entered between Py Point, the S extremity of

Doumer Island and Cape Kemp, 1.2 miles NW. A lighted beacon is reported to stand near Py Point and an emergency box of

provisions is situated in this vicinity. A spit, with several rocks

awash, extends up to 0.3 mile from the head of this bay. Anchorage can be obtained in a depth of 35m about 0.7 mile NNE

or 0.5 mile NW of Py Point. A shoal patch, with a depth of

7.3m, lies about 0.6 mile ENE of the point.

3.17 Homeward Point, located 1.5 miles NNE of Cape Kemp, is

the W entrance point of Security Bay. Gauthier Point, marked

by a beacon, forms the NE entrance point of this bay and is the

NW extremity of the island. A shoal patch, with a depth of

8.8m, lies about 1 mile NE of this point.

3.18 Cape Lancaster (64°51'S., 63°44'W.), the S extremity of Andvers Island, forms the S extremity of an ice-covered

promontory which rises gradually to Mount Ancla. A chain of

reefs extends up to 1.5 miles S from this cape.

3.18 Chata Rock, 3m high and over which the sea breaks heavily

in rough weather, lies about 0.6 mile S of the cape. A chain of

rocks, which runs parallel to the coast about 0.2 mile offshore,

extends from close E of the cape to about 0.6 mile E of it.

3.18 Strong eddies and overfalls have been reported to occur up to

about 1.2 miles seaward of this cape, especially during NE

winds.

3.18 Borgen Bay (64°45'S., 63°31'W.) indents the coast and recedes for about 2 miles. William Glacier lies at the head of this

bay. From the bay, the coast trends E for 2 miles and then NE

for 8 miles to Lion Sound. This stretch of the coast is bordered

by sheer cliffs, many of which are so steep that snow cannot

cling to them, and backed by several sharp summits. Billie

Peak, 725m high, is the most prominent of these summits and

Copper Peak, 1,125m high, rises 2 miles N of it and is greencolored.

3.18 Mount Francais, 2,821m high, is the tallest summit rising on

Anvers Island and stands above and inland from this portion of

the coast.

3.18 Lion Island (64°41'S., 63°08'W.), 411m high, stands 1.5

miles SSW of Iceberg Point. The entrances leading into Lion

Sound are clear, but a reef extends about 1 mile SW from Felicie Point, the S extremity of this island. Two small islets lie

close off the shore of Anvers Island, W of Felicie Point. A

rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.8 mile ENE of

Hippolyte Point, the N extremity of the island. Dobrowolski Island lies close to the shore, 3 miles SW of Ryswyck Point.

3.18 Caution.—When navigating in the vicinity of Cape Lancaster, vessels should exercise extreme care as reefs, which do not

break, have been reported to lie up to about 1 mile from the

shore.

3.19 Ryswyck Point (64°34'S., 62°50'W.) forms the NE

extremity of Anvers Island and Clifford Peak, 1,160m high, rises 4 miles W of it. Fournier Island lies 0.3 mile E of this point.

3.19 A group of islets and rocks, named The Waifs, lies in the

middle of the S entrance to Schollaert Channel. Breakers have

been observed to occur off the westernmost rocks of this group

and foul ground lies between them and Fournier Island.

3.19 Chiriguano Light is shown from a framework tower standing

on the southernmost islet of The Waifs.

3.19 A navigable channel leads between Ryswyck Point and

Fournier Island and has a least depth, in the middle, of 20m.

Vessels are recommended to approach this channel from the N

steering a course of 168° and from the S steering a course of

000°. The channel leading E of The Waifs is deep, but vessels

using it should keep at least 1 mile off the coast of Brabant Island. The fairway leading through Schollaert Channel is deep

and clear of dangers, except for a rock, with a depth of less

than 1.8m, which lies 0.2 mile NE of False Island.

3.19 Dallmann Bay separates Brabant Island and Anvers Island

and forms the W entrance to Schollaert Channel. Several

groups of low snow-capped islands, which are surrounded by

rocks, lie within this bay.

3.20 The Melchior Islands (64°19'S., 62°57'W.) lie in the

center of Dallmann Bay between Mount Parry and The Hump.

These islands consists of two groups, the West Melchior Islands and the East Melchior Islands, which are separated by

The Sound.

3.20 The East Melchior Islands consist principally of two islands,

Eta and Omega, which are separated by a narrow strait. Omega

Island is 183m high and is the largest of the entire group.

3.20 Andersen Harbor, an indentation in the SW side of Eta Island, lies at the W end of this strait. The SW shore of this harbor is formed by the N extremity of Omega Island. The harbor

is entered between Tripod Island, on the N side, and Pabellon

Island, on the S side. A lighted beacon is reported to be situated
146 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

on Pabellon Island. The harbor extends E for about 0.5 mile

and has depths of 9 to 54m. It provides anchorage in depths of

20 to 51m.

3.20 The strait leading between Eta Island and Omega Island varies in width from 90 to 180m. It is 0.5 mile long and has shallow depths. A strong tidal current sets in and out of this strait.

3.20 A number of rocks lie S of the East Melchior Islands and extend up to 0.4 mile seaward. During a recent survey, a belowwater rock, fronted by foul ground, was reported to lie about

2.5 miles E of the NE extremity of Omega Island.

3.20 A foul ground area extends up to 1.3 miles N of the East

Melchior Islands. Peace Island, the Tau Islands, and several

small islets lie on this area.

3.20 A beacon, 4m high, stands on an islet lying 0.4 mile NW of

the W side of Omega Island. Another beacon stands on an islet

lying 0.5 mile S of Omega Island.

3.20 The West Melchior Islands consist of the large Lambda Island, lying on the N side, and the smaller Gamma Island, lying

about 1 mile S. A chain of small islands and islets extends in a

NE/SW direction and lies centered between these two islands.

Delta Island is the northeasternmost of this chain, followed

close SW by Alpha Island, Beta Island, and Kappa Island. Epsilon Island lies close NW of Alpha Island and the Theta Islands lie close W of Kappa Island. Two harbors are formed by

this chain. Inner Harbor, which lies S of Lambda Island, and

Melchior Harbor, which lies N of Gamma Island.

3.20 A light is shown from a framework structure standing on the

E side of Lambda Island.

3.20 A group of three below-water rocks, fronted by foul ground,

was also reported to lie about 3 miles ENE of the light. A

group of several islets and rocks, fringed by foul ground, was

reported to lie about 2.5 miles NE of the light. Another group

of islets, surrounded by a foul ground area, lies about 3 miles

NNE of the light.

3.20 Inner Harbor recedes for about 0.2 mile and has depths of 31

to 71m. It may be entranced from The Sound. Foul ground extends up to about 140m N into the harbor from the N shore of

Alpha Island and up to about 100m N from the NW shore of

Delta Island. Moorings are available near the NE extremity of

Alpha Island.

3.20 Melchior Harbor, a sheltered haven, is 0.5 mile long. It is enclosed, except on the E side, by Delta Island and may be entered from The Sound. Harpun Rocks, with a least depth of 4m,

lie in the NE entrance to the harbor, close SE of the S extremity

of Delta Island. Anchorage may be taken in the center of the

harbor in depths of 31 to 77m, clay, sand, or stones with good

holding ground. However, vessels may be inconvenienced by

icebergs and drift ice.

3.20 A foul ground area extends up to 0.5 mile N from Lambda

Island, the northernmost of the W group. The Rho Islands, several in number, lie within this area.

3.20 The W entrances to Inner Harbor and Melchior Harbor have

not been surveyed and strong tidal currents, which often bring

large quantities of drift ice, are reported to set through them.

Moorings are available on the N shore of Gamma Island, about

0.2 mile SW of Gallows Point, its NE extremity. A hut and a

beacon are situated near Gallows Point. Anchorage can be taken with the summit of the island that lies between Gamma Island and Kappa Island bearing 239° and the beacon on Gallows

Point bearing 125°. Anchorage may also be taken about 0.2

mile N of this latter beacon.

3.20 The Sound runs in a N/S direction between the East Melchior Islands and the West Melchior Islands. When approaching this channel from the N, vessels should head for the center

until clear of a group of rocks which breaks and lies about 0.2

mile off the E shore of Lambda Island. Vessels should then

head for Gallows Point, the S entrance point of Melchior Harbor until they are past Delta Island when the haven will be

open to full view. Harpun Rocks lie about 0.2 mile S of Bills

Point, the S extremity of Delta Island.

3.21 Gand Island (64°24'S., 62°51'W.), flat and ice-covered, is 3 miles long and 1.5 miles wide. It lies about 3 miles

SSE of the Melchior Islands. Several rocks and reefs lie within

0.5 mile of the S shore of the island and a small island, known

as Manoury Island, lies 1.3 miles S of it. Gand Island forms the

N entrance point of Schollaert Channel and lies on its E side.

3.21 From Hackapike Bay, the coast extends N for 0.8 mile to Andrews Point which forms the S entrance point of Discovery

Sound. Three rocks lie close N of Andrews Point.

3.21 Guepratte Island is covered with snow and lies on the W side

of Schollaert Channel, 1.8 miles W of Andrews Point. Numerous small islands front the E shore of this island. Several rocks

and areas of foul ground extend up to 1 mile seaward of the E

side of this island.

3.21 Discovery Sound leads S of Guepratte Island and connects

Fournier Bay with Schollaert Sound. Phils Island lies close to

the S extremity of Guepratte Island and rocks extend up to 0.2

mile W of it. A least depth of 18.3m was reported to lie in the

channel 0.2 mile SE of East Point, the E extremity of Phils Island.

3.22 Inverleith Harbor (64°32'S., 63°00'W.), an inlet, recedes S for 2 miles and provides anchorage in a depth of 102m.

A glacier is located at the head of this harbor and a large

amount of drift ice often flows into it. Several small rocks lie

along the N shore of the Briggs Peninsula, at the E side of

Fournier Bay. This bay is 8 miles long, 3 miles wide, and a glacier fronts the head. A below-water rock lies near the middle of

the entrance to this bay, 1.5 miles WNW of the Briggs Peninsula. The W shore of the bay extends 10 miles N to an unnamed

point of land, which has foul ground extending up to 1.5 miles

N of it.

3.22 The Thompson Peninsula projects from the NE side of Anvers Island, on the W side of Dallmann Bay, and forms the N

side of Fournier Bay. A number of islets lie close off its seaward extremity. A large bay lies between the Thompson Peninsula and Gourdon Peninsula, 2 miles NW. The latter peninsula

forms the S shore of Lapeyrere Bay. Pyramid Rock, 40m high,

lies close off the NE extremity of the Gourdon Peninsula and

The Hump rises on the N side of Lapeyrere Bay.

3.22 D'Abnour Bay is small and lies close W of Cape Bayle

(64°17'S., 63°10'W.), the NE extremity of Anvers Island. From

Cape Bayle, the N shore extends W for 10 miles to Cape Gronland, the NW extremity of the island. D'Abnour Bay is obstructed by many rocks and shoals.

3.22 The N shore of the island is fringed by numerous rocks and

small snowy islands. The most prominent being the Lajarte Islands (64°14'S., 63°24'W.) which extend up to 2.5 miles N

from coast. Breakers and foul ground are reported to extend up
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 147

Pub. 200

to about 5 miles N of these islands.

3.22 The W coast of Anvers Island is frequently obscured by fog

and low clouds. Many rocks and snow-covered islands lie off

the coast and up to 4 miles offshore. Approach to this stretch of

coast is hazardous, except during periods of good visibility.

3.22 From Cape Gronland, the W coast of the island extends SW

for 31 miles to Cape Monaco. The Paul Islands, a group of five

islands, lies about 4 miles W of Cape Gronland.

3.22 Perrier Bay indents the W coast, 8 miles SW of Cape Gronland. The N entrance point of this bay is formed by Quinton

Point and the S entrance point is formed by Giard Point. Hamburg Bay lies SW of Perrier Bay and is separated from it by a

peninsula, 4.5 miles wide. Bonnier Point forms the W extremity of this peninsula. A chain of rocks, 2 miles long, extends NE

from the S side of Hamburg Bay to beyond Perrier Bay.

Gerlache Island lies 7 miles SW of Hamburg Bay. An extensive

patch of below-water rocks, which break heavily even in calm

weather, lies 2 miles N of this island.

3.22 Cape Monaco is located 8 miles SSW of Gerlache Island.

The shore between is fronted by the Rosenthal Islands which

extend up to 1.5 miles seaward. The northernmost of this group

of islands is conspicuous. Numerous dangerous rocks, surrounded by breakers, lie in an area, with a diameter of 0.8 mile,

centered about 4 miles NNW of Gerlache Island.

3.23 Cape Monaco (64°42'S., 64°15'W.), the W extremity

of Anvers Island, is fringed with numerous small islands and

rocks which extend up to 10 miles SW. Large icebergs are frequently grounded in the vicinity of these obstructions.

3.23 The Gossler Islands lie close off the cape. Buff Island, the

outermost of this group, is formed by a steep rock, 33m high,

with a sheer N side. It is very prominent and radar conspicuous.

3.23 Lenie Passage, which is deep and has a least width of 0.8

mile, leads between the Joubin Islands and the Gossler Islands.

Numerous dangers lie close to the shores on each side of this

passage.

3.23 At the E end, the dangers on the S side include Beaumont

Skerries, which lie 3.5 miles S of Cape Monaco, and Scend

Rock. The sea breaks heavily over Scend Rock and a rock,

awash, lies 0.3 mile S of it. The dangers on the N side of the

passage include shoal patches, with depths of 14 and 16m, and

Rumbler Rock, which lies 4 miles SE of Cape Monaco.

3.23 At the W end of the passage, a shoal patch, with a depth of

8.5m, lies 5 miles W of Cape Monaco. This passage should be

used in good weather as the water is smooth and the detour

round the Joubin Islands can be avoided.

3.23 A conspicuous rock, upon which the sea breaks heavily, lies

about 2.5 miles SE of Cape Monaco. A shoal, with a depth of

16.2m, lies about 2 miles S of the cape and a shoal, with a

depth of 4.9m, lies about 3 miles W of the Gossler Islands.

3.23 Bonaparte Point is located 7 miles SE of Cape Monaco. The

coast between is fronted by many small islands which lie up to

3 miles offshore. Two oil tanks are reported to stand on a small

peninsula which is located 0.5 mile NE of Bonaparte Point. A

small pier is situated on the S side of this peninsula. This pier

can accommodate vessels of up to 5.4m draft, but lacks mooring facilities for large vessels.

3.23 Shortcut Island lies 0.8 mile ESE of Bonaparte Point. This

island is separated from Anvers Island by a deep and narrow

channel which provides a direct route between Arthur Bay and

Biscoe Bay. A shoal, with a depth of 14.6m, lies about 1.3

miles SW of Halfway Island. Breakers were reported to occur

about 1.5 miles NNW of Halfway Island. Vessels have anchored in a depth of 36m about 0.3 mile offshore, 7 miles SE of

Cape Monaco.

3.24 Arthur Harbor (64°46'S., 64°04'W.), an inlet, lies

between Bonaparte Point and Norsel Point, 1.2 miles NNW. It

is fronted by six large islands and numerous islets and rocks.

Torgersen Island lies 0.2 mile NW of Bonaparte Point. A beacon stands on this island, but it was reported (1992) to be destroyed. Elephant Rocks partly uncover and lie close N of this

island.

3.24 Palmer Station (64°46'S., 64°04'W.), a United States base,

stands on a small area of bare rock on Anvers Island, adjacent

to Arthur Harbor. This base consists of a main laboratory

building, a second major building, and several smaller structures. It has a helicopter landing pad, a dock, and two large fuel

tanks.

3.24 The base is operated by the U.S. National Science Foundation in order to support scientific research, with an emphasis on

marine biology. This base was designated (1991), along with

its surroundings within 2 miles, as a Long Term Ecological Research Site. Any disturbance of the islands, waters, or wildlife

at this site would be detrimental to the research. Vessels that

have obtained prior approval to approach the site should contact the base 24 to 72 hours in advance for permission to anchor.

3.24 In January 1989, the Bahia Paraiso, an Argentinean vessel,

struck a rock when leaving Arthur Harbor and proceeding W

between DeLaca Island and Litchfield Island. The vessel drifted to a location lying immediately E of DeLaca Island, where it

sank in shallow water, about 1.1 miles SW of the base. The

hulk was reported (1992) to be lying on the bottom with a

small portion visible at LW. It was also reported (1992) that

there were plans to remove the fuel from the tanks of this vessel. The hulk is expected to remain indefinitely.

3.24 Litchfield Island, the largest island fronting Arthur Harbor,

lies 0.2 mile W of Torgersen Island. Many dangerous ledges

and pinnacle rocks extend SW from the S extremity of Litchfield Island. A dangerous rock lies 0.3 mile SSW of the S extremity and a shoal, with a depth of 3.3m, lies close E of it.

3.24 Humble Island and Breaker Island lie 0.4 mile and 0.8 mile,

respectively, NW of Torgersen Island. Shallow depths front the

W side of Torgersen Island and lie up to 0.1 mile offshore.

3.24 Arthur Harbor is easily entered and anchorage may be obtained in a depth of 18m, clay, about 0.5 mile NNE of

Bonaparte Point. It would be difficult for more than one vessel

to anchor at the same time within the harbor due to its small

size and many obstructions. The approach to the harbor, which

lies between Hermit Island and the Outcast Islands, is not recommended.

3.24 A vessel, with a draft of 8.2m, has safely used the following

route: From a position with Buff Island bearing 000° distant 3

miles, the vessel steered a course of 090° for 9.6 miles and then

a course of 003° for 6.1 miles. When the left tangent of Halfway Island was bearing 003° distant 2.5 miles, the vessel then

steered a course of 090° and passed midway between Janus Island and Spume Island until the right tangent of the former is-
148 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

land was bearing 000°. The vessel then steered a course of

038° toward the anchorage.

3.24 Caution.—A primary difficulty encountered in the approach

to the harbor was reported to be the inability to correctly identify Halfway Island. Difficulty was also encountered in identifying Spume Island.

3.25 Biscoe Bay (64°48'S., 63°50'W.) is entered between

an unnamed point, located 4 miles ESE of Bonaparte Point,

and Biscoe Point, 3.5 miles ESE. The latter point is formed by

a jagged and rocky peninsula on which a penguin rookery is

situated. Access Point is located 0.8 mile SE of Biscoe Point.

Shortcut Island lies 0.8 mile ESE of Bonaparte Point and is

separated from Anvers Island by a deep, narrow channel which

provides a direct route between Arthur Bay and Biscoe Bay.

Several indentations, which might provide sheltered anchorage, lie on each side of the peninsula.

3.25 The Wauwermans Islands (64°55'S., 63°53'W.) lie 4 miles

SW of Cape Lancaster. This group consists of numerous islands which extend in an E/W direction for about 9 miles. The

islands are 9 to 91m high and are covered with snow. Water is

available from streams on some of these islands during the

summer months.

3.25 Wednesday Island, the easternmost of the group, is almost

circular with a diameter of about 1.5 miles. The NE extremity

of this island lies 3 miles WSW of Cape Errera. Brown Island

lies 2 miles S of Wednesday Island and is small, brown, and almost free of snow. A reef, marked by breakers, extends up to

about 1.5 miles S and SSW from this island. A dangerous rock,

awash, lies about 1 mile S of the island.

3.25 Hazard Rock, isolated and small, is 0.9m high and lies 2

miles SE of Brown Island. This rock forms an extreme danger

in low visibility as it may easily be mistaken for floating ice

and is not radar conspicuous. A dangerous rock lies about 0.5

mile N of Hazard Rock. A shoal patch, with a depth of 25.6m,

is reported, existence doubtful, to lie about 1 mile N of Hazard

Rock.

3.25 A light is reported to be shown from a structure standing on

Prevot Island, the northwesternmost island of the group, which

lies 6 miles WNW of Wednesday Island. Menier Island lies 4

miles S of Cape Errera and the Puzzle Islands lie 2 miles W of

it. Numerous dangers lie in a chain that extends up to 1.5 miles

NW of Menier Island and include several islands, reefs, and

shoals.

3.26 Butler Passage (64°58'S., 63°44'W.) leads between

the E side of the Wauwermans Islands and the W side of the

Puzzle Islands. The N entrance of this passage is formed by the

junction of Bismarck Strait, Neumayer Channel, and Peltier

Channel. The passage leads SW to the N entrance of Lemarie

Channel, about 2.5 miles W of Cape Renard.

3.26 Bismarck Strait, at its W end, leads from seaward and separates the SW side of Anvers Island from the Wauwermans Islands, about 5 miles S. The strait has a width of about 3 miles

between Chata Rock, lying S of Cape Lancaster, and the northeasternmost of the Wauwermans Islands. It is mostly deep, but

care is necessary when navigating in this vicinity as isolated

shoals rise steeply on each side of the fairway channel. Bismarck Strait leads NE to Neumayer Channel and Gerlache

Strait, and SSW through Butler Passage and Lemarie Channel.

Cape Willems to Darbel Bay

3.27 Flandres Bay (65°02'S., 63°20'W.), a large indentation, lies at the S end of the Danco Coast between Cape

Willems (64°57'S., 63°16'W.), its NE entrance point, and Cape

Renard, its SW entrance point. Between these capes, the bay

has a width of about 11 miles, but it narrows toward the head

which lies 15 miles SE. Numerous rocks and reefs front the

shores of this bay.

3.27 The Moureaux Islands lie 3 miles from the head and 3 miles

E of Rahir Point, a rocky promontory, which forms the W entrance point of the inner part of the bay. These islands are low,

snow-covered, and are connected by moraines which at times

appear above the sea.

3.27 The Guyou Islands and a shoal, with a depth of 10.9m, lie

about 4 miles and 5.3 miles, respectively, WNW of Rahir

Point. Swan Rock, 2.4m high, lies in the NE entrance of the

bay, about 1.8 miles SSW of Cape Willems.

3.27 The head of the bay is narrowed to a width of about 4 miles

in the vicinity of Rahir Point which projects N from the S

shore. Beyond this point, the inner part of the bay contains several small inlets. Briand Fjord, the northernmost, is 2 miles

long and 1 mile wide. Etienne Fjord indents the coast in the

SW part of the inner bay. It is 4 miles long and has an entrance

about 1.5 miles wide. Thomson Cove indents the E side of Rahir Point. It is about 1 mile long and 1.5 miles wide.

3.27 The W side of a peninsula trends S for 2 miles and forms the

E shore of Lauzanne Cove. From the W entrance point of this

inlet, the S shore of Flandres Bay extends W for 1.5 miles to

Sonia Point, a distinctive rocky projection. From this point, the

coast extends NW to an unnamed point which forms the E entrance point of Hidden Bay. This stretch of shore is indented by

four small bays. An extensive foul ground area extends up to

1.5 miles seaward of the entrance to this bay and many small

islets lie on it. The shore then extends SSW for 4 miles to the

head of Hidden Bay and then trends N for about 3 miles to

Cape Renard.

3.27 Cape Renard (65°01'S., 63°46'W.) is a conspicuous headland, 740m high. This cape is marked by two steep needles, the

slopes of which are too precipitous for snow to cover them.

3.27 The Dannebrog Islands (65°03'S., 64°08'W.) consist of a

chain of islands and rocks lying S of the Bismarck Strait. This

chain extends WSW for 20 miles from a position located about

5 miles W of Cape Renard. The Dannebrog Islands group also

includes several large islands lying E of the above chain which

are separated by Lemaire Channel. The area in the vicinity of

the Dannebrog Islands has not been completely surveyed.

However, Nimrod Passage, which separates these islands from

the Wauwermans Islands, is mostly deep and has a width of at

least 0.8 mile, except for a shoal, with a depth of 14.6m, lying

in the middle of its E end. Numerous dangers, which may best

seen on the chart, lie between 22 and 31 miles W of Cape Renard.

3.28 Booth Island, the largest of the Dannebrog Islands

group, lies with Turquet Point, its N extremity, located 5 miles

WSW of Cape Renard. This island is high, rugged, and consists of two rocky masses joined by a low, narrow peninsula of

ice and snow. Gourdon Peak (Wandel Peak), 979m high, rises

in the S part of the island. Two spurs extend N from this peak
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 149

Pub. 200

and fall steeply to the sea, enclosing a beautiful glacier between them. The westernmost of these spurs forms a peninsula

on the N side of which lies, Port Charcot, a small bay. Jeanne

Hill, 193m high, and Louise Peak, 625m high, stand on this

peninsula. A large penguin rookery is reported to be situated on

the slopes of Jeanne Hill.

3.28 Francais Cove, a small creek, lies at the head of Port Charcot

between Vanssay Point and Cholet Island.

3.28 Splitwind Island (65°02'S., 63°56'W.), with a group of

rocks lying NE and SE of it, is located 0.5 mile NE of Turquet

Point.

3.28 Port Charcot (65°04'S., 64°00'W.) indents the N side of

Booth Island. This bay has depths over 25m lying W of Vanssay Point, but the bottom is rocky and the holding ground is

very poor. This harbor offers protection from all winds except

NE gales which raise a rough sea.

3.28 Hovgaard Island lies close SW of Booth Island and extends

for 3 miles in a NE/SW direction. The shores of this island

consist mostly of steep, vertical cliffs. A small peninsula forms

the S extremity of the island, off which a number of rocks lie.

A rock, which breaks, is reported to lie midway between Hovgaard Island and Petermann Island.

3.28 Pleneau Island, 54m high, lies close off the NE extremity of

Hovgaard Island. A shoal area, with rocks that break, is reported to lie within 0.2 mile E of the E end of this island. A penguin rookery is situated on the NE end of the island.

3.28 Anchorage was obtained in a depth of 49m, rock, within the

channel leading between Pleneau Island and Booth Island. Anchorage was also taken with Gourdon Peak bearing 070°, distant 1 mile. The islands lying around this anchorage afford

good protection from all seas except those from the W.

3.28 The Vedel Islands lie 2 miles W of Hovgaard Island. This

group consists of numerous islands and rocks, but has not been

surveyed. A chain of rocks extends NE for 2 mile from this

group and another group of rocks lies between 1 and 2 miles S

of it.

3.28 A beacon, 6m high, is reported to stand on one of the Stray

Islands, a small group, which lies S of the Vedel Islands and W

of Petermann Island. Numerous dangers lie W, NW, and N of

the Vedel Islands and extend up to about 5 miles seaward.

3.29 Petermann Island (65°10'S., 64°10'W.) lies 1 mile

SSW of Hovgaard Island. Clayton Hill, a rocky mass, is 102m

high and rises in the N part of this island. A beacon surmounts

this hill and another beacon stands on the S end of the island.

Port Circumcision, a small inlet, indents the E side of the island

and has depths of 5 to 8.2m. A large cairn stands on Megalestris Hill, a rocky hillock, which is 35m high and rises in the S

part of the island.

3.29 The E part of the N shore of the island is fronted by foul

ground, while the W shore is mostly clear. Several islands lie S

of Petermann Island. The largest of these are Charlat, Thiebault, and Boudet. A beacon stands on the SE end of Boudet Island and below-water rocks lie between this island and Herald

Reef, 0.8 mile WSW.

3.29 Petermann Island may be approached through French Passage, Penola Strait, or Lemaire Channel. However, vessels

should approach Port Circumcision from the SE. Anchorage

can be taken to the S of Boudet Island in a depth of 33m, rock,

with the right tangent of Herald Reef bearing 277° and the beacon on Petermann Island bearing 004°. This anchorage is protected to the E by the Graham Coast and somewhat to the W by

the numerous small islands and reefs.

3.30 From Cape Renard, the coast extends SW for 13 miles

and forms the E shore of Lemaire Channel. This stretch of

coast is formed by steep cliffs, up to 610m high, which rise vertically from the water. Deloncle Bay, lying 6 miles SW of Cape

Renard, forms an indentation in a glacier which rises steeply to

the E. Loubat Point and Glandaz Point form, respectively, the

N and S entrance points of this bay. Girard Bay lies 3 miles SW

of Glandaz Point. Mount Cloos, snow-covered and domeshaped, rises on the N shore of Deloncle Bay. A sharp coneshaped hill, 981m high, rises close W of this peak and has

steep, bare, and rocky slopes.

3.30 The S shore of Girard Bay is formed by the high cliffs of

Mount Scott, a rocky mass, which is in the form of a horseshoe. Duseberg Buttress rises opposite Petermann Island and is

conspicuous. It consists of a rocky cone, 500m high. From this

cone, the coast extends S and forms the E shore of Penola

Strait. A beacon stands on Redondo Point which is located 2.3

miles S of Duseberg Buttress.

3.30 Waddington Bay (65°16'S., 64°05'W.) is entered between

Rasmussen Island and Cape Tuxen. Cape Tuxen is indented by

several coves and surmounted by the steep slopes of Mount

Demaria. This peak is 638m high, free of snow, and conspicuous. It stands perpendicular and resembles a crouching cat.

3.30 The Yalour Islands, a group of islands and rocks, lies in the

middle of Penola Strait with a navigable channel passing on either side. The channel leading E of the group has not been surveyed and dangers may lie within it. The W side of the group is

fringed by foul ground.

3.30 A rock, 2m high, lies about 2 miles W of Cape Tuxen and

Barros Rocks lie 0.4 mile S of it.

3.30 French Passage leads between the Dannebrog Islands, to the

N, and the Roca Islands and the Argentine Islands, to the S.

This passage is believed to be clear of dangers; however, numerous pinnacle rocks and reefs lie in this vicinity and great

care should be taken.

3.30 An above-water rock, with a below-water rock lying close

NW of it, is located near the approach to French Passage, about

4 miles NE of the largest of the Cruls Islands. Two small islets,

fringed by foul ground, are reported to lie, existence doubtful,

about 4.5 miles W of the largest of the Cruls Islands.

3.31 The Argentine Islands (65°15'S., 64°16'W.) are the

first group in an extensive chain of islands which extends in a

WNW direction for about 12 miles. This group lies 3 miles

from Cape Tuxen and consists of an archipelago of islands, the

largest having a diameter of about 0.7 mile, which are fringed

by many rocks and reefs. None of these islands rise to a height

of more than 65m. The islands in the group are separated by

several narrow channels through which swift currents run with

many eddies.

3.31 The Argentine Islands can be divided roughly into seven

groups. The five principal islands of the northernmost group

are Irizar, Uruguay, the two Corner Islands, and Grotto Island.

Anchorage was obtained in a depth of 31m, rock, off Irizar Island.

3.31 A group of islands lies SSW of the northernmost group and
150 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

is separated from it by Meek Channel. Galindez Island is the

northeasternmost of this group Skua Island is the southwesternmost. Winter Island almost fills the entire bight lying between the W side of the former island and the N side of the

latter island. A disused hut is situated on the SE extremity of

Winter Island. A beacon is reported to stand on the W end of

Winter Island.

3.31 Galindez (Faraday), a British base, is situated on the peninsula that forms the NW end of Galindez Island. Marina Point is

the NW extremity of this peninsula.

3.31 Meek Channel, with a least depth of 7.9m, leads between

Corner Island and the NE side of Galindez Island. Corner

Rock, with a least depth of 2.1m, lies in the E entrance and restricts the use of this channel to vessels of less than 60m in

length. A reef, with a least depth of 2.1m, lies close off the NW

part of Galindez Island. Thumb Rock lies at the SE end of the

reef, Indicator Island lies on its SW part, and two islands,

known as The Buttons, lie on its N part. A narrow channel,

with a least depth of 8.5m, leads between the reef and the NW

part of Galindez Island. A deep channel, reported to be clear of

dangers, leads between the reef and the N side of Winter Island. These two channels lead to Stella Creek which separates

Galindez Island from Winter Island.

3.32 Stella Creek (65°15'S., 64°16'W.) has a least depth of

4.6m in its N part and 0.9m in its S part. However, its S entrance is shallow and obstructed by numerous rocks. Cornice

Channel separates Galindez Island from Skua Island. The N

end of this passage is narrow and has a depth of 1.2m. The

channel leading between Galindez Island and Skua Island,

which is known as Skua Creek, has depths that decrease from

20m at the NW entrance to 2.4m at the SE end. The SE end of

this channel is also obstructed by foul ground. The NW entrance is narrowed by a bank extending from its NE side on

which a rock, with a depth of 2m, lies.

3.32 A number of islands and above-water rocks lie up to 0.2 mile

seaward of the W side of Skua Island. In addition, several

shoals have been observed from the air to extend up to about

0.2 mile S from the S side of this island.

3.32 The NW part of the Argentine Islands contains three groups

of islands. The northernmost of these groups is the Forge Islands, the central group is the Three Little Pigs, and the southernmost group is the Shelter Islands. Several above and belowwater rocks lie in the channel leading between Horseshoe Islands and Grotto Island.

3.32 The SW group of the Argentine Islands consists of two principal islands; Black Island is the southeasternmost and Leopard

Island is the northwesternmost. Numerous above and belowwater rocks front all the islands in this group. Black Island

Channel, which leads between Skua Island and Black Island, is

180m wide, deep, and clear of dangers in the fairway. However, Runciman Rock, which is marked by breakers, lies in the

middle of the S approach to this channel, about 0.2 mile E of

Black Island. Shoals extend up to about 0.2 mile SE and S from

Finger Point, the SW extremity of the island. A shoal, with a

depth of 2.1m, lies about 0.3 mile E of Runciman Rock.

3.32 An area, which is about 0.5 mile long and 0.2 mile wide, lies

with Winter Island and Skua Island, on its SE side, and Three

Little Pigs and Shelter Islands, on its NW side. This area has

depths of 14 to 34m. The channel, which leads to this area from

Black Island Channel, passes between Skua Island and Shelter

Island. It is deep and clear of dangers in the fairway.

3.32 The westernmost group of the Argentine Islands consists of

The Barchans, four principal islands. These islands are snowcapped and fronted by a number of islets and rocks. A beacon

stands on the NW extremity of the northwesternmost island.

Several isolated rocks and reefs lie up to 3 miles S of this

group.

3.32 Anchorage can be obtained in a depth of 23m about 0.2 mile

S of the central of Three Little Pigs. Anchorage can also be obtained in a depth of 31m within the NW part of Meek Channel,

E of Channel Rock. Both of these anchorages are protected

from the swell, but drift ice may be troublesome. Small vessels

may find good shelter within Stella Creek. The best approach

to Stella Creek is via Black Island Channel which passes between Skua Island and Shelter Island. Vessels proceeding to

Stella Creek from the E by way of Meek Channel should keep

close to the S side of the westernmost of the Corner Islands in

order to avoid Corner Rock.

3.33 Barros Rocks (65°17'S., 64°12'W.), a group of small

islets, lie in a crescent-shape chain about 3 miles W of Cape

Tuxen. A rock, 1.8m high, lies, position approximate, about 0.5

mile N of this chain.

3.33 The Berthelot Islands lie centered about 4 miles S of Cape

Tuxen. This group consists of three small and barren islands,

the largest being 166m high. Numerous rocks lie between this

group and the mainland. A rock, which breaks, is reported to

lie about 2.5 miles W of the largest of the Berthelot Islands.

Gaunt Rock lies 2.8 miles NNW of this rock and a shoal, with

a depth of 11m, is reported to be located close NE of it. Shoals,

with depths of 13.7 and 14m, lie 0.5 mile NW and 3 miles W,

respectively, of this rock.

3.33 A foul ground area, which is about 0.8 mile in diameter, lies

8.5 miles W of Cape Tuxen.

3.33 Darboux Island, 270m high, lies 3 miles W of Cape Perez. It

has precipitous sides and a conical snow-clad summit. A small

group of islands lies about 1 mile N of this island. Somerville

Island lies 2.5 miles NW of Darboux Island. This island is located within an area of islets and rocks, about 2 miles in diameter. Gedges Rock and Grim Rock lie 10 miles W and 10 miles

WSW, respectively, of the Berthelot Islands. A group of islands

and rocks lies centered 6 miles SW of Grim Rock.

3.33 A shoal, with a least depth of 2.1m, lies 0.5 mile NW of

Gedges Rock. 

3.33 The Betbeder Islands, a group consisting of three main islands and three rocks, lie centered 22 miles W of Cape Tuxen.

3.33 A reef, almost awash and breaking, is reported to lie about 1

mile S of the westernmost island of the Betbeder Islands group.

Another reef extends about 0.3 mile N from the largest island

of the group.

3.33 Sooty Rock and Lumus Rock lie 3 miles and 7.8 miles, respectively, WNW of Betbeder Island. A shoal patch, with a

depth of 9.7m, lies about 2.5 miles NNE of the Betbeder Islands. Sooty Rock is 18m high and breaks heavily.

3.33 A group of rocks lies between 4 and 6 miles N of the Betbeder Islands group. A survey reported that two isolated shoals,

with depths of 23.8 and 27.4m and surrounded by foul ground,

lie about 4.3 miles NE of the westernmost of the Betbeder Islands group. A danger to navigation, existence doubtful, was
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 151

Pub. 200

also reported to lie about 1.8 miles NW of the westernmost island of this group.

3.33 A below-water rock is reported to lie, position approximate,

about 0.5 mile S of Sooty Rock. An isolated shoal, with a depth

of 11m, lies about 6 miles NNW of the E extremity of Sooty

Rock.

3.33 Caution.—Vessels navigating in this area are advised to exercise great care due to the numerous dangers and obstructions.

3.34 Beascochea Bay (65°30'S., 64°00'W.), 14 miles long,

varies in width between 1 and 6 miles. Cape Perez, the N entrance point of this bay, is prominent due to its high, perpendicular cliffs. These cliffs are formed of pink granite and are

surmounted by two summits, 310 and 500m high, in front of

which a sharp, conical peak rises.

3.34 Deniau Island (65°27'S., 64°19'W.), with several islets lying close NE of it, is located in the entrance to Beascochea

Bay. This island along with the Lippmann Islands, Lahille Island, Tot Island, and the Edwards Islands all lie within 6 miles

of the NW end of the Takaki Promontory.

3.34 Leroux Bay is wide and extends for about 7 miles SE. It is

bordered on the NE side by the ice-covered peninsula which

forms Nunez Point. The entrance to the bay is reduced in width

by the location of Lahille Island. The E entrance is 2 miles

wide and lies between Lahille Island and Nunez Point. The W

entrance is 3 miles wide and lies between Lahille Island and a

group of three islands which are located 1 mile E of Chavez Island.

3.34 Chavez Island is separated from the mainland by a narrow

channel, in which strong currents have been observed. This island rises in ice-covered slopes to two rocky pinnacles. The

southernmost pinnacle forms the summit of the island and is

670m high. The W side of the island is very precipitous.

3.34 Link Stack lies close off the N extremity of Chavez Island.

The Triad Islands, a group of three, and Verge Rocks lie 2

miles E and 2 miles N, respectively, of this stack. An islet is also reported to lie 0.5 mile NE of the stack. Trickster Rocks, the

Sanctuary Islands, and the Riddle Islands lie close off the NW

and SW extremities of the island.

3.34 Bigo Bay (65°43'S., 64°30'W.) is entered between the NW

extremity of Chavez Island and Cape Garcia, 7 miles SW.

Mount Bigo, 1,981m high, rises at the head of this bay. Lizard

Island lies parallel to the N side of the bay and is separated

from it by a narrow channel. It is low and covered with ice except at the summit.

3.34 From Cape Garcia (65°44'S., 64°40'W.), the coast extends

S for 5 miles and then SSE for 9 miles where it forms the NE

shore of Barilari Bay. This bay is 6 miles wide and its shores

are formed by ice cliffs which face the seaward edges of broad,

glacial slopes. At the head of the bay, three glaciers descend

from the interior between high rocky masses.

3.35 Sphinx Island (65°54'S., 64°53'W.), 2 miles long and

0.5 mile wide, lies near the S entrance to Barilari Bay. This island is inaccessible and presents a bare rock summit with vertical ice faces on all its sides. Several islets and rocks lie close

off the N and SE extremities of the island. The location of

Sphinx Island reduces the width of the entrance to Barilari Bay.

3.35 A bay, which is obstructed by an island, lies between Loqui

Point and Rossa Point, 6.5 miles WSW. Landing can be effected in the vicinity of the latter point. The Llanquihue Islands,

which form the E side of Harrison Passage, extend 7 miles N

from this island. Tuorda Peak, 871m high, rises 2 miles SE of

Rossa Point with Hoek Glacier located E of it.

3.35 The Biscoe Islands (66°00'S., 66°30'W.) form a chain which

extends parallel to the W coast of the Antarctic Peninsula. This

chain lies between 15 and 20 miles from the mainland and is

separated from it by Pendleton Strait and a maze of smaller islands and islets. The islands in the chain extend for 85 miles

between the Martins Islands and Matha Strait. They are separated into two groups by Pendleton Strait. These islands are entirely covered by glaciers, presenting domes of ice that often

are very extended and, in some cases, bare rock is observed

only at the base of the ice cliffs near the water's edge.

3.35 The Biscoe Islands have not been accurately surveyed and no

landing places, shelters, or harbors are known to exist within

them.

3.35 Rabot Island lies close S of Renaud Island and is separated

from the latter by an unexamined channel, about 1.5 miles

wide. Extension Reef extends up to 8 miles SW from Rabot Island and many small islands lie on it. Numerous icebergs are

also usually reported to be aground on this reef. A beacon is reported to stand on one of the islands lying near the SW end of

the reef, 5.5 miles SSW of Monflier Point, the SW extremity of

Rabot Island. Another beacon stands near Monflier Point and a

hut is reported to be situated close to a small cove, 0.8 mile

ENE of it.

3.35 Renaud Island is the largest of the Biscoe Islands group. The

entire W coast of this island is fronted by a foul ground area

which extends up to 5 miles offshore. This area is dotted with

innumerable islets and rocks, which break, and numerous below-water rocks and reefs. A chain of islets, surrounded by foul

ground and about 1 mile long, lies 7.5 miles off the W coast of

Renaud Island, abreast the middle of the island. A foul ground

area extends 6 miles SSW from the S extremity of Renaud Island. Two islets, surrounded by foul ground, lie 11.5 miles W

of the S extremity of the island. A shoal area, the existence of

which is probable, is reported to lie about 26 miles W of the S

extremity.

3.36 The Pitt Islands (65°26'S., 65°30'W.), a group of islands, are located near the N end of the Biscoe Islands. Two

isolated islands lie close N of the main group, about midway

between Snodgrass Island and Lumus Rock.

3.36 The Pitt Islands include Trundle Island, the northeasternmost

of the group; Jinks Island; Snubbin Island, the westernmost of

the group; Nupkins Island; Sawyer Island; Pickwick Island, the

largest of the group; Winkle Island; Tupman Island; Fizkin Island; and Slumkey Island. Johannessen Harbor is bordered by

Snodgrass Island, Weller Island, and Jingle Island. It is entered

through Wardle Entrance. Buzfuz Rock lies 1 mile W of Snubbin Island.

3.36 Smiggers Island, Lacuna Island, and Trivial Island lie at the

SE side of the Pitts Islands, with Huddle Rocks, Symington Islands, Lorn Rocks, Cornet Island, Milnes Island, and Woolpack Island located farther E and SE.

3.36 A large number of islands and rocks, which may best be seen

on the chart, lie within an unsurveyed area located E of Renaud

Island. These include Karelin Island, Martin Island, the Vize

Islands, Nusser Island, Wittmann Island, Laktionov Island,
152 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

Schule Island, Budel Island, Bates Island, Hummock Island,

Round Island, Hennessy Island, Zukriegel Island, Curtis Island, Dodman Island, and the Trump Islands. Jagged Island lies

close E of Dodman Island and Beer Island is located close S of

it.

3.36 Duchaylard Island (65°43'S., 65°07'W.), 553m high, has a

prominent conical peak and lies at the SW end of Grandidier

Channel, 5 miles SSW of Woolpack Island. Landing may be

made at the SE end of this island.

3.37 Vieugue Island, 305m high, has a conical peak and

lies 1 mile NE of Duchaylard Island. Hook Island and Holmes

Island lie 1 mile NE and close SSW, respectively, of this island.

Guile Island, Cat Island, and Runnelstone Rock lie 1.3, 3.3,

and 5.8 miles, respectively, SW of the island.

3.37 Larrouy Island is 744 high and its S extremity lies 5 miles

NNE of Ferin Head. Landing may be made on Tadpole Island

which lies 2.5 miles SW of Larrouy Island.

3.37 From the ice cliff at the SW entrance point of Barilari Bay,

the coast extends SW for 6 miles and then W for 6 miles to

Ferin Head (65°59'S., 65°20'W.). This headland is marked on

its N face by a horizontal ridge, behind which rises a snowy

cone, and forms the NE entrance point of Holtedahl Bay. The

Fish Islands, a group of six, lie in the NE part of the entrance to

the bay and extend 4 miles SW from Ferin Head. A depth of

36m was reported to lie about 4 miles WSW of Ferin Head.

3.37 From Ferin Head, the coast extends S for 3 miles to Sharp

Peak. Prospect Point is located 1.3 miles S of Ferin Head and a

hut is reported to stand on its NE side. Flounder Island, the

largest of the Fish Islands group, lies 1.5 miles SSW of Prospect Point.

3.37 Black Head (66°06'S., 65°37'W.) forms the N extremity of a

peninsula which rises to Waldeck-Rousseau Peak, 3 miles S.

This peak is conspicuous and bears some resemblance to the

monolith at Cape Perez, but is not as sharp. Cape Evensen, located 7 miles WSW of Black Head, is a bold headland, with

cliffs of ice and rock, which forms the W extremity of the peninsula. A shoal, with a depth of 11m, was reported (1958) to lie

about 1 mile NW of Cape Evensen. Marie Island lies close NW

of this cape.

3.38 The Saffery Islands (66°04'S., 65°49'W.), a group

with Turnabout Island at its SE end and Turtle Island at its NW

end, lie between 2 and 8.5 miles WNW of Black Head. The

Trump Islands lie between 4 and 5 miles WNW of Turtle Island, 5 miles WSW of Dodman Island. Breakers have been observed to front the W side of the Trump Islands and a belowwater rock has been reported, from the air, to lie about 2.8

miles NNE of them. Another below-water rock is reported to

lie about 0.8 mile W of these islands.

3.38 Auvert Bay (66°14'S., 65°45'W.), of undetermined extent,

lies between Cape Evensen and Cape Bellue. A group of islands and rocks lies within 1 mile SSE of Cape Evensen. Risk

Rock, above-water, and Pesky Rocks, also above-water, lie 1.8

miles WSW and 4.5 miles W, respectively, of this cape.

3.38 Malus Island, 30m high, lies 4 miles S of Cape Evensen and

two low rocks lie 1 mile NE of it. A rocky islet lies 1 mile

WSW of Cape Bellue and several rocks front the rocky cliffs

on the NE side of this cape.

3.38 Crystal Sound separates the Biscoe Islands from the mainland. It is about 55 miles long, 20 miles wide, and contains numerous islands which are not easily distinguished from the

drift ice. This sound has numerous shoals, which rise from very

deep water, and navigation within it is exceedingly hazardous.

3.38 Lavoisier Island (66°12'S., 66°44'W.) is the northernmost of

the S group of the Biscoe Islands. Foul ground extends up to 2.5

miles seaward from Cape Leblond, its N extremity. The W shore

of the island, which has not been fully examined, is fronted by

foul ground extending up to about 2.5 miles seaward. The E

shore of the island has not been examined at all.

3.38 Dubois Island and Krogh Island lie close SW of the SW extremity of Lavoisier Island. Molnar Rocks lie about 4.5 miles

off the W coast, abreast the middle of the island, and a dangerous rock lies 1.3 miles NNW of them.

3.38 Watkins Island lies 3 miles SW of Lavoisier Island. A group

of islands extends S from this island, the southernmost being

Decazes Island. Foul ground extends up to 3 miles W from this

group.

3.38 Belding Island lies close W of the S extremity of Watkins Island. The NW shore of this island is fringed by foul ground.

Several islets and areas of foul ground extend up to about 3.5

miles SW of the SW extremity of this island. An isolated and

dangerous rock lies about 5.8 miles WSW of the SW extremity

of the island.

3.38 The NW shore of Watkins Island is fronted by numerous islets and rocks which extend up to 1.3 miles seaward. A rock,

awash, and a below-water rock lie about 2 miles NW and 2.5

miles W, respectively, of the NW end of Watkins Island. An

isolated, small island, existence doubtful, is reported to lie

about 7 miles WSW of the NW extremity of Watkins Island.

3.38 Numerous small islands and rocks lie E of the Biscoe Islands.

3.38 Matha Strait (66°34'S., 67°30'W.), a channel, leads between the rocks, which lie SW of Belding Island and the Barcroft Islands, and the Sillard Islands, which lie off Cape

Mascart, the NE extremity of Adelaide Island.

Darbel Bay to Horseshoe Island

3.39 Darbel Bay (66°37'S., 66°32'W.) is entered between

Cape Bellue and Cape Rey, 25 miles SW.

3.39 Rambler Harbor (66°28'S., 66°27'W.), a sheltered anchorage area, lies on the N side of Rambler Island. Reefs extend NE

from this island to the first group of islands, the outermost of

which is known as Atom Rock. Rambler Island is mostly surrounded by ice cliffs.

3.39 Vessels approaching this harbor from the S should keep outside the off-lying islands and enter from the N. A rock, awash,

lies close off an isolated outcrop which projects midway along

the W side of Sunday Island. This rock outcrop is only noticeable from the E and, being only 6m high, is difficult to identify

when there is drift ice.

3.39 Two small snow-covered rocks lie close off the ice cliffs of

Rambler Island and opposite the SE extremity of Sunday Island. A low rock and an island lie 2.5 miles NNW of the Bragg

Islands.

3.39 Caution.—Navigation within Darbel Bay is dangerous.

When entering the bay between the Ouston Islands and the

Darbel Islands, the largest of which lies 6 miles SSW of Cape

Bellue, care should be taken to avoid the off-lying rocks which
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 153

Pub. 200

extend up to 0.5 mile N of the N end of the latter group. The

entire area surrounding these groups of islands is foul.

3.40 The Loubet Coast (67°00'S., 66°00'W.) forms the

coninuation of the W coast of the Antarctic Peninsula and extends from Cape Bellue to the head of Bourgeois Fjord

(67°40'S., 67°05'W.), in Marquenite Bay.

3.40 Cape Rey (66°36'S., 66°27'W.), faced by dark and perpendicular cliffs, forms the seaward promontory of a rocky mass

which extends S. This cape is bordered at its base by a domeshaped ice sheet. The cape also forms the NE entrance point of

Lallemand Fjord.

3.40 A small group of islands and rocks lies 2 miles NNE of the

cape. A below-water rock is reported to lie, position approximate, about 0.5 mile W of the cape.

The Pauling Islands (66°32'S., 66°58'W.), forming an isolated group, lie 12.6 miles NNW of Cape Rey. This group consists of a snow-domed island and several smaller ice-capped

islands. Numerous rocks front the W and S sides of these islands. The main island is 100m high and surrounded by ice

cliffs except at its NE extremity, where a rock outcrop projects

to form a landing place. An island, existence doubtful, was reported to lie about 5 miles SW of this group.

3.40 Matsuyama Rocks, a group of islets and rocks, lie 4 miles

SW of Cape Rey and front the shore where a rocky promontory

protrudes from the ice cliffs. Holdfast Point and a small bay lie

8 miles S of this rocky promontory. Mist Rocks and an isolated

rock lie about 1 mile W and 2 miles NW, respectively, of this

promontory. A below-water rock is reported to lie, existence

doubtful, about 4 miles NNW of this promontory.

3.40 Lallemand Fjord extends 40 miles S from Cape Rey and is

entered between Holdfast Point and Roux Island, 11 miles SW.

A small group of rocks lies close off Orford Cliff (66°55'S.,

66°30'W.), which is located 7 miles S of Holdfast Point.

3.40 The E shore of the fjord is formed by a rocky mass of which

Cape Rey is the N extremity. Near the head of the fjord, this

rocky mass is broken by a glacier which flows W from the high

interior.

3.40 The S shore of the fjord is formed by two wide glaciers

which flow down from a height of 1,220m. These glaciers are

separated by a snow-covered, rocky plateau mass which is

about 1,500m high. The W entrance point of the fjord is

formed by a rocky peninsula which is surmounted by two

prominent peaks.

3.40 Roux Island (66°54'S., 66°57'W.), 293m high, lies NE of

the W entrance point from which it is separated by a channel,

0.3 mile wide. This island has vertical slopes on its N side.

3.41 Andresen Island lies on the E side of the entrance to

Lallemand Fjord, 4 miles from the ice cliffs which form the E

shore. A dangerous rock lies about 1 mile ESE of the SE extremity of the island. Landing can be made on the NW extremity of this island where a rocky ridge extends to the coast.

3.41 Detaille Island, 36m high, lies 2 miles WNW of Andresen

Island. Numerous above and below-water rocks and foul

ground extend up to 0.8 mile from all sides of this island. A hut

is reported to stand on the N side and a beacon surmounts the

summit of the island.

3.41 Shmidt Point (66°55'S., 67°02'W.) is the N extremity of the

Arrowsmith Peninsula which extends 41 miles SSW to Cape

Saenz. Hanusse Bay is entered between this point and Cape

Mascart, the NE extremity of Adelaide Island, 20 miles NW.

At the S end of this bay, Hansen Island lies close to The Gullet,

a narrow passage, which separates Adelaide Island from the

mainland.

3.41 The Gullet lies between the Arrowsmith Peninsula and Adelaide Island and connects Hanusse Bay to Laubeuf Fjord. This

passage is 0.2 mile wide and strong currents have been observed within it. On the N side, the passage opens into channels

which lead on either side of Hansen Island. On the S side, the

passage opens into channels which lead on either side of Day

Island. Due to this topography, strong local winds may be encountered.

3.41 Day Island lies 2 miles N of Wyatt Island and two small islands lie 3 miles W of its SW extremity. Another small island

lies close off Adelaide Island and 1 mile NW of the N extremity of Day Island.

3.41 Wyatt Island lies 2.5 miles offshore, 6 miles NE of Webb Island. A razor back ridge of exposed rock projects through the

blanket of snow and ice covering this island.

3.41 Pinero Island, prominent when viewed from the SW, lies 4

miles W of Cape Saenz (67°33'S., 67°39'W.) and another

small island lies 0.4 mile NE of it. Several jagged peaks, up to

380m high, rise at the S end of this island. The N end of the island is comparatively flat, 224m high, and is marked by a cairn

with a flagstaff. A dangerous rock is reported to lie about 1

mile NNW of the N extremity of Pinero Island.

3.41 Covey Rocks lie about midway between Cape Saenz and

Pinero Island.

3.41 Pas Island (67°41'S., 67°28'W.) lies 3 miles S of Cape

Saenz. Lainez Point, a steep and rocky promontory, is 914m

high and forms the W extremity of the island. The S slopes of

this point form the N shore of Dalgliesh Bay. The S shore of

the bay consists of steep cliffs. These cliffs front a rugged massif, 1,644m high, which forms the S part of the island. At the

head of the bay, the slopes of a glacier descend from the high

interior of the island. The E coast of the island is inundated by

ice with only a few bare rocks showing. The S part of this coast

is faced by steep slopes, up to 1,128m high.

3.41 Nemo Cove, 1 mile wide and 1 mile long, indents the E coast

of the island and Mount Arronax, 1,585m high, rises close N of

it. The N coast of the island is indented by a large bay, 4 miles

wide. This bay recedes for 3 miles and its shores consist of low,

glacial slopes with occasional rocky hills and shingle beaches.

3.41 Quilp Rock, consisting of two above-water rocks, lies about

3.5 miles NNE of Lainez Point. A small island is reported to lie

about 7.5 miles W of Lainez Point.

3.41 Bigourdan Fjord, about 10 miles long and 3 miles wide, lies

N of Pourquoi Pas Island. The W entrance of this fjord is

formed by Cape Saenz. A reef obstructs the S half of this entrance and extends 1 mile N from Pourquoi Pas Island. The N

shore of the fjord consists of a glacier-filled valley, which extends N to Lallemand Fjord, and several high, rocky massifs.

Blaiklock Island, 1,341m high, lies at the E end of the fjord and

is separated from Pourquoi Pas Island by a channel, about 1

mile wide.

3.41 The Narrows lie between Pourquoi Pas Island and Blaiklock

Island. This channel is about 0.5 mile wide and connects Bigourdan Fjord to Bourgeois Fjord. Strong currents usually set in

this channel. A small island, fringed by rocks, lies in the NE
154 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

entrance to this narrow channel.

3.41 It was reported (1979) that Jones Channel was blocked by an

ice shelf and was not navigable.

3.41 Bourgeois Fjord is entered between the S extremity of Pourquois Pas Island and the S extremity of Lagotellerie Island. It

extends 30 miles in a NNE direction to Blind Bay. Blind Bay

forms the SW limit of the Loubet Coast and the NE limit of the

Fallieres Coast. The Barnes Glacier and the Perutz Glacier lie

at the head of this bay.

3.41 Ridge Island lies in the center of Bourgeois Fjord. This island is about 7 miles long and is marked by a razorback ridge

of dark rocks, 668m high, which forms the long axis of the island. This ridge descends to a col in the N part of the island

and, farther N, rises to a rounded hill, 305m high, which is very

steep on its N side. A bay, with a broad and gently-sloping

beach, lies S of this rounded hill and below the col. The S end

of the island is 1 mile wide and is fronted by an ice cliff. A

raised shingle beach fringes the SW end of the island and is

covered with debris which has fallen from the steep slopes

above it.

3.41 The entrance to Dogs Leg Fjord lies on the E side of Bourgeois Fjord, E of Ridge Island. This fjord extends for 7 miles in

an E direction. Two islands lie in the entrance of the fjord

which is about 2 miles wide. A small rock was reported (1971)

to lie about 2.5 miles WSW of these two islands.

3.41 Caution.—The coastline, islands, and other features in the

vicinity of Pourquoi Pas Island, Bigourdan Fjord, and Bourgeois Fjord have been reported (2007) to lie up to 1,300m W of

their charted positions. Mariners are advised to use extreme

caution when navigating in this area. 

3.42 Adelaide Island (67°15'S., 68°30'W.) is 73 miles

long and extends in a NE/SW direction. This island has an average width of over 18 miles and lies seaward of the Loubet

Coast. It is separated from the mainland by Hanusse Bay, in the

S part of Matha Strait; by Loubet Strait; and by Laubeuf Fjord,

in the N part of Marguerite Bay.

3.42 A range of mountains extends the entire length of the island

and presents a number of steep slopes on its E side. On the W

side of this range, a long terrace of snow and ice spreads from

the base of the mountains to the sea. This terrace terminates in

perpendicular cliffs, 30 to 45m high.

3.42 Jenny Island, 1.8 miles long and 0.9 mile wide, lies 4 miles

NE of Cape Alexandra. From some directions, this island has

been reported to be difficult to distinguish. The S side of the island consists of cliffs, up to 244m high, with a small glacier at

their base. The E side of the island is perpendicular and fringed

by shingle beaches. These beaches are covered with debris that

falls from the heights above. The N side of the island has gentle

slopes. A conspicuous horizontal, stone terrace is located at the

SW end of the island, at the foot of the highest peak. This terrace is 400 to 480m long, 50 to 100m wide, and rises to a

height of 8m above the sea.

3.42 Temporary anchorage has been taken off the NE extremity of

Adelaide Island. Anchorage, sheltered from strong NE winds,

has also been taken in a depth of 42m about 1 mile S of the

rocks fronting the SW side of Jenny Island.

3.43 Ryder Bay (67°34'S., 68°20'W.) is entered between

an unnamed point on the SE coast of Adelaide Island, located 4

miles N of Jenny Island, and Rothera Point, 9 miles NE. Four

glaciers flow into this bay.

3.43 Killingbeck Island, 28m high, lies 0.9 mile E of Rothera

Point. This island consists mainly of snow-free rocky outcrops

and can be easily distinguished by its rounded hump from the

S. However, this hump is sometimes hidden by icebergs which

may be grounded on a reef extending up to about 0.8 mile S of

the island.

3.43 Rothera Point, a rocky headland, is 38m high and usually

free of snow during the summer. North Cove lies on the NE

side and South Cove lies on the SW side of this headland.

These two coves, which have gently sloping shingle beaches,

may be used for boat landings, depending on the prevailing

weather and ice conditions. The windward cove tends to fill

with icebergs and brash ice; however, most icebergs are able to

float freely in and out of these coves due to their great depths.

A jetty, suitable for small boats, is reported to be situated within South Cove and has a depth of 0.8m alongside. A rocky

ledge, with a least depth of 1.2m, fronts the E side of this cove.

3.43 A gray shingle beach, 300m wide, extends W between the

headland and an ice field. Adelaide Island (Rothera), a British

base station, is situated in the vicinity of this beach. An airstrip

is situated 2.5 miles NW of Rothera Point. It stands on the NE

side of Reptile Ridge which backs the NE shore of Ryder Bay.

3.43 An extensive shoal, with a least depth of 2.3m, lies centered

0.8 mile NW of Killingbeck Island. Several drying and belowwater rocks also extend up to 0.4 mile N of this island. A rock,

which dries 4.3m, lies close off the S extremity of Rothera

Point and a number of other dangers are located between it and

the island.

3.43 An area extending S and W of the island is encumbered with

numerous dangers and is hazardous for boats. However, a clear

channel, with a depth of 42m, leads between the island and this

area. Local knowledge is advised. The approach to Ryder Bay

is obstructed by the Leonie Islands group.

3.44 Leonie Island (67°36'S., 68°21'W.), the largest and

westernmost of a group of islands, is 1.5 miles long, conical,

and 494m high. This island is reported to be often difficult to

distinguish against the background of Adelaide Island. A below-water rock lies about 0.5 mile N of this island and several

rocks, awash, lie 0.3 mile E and 0.5 mile S of the E extremity

of the island. The area surrounding this island is otherwise unsurveyed.

3.44 Lagoon Island lies 2 miles E of Leonie Island. A shallow

boat harbor, which is entered from the S, indents the shore of

this island. Foul ground is reported to extend from the entrance

points of this harbor.

3.44 Limpet Island lies 1.5 miles SE of Leonie Island and is 25m

high. Several small islands and below-water rocks lie within

0.3 mile N and W of this island. A rock, existence doubtful,

was reported (1980) to lie about 0.8 mile SE of this island. Additional dangers were also reported to lie close SW of this rock.

3.44 Anchorage Island, the easternmost of the group, lies 0.8 mile

SE of Lagoon Island. This island is 1.5 miles long, 57m high in

its N part, and a small island lies close SE of it. Two small boat

harbors indent the E side of Anchorage Island. The southernmost harbor has depths of 3 to 7m, but was reported (1976) to

be heavily blocked with ice. The approach to the northernmost

harbor was reported (1977) to be blocked by several grounded
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 155

Pub. 200

bergs. A number of below-water rocks front the S side and extend up to 0.4 mile S of the island. A channel, with a least

depth of 7.7m, leads between Lagoon Island and Anchorage Island.

3.44 The Mikkelsen Islands, consisting of a group of nine, lie 2

miles SE of Anchorage Island. The southernmost island of this

group is 17m high.

3.44 Anchorage Island and the Mikkelsen Islands consist mainly

of snow-free rock and can be quite easily identified against the

snow-covered background by vessels approaching from the S.

Occasionally, the islands are obscured by large icebergs that

drift in the deep water in this vicinity. From the SE, the two

groups of islands merge together and identification is difficult.

3.44 The passage leading between Anchorage Island and the

Mikkelsen Islands is deep, but a small islet, 2m high, lies 0.5

mile N of the northernmost island in the Mikkelsen group. This

islet is often obscured by bergs. Ives Bank, with a least depth

of 11m, lies about 1 mile S of the westernmost island of the

Mikkelsen group. The passage should be navigated with great

care.

3.44 An area, 18 miles long and 3 miles wide, lying in the approach to Rothera Point was examined in 1976. This area extends for 1.5 miles on each side of a line, 18 miles long, drawn

on a bearing of 030° from a position located 3.5 miles E of the

Guebrant Islands. A least depth of 95m within this area was reported to lie about 3 miles E of Killingbeck Island.

3.44 Deep-water routes lead between Jenny Island and Adelaide

Island and then to the E of the Mikkelsen Islands or between

Anchorage Island and the Mikkelsen Islands. However, the use

of these routes may depend on the ice conditions.

3.44 Anchorage.—No safe anchorage exists in the vicinity of

Rothera Point, Anchorage Island, or the Mikkelsen Islands.

Temporary anchorage may be taken, by small vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of 35m within the bay close N of

Rothera Point and about 350m NW of the N extremity of the

headland. However, this anchorage is very dangerous with the

prevailing NE winds, especially at night, due to the risk of

large icebergs drifting close inshore.

3.45 Weertman Island (66°58'S., 67°45'W.), the largest of

the Bennett Islands, has a prominent pyramidal-shaped peak,

596m high. This island is the southernmost of a group of five

which lies SW of Liard Island. A landing place is located at the

NE extremity of Weertman Island, below a prominent cliff. A

shoal patch, with a depth of 12.8m, lies about 2 miles NNE of

the E end of this island.

3.45 Liard Island, 11 miles long, lies in the middle of Hanusse

Bay. This island has a central range of mountains which rises

to Mount Bridgman, 914m high. The coast of the island consists of an unbroken line of ice cliffs except at Tutton Point, its

SW extremity. Several extensive rock exposures are located

close N of this latter point. Numerous reefs and shoals lie up to

4.5 miles seaward of the N extremity of the island.

3.45 Buchanan Passage leads between Adelaide Island and Laird

Isand. Isacke Passage leads between Laird Island and the Arrowsmith Peninsula.

3.45 The Sillard Islands (66°37'S., 67°34'W.), a group of two,

are ice covered and lie 2.5 miles NE of Cape Mascart, the NE

extremity of Adalaide Island. These islands are surrounded by

foul ground. A small reef and two rocks, awash, lie close off

the N side of these islands, on S side of Matha Strait.

3.45 From the NW extremity of Adelaide Island, the W coast extends in an unbroken line of ice cliffs to Cenobite Rocks. The

shore steep-to and mostly clear of dangers.

3.45 At the beginning of January, a tongue of drift ice forms on

the S side of the entrance to Matha Strait and usually extends

from a position located 5 miles N of Cape Mascart up to about

16 miles W of the cape. To the W of this ice tongue, a passage

leads nearly 10 miles NNW. Later on, this passage forms a

coastal channel, 5 to 10 miles wide, but gradually decreases in

width until it closes entirely in the vicinity of Cape Adriasola.

The ice tongue is formed mainly by wind action.

3.45 A number of large icebergs often lie grounded about 2 miles

N of Cenobite Rocks and indicate the N limit of the shallow

water.

3.45 The Amoit Islands, consisting of two groups, lie between 10

and 12 miles W of Cape Adriasola and are fronted by several

reefs and rocks. The Ward Islands, two in number, are located

in the southernmost group and rise to heights of 6.7 and 7.6m.

Cumbers Reef and a small island, 5.2m high, are located in the

northernmost group. These dangers may best be seen on the

chart.

3.45 A shoal patch, with a depth of 33m and which breaks in a

heavy swell, lies 2 miles N of Cumbers Reef. Grounded ice

bergs are reported to often indicate the shoal areas lying in the

vicinity of the Amoit Islands, the Ward Islands, and Cumbers

Reef.

3.46 Cenobite Rocks (67°35'S., 69°18'W.), consisting of

three, lie about 2.5 miles W of Adelaide Island. The largest of

these rocks is 5.2m high. To the S of these rocks, the coast of

Adelaide Island extends 4.5 miles SSE to Cape Adriasola and

is fringed by numerous small islands and below-water rocks.

3.46 Cape Adriasola consists of a promontory fronted by an ice

cliff. At many points on this ice cliff, rocky outcrops can be

seen protruding, a few meters above sea level. A small group of

rocks, up to 2.4m high and usually obscured by ice, lies 0.8

mile W of this cape.

3.46 The Chatos Islands, a group of three, lie about 1 mile SSW

of the cape. The group is fronted by numerous rocks and its

largest island is 12m high. Cono Island, conspicuous and conical, is 58m high and lies 1 mile S of this group.

3.46 Johnston Passage separates the Amoit Islands from Cenobite

Rocks. Grounded icebergs are reported to often indicate the

shoal areas lying in the vicinity of the Amoit Islands, the Ward

Islands, and Cumbers Reef.

3.46 Fullastern Rock, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies 6.5 miles

WNW of Cape Adriasola, in the middle of Johnston Passage. It

is steep-to and has been reported not to break. This rock is not

always marked by grounded icebergs and should be given a

wide berth.

3.47 From Cape Adriasola, the ice cliff trends 8.5 miles SE

to Adelaide, a disused British base. The remains of the base,

several boarded-up huts and three metal masts, stand on an icefree rocky point, 24m high.

3.47 Numerous low islets, rocks, and reefs fringe this stretch of

coast. The islets are sometimes ice-capped and frequently difficult to distinguish.

3.47 The coast extending for 3 miles SE of Cape Adriasola is
156 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

fronted by foul ground lying up to 1 mile offshore.

3.47 Novel Rock, which is steep-to and frequently breaks, lies 3.5

miles S of Cone Island (67°41'S., 69°10'W.). League Rock,

6m high, and the Esplin Islands, up to 6m high, lie 3 miles SE

and 4 miles E, respectively, of Novel Rock. Cox Reef, which

dries, lies 2 miles ESE of Novel Rock. A shoal patch, with a

depth of 6.4m, lies 0.9 mile N of this reef. This shoal lies near

the N end of a bank, with depths of 13 to 37m, which extends

N from the reef.

3.47 Box Reef, a chain of drying rocks, lies between League

Rock and the Esplin Islands and may best be seen on the chart.

Hibbert Rock, awash, lies 0.9 mile SE of League Rock and foul

ground extends up to 2 miles E of it.

3.47 Patience Rocks, up to 1.2m high, lie 0.7 mile NNW of the

former base. From these rocks, foul ground extends 1 mile SW

to within 0.2 mile of the foul ground extending E from League

Rocks. Glover Rocks lie close SE of the former base and extend up to 0.4 mile from the shore. Launch Rock, with a depth

of 1.5m, lies 0.5 mile SSW of the former base.

3.47 Avian Island (67°46'S., 68°54'W.) lies close off the coast,

0.2 mile SSE of the SW end of Adelaide Island. This island is

rocky, ice free, and 48m high at its S end. A lattice tower, 12m

high, is reported to stand on the S end of this island. Several

reefs fringe the W side of the island and extend up to about 0.5

mile S. Two huts are reported to stand on this island.

3.47 The Henkes Islands, separated by Crosse Passage from

Skeen Rocks, lie centered 2.5 miles SSW of the former base.

Crouch Island, the southernmost and largest of the group, lies 3

miles SSW of Adelaide Island. Its summit, which is 11m high,

is surmounted by a tripod beacon. Preston Island lies close to

Crouch Island. These islands are steep-to on their S sides and

numerous shoals and areas of foul ground lie in their vicinity.

Worth Reef and Dean Rocks extend up to 1 mile N and 1.5

miles E, respectively, from Preston Island. Biggs Island, 3.7m

high, lies 1.3 miles S of Avian Island.

3.47 Anchorage can be obtained in a depth of 27m about 0.7 mile

SSW of the former base. The shoal patches in the vicinity provide some protection from large icebergs which continually

drift into this anchorage from the W. The anchorage may be approached from the E by passing through Crosse Passage, close

N of Biggs Island, and then altering course to 320°. By keeping

the latter island astern, bearing 140°, this course leads midway

between Skeen Rocks and Worth Reef. The anchorage should

be used only in case of necessity and is not recommended due

to the frequency of icebergs drifting in the area.

3.47 From the SW end of Adelaide Island, the coast extends 7

miles E to Cape Alexandra which is faced by steep, rocky

cliffs. It consists mostly of ice cliffs, up to 30m high, with occasional rock outcrops at their base. A short patch of rocky

cliffs, 482m high, is located 1.5 miles W of Cape Alexandra.

3.48 Jennings Reef extends 3 miles E from Avian Island

and up to 1.5 miles from the coast to the Rocca Islands. This

reef consists of an extensive chain of low islands, shoals, and

rocks. The Rocca Islands rise to a height of 6m.

3.48 The Ginger Islands, up to 13m high, lie 0.3 mile offshore,

4.5 miles ENE of Avian Island. A shoal patch, with a least

depth of 3.4m, and a detached shoal, with a depth of 20m, lie

0.8 mile ESE and 2.5 miles S, respectively, of Ginger Islands.

3.48 Fitton Rock, 7m high, lies 0.4 mile SSE of Cape Alexandra

and a below-water rock lies 0.5 mile W of it. Another belowwater rock is reported to lie about 0.7 mile NE of Fitton Rock.

3.48 Vessels have obtained anchorage in a depth of 35m about 0.8

mile NE of the Rocca Islands. This roadstead was reported to

be almost completely free of any dangers from drifting ice

bergs or bergy bits.

Square Bay to Alexander Island including Marguerite Bay

3.49 Square Bay (67°51'S., 67°00'W.) is 9 miles long and

9 miles wide. Broken Island and Center Island lie within this

bay. Lagotellerie Island and Horseshoe Island front the bay and

separate it from Bourgeois Fjord.

3.49 The E shore of the bay is mostly formed by almost vertical,

rocky walls which, in places, are faced by ice falls or hanging

glaciers. The S part of the E shore is filled by a large glacier

which extends into an interior valley. Many raised beaches and

glacial moraines front the steep and rocky cliffs within this bay.

The S shore of the bay consists of precipitous, bare rock walls

which rise to Mount Wilcox, 1,402m high. These walls are broken up by two small glaciers, each about 1 mile wide.

3.49 Camp Point (67°58'S., 67°19'W.), a prominent pyramidshaped promontory, has steep sides and is 884m high.

3.49 Broken Island lies in the N part of the bay, about 2 miles

from the N and E shores. Two small islets, fringed by foul

ground, lie close off the SW side of this island. Centre Island

lies in the S part of the bay, about 3 miles N of the S shore. The

Line Islands extend 1 mile in an E/W direction and lie in the S

entrance to the bay, midway between Horseshoe Island and

Camp Point.

3.49 Horseshoe Island (67°52'S., 67°16'W.) lies with its SW extremity located 1.8 miles E of Legotellerie Island. Mount

Breaker, 879m high, is the southernmost and tallest of several

peaks standing in the SE part of this island. Penitent Peak,

823m high; Ryan Peak, 809m high; Trifid Peak, 646m high;

Spincloud Heights, with two peaks 646 and 626m high; and

Russet Pikes, 538m high, rise in the NE part of the island. The

slopes of the peaks are covered by loose boulders, the steepest

being devoid of snow. Several conspicuous glaciers lie between

the peaks.

3.49 Several small islets and rocks fringe the S side of Horseshoe

Island and Reluctant Island lies close off the E extremity. A

number of small islands front the SW shore of Horseshoe Island and foul ground fringes the W extremity. A shoal, with a

depth of 3.7m, is reported to lie about 4 miles W of the NW extremity of this island. Another shoal, with a depth of 12.8m,

lies about 2 miles WSW of the NW extremity.

3.49 Lystad Bay indents the W side of the island and is flanked,

on its N side, by Mount Searle, 536m high. The S side of this

bay consists of steep, bare cliffs. Several fresh water lakes lie

beyond the glacier which fronts the N shore of the bay. A large

glacier terminates at the water's edge in an ice cliff, 9m high, at

the head of the bay. Two small islets lie in the N part of the bay,

close S of the N entrance point. At the head, several islets and

shoals extend up to 1.5 miles seaward from the face of the ice

cliff. A beacon is reported to stand on an islet, 8m high, which

lies 1.5 miles SE of Beacon Head, the N entrance point. Sally

Cove lies 2 miles NE of Beacon Head and Homing Head is located 2.5 miles NE of it. A hut is reported to stand near the
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 157

Pub. 200

head of the cove.

3.49 A conspicuous gravel spit fronts the S shore of the bay, close

inside the S entrance point. Shoals, with depths of 6.4 and

4.1m, lie 0.5 mile W and 0.5 mile WNW, respectively, of this

spit.

3.49 Anchorage can be obtained in depths of 38 to 55m within

Lystad Bay. However, the depths may be less than those charted and the bottom consists of sand, gravel, and rock.

3.49 Caution.—Depths of only about 19m have been reported

(1991) to lie up to 4.5 miles SW of Camp Point.

3.50 Calmette Bay (68°03'S., 67°10'W.) is entered between Camp Point and Cape Calmette, 6 miles SSE. Bare

slopes, up to 780m high, front the NE side of this bay. McMorrin Glacier descends into the bay from Mount Wilcox and

Mount Metcalfe. Todd Glacier descends toward the bay from

Boulding Ridge.

3.50 Cape Calmette is formed by the NW extremity of a narrow

and rocky peninsula which is 460m high and rises from the sea

in precipitous cliffs. A group of below-water rocks lies 2 miles

WSW of this cape. A rock, awash, was reported (1975) to lie

about 3.5 miles WSW of the cape and another rock was reported (1981) to lie, position approximate, about 2 miles farther W.

3.50 Millerand Island lies 4 miles S of Cape Calmette and about 1

mile W of the mainland ice cliffs. The E and S shores of this island consist of a large glacier which slopes from the steep,

rocky masses to the water's edge. A cove lies at the NE end of

the island and is bounded by low, rocky spurs. These spurs extend from the base of a promontory which is 579m high. This

cove has not been surveyed, but it may provide an anchorage.

The island is reported to be radar conspicuous and has been

sighted at a distance of 40 miles in good weather.

3.50 A chain of small islands and rocks lies close off the SW extremity of Millerand Island and extends up to 2 miles SE. Several reefs and numerous small islands also extend up to 3 miles

NW and 6 miles W of the island. Pod Rocks lie 5 miles W of

the island and a reef, with a least depth of 12.5m, is reported to

lie about 5 miles SW of them. A fairway, with a least depth of

13m, leads through Powell Channel between Millerand Island

and the Debenham Islands.

3.50 Caution.—Vessels are advised to use great care when navigating in the vicinity of Millerand Island and Calmette Bay as

numerous dangers lie in this area and strong currents have been

observed. In addition, violent winds often blow off the high interior in this vicinity.

3.51 The Debenham Islands, a chain of islands and rocks,

extend between Cape Calmette and Millerand Island. This

chain also extends NE in an arc from a point, located 4 miles

W of the highest peak of Millerand Island, and then SE to the

narrow strait which separates the latter island from the ice cliffs

of the mainland. The principal islands of the chain are Barbara,

Barry, Brian, Audrey, Ann, and June. The narrow passages

which lead between the northernmost islands of the group are

foul and navigable only by small craft and boats. The passage

leading between Brian Island and Audrey Island is about 0.2

mile wide, but is encumbered with numerous shoals and other

dangers. A shoal, with a depth of 4.6m, lies midway between

these two islands. A navigable channel leads between this

shoal and the foul ground extending N from Audrey Island. It

is about 90m wide and has a least depth of 14.6m.

3.51 Three shoals, with depths of 10 to 15m, lie between about

0.6 and 0.9 mile SW of the summit of Barbara Island. Numerous other shoals and dangers front this chain and strong currents have been observed in its vicinity.

3.51 Anchorage may be taken in a depth of 38m midway between

Audrey Island and the mainland. Due to the violent winds,

which sweep off the interior, vessels are recommended not to

anchor in the narrow passages or in the vicinity of any belowwater dangers.

3.51 General San Martin, an Argentinean base, is situated on Barry Island. Beacons are reported to stand on Brian Island and

Audrey Island, the two westernmost of the chain. The beacon

on the former island is reported to be 30m high and situated at

the W side.

3.51 Neny Island lies in the entrance to Neny Bay, 3 miles SE of

Millerand Island. Its summit, formed by a sharp peak, rises in

the center of the island and is 675m high. Store Point, a small

projection, forms the N extremity of this island. The shores of

the island are steep and partly free of ice in the summer. A

rock, with a depth of 2m, lies about 0.4 mile ENE of Store

Point. Two shallow shoals lie about 0.6 mile E of Store Point.

3.51 Trepassey Island lies 1.2 miles E of Store Point and is fronted on its E side by numerous small islands and above-water

rocks. Several islets and rocks, which may best be seen on the

chart, lie S and E of this island.

3.51 Beaumont Island lies 0.6 mile ESE of Trepassey Island. Burton Rocks, which cover and uncover, lie 2.5 miles SW of Beaumont Island, 0.8 mile S of the middle of the S side of Neny

Island.

3.51 Tides—Currents.—At Barry Island, in the Debenham Islands chain, the MHHWS near the solstices is reported to be

1.8m above chart datum, the MLLW is reported to be 0.8m The

tides in this vicinity are usually diurnal.

3.52 Stonington Island (68°11'S., 67°01'W.) lies 0.6 mile

NE of Neny Island. This island is 0.3 mile long and extends in

a NW/SE direction. Landing may be made on a few small

stony beaches fringing the E and SW shores of the island.

3.52 The huts of a disused British base stand close E of Flagpole

Point, the W extremity of the island. A flagstaff, with several

radio masts standing close SE of it, is situated near this point. 

3.52 Structures of the U.S. Antarctic Service Expedition (1940)

and the Ronne Antarctic Research Expedition (1948) stand

close E of the disused British base and are designated as an

Historic Site under the Antarctic Treaty. Visitors may enter the

buildings and inspect artifacts, but should avoid disturbing the

site and resecure all doors upon departure.

3.52 Neny Bay (68°12'S., 66°58'W.) is entered between the NW

extremity of the Roman Four Promontory, on which stands a

beacon, and Boulder Point, 1.9 miles NNW. Anchorage can be

taken in a depth of 49m, rock with patches of sand and mud,

about 0.3 mile WSW of a framework tower situated near Boulder Point. The tidal current at this anchorage usually sets in a

SE direction at a rate of 0.5 knot. This current has never been

observed to set in a NW direction.

3.52 Neny Fjord, which extends 9 miles E, is entered between the

Roman Four Promontory and the NW extremity of Red Rock

Ridge, 5.5 miles WSW. Postillion Rock fronts the S side of the

Roman Four Promontory. Red Rock Ridge, a conspicuous and
158 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

reddish-colored peninsula, forms the S side of the fjord. This

peninsula is 690m high and has vertical cliffs, up to 250m high,

facing its N side. A glacier fringes its S side. A number of islands, of which Gremlin Island is the northernmost, lie close

off the NW extremity of the peninsula. Numerous rocks lie up

to 1 mile seaward of the W side of the peninsula and an isolated rock, awash, lies 7 miles SW of Gremlin Island. Two shoal

patches, with depths of 14 and 10.7m, lie 11.5 miles W and

10.5 miles WNW, respectively, of Gremlin Island.

3.52 The Refuge Islands, about five in number, lie about 0.3 mile

SW of the ice cliffs fringing Red Rock Ridge. A hut is reported

to stand on one of these islands. A rock, awash, lies about 5.5

miles W of these islands. A shoal, with a depth of 8.9m, and a

very shallow rock are reported to lie about 9 miles WNW and 8

miles N, respectively, of the islands.

3.52 A shoal, with a depth of 20.1m, lies about 11.5 miles W of

the W extremity of Red Rock Ridge and another shoal, with a

depth of 14m, lies about 1 mile SE of it. A shoal, with a depth

of 3.1m, is reported to lie about 1 mile SSE of the latter shoal.

3.52 Rocky cliffs extend continuously S for about 4 miles from

close E of Red Rock Ridge to where a glacier, about 1 mile

wide, slopes steeply to the sea. This glacier lies on the Bertrand

Ice Piedmont and is bordered on its S side by the notched and

almost vertical walls of Black Thumb, a rocky column, which

is 1,190m high. Mikkelsen Bay lies between the Bertrand Ice

Piedmont and Cape Berteaux, 20 miles SSW.

3.53 Cape Berteaux (68°50'S., 67°30'W.) is formed by the

W part of a conspicuous promontory, 1,210m high. Several

peaks rise on the E part of this promontory.

3.53 The Terra Firma Islands (68°42'S., 67°32'W.) lie 7 miles

NW of this cape and comprise a group of several islands and

skerries. The islands are very steep and rocky. The southernmost island of the group is the largest and is 320m high. A hut

is reported to stand on a small island lying close N of the largest island.

3.53 Flyspot Rocks, a group of thirteen islets and rocks, lie 18

miles NW of the largest of the Terra Firma Islands. The islets

are snow-capped, the tallest being 37m high. Compass Island,

rocky and ice capped, is 30m high and lies 11 miles ESE of

Flyspot Rocks.

3.53 A rock, awash, is reported to lie, position approximate, about

10 miles WNW of Cape Berteaux. Several unnamed islets, the

positions of which are doubtful, are reported to lie between 22

miles W and 23 miles WNW of Cape Berteaux.

3.53 Mushroom Island, 152m high, lies 10 miles WSW of Cape

Berteaux and rock exposures mark its NE side. A small island

and a shoal, with a depth of 29m, lie 13.5 miles WNW and 2

miles N, respectively, of Mushroom Island. 

3.53 Keyhole Island and another small island lie close N of Cape

Berteaux, on the S side of Mikkelsen Bay. A rock, awash, is reported to lie about 14 miles W of Keyhole Island.

3.53 A bight lies between Cape Berteaux and an unnamed point,

30 miles SW, and is filled by an extensive mass of ice which is

known as the Wordie Ice Shelf. This mass of ice is fed by numerous glaciers which descend from the inland mountains. Its

front is 6 to 18m high, except close SE of Cape Berteaux where

it descends almost to sea level.

3.53 The promontory forming the SW side of this bight, close SW

of Cape Berteaux, is fringed by a glacier. Mount Guernsey, a

rocky and flat-topped mountain, is 1,230m high and rises 32

miles SW of Cape Berteaux. Three islands lie near the edge of

Wordie Ice Shelf, between 8 and 12 miles SSE of Mushroom

Island.

3.53 The Puffball Islands, a group of eight, extend 10 miles in a

SW direction from a position located 13 miles WSW of Mushroom Island. Seven of these islands form a chain. The additional island of the group lies E of this chain and about halfway

between it and the Wordie Ice Shelf. These islands are reported

to be often hidden among the tabular icebergs in this area.

However, they can sometimes be identified by their convex and

ice-capped tops beneath which, nearly always on their N sides,

small rock exposures protrude.

3.53 The Bugge Islands, a group of three, lie close together close

off the SW end of the Wordie Ice Shelf. The largest island of

this group is 366m high. Several islets and rocks front the N,

SE, and SSW sides of these islands.

3.53 Caution.—Local magnetic anomalies exist in the vicinity of

Compass Island, Flyspot Rocks, and Cape Berteaux.

Alexander Island to Cape Herlacher including

Bellingshausen Sea

3.54 Alexander Island (71°00'S., 70°00'W.) forms the S

entrance point of Marquerite Bay and is separated from the

mainland of the Antarctic Peninsula by George VI Sound. This

island is shaped like the letter "J" and extends for about 235

miles in a N/S direction. The width of this island varies from

about 50 miles in the N part to nearly 150 miles in the S part.

The N and W shores of the island are formed by a coastal piedmont which is similar to that on the W side of Adelaide Island.

3.54 Terminal Island, small and isolated, is 152m high and lies

close off the N extremity of Alexander Island. Toadstool

Rocks, up to 2m high, are reported to lie about 26 miles ESE of

Terminal Island.

3.54 Caution.—Numerous shoal patches and isolated islands are

charted up to 60 miles WSW, 40 miles NW, and 2 miles E of

Terminal Island. The area surrounding this island is imperfectly surveyed and great care should be exercised when navigating in this vicinity.

3.55 Mount Bayonne stands 12 miles SW of the N extremity of Alexander Island. This peak has a comparatively small

mass and is 1,400m high. Mount Paris, rising at the N end of

the Roven Mountains, stands close S of Mount Bayonne and is

separated from it by a snowy spur and four sharp, needle rocks

of uniform height. Mount Paris, 2,896m high, is the northernmost and tallest of three peaks which extend 8 miles SSE in the

form of a narrow crest. A deep depression, 3 miles wide, separates this crest from the S part of the Roven Mountains. The

peaks in this latter range of mountains have rounded summits,

rise up to a height of 2,440m, and have steep N and W sides.

The range extends to Mount Cupola which rises 28 miles SSE

of Mount Bayonne. Mount Calais, a detached summit, is

2,347m high and stands 22 miles SE of Mount Bayonne.

3.55 Cape Brown (69°16'S., 69°45'W.), 823m high, forms the W

entrance point of George VI Sound, at its N end. This cape is

chaotic in appearance, with jagged spurs and ridges descending

in steep slopes to the sea. Schoklsky Bay lies on the N side of

the cape. This bay extends NW for about 9 miles to Mount Cal-
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 159

Pub. 200

ais and recedes for 6 miles. Hampton Glacier enters the head of

this bay. 

3.55 The Douglas Range forms the E escarpment of Alexander Island and the W shore of the N part of George VI Sound. This

range extends 90 miles SSE from the vicinity of Hampton Glacier.

3.55 Mount Nicholas, 1,463m high, stands 5.5 miles SSW of

Cape Brown and forms the N limit of the Douglas Range.

Mount Stephenson, 2,987m high, forms the summit of this

range and rises 33 miles S of the cape.

3.55 Other prominent peaks in the Douglas Range include Mount

Spivey, Mount Huckle, Mount Egbert, Mount Ethelwulf, and

Mount Ethelred. 

3.55 Mount Tyrrell (69°58'S., 69°30'W.), 1,310m, stands 4 miles

WNW of Damocles Point, on the W side of George VI Sound.

Toynbee Glacier separates Mount Huckle from this peak.

3.55 Tombaugh Cliffs, ice free, front the N side of Pluto Glacier,

on W side of George VI Sound.

3.55 Fossil Bluff (71°20'S., 68°17'W.), a projection, is located 15

miles S of Tombaugh Cliffs. A British scientific base is situated in the vicinity of this projection, but is reported to be only

occupied during the summer.

3.55 Two Step Cliffs (72°04'S., 68°25'W.), located 34 miles S of

Fossil Bluff, form the N side of a cove. Kirwan Inlet lies 12

miles SSW of Corner Cliffs, where form the S side of this cove.

3.55 Le May, a range of mountains, extends S from the S end of

Douglas Range to Mimas Peak (71°56'S., 69°36'W.).

3.56 George VI Sound (71°00'S., 68°00'W.) is a major

fault depression which skirts the E and S shores of Alexander

Island. The N entrance of this sound, which is 13 miles wide, is

formed by Cape Jeremyon, on the E side, and Cape Brown.

The edge of the ice shelf at the N end of the sound is 12m high.

The edge at the SW end is 9m high.

3.56 Vessels entering the N part of the sound are advised to keep

to the center or the W side as strong currents set in this area

and the E coast appears to be more gently shelving with the

probability of uncharted rocks and shoals lying within this area.

3.56 Mount Bagshawe (71°28'S., 67°10'W.), 2,225m high, is the

summit of the Batterbee Mountains. To the S of these mountains, the E shore of the sound is formed by the sweeping front

of Goodenough Glacier, which is 40 miles wide.

3.56 At the SE extremity of Alexander Island, the sound has a

width of about 35 miles wide. From this point, the sound extends WSW for about 65 miles to the Eklund Islands

(73°16'S., 71°45'W.). The westernmost and largest of these islands is 5 miles long and has two summits, 250 and 395m high.

A cairn was reported (1984) to stand on the lower summit.

3.56 From the Eklund Islands, the sound continues W for 120

miles. Two large islands and one small island encumber this

part of the sound. Several nunataks stand on the westernmost

and largest of these three islands.

3.56 The English Coast is considered to extend 240 miles W from

the Buttress Nunataks (72°22'S., 66°47'W.) to Rydberg Peninsula.

3.56 Cape Vostok (69°08'S., 72°11'W.), fronted by a small islet,

is located 41 miles WSW of Terminal Island and steeply rises,

2.5 miles ENE, to Saint George Peak, which stands at the W

end of Havre Mountain Range. A number of prominent spurs

project through this range.

3.56 The Johansen Islands, a group of five, lie 15 miles W of the

cape and are partly snow-free and low.

3.56 Strong currents have been observed to set E or W off the N

side of this part of Alexander Island and this area has been observed to be free from ice in the winter months.

3.56 Lazarev Bay is entered between Cape Vostok and the N extremity of Rothschild Island, 13 miles SSW. Umber Island,

Dint Island, and the Glinka Islands lie within this bay.

3.57 Rothschild Island (69°25'S., 72°30'W.) lies 6 miles

W of the NW extremity of Alexander Island, from which it is

separated by an unsurveyed channel. It is formed by a black,

rugged mass which extends for 18 miles in a SE/NW direction.

The island is about 11 miles wide in its N part, narrowing perceptibly toward its S end, and is bordered on all sides by a

fringing piedmont. Two peaks, each over 600m high, rise in the

N part and near the center of the island.

3.57 This island has been reported at times to be actually a peninsula which extends W from Alexander Island.

3.57 A bank, with a least depth of 27m, lies 46 miles W of this island and extends for about 12 miles in an E/W direction.

3.57 Wilkins Sound (Wilkins Ice Shelf) (70°15'S., 73°00'W.) extends 60 miles W from the SE extremity of Rothschild Island

to Charcot Island. From this latter island, the ice front extends

S to Latady Island and then SE to the NE entrance point of

Mendelsohn Inlet.

3.57 Dorsey Island lies off the W side of Alexander Island, 27

miles SSE of Rothschild Island. Merger Island lies 14 miles

ESE of Dorsey Island, at the entrance to Haydn Inlet.

3.57 Charcot Island (69°45'S., 75°15'W.) lies 40 miles WSW of

Rothschild Island from which it is separated by Wilkens

Sound. This island is pear-shaped with the narrow end, 12

miles wide, forming its SW extremity. The remainder of the island has a width of about 45 miles. The entire island is covered

by a low ice cap, 274m high, from which the only rock exposures are a series of isolated mountain peaks bordering its N

shore.

3.57 Cape Byrd (69°38'S., 76°07'W.), the W extremity of the island, is formed by a sharp ice cape. Mount Monique, with a

long summit, is 610m high and stands close NE of the cape.

Marion Nunataks, somewhat lower, rise 20 miles E of this

peak. Mount Martine, over 600m high, rises 7 miles SE of

these nunataks and is the most striking feature of the island.

This mountain is formed by a rugged massif, having dark-colored, jagged peaks with steep slopes. Cape Mawson, the SE extremity of the island, is located 15 miles SE of Mount Martine

and is low.

3.57 Cheesman, a small and black islet, was reported to lie about

2 miles seaward of the N shore of the island. The entire area in

the vicinity of this islet has not been fully surveyed. A patch,

with a depth of 73m, was reported (1973) to lie about 25 miles

N of the islet.

3.58 Carroll Inlet (73°18'S., 78°30'W.) forms the E

boundary of the Bryan Coast, which extends W, as an unbroken

ice cliff, for about 120 miles to approximately 85°W, the E

boundary of the Eights Coast.

3.58 The hinterland of Ellsworth Land (75°30'S., 80°00'W.)

consists of a plateau, about 2,000m high, which is known as the
160 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

Hollick-Kenyon Plateau (78°00'S., 105°00'W.). Sentinel

Ranges rise between 77°30'S and 79°00'S, and between

92°30'W and 86°00'W. Mount Ulmer, 3,672m high, stands near

the N end of these ranges.

3.58 Vinson Massif (78°35'S., 82°25'W.), 5,140m high, is the

highest known summit in Antarctica.

3.58 Bellingshausen Sea (71°00'S., 85°00'W.), the limits of

which have not been precisely agreed upon, is defined as lying

between Thurston Island, on the W side, and Alexander Island,

on the E.

3.58 Though drift ice covers the greater part of this sea for most

of the year, the E portion of the region becomes almost ice free

for a few weeks, in the average year, during February and

March. In a severe season, even the E portion remains more or

less ice covered throughout the summer. In a light year, the region lying E of 90°W is often almost clear of drift by early

March.

3.58 Due to the action of the prevailing SE winds, polynyas,

sometimes covering thousands of square meters, occur from

time to time along the coastal regions. As the ice fails to clear

from the SW corner of the Bellingshausen Sea, much of the ice

in this area is either second or multi-year ice.

3.58 The Fletcher Islands, two prominent islands, are located SE

of Thurston Island. Dustin Island lies 20 miles SE of Cape Annawan, the E extremity of Thurston Island, at the N side of the

ice shelf. This island, about 610m high, is the larger of the two

and has several prominent ice-free rock cliffs. A small island is

reported to lie, existence doubtful, about 10 miles N of this island. McNamara Island, about 240m high, lies 15 miles E of

Dustin Island, at the N side of the ice front.

3.58 Seraph Bay is formed between the W side of Dustin Island

and the Tierney Peninsula, 18 miles NW. Peale Inlet indents

the W side of this peninsula and extends SE for about 15 miles.

A glacier flows into the sea about 10 miles NW of the W entrance point of this inlet.

3.59 Peter I Island (68°47'S., 90°35'W.), under Norwegian sovereignty, lies 212 miles NE of Thurston Island and 308

miles W of Cape Byrd, the W extremity of Charcot Island. The

island is entirely covered with snow and ice, no bare rock being

visible except where the slopes are precipitous. It was reported

that the shape of the island varies from that currently charted

and several rocks lie close off its N end.

3.59 Lars Christensen Peak, the lofty and rounded dome of an extinct crater, is 1,753m high and forms the summit of the island.

The W part of the island consists of precipitous slopes while

the E part is lower and consists of a piedmont platform. The N

side of the island consists of large twin glaciers.

3.59 Cape Eva (68°42'S., 90°37'W.), the N extremity of the island, is fronted by rocks which are surrounded by foul ground.

Several below-water rocks and shoals extend up to 1 mile N

from the NW extremity of the island. Breakers may be observed up to some distance seaward of these dangers. Two

rocks, 2 and 53m high, lie 1 mile SW of the NW extremity.

They are dark, snow-free, and have vertical sides with flat tops.

3.59 Larsen Glacier lies 2 miles S of the NW extremity and the

shore between consists of ice cliffs. Norvegia Bay lies between

the S side of this glacier and Cape Ingrid, 1 mile S. An abovewater rock lies close off the NE side of this bay.

3.59 Cape Ingrid consists of a bare, barren, and rocky promontory

which is 152m high and has vertical sides. A shoal fronts the

W side of this cape and extends up to about 0.3 mile seaward.

Two small glaciers are located on the S side of this promontory.

A large cavern, known as Celil Cave, is located in the rock

cliffs of the cape.

3.59 Sandefjord Cove lies on the S side of Cape Ingrid. This inlet

affords anchorage in a depth of 38m, sand and volcanic stones,

close to the coast. Vessels entering this cove should proceed

with care as the bottom is reported to be uneven. Framnes

Head, located at the head of this inlet, consists of a steep, rugged platform of lava and basaltic rock. This platform is 75m

long, 40m wide, and a depot hut was constructed on it in 1929.

3.60 Thurston Island (72°06'S., 99°00'W.) extends for

about 120 miles in an E/W direction between Cape Annawan,

its E extremity, and Cape Flying Fish, its W extremity. The

Walker Mountains rise on the N side of this island and attain

heights of up to 1,036m. Peacock Sound lies close of S of the

island is filled by an ice shelf, of which Demas Ice Tongue is

the W extremity. Shernan Island, about 180m high, lies in the

middle of the sound.

3.60 Several bays and inlets indent the N coast of Thurston Island.

Cape Davies, the NE extremity of the Hughes Peninsula, is located 45 miles ENE Cape Flying Fish. Glacier Roads indents

the middle of the N shore of the island and extends between

Cape Davies and the W side of the Noville Peninsula, 15 miles

E.

3.60 Porters Pinnacles (71°33'S., 99°09'W.), a reef, consists of

four pinnacles and one large rock, 9m high and lies in the approach to Glacier Roads. This reef is located about 4 miles

from the NW side of the Noville Peninsula and 20 miles ENE

of Cape Davies. Mount Palmer rises near the N extremity of

the Noville Peninsula. Bergy bits and pieces of ice floes frequently rest on top of this reef.

3.61 Cape Flying Fish (72°06'S., 102°29'W.), the W extremity of Thurston Island, forms the E boundary of the Walgreen Coast. This coast extends S for about 170 miles to Pine

Island Bay and then WNW for about 185 miles to Cape

Herlacher, the N extremity of the Martin Peninsula. The W

boundary of the coast is still undetermined.

3.61 Peacock Sound is the largest of four bays, all open to the W,

which indent the coast between Cape Flying Fish and a point,

located about 170 miles S, where the Walgreen Coast turns to

the W. This sound is 40 miles wide, at its N entrance, and is reported to extend SE for about 110 miles and then S for about

50 miles, but its farthest SE extent is unknown.

3.61 Cape Waite, the S entrance point of Peacock Sound, forms

the NW extremity of the King Peninsula. From this cape, the

coast extends about 50 miles S to the NE extremity of the Canisteo Peninsula. The bay lying close N of this latter peninsula is

much smaller than Peacock Sound and an ice shelf was reported (1946) to obstruct its inner half.

3.61 Burke Island (73°08'S., 105°06'W.) is reported to lie with

its S end located about 30 miles W of the SE extremity of the

King Peninsula.

3.61 The Canisteo Peninsula is reported to project W and be 18

miles wide. Two small groups of islands, known as the Lindsey

Islands, lie close off the NW extremity of this peninsula. The

Sterrett Islands and the Edwards Islands lie close W of the SW
Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 161

Pub. 200

extremity of this peninsula.

3.61 The Brownson Islands, reported to be a group of four, lie

about 6 miles SW of the SW extremity of the Canisteo Peninsula. 

3.61 Cranton Bay, 30 miles wide, extends about 20 miles E and

lies close S of the SW extremity of the Canisteo Peninsula.

From the S entrance point of this bay, the coast recedes to form

Pine Island Bay, the last of the four major indentations in the S

part of the Walgreen Coast. This bay is 20 miles wide at its entrance and extends SE for an unknown distance.

3.61 The Hudson Mountains, two parallel ranges of detached

peaks, extend E along the shore between the Canisteo Peninsula and Pine Island Bay. The mountains are snow-covered and

attain heights of up to 1,220m.

3.61 From the head of Pine Island Bay, the Walgreen Coast extends W for about 160 miles to the Martin Peninsula. Cape

Herlacher forms the N extremity of this latter peninsula.

3.61 The Bear Peninsula extends N from the mainland, 40 miles E

of the Martin Peninsula. It is about 50 miles long, 25 miles

wide, and 880m high. A bay, of unknown extent, lies E of the

Bear Peninsula and is reported to be about 75 miles wide. This

bay is filled by the Thwaites Glacier Tongue, an extension of

the ice shelf. The Thwaites Iceberg Tongue, which was reported (1966) to be separated from the glacier tongue, protrudes N

for a farther 50 miles in the W half of the bay. Another bay lies

between the W side of the Bear Peninsula and the E side of the

Martin Peninsula. It is obstructed by the Dotson Ice Shelf. 

3.61 The Kohler Range, an extensive mountain range, stands 30

miles S of the base of the Martin Peninsula. The peaks in this

range attain heights of up to 4,570m.

3.61 A snow-covered island, 5 miles long, is reported, existence

doubtful, to lie about 103 miles NNE of the Bear Peninsula. A

number of bare, rocky islands are reported, existence doubtful,

to lie close off the coastal ice cliffs of the NE end of the Bear

Peninsula.

Cape Herlacher to Cape Colbeck including

Amundsen Sea

3.62 Amundsen Sea lies between the W side of Thurston

Island and Cape Dart, 400 miles W. 

3.62 Cape Dart (73°07'S., 126°09'W.), lying at the E side of

Wrigley Gulf, is located at the foot of Mount Siple, a massive

and snow-covered mountain, 3,110m high. An ice front extends between this cape and Cape Herlacher, 228 miles E, and

partly encloses two islands. The E and smaller island, known

as Wright Island, is 244m high. The W island, of which Cape

Dart forms the NE extremity, is about 100 miles long. Three

small islets are reported to lie within 18 miles N and NE of

Mount Siple.

3.62 Executive Committe Range extends in a NE/SW direction

between 76°30'S, 127°00'W, and 77°20'S, 128°55'W.

3.62 Grant Island (74°30'S., 131°30'W.), the extent of which is

not fully determined, lies at the W side of Wrigley Gulf. Shepard Island, reported to be 5 miles long and 4 miles wide, lies 7

miles W of this island. Forrester Island, 171m high, lies 14

miles NNE of Shepard Island and is covered with a layer of ice

and snow, about 100m thick.

3.62 The Getz Ice Shelf fronts the coast between the vicinity of

Cape Dart and Grant Island. Dean Island is enclosed within

this ice shelf, 48 miles E of Grant Island.

3.62 A detached group of bare, rocky hills stands S of Grant Island. This group marks the W side of Wrigley Gulf and the E

end of the Hobbs Coast. From this group, the Ames Range extends SE and consists of several large, isolated, and snow-covered masses which have flat tops and steep, precipitous sides.

Large glaciers debouch NE between these masses. This high

range extends SE to the E extension of the Hal Flood Range.

3.63 The Hobbs Coast (74°50'S., 132°00'W.) extends 120

miles SW from the W edge of the Getz Ice Shelf to the E side

of Land Bay. The section of this shore lying between Land Bay

and Hull Bay, 60 miles NE, is bordered by a coastal range. The

peaks in this range are nearly bare and have steep, snow-free

cliffs on their N faces. The S side of this range is drowned by

the continental ice descending from the high interior plateau.

3.63 Hull Bay is completely filled by Cordell Hull Glacier, which

drains a vast basin. Mount Giles, over 900m high, forms the W

entrance point and consists of a clump of glaciated mountain,

snow-free only on the wind swept heights. Shoals are reported

to probably lie along the portion of the coast in the vicinity of

this bay. They cause grounding of the expanded ice tongue and

render the bay inaccessible to vessels.

3.63 Cape Burks (74°45'S., 136°50'W.), a well-defined point, is

located 15 miles NNE of the entrance to Hull Bay. This cape is

marked by bare rock and a penguin rookery is situated in its vicinity.

3.63 Cruzen Island (74°47'S., 140°40'W.), lying 57 miles W of

Cape Burke, is a rocky crag, over 300m high. It is composed of

black coal-like rock which is probably of volcanic origin. A

vessel reported (1962) that this island was conspicuous among

the many huge and grounded bergs in the area. A large ice

field, not navigable in 1940 except by icebreakers, was reported to extend WSW and ESE of the island.

3.63 A small island was reported (1963) to lie about 15 miles SE

of Cruzen Island.

3.63 Land Bay is about 10 miles wide. Mount McCoy, a high and

flat-topped massif, stands near the head of this bay and has

dark, snow-free, and vertical sides. Land Glacier, heavily crevassed, descends into the bay on either side of this massif.

3.64 The Ruppert Coast (75°45'S., 141°00'W.) extends

about 75 miles WSW from Land Bay to the N entrance point of

Block Bay. It consists of an ice slope which has many snowcovered ridges. The Phillips Mountains, a coastal range of isolated peaks, stand behind the shore and attain a height of

1,200m.

3.64 Block Bay, 20 miles wide, lies between the W side of the

Ruppert Coast and the Guest Peninsula. A glacier descends into the head of this bay. The Guest Peninsula is about 40 miles

long, 25 miles wide, and extends in an E/W direction.

3.64 Sulzberger Bay, about 130 miles wide, lies between the W

side of the Guest Peninsula and Cape Colbeck (77°10'S.,

158°00'W.), the N extremity of Edward VII Peninsula. The Alexandra Mountains form the coastal range which stands along

the shores of the bay. This extensive bay is almost entirely

filled by the Sulzberger Ice Shelf and four glaciers flow into its

SE side. Although patches of water have been observed from

aircraft, the bay has never been reported to be ice free. A vessel

reported (1962) that four low ice-covered islands lie within the
162 Sector 3. The Bellingshausen Sea and the Amundsen Sea —Joinville Island to Cape Colbeck 

Pub. 200

bay, the northernmost being located about 14 miles WSW of

the Guest Peninsula.

3.64 The Scott Nunataks, over 600m high, stand, with twin summits, on the W side of the bay, 53 miles ESE of Cape Colbeck.

McKinley Peak, 760m high, rises 90 miles SE of Scott Nunataks, near the head of the bay. This mountain forms the SW end

of the Ford Ranges which extend along the S and E sides of the

bay. These ranges consist of a series of mountain groups of

variated structures and appearance. The Rockefeller Plateau,

760 to 1,220m high, stands about 270 miles SE of Cape Colbeck.

3.64 Marie Byrd Land is defined as that portion of Antarctica lying E of the Ross Ice Shelf and the Ross Sea and S of the Pacific Ocean. It extends E approximately to a line between the

head of the Ross Ice Shelf and the Eights Coast. The Rockefeller Plateau is considered to be the Marie Byrd Land portion

of the Antarctica Plateau.
163

Pub. 200

4. 

The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
165

Pub. 200

SECTOR 4 

THE ANTARCTIC—CAPE COLBECK TO CAPE NORVEGIA

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the coast of Antarctica between

Cape Colbeck and Cape Norvegia, including the Ross Ice

Shelf, McMurdo Sound, and the Ross Sea.

General Remarks

4.1 The Ross Sea is an extensive bight indenting the coast

of Antarctica and lying S of New Zealand. It is located between

Victoria Land, on the W side, and the Edward VII Peninsula,

on the E, and is bounded to the S by the Ross Ice Front, the seaward edge of the Ross Ice Shelf. The depths in this sea are not

great, generally ranging from 350 to 750m, but occasionally

exceeding 900m. Pennell Bank, lying near the central area of

the sea, has a least depth of 106m. McMurdo Sound, located in

the SW corner of the sea, is 49 miles long and varies in width

between 27 and 41 miles. The depths within the E part of this

sound generally range from 650 to 890m, to the S of the Dellbridge Islands. Depths of about 550m extend S to the ice shelf.

The W part of the sound has shallower depths, generally ranging from 200 to 450m.

4.1 Ice.—Ross Sea is the most easily accessible area of this part

of Antarctica. Every vessel that has attempted to enter this area

at the correct season has been successful.

4.1 Tides—Currents.—The general W current setting near the

continent is presumed to be divided by the Pennell Bank area.

The S branch flows under the Ross Ice Shelf with a surface

current setting W along the ice front at a rate of up to 3 knots.

This current sets along the N coast of Ross Island and then toward the W shore of Ross Sea, while an eddy sets round Cape

Bird, the N extremity of Ross Island, and S as far as Cape

Royds. In the vicinity of the latter cape, this current is joined

by a strong N current which enters McMurdo Sound from beneath the Ross Ice Shelf. The combined current sets NW and N

along the coast of Victoria Land and past Cape Adare. It then

rejoins the main N branch current which sets NW between the

continent and the Balleny Islands.

Cape Colbeck to Cape Adare

4.2 Cape Colbeck (77°10'S., 158°00'W.), the N extremity of the Edward VII Peninsula, is located about 45 miles N of

Okuma Bay and is described in paragraph 3.64.

4.2 Okuma Bay (77°50'S., 158°20'W.), lying 53 miles E of

Kainan Bay, is 3 miles wide and recedes about 4 miles into the

ice shelf. A depth of 104m, with hard stone bottom, was reported to lie at the edge of the ice cliff on the E side of the bay and

a depth of 238m, with hard stone bottom, was reported to lie

near the ice cliff on the W side. Vast pressure ridges extend SE

from the head of the bay where the shelf ice is comparatively

low. It was reported (1955) that an icebreaker found this bay

impossible to enter. The heavy ice within the bay was broken

and hummocked by much pressure.

4.2 A current, with a rate of about 2 knots, sets into Okuma Bay

from the N and brings with it large quantities of drift ice. This

current then sets SW along the face of the ice shelf toward the

Bay of Whales.

4.2 The Ross Ice Shelf extends about 400 miles between its seaward edge and the escarpment of the Queen Maud Mountains.

It is 400 miles wide and lies between the coast of Victoria Land

and the plateau of Maire Byrd Land. The W extremity of its

edge is located at Cape Crozier where immense pressure ridges

are raised for several miles. The ice shelf was determined

(1962) to be 67 to 98m thick. The E extremity of its edge lies E

of Okuma Bay (158°W.), where it merges with the plateau. The

edge of the shelf is floating. An average depth of 567m has

been determined to lie close off this edge between Cape Crozier and the Bay of Whales.

4.2 A survey in 1902 indicated that the edge of the shelf had receded 4 to 35 miles since the survey of 1841-42. The greatest

recession being between 164°W and 169°W, and the least recession being to the W of 174°E. The retreat of the barrier edge

during the intervening 60 years has averaged 0.3 mile per year.

4.2 A survey in 1911 showed a slight advance over the greater

portion of the edge, which indicated an advance rate during the

intervening 9 years of 3.6m per day. A survey in 1935 showed

a general advance of about 12 miles during the intervening 24

years, or slightly over 2.4m per day. The contour irregularities

in the face of the edge and the height range of 4.6 to 46m were

in very close agreement with the results obtained during 1911.

4.2 The N movement of the shelf surface has been measured at a

point located about 10 miles E of Minna Bluff. It was determined that the shelf ice in this vicinity moved 556m in 13.5

months, or about 1.4m per day.

4.3 The Ross Ice Shelf is evidently afloat at its edge, except at the extremities, and is probably afloat for a considerable

distance to the S.

4.3 It was reported that Roosevelt Island (79°25'S., 162°00'W.),

ice covered and 377m high, lies in the E part of the Ross Ice

Shelf with its N extremity located about 3 miles S of the head

of the former Bay of Whales. This island extends about 90

miles S and has a width of about 40 miles. It was also reported

that other snow-covered islands lie about 30 miles W and about

45 miles SE of Roosevelt Island.

4.3 The Bay of Whales was a natural harbor. However, an expedition reported (1955) that this bay no longer existed. Extensive calving of the Ross Ice Shelf has destroyed this feature

leaving a shear wall of ice in its former position.

4.3 Kainan Bay (78°10'S., 162°30'W.) lies 37 miles NE of the

NW end of Roosevelt Island. This bay was reported (1956) to

be about 2.5 miles wide and to recede in a SW direction for

about 2 miles. It was fringed by ice cliffs, 6 to 15m high. The

bay is open to the NW and N and has depths of 549 to 640m

over a bottom of brown silt.

4.3 It was reported (1955) that ice covered all of Kainan Bay except for an area, about 0.5 mile square, lying off the W entrance point. This ice was 2 to 3m thick and was covered with a

layer, 0.5m thick, of compacted snow. The prevailing winds in
166 Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 

Pub. 200

this vicinity are between E and SW which tend to keep drift ice

out of the bay. The bay can be approached by transiting the

drift ice near 180°. When open water is reached, vessels should

then head E toward the bay.

4.3 The N coast of Ross Island (77°30'S., 168°00'E.) extends

SE for about 25 miles between Cape Bird (77°10'S.,

166°41'E.) and Cape Tennyson (77°22'S., 168°18'E.). This latter cape is formed by a dark, rocky outcrop projecting from the

ice-covered slopes of Mount Terra Nova (77°31'S.,

167°57'E.).

4.3 A bay lies close W of Cape Tennyson where the slopes of

Mount Erebus (77°32'S., 167°10'E.) recede S for about 7

miles. The coast extending to the E of Cape Tennyson consists

of a precipitous cliff. Williamson Rock (77°27'S., 169°15'E.)

lies close to the cliff, 13 miles ESE of the cape, and Cape Crozier, the E extremity of Ross Island, is located 5 miles SSE of

it.

4.4 Cape Crozier (77°31'S., 169°24'E.), surmounted by a

small cairn, consists of a black, basalt cliff, 61 to 122m high.

The Knoll (77°31'S., 169°21'E.), a conspicuous cone, stands

above the cape and is 369m high. This cone is backed by the

black and bare slopes of Mount Terror (77°31'S., 168°32'E.).

4.4 The cliffs in the vicinity of the cape form a prominent series

of basalt columns, about 30m long, which appear as narrow

hexagonal rods that are curved and interlocked. The cliffs are

interrupted, about 2 miles NW of the cape, by a low, pebble

beach. Many stranded bergs have been observed near this

beach and a depth of 22m is reported to lie about 0.3 mile offshore in this vicinity.

4.4 Beaufort Island (76°56'S., 166°56'E.), 686m high, lies 13

miles NNE of Cape Bird. This island is volcanic in origin and

has an egg-shaped appearance. The E side of the island is

steep, bare, and rocky while the W side consists of a long ice

slope which terminates at the sea in cliffs, 2 to 15m high. The

island appears to be surrounded by deep water, but the area has

not been fully surveyed.

4.4 It was reported (1961) that a shoal area extended about 0.5

mile seaward from the SW extremity of the island. This shoal

was reported to be marked by a color change and could be easily avoided.

4.4 A strong current sets W through the passage leading between

Beaufort Island and Cape Bird and, at times, attains a rate of 3

knots. The strength of this current, but not its direction, is affected by the tides. This passage is frequently blocked by drift

ice which has traveled along the coast of Ross Island, but there

is little danger of heavy pressure.

4.4 Cape Bird, the N extremity of Ross Island, is located 7 miles

N of Mount Bird (77°17'S., 166°43'E.). This cape is formed

by a rounded and lofty promontory with many headlands of

black lava.

4.4 Wohlschlag Bay (77°22'S., 166°25'E.) lies between Cape

Bird and Cape Royds. The greater part of the shore of this bay,

except within 2 miles of Cape Royds, is faced by inaccessible

ice cliffs, 9 to 30m high. 

4.5 Cape Royds (77°33'S., 166°09'E.), a dark mass of

rock, is faced by steep cliffs. Rocky Point, located 2.5 miles N

of the cape, is flanked, on the N side, by the unbroken glacier

slopes of Mount Erebus and, on the S side, by Horseshoe Bay

(77°32'S., 166°12'E.). This latter bay is 0.3 mile wide and provides shelter in emergencies. Between Horseshoe Bay and

Cape Royds, the shore is fringed by a broad, sandy beach

above which stands a conspicuous peak, 67m high.

4.5 Backdoor Bay (77°34'S., 166°12'E.), about 0.8 mile wide,

lies close E of Cape Royds. A dangerous rock, which uncovers,

lies about 0.5 mile NW of Flagstaff Point, the W entrance point

of this bay. The bay has depths of 18 to 33m, but the holding

ground is poor and anchorage is not recommended. A hut is reported to stand on Flagstaff Point.

Courtesy of Millitary Sealift Command

Mount Erebus
Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 167

Pub. 200

4.5 North Bay lies between Cape Barne, located 2 miles SE of

Flagstaff Point and Cape Evans, 4 miles SE. Anchorage can be

taken in a depth of 35m about 200m off the shore of the bay although this is too close if the wind shifts from the prevailing

SE. The bottom is quite steep and a depth of 100m lies about

0.3 mile from the shore. A depth of 27m was reported to lie

about 0.6 mile from the shore and 0.4 mile from the face of

Barne Glacier, which fronts the head of the bay.

4.5 Cape Barne (77°35'S., 166°14'E.) consists of a steep and

rocky bluff, 90m high, surmounted by a prominent volcanic

pillar, 46m high. Mickle Island lies close offshore, about 0.8

mile N of this cape. Several sandy beaches fringe the shore between the cape and this island.

4.5 Cape Evans (77°38'S., 166°24'E.) consists of a low triangular-shaped promontory. A shoal area extends 0.8 mile S from

the cape. It was reported (1992) that a vessel touched bottom

about 200m W of this area, indicating that shoals also extend

SW from the cape.

4.5 McMurdo Sound (77°30'S., 165°00'E.) is entered between

Dunlop Island and Cape Bird, the N extremity of Ross Island.

This sound, which is reported to be deep throughout, extends S

for about 50 miles to the ice edge. This region is perhaps the

best known in Antarctica. Having been the site of four British

expedition bases, it is now the location of the principal scientific base station of the United States. It is reported that there is

no safe anchorage within McMurdo Sound.

4.6 The Dellbridge Islands (77°40'S., 166°25'E.), a

group of four, lie S of Cape Evans. Inaccessible Island lies 1.3

miles SW of the cape and is 160m high at its E end. A submarine ridge, with depths of 101 to 152m, lies between this island

and the cape. This ridge is an extension of the shoal fronting

the cape and many icebergs have stranded in its vicinity. Tent

Island lies 1 mile S of Inaccessible Island and is 137m high. A

least depth of 58m was reported to lie 2.3 miles SW of this island. Big Razorback Island, 64m high, lies 1.3 miles E of Tent

Island and Little Razorback Island, 36m high, lies 0.8 mile N

of it.

4.6 From Cape Evans, the coast extends ESE for 4 miles to

Turks Head (77°40'S., 166°46'E.), a precipitous, black headland, 158m high. It consists of ice cliffs, 12 to 30m high. The

coast then extends S for 12 miles to Cape Armitage, the S extremity of Ross Island, and is mostly fronted by low ice cliffs.

4.6 Erebus Bay lies on the S side of Erebus Glacier Tongue. Turtle Rock, 30m high, lies 1 mile offshore, about 2 miles S of the

latter tongue. A shoal, with a least depth of 8.7m, lies about 0.5

mile offshore, 3 miles NNW of Cape Armitage. Vessels are advised not to pass E of this shoal because the area is unsurveyed.

A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, is reported to lie about midway

between this shoal and the shore.

4.6 Cape Armitage (77°51'S., 166°40'E.), the sloping termination of the Hut Point Peninsula, is backed, 0.5 mile NE, by Observation Hill which is 228m high. A memorial cross to

Captain R.F. Scott, RN, and the southern party, who lost their

lives on their return from the South Pole in March 1912, surmounts this hill.

4.6 Carter Hill, 301m high, stands 1.5 miles N of Cape Armitage

and Castle Rock, 412m high, lies 3 miles N of it.

4.6 Hut Point, where Scott's party wintered in 1902-1904, is located 1 mile NW of Cape Armitage and fronted by shoals.

Shoal patches, with depths of 8.8 and 4m, lie 2 miles N and 0.8

mile S, respectively, of this point.

4.6 Pram Point (77°51'S., 166°45'E.) is located on the edge of

the Ross Ice Shelf, 1.3 miles NE of Cape Armitage.

4.6 Scott Base (77°51'S., 166°45'E.), the principal New Zealand

base, stands on this point. It was originally established for the

International Geophysical Year in 1957 and has been manned

ever since. It was the base used by Sir Edmund Hillary for the

Trans Antarctic Expedition and was the base to which Sir Vivian Fuch's party returned on 2 March 1958, after crossing the

continent via the South Pole in 99 days.

4.6 The base consists of nine buildings, is permanently manned

throughout the year, and is connected by road to McMurdo Station.

4.7 McMurdo Station (77°51'S., 166°40'E.), the principal United States base, stands on the low, volcanic hills at the S

extremity of Ross Island. Part of the station fronts Winter

Quarters Bay. This station is one of the seven original constructed by the United States for the International Geophysical

Year (1955-56) and has been used continually since then. Over

the years, the station has expanded to provide extensive facilities for both support activities and research. It now includes the

4,320m2 Albert P. Crary Science and Engineering Center and

numerous dormitories.

4.7 The base is the primary rescue coordination center for the

continent and the operational hub for the U.S. Antarctic Program, which is managed by the National Science Foundation.

Virtually all personnel, equipment, and supplies destined for

continental bases and field camps, except Palmer Station on the

Antarctic Peninsula, are routed through McMurdo. Bulk fuel

and cargo are transported by ship to this station.

4.7 The station consists of approximately 110 buildings with

graded roads, a power plant, and other utility systems such as

water and waste disposal. It has a communications system, surface vehicles, a heliport, a docking area, and a fuel depot. This

latter depot consists of 20 storage tanks with a total capacity of

about 190,000 barrels (about 8 million gallons). In addition, a

diesel-fueled saltwater distillation plant produces fresh water

for most needs.

4.7 An airfield (Williams Field) is situated in the vicinity of the

station. It is reported that ski-equipped aircraft can land

throughout the year and wheeled aircraft can land on an ice

runway from October to early December. The field also includes facilities for refueling, repairing and servicing aircraft,

and housing and feeding operating personnel.

4.7 A wharf, used by supply vessels, fronts the base in Winter

Quarters Bay. It is 201m long, 140m wide, and constructed of

ice. Vessels must obtain approval in advance to visit McMurdo

and should contact the station 72 hours and 24 hours prior to

arrival. (See Part I—Regulations.)

4.8 Mount Morning, 2,712m high, stands near the head of

the sound at the W end of a peninsula which is located SE of

Koettlitz Glacier. Mount Discovery (78°22'S., 165°01'E.),

2,767m high, stands 20 miles ENE of this peak where the peninsula divides with the Brown Peninsula extending 15 miles N

and Minna Bluff extending 25 miles ESE. Bratina Island lies

close N of the Brown Peninsula.

4.8 Black Island (78°07'S., 166°05'E.), 1,110m high, lies with
168 Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 

Pub. 200

Cape Hodgson, its NW extremity, located 10 miles SE of Bratina Island. Cape Spirit forms the NE extremity of this island.

4.8 White Island, 16 miles long and 702m high, lies E of Black

Island from which it is separated by White Strait. Cape Spencer-Smith forms the N extremity of this island.

4.8 The ice front, which is generally 1.5 to 8m high, trends NE

from a position located 20 miles S of Butter Point and then SE

to a position 3 miles S of Cape Armitage. It then curves NE

and NW and meets the S coast of Ross Island at Pram Point.

This front, however, changes considerably from year to year.

4.8 The part of the E coast of Victoria Land that lies S of McMurdo Sound is quite unapproachable by sea.

4.8 From Cape Chocolate, the coast trends NNW for 17 miles to

Butter Point and is backed by the Royal Society Range. Mount

Lister, the summit of this range, is 3,891m high and rises 27

miles SW of Cape Chocolate. The Dailey Islands, a scattered

group of five, lie NE of Cape Chocolate. The westrermmost of

these small, volcanic islands is 183m high and lies 5 miles off

the cape.

4.8 Koettlitz Glacier descends into the sound SE of Cape Chocolate (77°56'S., 164°35'E.) and terminates in an ice cliff.

4.8 Butter Point, the S entrance point of New Harbor, is formed

by an angle in the ice cliff, about 6m high. This angle marks

the N extremity of the southernmost of the piedmonts skirting

the W shore of the Ross Sea. Vessels can moor on the N side of

the ice cliff, using ice anchors placed about 200m inshore. The

piedmont ice terminates in a low ice cliff which trends ESE for

about 6 miles to The Strand Moraines. These moraines are separated from the piedmont glacier by a water-cut channel which

undercuts the ice.

4.9 New Harbor (77°36'S., 163°51'E.), a bay, lies between Cape Bernacchi and Butter Point and recedes 6 miles

SW. The Kukri Hills rise at the head of this bay and Mount

Barnes, the summit, is 984m high.

4.9 The harbor has not been fully surveyed, but it is believed to

be deep, although shoals may exist in the NW part. The current

sets into this bay from the SE and may carry much drift ice.

Winds from that direction usually form a heavy swell and there

is little shelter within the bay. Strong W winds, descending via

the glacier valley, may also be encountered.

4.9 From Cape Bernacchi, the coast trends NNW for 29 miles to

Cape Roberts and is formed by a continuous piedmont. This

piedmont varies in width from 3 to 12 miles and is fed by three

outlet glaciers.

4.9 Cape Dunlop, a rocky headland, is located 11 miles SSE of

Cape Roberts. It is formed of gneissic granite above which

rests the piedmont ice.

4.9 Dunlop Island (77°14'S., 163°30'E.), 1.5 miles long and

18m high, lies E of Cape Dunlop from which it is separated by

a strait, 0.3 mile wide.

4.9 Spike Cape, a bare and rocky point from which the piedmont

ice has receded, is located 6 miles S of the island. Gneiss Point,

long and rocky, is located 7 miles S of this cape. The Bay of

Sails lies between these two rocky points. Another rocky outcrop, from which the piedmont ice has receded, is located at

the head of this bay.

4.9 Mount Newall, 2,134m high, rises 12 miles W of Gneiss

Point and forms the S side of the Wright Lower Glacier.

4.9 Marble Point (77°26'S., 163°50'E.) is located 2.5 miles S of

Gneiss Point. Bernacchi Bay lies on the S side of this rocky

spur. The bottom of the bay appears to regular and a depth of

75m lies in the middle, about 1.3 miles offshore. Between

Gneiss Point and Cape Bernacchi, located at the S side of the

bay, the shore, from which the face of the piedmont has receded, consists of a bare, rocky terrace, about 1 mile wide.

4.10 Granite Harbor (76°33'S., 162°44'E.) lies between

Cape Archer, on the N side, and Cape Roberts, on the S. It is 12

miles wide and recedes W for about 10 miles. This harbor

forms the seaward end of a deep valley filled by the Mackay

Glacier, which descends in a gentle slope from the interior plateau. About 1 mile inside Cape Archer, ice falls descend between steep cliffs and reach the sea in the form of a small

glacier tongue.

4.10 Point Retreat is located 5.5 miles SW of Cape Archer and is

backed by Kar Plateau, a flat glacier-cut shelf of black dolerite.

Dreikanter Head, located 1.5 miles NNW of Point Retreat, is a

steep dark promontory, 515m high. This promontory is mostly

enveloped by glacier slopes. Lion Island, 230m high, lies 1.7

miles NNE of Dreikanter Head, at the edge of a glacier.

4.10 Mckay Glacier is located at the SW side of the harbor and

Mckay Glacier Tongue projects seaward for about 2.5 miles, 3

miles SW of Point retreat.

4.10 A bay, about 2 miles wide, lies on the S side of the tongue

and Cuff Cape, a small and dark projection from which the glacier has receded, is located at its head. The shore to the S of

this cape consists of steep ice falls which are almost free from

silt and about 15m high. Flatiron, a flat and triangular-shaped

shelf of granite from which the glacier ice has receded, is located about 1 mile S of Cuff Cape. Finger Point, the E end of this

shelf, is sharp, precipitous, and gives the feature the appearance of a skyscraper.

4.10 The SW side of Flatiron forms the steep N shore of a small

inlet, known as Devils Punchbowl, which is about 0.2 mile

wide and 0.6 mile long. A small, hanging glacier, known as

Dewdrop Glacier, fronts the head of this inlet. This glacier terminates in ice face, 18m high, which lies close above the inlet

and behind a dry, gravel beach fronting avalanche slopes. A

long and narrow curving ridge of red granite forms the W and

S shores of the inlet. This ridge is 305m high at its W end and

descends gradually, reaching sea level at its E extremity. Devils

Thumb, 250m high, is a conspicuous knob of granite standing

about midway along the ridge.

4.10 Devils Punchbowl was reported (1958) to be obstructed and

contain dangerous loose ice. No anchorage was available as

deep water extended up to the beach.

4.10 It was reported that a spit, with a depth of less than 37m,

projects from the S side of the harbor, about 2 miles E of Devils Punchbowl.

4.10 New Glacier lies S of Devils Thumb and is an extension of a

level snow-covered plateau which forms the S side of Mackay

Glacier. New Glacier is fed by the Minnehaha Ice Falls which

descend from a mottled cone standing W of Mount England.

4.10 Mount England (77°02'S., 162°27'E.), 1,205m high, is the

most prominent massif rising on the S shore of Granite Harbor.

Its slopes descend abruptly from the snow-covered summit to

the New Glacier.

4.11 Cape Roberts (77°02'S., 163°12'E.), the S entrance
Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 169

Pub. 200

point of Granite Harbor, is formed by a low, rocky, triangularshaped spit which extends seaward for about 0.5 mile. Many

grounded icebergs have been observed in the vicinity of this

cape.

4.11 Discovery Bluff, 490m high, is located on the W side of Avalanche Bay, 7 miles WNW of Cape Roberts. This bluff consists of a conspicuous headland with steep slopes separated by

gullies. Botany Bay lies between Discovery Bluff and Cape

Geology, about 1 mile W. This latter cape is formed by a patch

of gravel. A beach of granite boulders fronts the head of the

bay.

4.11 From Cape Geology, the shore extends SW for about 1.5

miles to the face of New Glacier, at the foot of Mount England.

It is formed by steep, rocky cliffs, up to 229m high.

4.11 From Cape Archer, the coast extends NE for 13 miles to

Cape Ross. Gregory Island, dark and 0.3 mile in diameter, lies

close to the coast, 2 miles NE of Cape Archer. This island,

which is 100m high, may be mistaken from seaward at times

for the cape.

4.11 From Cape Archer, a piedmont extends inland for about 6

miles and is bordered by the hills rising along the N shore of

Granite Harbor. At a point about 5 miles S of Cape Ross, this

piedmont recedes about 0.3 mile from the shore and rests on a

red granite platform.

4.11 From Cape Ross, the coastal piedmont extends NW for

about 7 miles to Tripp Bay. Depot Island, small and 60m high,

lies 0.8 mile offshore, about 2 miles NW of Cape Ross. The W

side of this island has accessible slopes, but its other sides consist of perpendicular, granite cliffs rising from the water's edge.

4.11 Tripp Island, 110m high, lies in the center of Tripp Bay, 7

miles NW of Cape Ross. It is conspicuous, dark, and marks the

entrance to two deep valleys which lie behind it. The northernmost of these valleys is filled by Fry Glacier which is about 2

miles wide and has vertical, smooth walls.

4.11 Cape Day is located 30 miles N of Cape Ross. Charcot Cove

lies between this cape and Bruce Point, 7 miles NW. The Nordenskjold Ice Tongue occupies most of this cove, although inlets, which recede about 2 miles, lie between the tongue and

each of the entrance points. This tongue is about 20 miles long,

5 miles wide, 30m high, and is believed to be afloat. Its surface

is formed by hard, bare glacier ice, except on the N side and the

seaward end, where drifting snow piles up. The surface is generally flat with gentle undulations. The N edge of the tongue

terminates in a vertical ice cliff, 15m high, with overhanging

snow cornices. The S edge is not uniform as the S winds produce marked erosion. This edge consists of steep slopes

formed of serrated and scalloped green-glacier ice. There is no

evidence of this ice tongue being actively fed. It is now believed that the tongue was once a part of a large piedmont and

is now inactive and disintegrating.

4.11 Harbord Glacier Tongue lies 14 miles N of Nordenskjold Ice

Tongue and Cheetham Ice Tongue, the seaward extension of

Davies Glacier, is located 7 miles N of it. Davies Glacier, 6

miles wide, trends W for about 15 miles and then curves SW.

This glacier is heavily crevassed and a branch, which forms

Clarke Glacier, flows N behind Lamplugh Island from near its

seaward termination. Cheetham Ice Tongue is about 3 miles

long, 2 miles wide, and 12m high. The structure of this tongue

has not been fully determined, but it appears to be largely

formed of snow. Its relationship with Davies Glacier is based

principally upon conjecture.

4.12 Prior Island (75°41'S., 162°54'E.) lies 5 miles S of

Cape Irizar and about 1 mile off the SE end of Lamplugh Island. The granite cliffs of this island are about 90m high and

covered with an ice cap, about 23m thick. Lamplugh Island, 4

miles wide and about 10 miles long, is 244m high and capped

by glacial ice. Cape Irizar, the N extremity of the island, is

formed by a bold, rocky headland. It is 180m high, consists of

red granite, and has a glacial cap.

4.12 Franklin Island (76°05'S., 168°19'E.) lies 100 miles SSE of

Cape Washington and about 80 miles E of Cape Day. This island is 6 miles long, 3 miles wide, and 310m high. It is covered

with a thin ice cap. The N side of this island consists of precipitous cliffs, 150 to 180m high. Norway Rocks extend up to

about 4 miles seaward of Bernacchi Head, the S extremity of

the island. A stony beach, on which a large penguin rookery is

situated, fronts the SW side of the island and is backed by

cliffs, 122m high. A depth of 37m was reported to lie about 0.2

mile off this beach. It was reported that good anchorage could

probably be found off the N side of this island during S winds.

4.13 Geikie Inlet (75°30'S., 163°00'E.), about 5 miles

wide, lies between the cliffs on the S side of Drygalski Ice

Tongue and Cape Irizar, the N extremity of Lamplugh Island.

Cape Reynolds, rocky and 100m high, forms the W shore of

this inlet. Clarke Glacier lies between Cape Reynolds and

Cape. It is 1 mile wide, 8 miles long, and is bordered on the E

side by Lamplugh Island.

4.13 The Drygalski Ice Tongue is fed by the Larsen and David

Glaciers. This ice formation extends about 38 miles to its seaward extremity and varies in width. It is reported to have a

maximum width of about 25 miles, along the shore. David Glacier flows into the Drygalski Ice Tongue to the N of Geikie Inlet. This glacier is about 8 miles wide and is presumed to

extend WNW as far as the interior plateau, about 25 miles inland.

4.13 Cape Philippi, a dark cliff with vertical sides, is the E extremity of D'Urville Wall, a strongly glaciated cliff, about

1,000m high, which extends W and forms the N wall of David

Glacier. Above the cape, the summits of an extensive massif

rise and separate David Glacier from Larsen Glacier. Mount

Neumayer is the S of these summits and Mount Bellingshausen, 1,380m high, is the northernmost. This latter peak has a

steep and conspicuous cone.

4.14 Terra Nova Bay (74°50'S., 164°30'E.) lies between

Cape Washington, 274m high, and the Drygalski Ice Tongue,

55 miles SSW, and recedes about 25 miles. The shores of the

bay to the W of Cape Washington are formed by the ice cliffs,

15 to 48m high. These cliffs rise to the slopes of Mount Melbourne, 2,730m high, which rises 15 miles N. Occasionally,

dark rocks project through the slopes of this peak and heavy ice

falls are visible on its SW side. Mount Dickason, 2,134m high,

stands about 37 miles NW of Cape Washington. Markham Island, 60m high, lies 8 miles NNW of the cape.

4.14 Gerlache Inlet lies 20 miles WSW of the same cape. Gondwana, a German scientific station, and Baia Terra Nova, an Italian scientific station, are situated in the vicinity of this inlet and

are manned during summer.
170 Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 

Pub. 200

4.14 Near Markham Island, the coast extends SW for 17 miles,

the low shore rising to the slopes of a peninsula. Mount Abbott,

1,020m high, forms the summit of this peninsula and stands 25

miles WSW of Cape Washington. The S extremity of the peninsula consists of many low foothills. Evans Cove, 2.5 miles

wide and free of dangers, lies close W of these foothills. The N

shore of the cove is formed by a glacier with several conspicuous moraines.

4.14 Inexpressible Island, about 7 miles long and 3 miles wide, is

390m high and forms the W shore of the cove. A penguin rookery has been reported to exist at the S end of this island. Vegetation Island, narrow and about 1 mile long, lies 3 miles N of

Inexpressible Island. Hells Gate Moraine is located between

these two islands and extends SE to the shore of Evans Cove.

4.14 Terra Nova Bay is often ice free when dense drift ice is

found up to 20 miles offshore. This is due to the deflection of

the current by the Drygalski Ice Tongue. The best approach to

the bay is from the NE, but this route may be closed if strong

SE winds have prevailed. Open water may be found near the N

edge of the Drygalski Ice Tongue due to the current deflected

by submarine eskers under the ice tongue.

4.14 Mount Nansen, a tabular-shaped massif, rises in terraces and

terminates at its N end in precipitous walls. This massif, fronted by low and bare foothills, extends for about 8 miles N and

forms the W side of Gerlache Inlet.

4.14 Reeves Glacier fills a large indentation in the NW side of the

bay, W of Gerlache Inlet. Hansen Nunatak, 965m high, stands

near the center of this glacier, 18 miles W of Vegetation Island.

Teall Nunatak stands about 5 miles seaward of Hansen Nunatak. Large moraines extend SE on the undulating and heavily

crevassed surface of the glacier.

4.14 Mount Larsen, 1,562m high, forms the S wall of the Reeves

Glacier and consists of sheer, faceted-granite cliffs on its N

side. Larsen Glacier, 3 miles wide, lies on the S side of Mount

Larson and extends 25 miles from its seaward end to the interior plateau.

4.15 Cape Washington (74°39'S., 165°25'E.), a bold and

truncated headland, is 274m high and forms the extremity of a

spur of Mount Melbourne. This spur, which projects 7 miles

SE and then 5 miles SSE, separates Wood Bay from Terra Nova Bay. Vast quantities of drift ice, swept N by the tidal current

or moved by the summer prevailing winds, are often trapped

along the shores of the spur. A shoal, with a depth of 14.6m,

was reported to lie within 0.5 mile of the cape.

4.15 Wood Bay lies between Cape Washington and Cape

Johnson, 35 miles N. This bay provides shelter, but drift ice is

often carried in by the tidal currents and SE winds. The ice

within the bay may not break out until February. The S shore of

the bay consists of ice cliffs.

4.15 Lady Newnes Bay (73°40'S., 167°30'E.) indents the coast

between Coulman Island and Cape Johnson. This bay, about 80

miles wide, is completely filled by extensive and undulating

shelf ice. Most of the area lying seaward of this bay has not

been surveyed.

4.15 Coulman Island (73°28'S., 169°45'E.), 18 miles long, lies

95 miles NE of Cape Washington. A peak, 1,998m high, stands

at the S end of this island. Cape Anne, the S extremity of the island, consists of an abrupt cliff, 305m high, and is fringed

along the shore by a thick ice foot. Cape Wadworth, the N extremity, consists of a vertical cliff, 793m high, with glacier

cliffs on either side. Landings have been made on rocks lying

under these cliffs.

4.15 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly has been reported to

exist in the vicinity of Coulman Island.

4.16 From Cape Phillips, located 17 miles N of the N end

of Coulman Island, the coast extends N, with rocky cliffs and

spurs, for 21 miles to Cape Daniell. Steep, high cliffs, which

are broken occasionally by ice slopes, extend 14 miles SW

from Cape Phillips to Cape Jones, a black bluff with vertical

sides. Mount Brewster, 2,026m high, is dome-shaped and

stands above Cape Jones. The ice slopes descend from the

summit of this peak and completely cover this section of the

coast.

4.16 Tucker Inlet lies between Cape Daniell and Cape Wheatstone, 8 miles NNE, and is usually blocked by drift ice. The

head of this inlet consists of snow-covered hills which rise W

to Mount Northampton. This latter peak is 2,465m high and

stands 18 miles W of Cape Daniell.

4.16 The land extending between Cape Wheatstone and Cape

Hallett, 17 miles N, is shaped into a peninsula by inlets receding at the N and S ends. Cape Wheatstone is a steep, rocky

bluff which is capped by a dome of ice. Cape Hallett consists

of steep cliffs which are backed by Quarterdeck Ridge, 1,660m

high. 

4.16 Edisto Inlet lies between Cape Hallett and the mainland.

This inlet recedes S for about 8 miles and is 3 miles wide.

There are depths of 293 to 558m within this inlet.

4.16 Moubray Bay lies between Cape Hallett and Cape Roget, 20

miles NNE. An isolated rock lies about 8.5 miles N of the latter

cape.

4.17 The Possession Islands (71°56'S., 171°10'E.), a

group of nine islands and islets, lie 5 miles offshore, 9 miles E

of Cape Roget. These islands and islets vary in size from being

1.3 miles long to being mere pillars of rock. Possession Island,

the northernmost and largest island, is low and bare except at

its SW extremity. Archer Peak, 116m high and abrupt, forms

the S extremity of this island. Foyn Island, the central island, is

247m high and has mostly vertical sides. Heftye Island, the

soothernmost island, is 64m high. Several of the islets in the

group are formed by pillars which have vertical walls up to

about 9m high. Landings have been made on these islands. The

channel leading between the group and the mainland is 5 miles

wide. This channel has been navigated by several vessels and is

believed to be free of dangers, but it may be blocked by heavy

drift ice at times. A tidal current has been experienced in the

vicinity of this channel. The N setting current, with a rate of 3

knots, is reported to be considerably stronger than the S.

4.17 Cape McCormick, a conspicuous cliff, is located 11 miles

NE of Cape Roget and is backed by steep glacial slopes which

extend from the interior mountains. Mount Sabine, 3,622m

high, and Mount Whewell rise close N of the cape. Mount

Robinson stands behind Downshire Cliffs, 12 miles N of the

cape, and has a conspicuous sharp peak.

4.17 From Downshire Cliffs, the coast extends 23 miles NNW to

Cape Adare, the N extremity of the Adare Peninsula. This peninsula is 2,050m high and its E side descends in sheer cliffs to

the sea. Several pillars of rock fringe the shore in this vicinity.
Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 171

Pub. 200

Cape Adare to Porpoise Bay

4.18 Cape Adare (71°17'S., 170°14'E.) is the E entrance

point of Robertson Bay and also the NE extremity of Victoria

Land. This cape consists of a vertical cliff of black basalt,

305m high. It is reported that a hut is situated near the N end of

the cape. Rose Rock, a pillar rock originally part of a double

rock group known as The Sisters, lies close to the N extremity

of the cape; Gertrude Rock, the former outer pillar rock, no

longer exists. 

4.18 Several shoals have been reported to lie within an area located about 2.5 miles NW of the cape. However, deep water, over

an uneven bottom, has been reported to lie about 3.5 miles NW

of the cape. Shoals have been reported extending 3 to 4 miles

W from Cape Adare.

4.18 Robertson Bay lies between Cape Adare and Cape Barrow,

19 miles W, and recedes for about 25 miles. This bay is dominated by the Admiralty Mountains, the slopes of which are so

steep that, except in the valleys, no snow or ice is able to lodge,

and bare rock is shown everywhere. This bay probably remains

free of ice from January to April. New freezing usually begins

in April, but strong offshore winds frequently drive the ice out

of the bay during the winter months. Drift ice moves in and out

of the bay under the influence of the tidal currents.

4.18 A current sets round Cape Adare and into Robertson Bay,

bringing in masses of ice. This current sometimes attains a rate

of 5 knots, but is much affected by the tide. An eddy current

has been reported to occur within the inner part of the bay and

then set out along its E side. Anchorage can be obtained anywhere off the E side of this bay but usually in a depth of 27m

close off the S side of a beach which lies 1 mile S of Cape

Adar. However, this side of the bay is especially subject to SE

blizzards. Anchorage can also be taken in a depth of 20m close

off the E side of Colbeck Bay, a small inlet, lying near the head

of Robertson Bay.

4.18 Caution.—Robertson Bay should be navigated with great

care and vessels should give Cape Adare a wide berth.

4.19 Atkinson Cliffs (71°17'S., 168°55'E.), 680m high, are

located 7.5 miles SE of Nelson Cliff, 540m high, from which

they are separated by the Simpson Glacier Tongue, projecting

about 2.5 miles seaward. Mount Cherry-Garrard, a conspicuous peak, stands on Atkinson Cliffs and Anderson Ice Falls lie

close SE of them. The E side of these ice falls are bordered by

a steep, rocky ridge which descends from the slopes of Mount

Wright. Turret Island and Flat Island lie close SE of this ridge.

Cape Barrow forms the NE end of the latter island and the W

entrance point of Robertson Bay. Shipley Glacier descends

steeply and envelops the W sides of those two islands, ending

at the water's edge in a vertical cliff, 27m high. Cape Wood

forms the E extremity of Flat Island.

4.19 Cape Scott is located 22.5 miles NW of Nelson Cliff and 6

miles ESE of Cape Oakeley. Smith Inlet, 8 miles wide, appears

to be a fjord and recedes for a considerable distance. Mount

Dalmeny stands above the S shore of this inlet and Cape Oakeley, a dark and bold headland, forms its E entrance point. This

section of the coast consists of dark, conspicuous cliffs fronting

snow-covered hills. High mountains rise inland, the most

prominent being Mount Pechell which stands 13 miles W of

Cape Scott.

4.19 Yule Bay lies 20 miles NW of Smith Inlet and is entered between Cape Dayman and Cape Hooker, 9 miles NW. The latter

cape forms the S end of a fork-shaped projection.

4.19 The Lyall Islands, a group of four, lie about 3 miles offshore,

6 miles SE of Cape Dayman. This portion of the coast is

backed by high hills, the most prominent peak being Mount Elliot.

4.19 Cape North, located 27 miles WNW of Cape Hooker, consists of a vertical, snow-covered cliff, 61m high. The coast between this cape and Yule Bay consists of high ice cliffs.

4.20 The Balleny Islands (66°55'S., 163°20'E.), a group of

five, lie with the southeasternmost island located about 190

miles NNW of Cape Hooker. The group forms a chain which

extends in a NW/SE direction for about 100 miles. The islands

are heavily glaciated and are volcanic in origin. Ice tongues

project into the sea from their slopes.

4.20 The sea area lying between this group and the mainland is

frequently impenetrable due to heavy drift ice. The current in

the vicinity of the chain sets NW and field ice from the Ross

Sea drifts toward the group and often becomes choked up between the islands and the mainland.

4.20 Young Island, the northwesternmost island, is long and narrow with a gentle, sloping plateau, 1,340m high. This island is

19 miles long, 4 miles wide, and is entirely covered with snow.

Cape Ellsworth, the N extremity of this island, consists of a

rocky bluff, 290m high, off which lie Seal Rocks, up to 15m

high. Foul ground fronts these rocks and lies up to 2 miles seaward. A below-water rock lies about 3 miles NNW of this

cape. Breakers, position approximate, were reported (1959) to

exist in the vicinity of this rock.

4.20 The W side of the island is steep and crevassed, but the E

side is low. The S extremity consists of a rocky wall, 186m

high, capped by an ice sheet. Cape Douglas, the E extremity, is

located 4.5 miles NNE of the S extremity, and is fronted by two

prominent and rocky bluffs, 162m high. A prominent cone is

reported to stand 6.5 miles SSE of Cape Ellsworth.

4.20 Row Island lies 2.3 miles SSE of Cape Douglas. It is about

0.5 mile long and 183m high.

4.20 Borradaile Island, lying 3 miles SE of the S extremity of

Young Island, is 2 miles long and 1 mile wide. This island is

ice capped, 381m high, and has sheer sides. Beale Pinnacle,

61m high, lies close to the E end of this island and is shaped

like a boot. Rocks, which break, front the N and NW ends of

this island and extend up to 2.5 miles seaward. The channel

leading between Borradaile Island and Young Island has not

been thoroughly surveyed.

4.20 Buckle Island lies 16 miles SE of Young Island. This island

is 13 miles long, 4 miles wide, and extends in a N/S direction.

It consists of a gentle sloping plateau, 1,238m high. In some

places, rocky cliffs descend to the water's edge. In others, long

ice cliffs forms the seaward edge of glacial slopes and descend

between breaks in the rocky masses. Cape McNab, 354m high,

forms the S extremity of this island. A glacier descends in the

vicinity of the cape from the high interior and flows between

rocky walls. Scott Cone, 31m high, rises 2 miles NNE of this

cape. Eliza Cone, 67m high with an archway through it, rises 1

mile W of the cape.

4.20 Sabrina Island, about 0.7 mile long, lies 2 miles S of Cape

McNab and is 90m high. A conspicuous pinnacle, known as
172 Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 

Pub. 200

The Monolith, stands at the S end of the island and is 79m

high. A group of rocks, which breaks heavily, lies 2.5 miles SE

of this pinnacle. Below-water rocks lie close N and NE of the

island. A shoal is reported to lie in midchannel between Sabrina Island and Buckle Island.

4.20 Sturge Island, the southeasternmost of the group, lies 45

miles SE of Buckle Island. It is 18 miles long and 8 miles wide.

Steep, rocky cliffs and a broad ice tongue descend from the interior to form the coast. This island is completely ice capped

and Brown Peak, 1,167m high and prominent, stands in its S

part. Cape Freeman, 672m high with a vertical rock wall, forms

the N extremity of this island and Cape Smyth, with a long ice

slope, forms the S extremity. Rocks, awash, lie within about

0.5 mile SE and SW of this latter cape. A shingled spit extends

about 0.3 mile ESE from Cape Smyth and rises to a hill, 100m

high. Four detached stacks lie close ESE of the seaward extremity of this spit. A shelf, with depths of 11 to 15m, extends

up to about 0.5 mile S of the shingled spit. Temporary anchorage may be taken on this shelf and about 0.2 mile from the spit.

4.20 Scott Island (67°24'S., 179°55'W.) lies 315 miles NE of

Cape Adare. It is about 0.3 mile long, 1.5 miles wide, and extends in a N/S direction. When approaching the Ross Sea from

New Zealand, many vessels prefer to proceed to Scott Island

and then turn S. The N part of the island consists of precipitous

cliffs, 41m high. The slopes above these cliffs rise to a rounded

summit, 49m high, which stands in the center of the island. The

slopes on the S side of this summit descend toward the S extremity of the island where they end about 2m above the water.

The island is completely ice capped. Small coves lie at the NE

and NW extremities of the island and are obstructed by many

rocks over which the sea breaks.

4.20 Haggits Pillar, a column of rock, is 64m high and stands

close off the W side of the island. A cavern, 15m high, passes

through the N end of Scott Island. The S side of the island is

fringed by foul ground. The remaining sides of the island have

depths of at least 14m lying as close as 90m offshore.

4.20 Scott Island Bank extends up to 40 miles S of the island. An

isolated depth of 60m is reported to lie about 28 miles SSW of

the island.

4.21 Archer Point (69°11'S., 157°39'E.) is rocky and

backed by the Wilson Hills, which extend WNW. A long and

narrow glacier, with a forked end, lies close W of this point. It

extends NNW from the Wilson Hills and projects about 15

miles seaward. Babushkin Island lies close E of this glacier and

5 miles NW of the point. The Terra Nova Islands lie 17 miles

NNE of the point. They are small, low, and rocky.

4.21 Cape Kinsey is located 25 miles ESE of Archer Point and

three small islands are reported to lie about 3.5 miles NW of it.

The coast between is rugged and reaches the sea in steep, rocky

points which are separated by glaciers and backed by the Wilson Hills. The most prominent headlands along this stretch are

Williamson Head, located 4 miles E of Archer Point, and

Drake Head, located 12 miles WNW of Cape Kinsey. Harald

Bay indents the coast between Archer Point and Williamson

Head. Davies Bay lies close W of Cape Kinsey and appears to

recede for a considerable distance. A depth of 278m was reported to lie about 17 miles NE of Cape Kinsey. Many grounded icebergs have been observed along this stretch of coast and a

strong NW tidal current sets in this vicinity.

4.21 Cape Cheetham (70°18'S., 162°42'E.) is located 82 miles

SE of Cape Kinsey. The land between has not been fully surveyed. This cape appears to be an isolated pinnacle which

forms the E extremity of Rennick Bay. The bay is about 18

miles wide and its W entrance point consists of high cliffs with

outcroppings of rock. Rennick Glacier flows into this bay.

4.21 From Cape Cheetham, the coast extends ESE for 18 miles to

Cape Williams and is backed by the Bowers Mountains, which

are rugged, snow-covered, and of moderate height. An island,

known as Sputnik Island, is reported to lie about 15 miles SE

of Cape Williams and a rock is located close off its SW end.

Cape Cheetham is separated by a valley of col from Mount

Bruce. This latter peak is 1,639m high and forms the summit of

the Bowers Mountains.

4.21 Leningradskaya, a Russian station, is situated 18 miles SE of

Cape Kinsey. It was reported to be unoccupied (1995).

4.21 Lillie Glacier Tongue, 38m high, extends about 12 miles N

from snow-covered, rounded hills between Cape Cheetham

and Cape Williams. An islet, 900m high, is reported to lie close

off the NW end of this glacier tongue and about 3 miles E of

Cape Cheetham. A depth of 245m was reported to lie about 8

miles N of the tongue of the glacier. Many grounded icebergs

and unbroken fast ice have been observed to fringe the shore in

this vicinity. A strong NW current sets along this part of the

coast.

4.21 Cape Freshfield (68°20'S., 151°00'E.) is located 150 miles

WNW of Archer Point. The coast between is quite jagged and

consists of numerous indentations. Lauritzen Bay lies about 15

miles W of Archer Point and is obstructed by an ice shelf.

Depths of 117 to 362m have been reported to lie within this

bay. The head of the bay is backed by Magga Peak, 244m high,

which consists of a mass of sheer rock in flat-iron shape with a

strip of fast ice, 1 mile wide, extending along the coast from its

base. A cairn was reported (1962) to stand on the summit of

this peak. Drury Nunatak and Reynolds Peak both stand about

14 miles SW of Magga Peak.

4.22 Cape Buromskiy, located 35 miles WNW of Archer

Point, forms the W extremity of a small projection which extends NW from the coast. An island lies close W of this cape.

The Mawson Peninsula, about 35 miles wide, is centered with

its N extremity located about 40 miles E of Cape Freshfield.

4.22 The George V Coast is considered to lie between 155°E and

142°E. It was discovered and explored by the Australasian

Antarctic expedition, under Sir D. Mawson (1911-14).

4.22 Virik Bank lies about 160 miles N of Cape Freshfield and

has a least reported depth of 95m. A dangerous shoal has been

reported to lie about 33 miles SW of this bank, but its existence

and position are doubtful.

4.22 Deakin Bay (68°23'S., 150°10'E.) lies 18 miles W of Cape

Freshfield. A depth of 585m over a bottom of slate, mud, and

stone was reported to lie within this bay.

4.22 Cape Wild (68°23'S., 149°07'E.), the W entrance point of

Deakin bay, is located 28 miles W of Cape Freshfield. Cape

Blake is located 8 miles NW of Cape Wild.

4.22 Horn Bluff, located 8 miles SW of Cape Blake, is formed by

a prominent rock bastion projecting from beneath the ice cap.

This bastion is fronted by coastal cliffs, 325m high, and its upper part consists of several great conspicuous columns, resembling organ pipes. The cliffs are broken only by shallow,
Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 173

Pub. 200

narrow coves where the ice descends to the sea.

4.23 Cape Spencer is located 25 miles W of Cape Blake

and about 5 miles E of Buckley Bay, which is filled by the high

ice cliffs of the Ninnis Glacier. This large glacier descends

steeply from the high interior through a broad valley and is

heavily hummocked and crevassed. Dixson Island, 335m high,

lies 33 miles NW of Cape Spencer, near the W limit of the Ninnis Glacier. This island is ice covered, about 11 miles long and

6 miles wide.

4.23 Cape Hurley (67°36'S., 145°18'E.) is located about 45 miles

NW of Dixson Island and marks the point where Mertz Glacier

reaches the sea. This stretch of coast is unbroken by rock outcrops and, like the coast farther E, consists of an ice cliff behind which, 20 to 25 miles from the sea, rise ice-covered

slopes, up to 920m high. Fisher Bay lies 4 miles W of Cape

Hurley and is bounded on its W side by the E side of Mertz

Glacier Tongue.

4.23 Mertz Glacier Tongue extends NE for about 30 miles from

the coast and has a width throughout of about 20 miles. It terminates at the sea in ice cliffs, up to about 50m high. This

tongue is believed to be afloat and a depth of 728m has been

reported to lie close off its W edge. The surface of this tongue

is heavily fissured.

4.24 Buchanan Bay, located 47 miles NW of Cape Spencer, lies on the W side of Mertz Glacier Tongue. Mount

Murchison, 567m high, stands 8 miles SW of this bay and is almost entirely covered in snow. Aurora Peak, 533m high, rises 4

miles SSW of Mount Murchison from which it is separated by

a gully. The W shore of the bay is formed by the continental ice

slopes which rise to Mount Hunt. This latter peak is domeshaped and 457m high. It forms the S end of a promontory

which projects N and terminates in Cape de la Motte, the W

entrance point of the bay. The Hodgeman Islands and the Close

Islands lie close off the W and E sides, respectively, of this

cape. The islands are all small and ice capped.

4.24 Watt Bay, 6 miles wide, indents the coast close W of Mount

Hunt. The shore descends to almost sea level at the head of this

bay. Madigan Nunatak, a conspicuous and jagged ridge of gray

gneiss, rises 10 miles WSW of the head of the bay and is 732m

high. The W part of the bay is obstructed by many rocks and

small islands which lie up to 2 miles offshore.

4.24 Cape Gray (66°51'S., 143°22'E.), faced by ice cliffs, is located 12 miles NW of Watt Bay and is the N termination of an

extensive ice plain which descends from the interior in a series

of crevassed slopes.

4.24 The Way Archipelago consists of numerous small islands

and rocks which front the coast and lie up to 2 miles offshore.

Stillwell Island, the largest of this archipelago, lies close NE of

the cape. This island is steep, rocky, about 0.3 mile in diameter.

It is 37m high near the NW extremity.

4.24 Commonwealth Bay (67°01'S., 142°40'E.), 27 miles wide,

lies W of Cape Gray and recedes for about 12 miles. The E side

of this bay is obstructed by many islets which lie up to 2 miles

offshore. The Hannam Islands lie about 2 miles offshore, 7

miles W Cape Gray. Whetter Nunatak, a conspicuous rocky

outcrop, juts through the ice cliffs, 3.5 miles S of these islands.

The Laseron Islands, a small group, lie on the SE side of the

bay. The Mackellar Islands lie in the center of the bay and

about 1.5 miles from the head. This group consists of about 30

rocks and small islands which extend over an area, about 2

miles long and 1 mile wide. The largest island in the group is

about 0.5 mile long and is the site of a large penguin rookery.

Several reefs and shoals lie in the vicinity of these islands and

they should be approached with care.

4.25 Cape Denison (67°00'S., 142°40'E.), a rocky point, is

located in the center of the S shore of Commonwealth Bay.

This cape is formed by a glacial moraine of ice-polished

gneiss. It is about 0.5 mile long, 1 mile wide, and has a mean

elevation of 12m above sea level. Landing may be made within

a cove lying close S of the cape. This cove is 0.2 mile wide, 0.5

mile long, and has an average depth of 4.6m.

4.25 About 0.5 mile inland, the morainic ice joins the inland ice

sheet, which is 55m high. About 12 miles inland, the continental slopes rise to a height of 610m. Heavily crevassed ice slopes

descend vertically to the sea in ice cliffs, 18 to 46m high, on

each side of Cape Denison. A hut and a memorial cross are reported to stand near the cape.

4.25 Anchorage can be obtained about 1 mile W of Cape Denison, but the bottom is extremely uneven. This area appears to

have depths of 37m or less over a bottom of mostly rock. The

anchorage is protected from the strong prevailing winds, which

blow offshore from between S and SE, and also from drifting

icebergs and ice pressure.

4.25 At Cape Denison, the average wind speed is phenomenally

high and it is probably the windiest region in the world. The

annual average wind speed is reported to be 38 knots or gale

force. Almost continuous blizzards blow for nine months of the

year in this vicinity and whirlwinds of snow occur during the

rare periods of comparative calm.

4.25 It was reported (1985) that a sheltered haven for small boats

lies close W of Cape Denison. A reef, which is partly abovewater at LW, extends across the entrance. A rock, awash, was

reported (1989) to lie about 1.6 miles W of the cape.

4.25 Point Alden (66°48'S., 142°02'E.) is the W entrance point of

Commonwealth Bay. From this point, the coast extends W for

12 miles to Cape Decouverte. This latter cape is the NW extremity of the largest island in a group, known as the Cruzon

Islands, which lies close off the coast and extends in a NW/SE

direction for about 1.5 miles. The Sentinel Islands, another

small group of rocky islands, lie about 3.5 miles E of Cape Decouverte and close off the ice cliffs.

4.25 From Cape Decouverte, the coast extends SW for 10 miles to

the Zelee Glacier. This stretch of coast is fronted by many islands, some of which lie up to about 2.5 miles offshore.

4.25 Port Martin, a peninsula, is located 8 miles SW of Cape Decouverte and was the site of a former base. This base was destroyed in 1952, as a result of a storm of great violence and a

fire.

4.25 Petrel Island (66°40'S., 140°00'E.) lies 30 miles WNW of

Port Martin and is the site of Dumont d'Urville Base, a French

station. A radiobeacon is situated at the island and is activated

on request.

4.26 The Zelee Glacier extends for about 7 miles NW and

then about 2.5 miles W, meeting the coast again about 2 miles

SE of Cape Jules. A few islands and shoals are reported to lie

within 1.5 miles NE of the E side of this glacier. Two islands,
174 Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 

Pub. 200

located about 1 mile apart and fronted by shoals on their E

sides, lie 4 miles NE of the N extremity of the glacier. The Lacroix Nunatak, which reaches the coast about 1.5 miles NW of

the glacier, is 88m high at its W end.

4.26 Cape Jules, 0.7 mile wide, is located 15.5 miles W of Cape

Decouverte and projects about 0.8 mile from the coast. A small

cove indents the middle of the N side of this cape. Tristan Island and Yseult Island lie close off the NW and NE extremities, respectively, of the cape.

4.26 From Cape Jules, the Adelie Coast extends W for about 10

miles to Cape Bienvenue. This latter cape is small, rocky, partially ice covered, and 44m high. From Cape Bienvenue, the

coast continues W for 10 miles to the Astrolabe Glacier

Tongue. This tongue extends 4 miles NE from the ice cliffs and

is about 3.3 miles wide. Piner Bay, an open bay, is formed between the NE extremity of the glacier tongue and Cape Bienvenue. Cape Geodesie, low and ice covered, is located 2.8 miles

NW of the W side of the Astrolabe Glacier Tongue. It has several prominent and rocky outcrops at the NE end.

4.26 The Geologie Archipelago extends W and N of the glacier

tongues. This archipelago is roughly divisible into three island

groups. The northernmost group consists of the Dumoulin Islands which are numerous and cover an area about 2 miles in

extent. Icebergs are reported to ground along a line, which extends SSE for about 4 miles, from close E of these islands.

4.26 Islands are reported to lie about 6 miles NW and 8 miles N

of Cape Geodesie. Breakers were reported (1958) to exist

about 16 miles N of the cape.

4.26 From Cape Geodesie, the coast extends 31 miles WNW to

Cape Pepin. About 8 miles NW of Cape Geodesie, Liotard

Glacier reaches the sea and forms a small tongue. Janet Rock, a

small rock, lies 17.5 miles WNW of Cape Geodesie and close

off the ice cliffs. The Francais Glacier lies about 7 miles W of

Cape Pepin.

4.26 The Adelie Coast extends 20 miles WNW from Cape Pepin

to Cape Robert and then 22 miles W to Cape Bickerton, the E

entrance point of Victor Bay. Pourquoi Pas Point, an ice-covered cape, is located 20 miles NW of Cape Bickerton. This

point forms the W entrance point of Victor Bay and also the W

limit of the Adelie Coast.

4.26 Victor Bay extends about 7 miles to its head and is almost

completely filled by the Commandant Charcot Glacier.

Mathieu Rock lies close off the E side of the bay and X Rock

lies 3 miles W of it. X Rock, 33m high, consists of a prominent, black mass which is streaked with quartz on its eroded

flanks. Both of these rocks rise from islands that are embedded

in the ice.

4.26 From Pourquoi Pas Point, the ice-covered cliffs of the Clarie

Coast extend generally W for 140 miles to Cape Morse. The

Pourquoi Pas Glacier Tongue lies near the E end of this coast.

4.26 The Dibble Glacier is located 30 miles W of Pourquoi Pas

Point and close E of Davis Bay. The Dibble Glacier Tongue,

about 18 miles wide, is reported to extend up to about 40 miles

N from the coast.

4.26 Davis Bay, about 15 miles wide at its entrance, lies between

the Dibble Glacier Tongue and Cape Cesney, its ice-covered W

entrance point. Lewis Island, the site of an automatic weather

station, is small and rocky. It lies close inside the E side of the

entrance to Davis Bay.

4.26 About 9 miles WNW of Cape Cesney, a stubby peninsula

terminates at Cape Keltie and forms the northernmost point of

land on the Claire Coast. Freeman Point is located 23 miles W

of Cape Keltie and forms the W entrance point of Perry Bay.

This latter bay is about 12 miles wide at its entrance and recedes for about 4 miles. Freeman Glacier fills the W side of

this bay.

4.26 From Freeman Point, the coast extends 35 miles W to Cape

Carr. This latter cape is prominent, ice covered, and forms the

seaward extremity of the W part of the Claire Coast. Harrison

Glacier and May Glacier are located 13 miles ESE and 7 miles

WSW, respectively, of Cape Carr.

4.26 The Banzare Coast extends between Cape Morse and Cape

Southard. Porpoise Bay, Maury Bay, and Paulding Bay lie E to

W, in that order, and completely indent this stretch of coast.

4.26 Porpoise Bay, 85 miles wide at its entrance, lies at the E end

of the Banzare Coast. It recedes for about 46 miles and is entered between Cape Morse and Cape Goodenough. This latter

cape, which forms the W entrance point, is ice covered and the

N extremity of the Norths Highland. The shores of the bay are

interrupted by numerous glaciers. The westernmost glacier terminates in Cape Spieden, a prominent tongue, which lies 16

miles SE of Cape Goodenough.

Porpoise Bay to Barrier Bay

4.27 Maury Bay (66°33'S., 124°42'E.) lies SW of Cape

Goodenough and is entered between Stuart Point and Clark

Point. This bay is believed to be generally filled by ice and is

marked by prominent tongues which extend seaward from

Blair Glacier and Mackellar Glacier. The bay was reported

(1963) to be fronted by the Voyeykov Ice Shelf, which extended up to about 30 miles offshore, as far E as Cape Goodenough.

4.27 Paulding Bay, centered 40 miles W of Maury Bay, is ice

filled. This bay indents the W end of the Banzare Coast between Clark Point and Cape Southard. It is about 50 miles wide

at the entrance and recedes for 22 miles.

4.27 Henry Bay lies 35 miles SW of Cape Southard and Henry

the Islands and Chick Island obstruct this cove. An automatic

weather station is reported to be situated in the vicinity of this

bay. The Dalton Iceberg Tongue extends up to about 60 miles

N from the vicinity of Cape Southard.

4.27 Cape Mikhaylov is located 80 miles W of Cape Southard.

Cape Waldron is located 85 miles WNW of Cape Mikhaylov

and the Totten Glacier discharges on its E side.

4.27 The Budd Coast extends between Cape Waldron and the

Hatch Island, 140 miles W. Cape Poinsett, located 55 miles

NW of Cape Waldron, is the northernmost point of land along

this coast. The Balaena Islands lie about 50 miles WSW of

Cape Poinsett and close off the coast. The largest island of this

group is 1 mile long and 46m high. It is composed of granite

and has cliff-like slopes.

4.28 Cape Folger (66°08'S., 110°44'E.), located 17 miles

SW of the Balaena Islands, is the E entrance point of Vincennes Bay. Shoals front this cape and extend up to about 20

mile WNW of it. Shoal depths of 12.8 and 16.4m are reported

to lie about 14 miles NW and 8 miles NW, respectively, of the

cape. Petersen Bank lies with its S end located about 24 miles

NW of the cape.
Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 175

Pub. 200

4.28 Vincennes Bay is entered between Cape Folger and Cape

Nutt, 67 miles SW. It indents the Budd Coast and the adjoining

Knox Coast and recedes S for about 22 miles. The Adams Glacier and the Bond Glacier descend into the head of this bay.

The Windmill Islands, forming a chain, lie close off the NE

side of the bay. This chain extends S for 15 miles and its N end

lies 6 miles SSW of Cape Folger. The Frazier Islands and the

Donovan Islands, two groups located about 5 miles apart, lie

between 5 and 7 miles off the E side of the bay. Nelly Island,

the southeastenmost of the Frazier Islands, is 90 high. Chapel

Island, the northeasternmost of the Donovan Islands, is 43m

high.

4.28 Stonehocker Point is located on the E side of the bay, 9 miles

SW of Cape Folger. The Swain Islands, a large cluster, lie centered 2.8 miles NE of this point, but have not been fully surveyed.

4.28 Newcomb Bay is entered between Stonehocker Point and

Kirby Island, 0.8 mile S. It lies between the SW side of the

Clark Peninsula and the Bailey Peninsula, 1 mile SW. A fairway leads to this bay from the W but it is encumbered by Fitzpatrick Rock, 1.2m high and ice capped, which lies about 0.5

mile SW of the W extremity of the Clark Peninsula. Gibney

Reef, which dries 1.5m, lies about 0.5 mile NW of the W extremity of the Clark Peninsula. Larsen Bank, with a least depth

of 15.8m, lies about 0.5 mile ENE of Fitzpatrick Rock. The N

part of this bay has depths of 18 to 82m and provides safe anchorage for large vessels over good holding ground.

4.28 Kilby Island is 13m high and a beacon stands on its summit.

Another island, 30m high, lies 0.3 mile SSE of Kilby Island

and is surmounted by a beacon. Molholm Island lies 0.6 mile

ENE of Kilby Island and is also surmounted by a beacon.

4.28 Wilkes Station (66°15'S., 110°31'E.), in a state of disrepair

and decay, is situated in a valley on the Clark Peninsula, 0.3

mile NE of Stonehocker Point. It was established by the USA

in 1957 and remained active until 1969. During the summer,

the station remains uncovered to a limit dependent on the season melt. Numerous radio masts can be seen in the vicinity of

the former station.

4.28 Casey Station (66°17'S., 110°32'E.) is situated on the highest point of the Bailey Peninsula. This facility consists of numerous large modern buildings which are painted with bright

colors and are visible for 6 miles. A reinforced earthen wharf is

situated in the vicinity of this station and is used for re-supply

operations. A radiobeacon is situated at the station and will be

activated on request.

4.28 The former station, which is now known as Old Casey Station or the Tunnel because of its tunnel-shaped construction,

was closed in 1988.

4.28 Anchorage.—The bottom off the station is reported to consist of rock with poor holding ground. Vessels may anchor in a

depth of 44m about 0.2 mile E of Kilby Island, or in a depth of

29m about 0.2 mile NNW of Molholm Island, or close E of

Larsen Bank.

4.28 Caution.—It is reported that explosives are scattered across

an area of 500 squaremeters lying close E of Wilkes Station.

This area is marked by warning signs.

4.29 The Knox Coast extends W from the Hatch Islands to

Cape Hordern. From Cape Nutt, this coast extends 146 miles

NW to Cape Elliott.

4.29 The Underwood Glacier, located 2 miles W of Cape Nutt,

projects about 8 miles seaward. Merritt Island lies close to the

shore, about 22 miles NW of this glacier.

4.29 Bowman Island, 305m high, lies 29 miles NE of Cape Elliott. It is low, dumbbell-shaped, and ice domed. The center

section of this island is about 2 miles wide. Two rocky islands,

positions approximate, were reported (1948) to lie about 50

miles ENE of the N extremity of this island.

4.29 Mill Island (65°37'S., 101°00'E.), crescent-shaped and ice

capped, is 18 miles long and 4 miles wide near its middle.

4.29 Bowman Island and Mill Island are usually surrounded by

drift ice and grounded icebergs.

4.29 The Shackleton Ice Shelf, an extensive ice sheet, fronts the

coast and extends about 200 miles W from a point located 45

miles WNW of Merritt Island. It is fed by the glacial flows from

the continent and extends N for about 120 miles. The seaward

edge of this shelf is 18 to 31m high and is estimated to be about

180m thick. The observance of numerous grounded icebergs off

its NW face suggests that the shelf may be aground at some

points. Heavy drift ice is usually found along the N face of the

shelf, being carried there by the W setting current.

4.29 Tressler Bank, with depths of 85 to 177m, extends 25 miles

W and then 20 miles N from the NW end of the Shackleton Ice

Shelf. The Davis Sea lies on the W side of the Shackleton Ice

Shelf. The Queen Mary Coast extends E from Cape Filchner to

Cape Hordern.

4.30 Junction Corner (66°28'S., 94°35'E.) marks the

point where the W edge of the Shackleton Ice Shelf meets the

mainland. The surface here is undulating with extensive pressure ridges and crevasses. The ice-covered slopes of the continent, up to 914m high, stand S of Junction Corner. They extend

for about 30 miles but are devoid of any conspicuous landmarks.

4.30 From Junction Corner, the coast extends ESE for 38 miles to

Cape Moyes, an ice-covered point. The Roscoe Glacier flows

into the Shackleton Ice Shelf about midway between these two

points. The Gillies Islands lie 5 miles N of Cape Moyes. They

consist of two small, rocky outcroppings, 53m high. 

4.30 Masson Island lies 23 miles N of Cape Moyes. This island is

19 miles long, 9 miles wide, and 252m high.

4.30 From Cape Moyes, the coast extends SE for 5 miles and then

NE for 13 miles to Cape Dovers (66°29'S., 97°08'E.). Heavy

ice falls descend from the interior slopes between these two

capes. Henderson Island, ice capped and 241m high, lies 5

miles N of Cape Dovers. Bay of Winds, lying E of Cape Dovers, is 8 miles wide and recedes for about 12 miles. Alligator

Island, lying in the center of this bay, is 0.5 mile long, narrow,

and 150m high on its W side. Avalanche Rocks, lying on the

SE shore of the bay, are a distinctive outcrop of rocks, 180m

high. Delay Point, the E entrance point of the bay, consists of a

sheer rocky bluff, 183m high, which is surmounted by an ice

cap, at least 60m thick. Ice falls descend on either side of this

point.

4.30 Hippo Island lies 2 miles N of Delay Point. This island consists mostly of dark-colored gneiss, interspersed with bands of

red granite.

4.30 Cape Charcot, a sheer and rocky cliff, is located 7 miles E of

Delay Point and forms the NE extremity of the Melba Peninsula. Cape Kennedy, located 4 miles S of Cape Charcot, forms
176 Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 

Pub. 200

the S extremity. The Reid Glacier, 8 miles wide, descends from

the interior close SE of Cape Kennedy.

4.31 Cape Gerlache (66°30'S., 99°02'E.) is located 12

miles E of Cape Kennedy and forms the N extremity of the

Davis Peninsula. This peninsula is 180m high, 4 miles wide,

and forms the E limit of Reid Glacier.

4.31 David Island lies at the entrance to the Reid Glacier. A channel, 3 miles wide, separates this island from Cape Charcot and

another channel, 4 miles wide, leads between the island and the

Davis Peninsula. David Island is 87m high and has several bare

peaks and dark knolls. Watson Bluff, the NE extremity of the

island, is formed by a projecting bluff of ice-worn gneiss,

274m high. The island is 12 miles long, 10 miles wide, and its

summit consists of a bare ridge with steep, coarsely-weathered

faces.

4.31 The Northcliffe Glacier, lying S of the Davis Peninsula,

flows NNE and joins the Denman Glacier. This latter glacier

projects 45 miles N from the general line of the coast.

4.31 Mount Barr Smith, 1,252m high, stands 40 miles S of David

Island. Mount Strathcona, 976m high, stands 13 miles SSE of

Mount Barr Smith. The coast to the W of David Island is fronted by the W part of the Shackleton Ice Shelf. Bigelow Rock

lies off the W edge of the ice shelf, 23 miles NNE of Junction

Corner. This small rock is reported to show about 3m of exposed rock above sea level.

4.32 Farr Bay (66°35'S., 94°23'E.) lies close W of Junction Corner. It is about 10 miles wide and recedes for about 5

miles into the ice-clad coast. From the W side of this bay, the

land trends NW for 10 miles in a series of heavy, broken, and

crevassed ice falls. Helen Glacier lies 5 miles W of the bay and

is fronted by Helen Glacier Tongue, which projects 10 miles

seaward.

4.32 The Haswell Islands (66°31'S., 93°00'E.), a group of twelve

small and rocky islands, lie off Mabus Point, the W entrance

point of Wright Bay. The largest island is 0.7 mile long and

100m high.

4.32 Mirny Station (66°33'S., 93°01'E.), a Russian scientific station, is situated on the coast, close S of the Haswell Islands,

and is permanently manned.

4.32 From Mabus Point, the coast extends SW for 8 miles and

then NW for 15 miles to Cape Filchner. McDonald Bay lies on

the E side of this latter cape. Adams Island lies 8 miles W of

the Haswell Islands and 3 miles off the SW shore of the bay.

4.32 Drygalski Island (65°45'S., 92°30'E.) lies 45 miles NNW of

the Haswell Islands. This island is 9 miles wide, 327m high,

and has no rock visible. It is surmounted by a domed ice cap. A

current setting NW has been observed in the vicinity of this island.

4.32 The Wilhelm II Coast extends from Cape Filchner to Cape

Penck.

4.33 Cape Filchner (66°30'S., 92°12'E.), a sharp point on

the ice-capped coast, is located 9 miles W of Adams Island.

The mainland, 20 miles behind this cape, rises in a series of

broken, crevassed ridges, up to 914m high.

4.33 From Cape Filchner, the very irregular coast extends W for

28 miles to Krause Point and then SW for 46 miles to

Posaousky Glacier.

4.33 Gaussberg (66°48'S., 89°15'E.), an extinct volcano, is 350m

high and its pyramidal summit descends sharply on the N side

to the sea. Its N side consists of rocky terraces and bare slopes

covered with loose rubble. On the S side of this volcano, the

ice rises to a height of 122m. The slopes on the W and E sides

are covered with vast ice falls. Posadowsky Glacier, on the E

side, descends about 450m in height over a distance of 6 miles.

4.33 Cape Penck is located 40 miles W of Gaussberg. A large bay,

which recedes for 10 miles, lies between these two features and

Philippi Glacier is located at its head.

4.33 From Gaussberg, a large ice barrier, known as the West Ice

Shelf, extends NW as far as 66°S. The E edge of this shelf lies

along 89°E. This shelf fronts the coast up to about 81°E and is

reported to extend up to 100 miles seaward in places.

4.33 Barrier Bay (67°47'S., 81°15'E.) is formed between the SW

edge of this shelf and the coast to the W.

4.33 Four Ladies Bank (67°35'S., 77°30'E.) has a least known

depth of 124m and was discovered by Thorshavn (1937). Another bank, with a least depth of 97m, is reported to lie about

25 miles NNE of the shallowest part of Four Ladies Bank.

Princess Elizabeth Land

4.34 Princess Elizabeth Land was first sighted from the air

by Sir Douglas Mawson in 1931 and later partially charted by

Lars Christensen in 1934 and Klaus Mikkelsen in 1935. The E

part of this land has not yet been fully explored, but recent reconnaissance by Russian and Australian expeditions has greatly improved knowledge of this area. 

4.34 Princess Elizabeth Land extends from 73°E to 87°43'E,

where it joins Wilhelm II Land. The part of the coast lying between 76°E and 81°E is named the Ingrid Christensen Coast,

and that part lying between 81°E and 87°43'E is named the

King Leopold and Queen Astrid Coast.

4.34 Gillock Island (70°14'S., 71°32'E.), the extent of which is

not known, lies within the Amery Ice Shelf some distance off

Princess Elizabeth Land.

4.34 The King Leopold and Queen Astrid Coast was discovered

from the air in January 1934 by Lieutenant Gunnestad during a

flight from Thorshavn. No ice-free land was seen. The ice shelf

changes imperceptibly into continental ice and the ice edge is

liable to vary in position from year to year.

4.34 Banzare Bank (59°20'S., 76°50'E.) was reported to have a

least known depth of 184m and appeared to lie near the W end

of a large bank the E limit of which is yet to be determined.

Depths of less than 550m were reported to lie about 160, 250,

and 285 miles E of the Banzare Bank.

4.35 Prydz Bay (69°00'S., 76°00'E.) is contained between

the Amery Ice Shelf, on the W side, and the Ingrid Christensen

Coast, on the E.

4.35 The Larsemann Hills (69°25'S., 76°05'E.), consisting of

eleven rocky peninsulas, occupy about 11 miles of ice-free

coast extending between the Polar Record Glacier and the

Svenner Islands (69°02'S., 76°45'E.), which lie 70 miles NE

of Mount Caroline Mikkelsen.

4.35 Mount Caroline Mikkelsen (69°45'S., 74°07'E.) is 235m

high. Larsemann Hills rise to their tallest summit, 160m high,

on the second peninsula from the E end.

4.35 A number of bases are situated in this area. Zhongshan, a
Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 177

Pub. 200

Chinese station, stands in the this vicinity and Druzhnaya-4, a

Russian station, is situated on the promontory between Rogers

Glacier and Polar Record Glacier. Law Base, an Australian satellite station, is situated in this area. It is maintained from

Davis Base and often activated during the summer months.

4.35 Ranvik Bay (69°00'S., 77°40'E.) is entered 15 miles NE of

the Svenner Islands and is bounded on its N side by the Rauer

Islands (68°51'S., 77°50'E.). These are a group of numerous

and small rocky islands which lie SW of the Sorsdal Glacier

(68°42'S., 78°10'E.). The glacier is about 10 miles wide and is

broken with ice falls and crevasses. Calving of the glacier front

occurs in the summer months. The glacier tongue extends up to

about 8 miles seaward, N of the Rauer Islands.

4.35 Vestfold Hills (68°33'S., 78°15'E.), a stretch of ice-free coast

about 40 miles long, lies NE of Sorsdal Glacier and stands 200

to 300m high. The ice cap, in which there are many ice-free saline lakes, can be seen rising behind this stretch of coast.

4.35 Davis Station (68°35'S., 77°58'E.), an Australian base, is

permanently manned and includes a radio station which operates daily between 2330 and 1400 UT (GMT) and for longer

periods on request. Numerous radio masts are situated in an area close N of the base buildings. A non-directional radiobeacon

is situated at the base and will be activated on request.

4.35 A large number of islands lie up to 3 miles offshore, 25 miles

NE of Davis Station. Davis Anchorage (68°14'S., 77°55'E.)

lies in the S part of these islands and has been reported to be

one of the best in the Antarctic. It is used by research vessels

and others engaged in re-supply operations. Vessels have remained at anchor here with winds of up to 50 knots. The bottom consists of patches of boulder-strewn medium sand lying

between areas of rocky outcrops. The center of the anchorage,

which has a depth of 22m, lies 0.4 mile S of Anchorage Island.

Anchorage Patch, with a depth of only 12.1m, lies near the

center. A wreck, with a depth of 19.8m, lies about 200m NE of

this patch. The inshore limits of the anchorage are formed by

O'Gorman Rocks, a rocky shoal area, which has a depth of only

1.3m. The W limits of the anchorage are formed by Newman

Shoal, which dries 0 3m, lying 0.6 mile W of Torckler Rocks.

A shoal, with a depth of 0.4m, lies about 200m S of Anchorage

Island.

4.35 Thala Rock (68°33'S., 77°53'E.) is reported to lie, position

approximate, about 0.3 mile W of the S extremity of Turner Island. This rock presents a danger to vessels approaching from

the N.

4.35 Beacons, constructed of drums welded together, stand at the

N end of Gardner Island, on the summit of Turner Island, and

on the N end Torckler Rock. These drums are rusted and are

hard to distinguish against the surrounding hillsides. Another

beacon, cross-shaped, stands on the S summit of Anchorage Island. A small wharf, situated close S of the station buildings,

can be used by small craft. It is constructed from boulders and

earth fill. Amphibious vehicles can land over the beach lying

adjacent to this wharf.

4.35 Caution.—Care should be taken when approaching Davis

Station as many large icebergs may be encountered to the W of

a line extending between Keuken Island and Barratt Island.

The area lying to the E of this line may contain numerous small

icebergs, bergy bits, and large quantities of brash ice. Local

knowledge is required when approaching this base.

4.35 A local magnetic anomaly has been reported to exist in the

vicinity of Davis Anchorage.

4.36 The Svenner Islands (69°02'S., 76°50'E.), a group of

ten, lie 11 miles from the continental ice. An area of foul

ground lies about 10 miles N of this group of small islands.

The Sostrene Islands, consisting of two rounded islands, lie

about 25 miles SW of the Svenner Islands and about 3 miles

from the coast.

4.36 The main coast located opposite the Sostrene Islands trends

SW for 45 miles to Mount Caroline Mikkelsen. From this peak,

the coast extends N and forms Sandefjord Ice Bay, at the head

of MacKenzie Bay. An island, known as Kista Rock, is the

southernmost in a chain of small islands which extends in a N/

S direction within Sandefjord Bay. This island is reported to lie

about 1 mile N of Mount Caroline Mikkelsen.

4.36 The Lars Christensen Coast is considered to be that part of

the continent lying between Murray Monolith and the head of

the Amery Ice Shelf.

4.36 MacKenzie Bay, which indents the Lars Christensen Coast,

is entered between the Amery Ice Shelf and Cape Darnley. On

the W side of this bay, the ice slopes upward to a height of

274m high and is very crevassed. It then rises more sharply to

the Prince Charles Mountains.

4.36 From its W edge located in MacKenzie Bay, the Amery Ice

Shelf extends S for over 190 miles. Seylla Glacier, Charybdis

Glacier, and Nemesis Glacier, descending from the Prince

Charles Mountains, join together and discharge on to this ice

shelf, about 150 miles S of Cape Darnley.

4.36 Gillock Island (70°26'S., 71°52'E.), the extent of which is

not fully known, lies within the ice shelf and some distance off

Princess Elizabeth Land.

4.36 MacRobertson Land lies near 68°S and extends from William Scoresby Bay to Cape Darnley. It consists of high ice-covered land through which bare peaks rise at various intervals

along or near the coast. The E part of this land is ice covered

and featureless, the shore presenting ice-cliffs, 18 to 43m high.

The W part is bordered by coastal cliffs and rocky headlands,

and fronted by numerous islands and rocks. In the S part, many

high peaks project above the ice slopes of the interior.

4.37 Cape Darnley (67°43'S., 69°30'E.), the extremity of

the Bjerko Peninsula, consists of an ice cliff, 90m high, behind

which slopes rise upward to a height of about 610m. Numerous

icebergs have been observed stranded up to 50 miles NE of this

cape. These grounded bergs often cause congestion of the drift

ice in this vicinity. A depth of 141m over a rocky bottom was

reported to lie close off the seaward extremity of the cape.

4.37 From Cape Darnley, the coast extends W for about 40 miles

to Point Williams. This latter point consists of a bluff which

forms the E entrance point of Shallow Bay.

4.37 Shallow Bay, a small recession in the ice cliffs, is about 10

miles wide. Dingsor Dome, a snow-covered mountain, stands

10 miles SSE of Cape Williams and is 792m high.

4.37 Murray Monolith, 244m high, stands 8 miles W of Cape

Rouse and two rocks, awash, lie between them. Landing may

be made at the foot of the W side of the monolith where the

slope is not so steep. A dangerous rock is reported (1983) to lie

about 5 miles NE of Cape Rouse.

4.37 Scullin Monolith (67°47'S., 66°42'E.) is crescent-shaped

and 433m high. A reef extends N from the W extremity of the
178 Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 

Pub. 200

monolith, but vessels can approach it safely from the NNE.

4.37 The Gustav Bull Mountains stand 15 miles W of Scullin

Monolith and several conspicuous peaks in this range rise

about 5 to 7 miles S of the coast.

4.37 From Scullin Monolith, the coast extending W as far as Cape

Daly is reported to be fronted by many uncharted rocks and below-water pinnacles. Shoals, with depths of less than 15m,

have been reported to exist in this area. The depths vary rapidly

in this vicinity and vessels are advised to exercise great care

when approaching the coast.

4.37 From Scullin Monolith, the coast extends gradually WNW

for 49 miles to Strahan Glacier. Cape Fletcher is located about

midway along this stretch with Martin Reef, awash, lying within 10 miles of it. Many rocks and grounded icebergs have been

observed in the vicinity of this cape. Foul ground has been reported to lie between 25 and 35 miles NNE of the cape.

4.37 Strahan Glacier descends to the sea and calves numerous icebergs which, together with drifting bergs, usually congest Nilsen Bay, which lies close W. Many bergs ground within the bay.

Stevens Rock, small and bare, lies 2 miles E of Strahan Glacier

and is 7m high. Storegg Bank lies about 30 miles N of Strahan

Glacier.

4.37 From Strahan Glacier, the coast extends W, in a gradual convex arc, for 42 miles to Horseshoe Harbor. Cape Daly, an icecovered promontory, is located about midway along this

stretch. It is inconspicuous except when viewed from W and

NW.

4.37 Several groups of snow-free islands lie within 15 miles NW

of Cape Daly. These include the Thorgaut Islands, the Robinson Islands, and the Douglas Islands. The latter group, which

rises to a height of 18m, is the outermost.

4.37 Holme Bay is entered between Gibbney Island and an unnamed point, 19 miles E. This bay is obstructed by a large

number of scattered islands and rocks. A group of islands,

known as the Rookery Islands, lies 2 miles offshore on the W

side of the bay. 

4.38 Mawson Station (67°36'S., 62°52'E.), an Australian

scientific base, is situated at the head of Horseshoe Harbor and

is permanently manned. This base consists of about 48 buildings and includes a power station, an aircraft hangar, a radio

station, several garages for transport, a clinic, several laboratories, and living quarters.

4.38 Horseshoe Harbor may be approached through Holme Bay

and Kista Strait, on the W side of which lie the Flat Islands and

Moller Bank. Welch Rocks, Welch Island, and a group known

as Jocelyn Islands lie on the E side. The latter group consists of

Verner Island, Petersen Island, Teyssier Island, and Lee Island.

Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels in a depth of 73m

within the harbor, which is about 0.2 mile wide. Entrance Island, 0.2 mile long, lies across the N side of the harbor and Entrance Shoal, with a depth of 7.9m, lies about 200m W of it.

Local knowledge is essential for entering the harbor and approaching the station. Vessels are advised to contact the base

by radio before attempting to enter.

4.38 Falla Bluff, a prominent headland, is located at the head of

Utstikkar Bay. It is rocky, steep, and 366m high. Cape Simpson, a conspicuous and rocky bluff, is located at the N extremity of Ufs Island, 10 miles NW of this headland.

4.38 Byrd Head, a rocky and conspicuous outcrop, is located 2.5

miles WNW of Cape Simpson and is 366m high. Howard Bay

lies between Byrd Head and Cape Simpson.

4.38 Cape Bruce, a bold and conspicuous bluff, is located 6 miles

NW of Byrd Head. It is 184m high and forms the E entrance

point of Oom Bay.

4.38 Oom Bay, about 2 miles wide, affords good shelter. However, several islands lie off the entrance and stranded icebergs

have been observed in their vicinity. Landing may be made on

shelving beaches fringing the lee sides of some of the islands.

4.38 Campbell Head, 182m high, is located 3 miles WNW of

Cape Bruce. It consists of a bold, conspicuous promontory and

forms the W entrance point of Oom Bay. Two small islands lie

close off this promontory and a bay, which is filled by a glacier,

lies on its W side. 

4.38 The Kemp Coast extends between the head of Edward VII

Bay and William Scoresby Bay. This coast consists of ice cliffs

that are occasionally indented by bays. Except to the E of Cape

Wilkins, mostly no bare rock is visible. Until recent years,

heavy drift ice has rendered this coast inaccessible to vessels.

4.38 From Campbell Head, the ice-covered coast extends W for

20 miles to Trethewry Point, a rocky promontory projecting

about 1 mile N from the coast. Rocky islands lie 0.5 mile E and

close W of the seaward extremity of this point.

4.38 Numerous islands front the coast to the E of William Scoresby Bay. Dales Island, 50m high, lies 13 miles N of Trethewry

Point (67°24'S., 59°47'E.). The Warnock Islands and Farrington Island lie 1 mile S and 4.5 miles SSW, respectively, of

Dales Island. The Twins, two islands, lie 1.5 miles E of Farrington Island.

4.38 William Scoresby Archipelago, which consists of numerous

small and ice-free islands, extends for about 10 miles in a NE/

SW direction between Farrington Island and the mainland

coast to the S.

4.39 The Sheehan Islands (67°22'S., 59°46'E.), two in

number, lie 1 mile N of Trethewry Point and at the E end of another group. These islands, which are separated by a narrow

strait, are 0.5 mile long and have steep, rocky slopes with a

rugged outline. Islay Island, 3 miles long and 1 mile wide, lies

close W of the Sheehan Islands. Hum Island lies 0.8 mile SW

of McDonald Point, the E extremity of Islay Island. Couling Island, 114m high, lies 0.5 mile N of Islay Island.

4.39 Macfie Sound separates the SW portion of William Scoresby

Archipelago from Bertha Island. This sound extends in an E/W

direction and is about 1 mile wide. A sounding of 183m, with

no bottom, was observed in the E part of the entrance to this

sound, midway between Sheehan Island and Trethewry Point.

4.39 William Scoresby Bay is entered between Green Point and

Hope Point. Bertha Island, which is low at its E end and 122m

high at its W end, is formed of fine-grained gneiss-like rock of

a lightish-brown hue. The island also has many intrusions of a

darker, igneous rock and a remarkable quantity of garnets.

These rocks show the effects of severe wind erosion, being

weathered into fantastic shapes.

4.39 The head of William Scoresby Bay is reported to consist of

two coves, separated by a tongue of ice. No suitable anchorage

has been found within this bay, but it affords excellent shelter

in any weather and a landing may be made in several places.

The shores of the bay are backed by hills, up to 213m high.

4.39 Cape Wilkins (67°15'S., 59°18'E.) is located 6 miles NW of
Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 179

Pub. 200

Green Point and forms the NW extremity of Fold Island. The

Tillett Islands lie 6 miles N of this cape.

4.39 Stefansson Bay lies close W of Cape Wilkins. This bay is

about three times the size of William Scoresby Bay and is open

to the N.

4.39 The Kemp Coast extends to the W of Stefansson Bay and

consists of a series of dark, bold headlands, up to about 180m

high. The continental ice flows to the sea between these headlands. The inland ice rises gently to an even skyline which is

broken only by Kemp Peak, 340m high, standing 16 miles SW

of Cape Wilkins.

4.39 The Law Islands lie on the W side of the entrance to Stefansson Bay, 5 miles W of Cape Wilkins. Blackrock Head, a conspicuous and rocky outcrop, is located on the mainland behind

these islands, 7 miles W of Cape Wilkins.

4.39 From Blackrock Head, the coast trends NW for 3 miles to a

bold headland, 180m high.

4.40 West Stack (67°03'S., 58°03'E.), a rocky outcrop, is

located 3 miles NW of East Stack. From this outcrop, the coast

projects SSW in the form of a rocky bluff. Edward VIII Bay,

about 12 miles wide, is entered about 20 miles NW of West

Stack. This bay lies between the Oygarden Group, on the S

side, and the Austnes Peninsula, on the N. The Oygarden

Group, a chain of rocky and irregular islands, extends for 17

miles in a E/W direction close off the mainland. Kvarsnes

Foreland, a prominent and rocky headland, is located on the S

shore of the bay and is 107m high.

4.40 Cape Boothby, rounded and prominent, is located 8 miles N

of the entrance to Edward VII Bay. This cape is fronted by below-water rocks which extend up to 2 miles seaward.

4.40 Kloa Point, a prominent promontory, projects about 1 mile E

from the coast. It was reported (1961) that a dangerous rock

lies about 1.3 miles NNW of this point.

4.40 Rayner Peak stands 60 miles WSW of West Stack and low,

ice-covered land extends N for some distance from it. Several

peaks, up to 457m high, stand to the W of Cape Boothby. 

4.40 From Cape Boothby, the coast extends NW for 13 miles to

Cape Davis and consists of an unbroken ice cliff, 18 to 36m

high.

4.40 Magnet Bay (66°22'S., 56°20'E.), about 8 miles wide, lies 9

miles WNW of Cape Davis. The Galten Islands lie close off the

E entrance point of this bay. The shore of the bay does not recede deeply into the land. Several prominent and rocky outcrops project from the head of this bay. The peaks of the

Nicholas Range rise 10 miles S of the bay. Cape Borley is located 48 miles NW of Cape Davis.

4.41 Enderby Land (67°30'S., 53°00'E.), extending between 45°E and Edward VII Bay, was discovered by Biscoe in

1831. It is covered by an ice sheet, above which stand several

conspicuous mountain ranges.

4.41 The continental shelf is clearly defined in this vicinity. It extends 15 to 25 miles seaward of Enderby Land and has depths

of 149 to 200m. Lines of grounded icebergs have been observed at intervals in this vicinity and these greatly influence

the movements of the coastal drift ice. Prevailing winds and

swells often drive the ice near to the land.

4.41 In summer, gales from between NE and E are not uncommon

in this area, but, at other times, they blow with great violence

from between S and SE. In summer, a persistent swell is reported to set toward the land from between N and NW. During

the summer, the current in this area is reported to set W at a

rate of about 7 miles per day.

4.41 From Cape Borley, the ice cliffs extend W for 14 miles to

Doyle Point. Conradi Peak, 1,039m high, stands 15 miles SW

of Doyle Point. From this point, the coast extends WSW for 5

miles and then WNW for 14 miles to Cape Batterbee, a rocky

outcrop fronting the face of the ice cap. Vicars Island lies 5

miles offshore, about 10 miles E of Cape Batterbee. Several

small islands and one large island lie close N of this cape.

4.41 Proclamation Island (65°51'S., 53°41'E.) is very prominent

and consists of darkish-colored rock. It has steep, rocky slopes

and a rounded summit, 244m high.

4.41 The Aagaard Islands, a group of small islands, lie close W of

Proclamation Island. These islands often serve to anchor the

drift ice which is carried by the currents along the coast and

held against the shore by the N swell.

4.41 The coast located behind the Aagaard Islands extends W for

30 miles to Cape Close. Simmers Peaks, four sharp and black

peaks, stand about 7 miles S of this part of the coast and are

840m high.

4.41 From Cape Close, the coast extends SW for 35 miles to Cape

Ann.

4.42 Cape Ann (66°10'S., 51°22'E.) is formed by a small

projection in the ice cliff. Mount Biscoe, a prominent and

black-colored peak, stands above this cape. This peak is 700m

high, sharp, and has steep slopes.

4.42 From Cape Ann, the coast extends in a general SSW direction for 40 miles to near 50°S where it trends S. This part of the

coast is usually fringed by dense drift ice.

4.42 White Island, the limits of which have not been fully defined, lies N of the Sakellari Peninsula, from which it is separated by Styles Strait.

4.42 Casey Bay, about 25 miles wide, indents the coast SW of the

Sakellari Peninsula. Pinn Island and a number of smaller islands lie at the head of this bay. Alasheyev Bight lies W of Casey Bay and is separated from it by a promontory, 25 miles

wide.

4.42 Molodezhnaya Station (67°40'S., 45°51'E.) is the main

Russian research base. It is permanently manned and includes

a meteorological station and an airfield.

4.42 Spooner Bay, which lies in the SE corner of Alasheyev

Bight, was entered by a vessel for the first time in 1961. It is reported that this bay is backed by a number of reddish-tinged,

rocky hills. The E side of the bay consists of a vertical face of

black rock with an organ-pipe formation, 100m high.

4.42 Queen Maud Land extends between Coats Land and Enderby Land. Very little exposed rock lies near the coast of this land

and the shore is mostly formed by high cliffs of continental ice

or shelf ice. Depths of 1,646m were reported to lie at the edge

of the ice and indicated that the shelf was floating and that the

edge of the land mass was located still some distance to the S.

4.42 The E coast of Lutzow-Holm Bay is formed by a vast ice

sheet which slopes gently W to the sea and terminates in an ice

cliff, 20m high. Numerous bare, rocky areas, some of which

are quite extensive, protrude through this ice sheet. Many islands fringe this part of the coast, which extends S to 70°S.
180 Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 

Pub. 200

4.43 The Flatvaer Islands (69°01'S., 39°33'E.), a group

which includes Ongul Island, lie 3 miles offshore, near the E

entrance point of Lutzow-Holm Bay. The islands are hilly, 30

to 49m high, and are filled by small ponds, which are ice free

during the summer.

4.43 Syowa Station (69°00'S., 39°35'E.), a main Japanese base, is

situated within a bay on the NE side of Ongul Island and is permanently manned.

4.43 From the head of Lutzow-Holm Bay, the W shore of the bay

extends N for 30 miles to an unnamed point. Padda Island,

255m high, lies 5 miles N of this point.

4.43 The coast then extends in a general NW direction for about

110 miles to the N extremity of the Riiser-Larsen Peninsula.

4.43 The Prince Harald Coast was discovered by air in 1937 and

is considered to extend between the N extremity of the RiiserLarsen Peninsula, in 34°E, and the mainland in the vicinity of

the Flatvaer Islands, in 40°E. A chain of reddish-colored icefree mountains is reported to stand along this coast.

The Riiser-Larsen Peninsula to Cape Norvegia

4.44 The Princess Ragnhild Coast, discovered by air inthe

1931, is considered to extend between 20°30'E and 34°00'E.

This coast consists of a continuous ice cliff with high mountain

ranges rising in the interior. The Riiser-Larsen Peninsula separates the Princess Ragnhild Coast from the Prince Harald

Coast.

4.44 Gunnerus Bank lies off the Riiser-Larsen Peninsula. It extends about 120 miles seaward and has a least known depth of

421m. This bank drops abruptly off to depths of over 1,800m at

its W side, but slopes gradually on its E side.

4.44 From the NE end of the Riiser-Larsen Peninsula, the coast

extends W for 20 miles and forms the N shore of a broad peninsula. The ice-covered land in this vicinity is devoid of nunataks or bare outcrops. From this latter peninsula, the coast

extends SW for about 250 miles in the form of high ice cliffs to

23°'E. It then extends W to 20°E.

4.44 Breid Bay (70°15'S., 24°15'E.), about 20 miles wide, indents the ice cliffs and recedes S for about 15 miles. This bay is

reported to have a least depth of 187m. The former Roi Boudouin Station, which was closed in 1967, was situated on the S

side of this bay.

4.44 The Sor Rondane Mountains, up to 3,460m high, stand about

75 miles S of Breid Bay. From the coast in the vicinity of the

bay, the ice-covered land rises gradually to a height of about

700m high at the base of these mountains. The ice in this vicinity, including Godel Ice Port, was reported (1960) to extend to

about 70°05'S.

4.44 The Princess Astrid Coast, discovered by sea in 1931, is considered to extend between 5°E and 20°E.

4.44 Novolazerevskaya Station (70°46'S., 11°50'E.), a permanently-manned Russian scientific base, and Georg Forster

Station (70°46'S., 11°50'E.), a permanently-manned German

scientific base, are situated along this coast. A coastal radio

station is situated at the former base.

4.44 From the latter station, the land mass extends 180 miles SW

and rises fairly evenly to the Wohlthat Mountains, which are

4,300m high.

4.44 The Princess Martha Coast is considered to extend between

5°E and 20°W. It is fronted by a cliffed ice face, 21 to 36m

high. The W part of this coast consists of low, continental ice

without any nunataks. The E part consists of slopes rising to

the Maudheimvidda Mountains, which are over 3,000m high.

4.44 At position 70°00'S, 00°30'W, a tongue of ice projects N for

about 65 miles and varies in width from about 55 miles at its

base to about 25 miles at its seaward end. This tongue has been

determined to be afloat with depths of over 2,000m lying near

its edge. Many icebergs have been observed packed up against

this ice tongue in a chaotic mass. These bergs are apparently

carried by the coastal current.

4.45 Byrd Ice Port (69°34'S., 00°41'W.), an indentation,

lies on the W side of a tongue of ice which projects N from

Fimbul Ice Shelf. This ice port was reported (1964) to be about

5 miles wide and to be fringed by ice cliffs, 6 to 18m high. Several islands were reported to lie within this tongue of ice.

4.45 From Byrd Ice Port, the ice tongue continues SW for about

20 miles to the mouth of an unnamed ice port. This latter ice

port is about 13 miles wide and depths of 263 to 2,295m have

been reported to lie within its entrance. The shelf then extends

SSW for about 18 miles where it is interrupted by a stretch of

the the Princess Martha Coast, 17 miles long, which is not

fronted by a shelf.

4.45 Sanae Station (70°18'S., 02°22'W.), a South African base, is

situated near the NE extremity of a peninsula which separates

the Jelburt Ice Shelf from the Fimbul Ice Shelf.

4.45 From the E entrance point of Norsel Ice Port (71°01'S.,

11°00'W.), the shelf was reported (1964) to extend 140 miles

ENE to the W end of a peninsula which forms the E side of the

Jelbart Ice Shelf. An island lies close off the W side of the Jelbert Ice Shelf. 

4.45 Atka Ice Port (70°35'S., 07°51'W.) is 15 miles wide at its

entrance and was reported (1982) to extend for about 14 miles

S into the shelf. It was reported (1955) that wave action had undercut the shelf in numerous places and several underwater ice

rams projected up to 30m seaward. The shelf within the ice

port is 4 to 12m high. A depth of 50m was reported to lie close

to the ice front in the SW part of this ice port.

4.45 Georg Von Neumayer Station (70°39'S., 08°15'W.), a permanently-manned German scientific base, is situated close W

of Atka Ice Port. Anchorage may be obtained in a depth of

147m off the W side of Atka Ice Port and also in a depth of

73m within its SW corner. Vessels, with icebreaker assistance,

can usually reach Atka Ice Port by approaching it between

15°W and 5°W and then proceeding along the ice front.

4.45 Norsel Ice Port, an inlet on the shelf, lies 32 miles NE of

Cape Norvegia and was reported (1961) to be 5 miles wide. It

was the unloading point for Maudheim Bay during the Norwegian-Swedish-British Expedition of 1950 when the depth

alongside was reported to be 393m.

4.45 Druzhnaya-3 (71°06'S., 10°49'W.), a Russian base, operates

during the summer.

4.45 Svea Station (74°35'S., 11°13'W.), a Swedish base, is situated about 200 miles S of Cape Norvegia and is manned during

the summer.

4.45 Between the W limit of the Princess Martha Coast and Cape

Norvegia, 215 miles NE, the coast is fronted by an ice shelf

about 50 miles wide.

4.45 Cape Norvegia (71°20'S., 12°18'W.) forms an angle in the
Sector 4. The Antarctic—Cape Colbeck to Cape Norvegia 181

Pub. 200

coast and on its W side lies a bight known as Seal Bay. Two

small islands lie on the SW side of this bay. The cape is fronted

by an ice shelf, about 50 miles wide. Further information can

be found in paragraph 1.2.
183

Pub. 200

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

ADELAIDE ISLAND 67 15 S 68 30 W 3.42

ADMIRALEN PEAK 62 06 S 58 30 W 2.25

ADMIRALTY BAY 62 10 S 58 25 W 2.25

ADMIRALTY SOUND 64 20 S 57 10 W 1.27

AITCHO ISLANDS 62 24 S 59 47 W 2.32

ALEXANDER ISLAND 71 00 S 70 00 W 3.54

AMPHIBOLITE POINT 60 41 S 45 21 W 2.8

ANDVORD BAY 64 50 S 62 39 W 3.13

ANTARCTIC PENINSULA 69 30 S 65 00 W 1.7

ANTARCTIC SOUND 63 20 S 56 45 W 1.32

ARCHER POINT 69 11 S 157 39 E 4.21

ARDLEY ISLAND 62 13 S 58 56 W 2.23

ARGENTINE ISLANDS 65 15 S 64 16 W 3.31

ARTHUR HARBOR 64 46 S 64 04 W 3.24

ASH POINT 62 29 S 59 39 W 2.33

ASPLAND ISLAND 61 28 S 55 55 W 2.19

ASSES EARS 62 19 S 59 45 W 2.32

ASTOR ISLAND 62 39 S 61 11 W 2.42

ASTROLABE ISLAND 63 17 S 58 40 W 3.3

ASTROLABLE NEEDLE 64 08 S 62 36 W 3.12

ATHERTON ISLANDS 62 06 S 58 29 W 2.21

ATKA ICE PORT 70 35 S 07 51 W 4.45

ATKINSON CLIFFS 71 17 S 168 55 E 4.19

ATRICEPS ISLAND 60 47 S 45 09 W 2.7

AUSTIN ROCKS 63 26 S 61 04 W 3.6

AUVERT BAY 66 14 S 65 45 W 3.38

AVIAN ISLAND 67 46 S 68 54 W 3.47

B

BACKDOOR BAY 77 34 S 166 12 E 4.5

BALLENY ISLANDS 66 55 S 163 20 E 4.20

BANZARE BANK 59 20 S 76 50 E 4.34

BARCLAY BAY 62 33 S 60 58 W 2.41

BARNARD POINT 62 46 S 60 21 W 2.43

BARRIER BAY 67 47 S 81 15 E 4.33

BARROS ROCKS 65 17 S 64 12 W 3.33

BEASCOCHEA BAY 65 30 S 64 00 W 3.34

BEAUFORT ISLAND 76 56 S 166 56 E 4.4

BELL POINT 62 07 S 58 53 W 2.21

BELLINGSHAUSEN SEA 71 00 S 85 00 W 3.58

BENEDEN HEAD 64 46 S 62 42 W 3.12

BERKNER ISLAND 79 30 S 47 30 W 1.5

BERRY HEAD 60 42 S 45 37 W 2.11

BIGO BAY 65 43 S 64 30 W 3.34

BISCOE BAY 64 48 S 63 50 W 3.25

BISCOE ISLANDS 66 00 S 66 30 W 3.35

BISMARCK STRAIT 64 51 S 64 00 W 3.4

BLACK COAST 71 45 S 62 00 W 1.9

BLACK HEAD 66 06 S 65 37 W 3.37

BLACK ISLAND 78 07 S 166 05 E 4.8

BLACK POINT 62 29 S 60 43 W 2.41

BLYTHE BAY 62 28 S 60 20 W 2.40

BOND POINT 62 41 S 60 48 W 2.44

BONERT ROCK 62 27 S 59 43 W 2.34

BORCEGUI ISLAND 61 03 S 55 09 W 2.17

BORGE BAY 60 43 S 45 37 W 2.10

BORGEN BAY 64 45 S 63 31 W 3.18

BOUQUET BAY 64 03 S 62 10 W 3.12

BOURGEOIS FJORD 67 40 S 67 05 W 3.40

BOWLER ROCKS 62 21 S 59 50 W 2.32

BOWMAN COAST 68 10 S 65 00 W 1.15

BOWMAN PENINSULA 74 47 S 62 22 W 1.8

BOYD STRAIT 62 50 S 62 00 W 2.46

BRABANT ISLAND 64 15 S 62 20 W 3.10

BRANSFIELD ISLAND 63 11 S 56 36 W 1.42

BRANSFIELD STRAIT 63 00 S 59 00 W 3.1

BREID BAY 70 15 S 24 15 E 4.44

BRIDGEMAN ISLAND 62 04 S 56 44 W 2.19

BRIDGER BAY 60 33 S 45 51 W 2.14

BRUCE ISLAND 64 54 S 63 08 W 3.14

BRUNT ICE FALLS 75 55 S 25 00 W 1.2

BURKE ISLAND 73 08 S 105 06 W 3.61

BUTLER PASSAGE 64 58 S 63 44 W 3.26

BUTTRESS NUNATAKS 72 22 S 66 47 W 3.56

BYERS PENINSULA 62 38 S 61 05 W 2.42

BYRD ICE PORT 69 34 S 00 41 W 4.45

C

CAIRD COAST 76 00 S 24 00 W 1.2

CALMETTE BAY 68 03 S 67 10 W 3.50

CAMP POINT 67 58 S 67 19 W 3.49

CANTO POINT 62 27 S 59 44 W 2.33

CAPE ADARE 71 17 S 170 14 E 4.18

CAPE ANDREAS 64 00 S 60 43 W 3.4

CAPE ANN 66 10 S 51 22 E 4.42

CAPE ANNA 64 35 S 62 26 W 3.9

CAPE ARMITAGE 77 51 S 166 40 E 4.6

CAPE BARNE 77 35 S 166 14 E 4.5

CAPE BAYLE 64 17 S 63 10 W 3.22

CAPE BELSHAM 61 05 S 54 53 W 2.17

CAPE BENNETT 60 37 S 45 13 W 2.15

CAPE BERTEAUX 68 50 S 67 30 W 3.53

CAPE BIRD 77 10 S 166 41 E 4.3

CAPE BOWLES 61 19 S 54 06 W 2.16

CAPE BROWN 69 16 S 69 45 W 3.55

CAPE BRYANT 71 12 S 60 55 W 1.11

CAPE BURKS 74 45 S 136 50 W 3.63

CAPE BYRD 69 38 S 76 07 W 3.57

CAPE CHEETHAM 70 18 S 162 42 E 4.21

CAPE CHOCOLATE 77 56 S 164 35 E 4.8

CAPE COLBECK 77 10 S 158 00 W 3.64

CAPE CONWAY 62 51 S 61 24 W 2.43

CAPE CROZIER 77 31 S 169 24 E 4.4

CAPE DANGER 62 27 S 60 23 W 2.39

CAPE DARNLEY 67 43 S 69 30 E 4.37

CAPE DART 73 07 S 126 09 W 3.62

CAPE DENISON 67 00 S 142 40 E 4.25

CAPE DOVERS 66 29 S 97 08 E 4.30

CAPE DUBOUZET 63 16 S 57 01 W 3.2

CAPE EVA 68 42 S 90 37 W 3.59

CAPE EVANS 77 38 S 166 24 E 4.5

CAPE FILCHNER 66 30 S 92 12 E 4.33
184 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 200

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

CAPE FLYING FISH 72 06 S 102 29 W 3.61

CAPE FOLGER 66 08 S 110 44 E 4.28

CAPE FRESHFIELD 68 20 S 151 00 E 4.21

CAPE GARCIA 65 44 S 64 40 W 3.34

CAPE GARRY 63 21 S 62 16 W 2.47

CAPE GERLACHE 66 30 S 99 02 E 4.31

CAPE GRAY 66 51 S 143 22 E 4.24

CAPE HANSEN 60 40 S 45 35 W 2.8

CAPE HINKS 69 12 S 63 07 W 1.14

CAPE HOOKER 63 18 S 61 59 W 2.47

CAPE HURLEY 67 36 S 145 18 E 4.23

CAPE JAMES 63 06 S 62 45 W 2.46

CAPE KATER 63 46 S 59 54 W 3.3

CAPE KJELLMAN 63 44 S 59 24 W 3.3

CAPE LANCASTER 64 51 S 63 44 W 3.18

CAPE LEGOUPIL 63 19 S 57 55 W 3.2

CAPE LINDSEY 61 06 S 55 29 W 2.17

CAPE LLOYD 61 07 S 54 01 W 2.16

CAPE LOOKOUT 61 16 S 55 12 W 2.18

CAPE MELVILLE 62 02 S 57 37 W 2.28

CAPE MONACO 64 42 S 64 15 W 3.23

CAPE MURRAY 64 21 S 61 38 W 3.9

CAPE NEUMAYER 63 42 S 60 34 W 3.5

CAPE NORVEGIA 71 20 S 12 18 W 1.2,

4.45

CAPE RENARD 65 01 S 63 46 W 3.27

CAPE REY 66 36 S 66 27 W 3.40

CAPE ROBERTS 77 02 S 163 12 E 4.11

CAPE ROQUEMAUREL 63 33 S 58 56 W 3.3

CAPE ROYDS 77 33 S 166 09 E 4.5

CAPE SAENZ 67 33 S 67 39 W 3.41

CAPE SHEFFIELD 62 37 S 61 19 W 2.42

CAPE SMITH 62 52 S 62 19 W 2.46

CAPE STERNECK 64 04 S 61 02 W 3.8

CAPE TENNYSON 77 22 S 168 18 E 4.3

CAPE VIK 60 40 S 45 40 W 2.8

CAPE VOSTOK 69 08 S 72 11 W 3.56

CAPE WALLACE 63 13 S 62 15 W 2.47

CAPE WASHINGTON 74 39 S 165 25 E 4.15

CAPE WILD 68 23 S 149 07 E 4.22

CAPE WILKINS 67 15 S 59 18 E 4.39

CAPE WILLEMS 64 57 S 63 16 W 3.27

CAPE YELCHO 61 03 S 55 22 W 2.17

CAPE ZUMBERGE 76 14 S 69 40 W 1.6

CARAQUET ROCK 62 07 S 59 02 W 2.21

CARDOZO COVE 62 10 S 58 37 W 2.25

CARROLL INLET 73 18 S 78 30 W 3.58

CASEY STATION 66 17 S 110 32 E 4.28

CASTLE ROCK 62 48 S 61 34 W 2.43

CASY ISLAND 63 14 S 57 30 W 3.2

CAVE ISLAND 62 27 S 60 04 W 2.37

CECILIA ISLAND 62 25 S 59 43 W 2.32

CENOBITE ROCKS 67 35 S 69 18 W 3.46

CHANNEL ROCK 62 28 S 60 05 W 2.37

CHAOS REEF 62 22 S 59 46 W 2.32

CHAPMAN POINT 65 55 S 61 20 W 1.17

CHAPMAN ROCKS 62 30 S 60 29 W 2.41

CHARCOT ISLAND 69 45 S 75 15 W 3.57

CHAUVEAU POINT 64 05 S 62 02 W 3.12

CHEAL POINT 60 38 S 45 59 W 2.12

CHESHIRE ROCK 62 22 S 59 45 W 2.32

CHINSTRAP COVE 61 14 S 54 11 W 2.16

CHIONIS ISLAND 63 53 S 60 38 W 3.6

CHRISTIANIA ISLANDS 63 57 S 61 27 W 3.7

CLARENCE ISLAND 61 12 S 54 05 W 2.16

CLOTHIER HARBOR 62 22 S 59 40 W 2.30

CLOWES BAY 60 44 S 45 38 W 2.9

COATS LAND 77 00 S 27 30 W 1.2

COCKERELL PENINSULA 63 24 S 58 08 W 3.3

COCKSCOMB HILL 62 05 S 58 30 W 2.25

COFFER ISLAND 60 45 S 45 08 W 2.7

COLLINS HARBOR 62 11 S 58 51 W 2.24

COLLINS POINT 63 00 S 60 35 W 2.45

COMMONWEALTH BAY 67 01 S 142 40 E 4.24

CONCEPTION POINT 60 31 S 45 41 W 2.14

CONDOR PENINSULA 71 46 S 61 30 W 1.11

CONDYLE POINT 63 35 S 59 48 W 3.4

CONE ISLAND 67 41 S 69 10 W 3.47

CONE ROCK 62 27 S 60 07 W 2.37

CONFUSION ISLAND 60 44 S 45 38 W 2.9

CONICAL ROCK 62 43 S 61 11 W 2.42

COPPERMINE COVE 62 23 S 59 42 W 2.31

COPPERMINE PENINSULA 62 22 S 59 43 W 2.30

CORA COVE 62 28 S 60 21 W 2.40

CORNWALLIS ISLAND 61 04 S 54 28 W 2.16

CORONATION ISLAND 60 37 S 45 35 W 2.7

COULMAN ISLAND 73 28 S 169 45 E 4.15

COURT NUNATAK 73 22 S 61 36 W 1.9

COVADONGA HARBOR 63 19 S 57 55 W 3.2

COVE ROCK 61 54 S 57 51 W 2.20

CRAGGY ISLAND 62 28 S 60 19 W 2.40

CREPIN POINT 62 06 S 58 29 W 2.25

CRUISER ROCKS 61 13 S 55 28 W 2.18

CRUTCH PEAK 62 28 S 59 56 W 2.33

CRUZEN ISLAND 74 47 S 140 40 W 3.63

CUTLER STACK 62 36 S 60 59 W 2.42

D

D'URVILLE ISLAND 63 05 S 56 20 W 1.41

D'URVILLE MONUMENT 63 25 S 56 18 W 1.39

DAMOY POINT 64 49 S 63 32 W 3.16

DANCO COAST 64 42 S 62 00 W 3.6

DANGER ISLANDS 63 26 S 54 41 W 1.39

DANNEBROG ISLANDS 65 03 S 64 08 W 3.27

DARBEL BAY 66 37 S 66 32 W 3.39

DARWIN ISLAND 63 26 S 54 46 W 1.39

DAVEY POINT 61 58 S 58 34 W 2.20

DAVIS ANCHORAGE 68 14 S 77 55 E 4.35

DAVIS COAST 64 00 S 60 00 W 3.4

DAVIS STATION 68 35 S 77 58 E 4.35

DAWSON-LAMBTON GLACIER 76 08 S 26 45 W 1.3

DEACON PEAK 62 06 S 57 54 W 2.27

DEAKIN BAY 68 23 S 150 10 E 4.22

DECEPTION ISLAND 62 57 S 60 38 W 2.45

DEE ISLAND 62 26 S 59 47 W 2.32

DELLBRIDGE ISLANDS 77 40 S 166 25 E 4.6

DENAIS STACK 62 08 S 58 30 W 2.25

DENIAU ISLAND 65 27 S 64 19 W 3.34

DESOLATION ISLAND 62 28 S 60 22 W 2.39

DESPAIR ROCKS 60 33 S 46 10 W 2.13

DEVILS POINT 62 40 S 61 11 W 2.42

DISCOVERY BAY 62 29 S 59 43 W 2.33

DOVE CHANNEL 60 45 S 45 36 W 2.9

DRAGON COVE 62 28 S 60 08 W 2.39

DRUZHNAYA-3 71 06 S 10 49 W 4.45

DRYGALSKI ISLAND 65 45 S 92 30 E 4.32

DUCHAYLARD ISLAND 65 43 S 65 07 W 3.36

DUFAYEL ISLAND 62 10 S 58 34 W 2.25

DUFF POINT 62 27 S 60 02 W 2.33

DUMOULIN ROCKS 63 26 S 59 47 W 3.4

DUNBAR ISLANDS 62 29 S 60 12 W 2.41

DUNDEE ISLAND 63 30 S 55 55 W 1.37

DUNLOP ISLAND 77 14 S 163 30 E 4.9

DUPERRE BAY 64 27 S 62 41 W 3.12

DUROCH ISLANDS 63 18 S 57 54 W 3.2

DUTHOIT POINT 62 19 S 58 50 W 2.21

DYER PLATEAU 70 30 S 65 00 W 1.13

E

EADIE ISLAND 61 28 S 55 57 W 2.19

EAGLE COVE 63 24 S 57 00 W 1.35

EAST CAPE 60 38 S 45 11 W 2.15

EDDYSTONE ROCKS 62 36 S 61 23 W 2.42

EDGELL BAY 62 16 S 58 59 W 2.22

EDINBURGH HILL 62 33 S 60 01 W 2.39

EDWARDS POINT 62 29 S 59 30 W 2.31

EKLUND ISLANDS 73 16 S 71 45 W 3.56

ELEPHANT ISLAND 61 10 S 55 14 W 2.17

ELEPHANT POINT 62 41 S 60 52 W 2.44

ELIZA ROCKS 62 26 S 60 14 W 2.36

ELLSWORTH LAND 75 30 S 80 00 W 3.58

EMELINE ISLAND 62 24 S 59 48 W 2.32

ENDERBY LAND 67 30 S 53 00 E 4.41

ENDURANCE GLACIER 61 10 S 55 08 W 2.18

ENGLISH STRAIT 62 27 S 59 38 W 2.31

EPHRAIM BLUFF 62 34 S 59 43 W 2.36

EREBUS AND TERROR GULF 63 55 S 56 40 W 1.31

ERRERA CHANNEL 64 42 S 62 36 W 3.13

ESCARPADA POINT 61 17 S 54 14 W 2.16

ESTHER HARBOR 61 55 S 57 59 W 2.20
Index—Gazetteer 185

Pub. 200

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

ETERNITY RANGE 69 46 S 64 34 W 1.13

EWING ISLAND 69 54 S 61 13 W 1.14

EZCURRA 62 10 S 58 34 W 2.25

F

FACTORY COVE 60 43 S 45 37 W 2.11

FALSE BAY 62 43 S 60 22 W 2.44

FALSE ROUND POINT 61 54 S 58 02 W 2.20

FAREWELL ROCK 63 52 S 61 01 W 3.5

FARR BAY 66 35 S 94 23 E 4.32

FERIN HEAD 65 59 S 65 20 W 3.37

FERRER POINT 62 30 S 59 42 W 2.34

FILCHNER ICE SHELF 79 00 S 40 00 W 1.5

FILDES STRAIT 62 14 S 59 00 W 2.21

FLANDRES BAY 65 02 S 63 20 W 3.27

FLAT TOP PENINSULA 62 13 S 59 02 W 2.21

FLATVAER ISLANDS 69 01 S 39 33 E 4.43

FLENSING ISLANDS 60 42 S 45 41 W 2.10

FLORENCE NUNATAK 62 13 S 58 37 W 2.24

FOLGER ROCK 62 16 S 59 15 W 2.22

FORELAND ISLAND 61 57 S 57 39 W 2.29

FORT POINT 62 33 S 59 35 W 2.36

FORT WILLIAM 62 23 S 59 43 W 2.30

FORTIN ROCK 62 29 S 60 44 W 2.41

FOSSIL BLUFF 71 20 S 68 17 W 3.55

FOUL POINT 60 32 S 45 29 W 2.15

FOUR LADIES BANK 67 35 S 77 30 E 4.33

FOYN HARBOR 64 33 S 62 01 W 3.9

FRANKLIN ISLAND 76 05 S 168 19 E 4.12

FREDRIKSEN ISLAND 60 44 S 44 59 W 2.5

FRIDTJOF ISLAND 64 53 S 63 22 W 3.15

FUENTE ROCK 62 30 S 59 41 W 2.33

FULMAR BAY 60 37 S 46 01 W 2.12

FYR CHANNEL 60 44 S 45 41 W 2.10

G

GAND ISLAND 64 24 S 62 51 W 3.21

GAUSSBERG 66 48 S 89 15 E 4.33

GEIKIE INLET 75 30 S 163 00 E 4.13

GENERAL BELGRANO III 77 54 S 45 59 W 1.5

GEORG FORSTER STATION 70 46 S 11 50 E 4.44

GEORG VON NEUMAYER STATION 70 39 S 08 15 W 4.45

GEORGE VI SOUND 71 00 S 68 00 W 3.56

GERD ISLAND 60 40 S 45 44 W 2.12

GERLACHE STRAIT 64 30 S 62 20 W 3.4

GIBBON BAY 60 39 S 45 11 W 2.15

GIBBOUS ROCKS 61 03 S 54 59 W 2.17

GIBBS ISLAND 61 28 S 55 34 W 2.19

GILBERT STRAIT 63 38 S 60 16 W 3.5

GILLOCK ISLAND 70 14 S 71 32 E 4.34

GILLOCK ISLAND 70 26 S 71 52 E 4.36

GIPPS ICE RISE 68 46 S 60 56 W 1.14

GLACIER BLUFF 62 32 S 59 48 W 2.35

GONZALEZ ISLAND 62 29 S 59 40 W 2.33

GOSLING ISLANDS 60 39 S 45 55 W 2.12

GOULD BAY 78 00 S 45 00 W 1.5

GOULDEN COVE 62 11 S 58 38 W 2.25

GOURDIN ISLAND 63 12 S 57 18 W 3.2

GOURLAY POINT 60 44 S 45 36 W 2.9

GOVERNOR ISLANDS 60 30 S 45 56 W 2.14

GRACE ROCK 62 22 S 59 01 W 2.23

GRAHAM LAND 66 00 S 63 30 W 1.15

GRANITE HARBOR 76 33 S 162 44 E 4.10

GRANT ISLAND 74 30 S 131 30 W 3.62

GRAPTOLITE ISLAND 60 44 S 44 28 W 2.2

GREAVES PEAK 62 28 S 59 59 W 2.33

GREENWICH ISLAND 62 28 S 59 48 W 2.33

GREENWICH ISLAND 62 31 S 59 47 W 2.31

GREGORY POINT 62 55 S 62 33 W 2.46

GROWLER ROCK 62 07 S 58 08 W 2.27

GRUNDEN ROCK LIGHT 63 24 S 56 58 W 1.34

GUESALAGA PENINSULA 62 29 S 59 40 W 2.33

GUYOU BAY 64 05 S 62 35 W 3.12

H

HALF MOON BEACH 62 29 S 60 47 W 2.41

HALF MOON ISLAND 62 36 S 59 55 W 2.39

HALFTHREE POINT 62 14 S 58 57 W 2.22

HALLEY BAY 75 24 S 26 30 W 1.3

HAMMER HILL 61 04 S 55 21 W 2.17

HANNAH POINT 62 39 S 60 37 W 2.44

HARDY COVE 62 32 S 59 35 W 2.36

HARMONY COVE 62 19 S 59 12 W 2.22

HARMONY POINT 62 19 S 59 15 W 2.22

HASWELL ISLANDS 66 31 S 93 00 E 4.32

HAUKEN ROCK 62 01 S 57 33 W 2.29

HAYES GLACIER 76 16 S 27 54 W 1.3

HEARST ISLAND 69 25 S 62 10 W 1.14

HELL GATES 62 40 S 61 11 W 2.43

HEMMEN ICE RISE 77 57 S 49 46 W 1.5

HERBERT SOUND 63 53 S 57 40 W 1.25

HERO BAY 62 31 S 60 27 W 2.39

HERVE COVE 62 11 S 58 33 W 2.25

HETTY ROCK 62 40 S 60 44 W 2.44

HEYWOOD ISLAND 62 20 S 59 41 W 2.30

HILTON INLET 71 57 S 61 20 W 1.10

HOBBS COAST 74 50 S 132 00 W 3.63

HOLLICK-KENYON PLATEAU 78 00 S 105 00 W 3.58

HOLMES ROCK 62 23 S 59 50 W 2.32

HORSESHOE BAY 77 32 S 166 12 E 4.5

HORSESHOE ISLAND 67 52 S 67 16 W 3.49

HOSEASON ISLAND 63 44 S 61 44 W 3.6

HOSPITAL POINT 62 32 S 59 47 W 2.35

HOWKINS INLET 73 40 S 60 54 W 1.8

HUGHES BAY 64 13 S 61 20 W 3.8

HUMBLE POINT 61 11 S 54 08 W 2.16

HURD PENINSULA 62 41 S 60 23 W 2.44

HUT COVE 63 24 S 56 59 W 1.35

I

IBAR ROCKS 62 27 S 59 43 W 2.34

ICEBERG BAY 60 39 S 45 30 W 2.8

INACCESSIBLE ISLANDS 60 34 S 46 44 W 2.14

INDIAN ROCKS 62 29 S 60 17 W 2.40

INOTT POINT 62 32 S 60 00 W 2.39

INTERCURRENCE ISLAND 63 55 S 61 24 W 3.7

INVERLEITH HARBOR 64 32 S 63 00 W 3.22

IQUIQUE COVE 62 29 S 59 40 W 2.34

J

JAGGED ISLAND 61 54 S 58 29 W 2.20

JASPER POINT 62 11 S 58 54 W 2.23

JEBSEN POINT 60 43 S 45 41 W 2.10

JOHNSONS DOCK 62 40 S 60 22 W 2.44

JOINVILLE ISLAND 63 15 S 55 45 W 1.39

JORGE ISLAND 62 23 S 59 46 W 2.32

JUNCTION CORNER 66 28 S 94 35 E 4.30

K

KAINAN BAY 78 10 S 162 30 W 4.3

KELLER PENINSULA 62 05 S 58 26 W 2.26

KEMP PENINSULA 73 08 S 60 15 W 1.9

KING GEORGE BAY 62 06 S 58 05 W 2.27

KING GEORGE ISLAND 62 00 S 58 15 W 2.20

KNIGHT ROCKS 62 50 S 61 35 W 2.43

KRAUL MOUNTAINS 73 30 S 14 10 W 1.2

L

LADY NEWNES BAY 73 40 S 167 30 E 4.15

LAJARTE ISLANDS 64 14 S 63 24 W 3.22

LANCHESTER BAY 63 55 S 60 06 W 3.4

LANGE GLACIER 62 07 S 58 30 W 2.25

LAPIDARY POINT 62 12 S 58 56 W 2.23

LARSEMANN HILLS 69 25 S 76 05 E 4.35

LARSEN ICE SHELF 67 30 S 62 30 W 1.14

LARSEN ISLANDS 60 36 S 46 03 W 2.12

LASSITER COAST 73 45 S 62 00 W 1.8

LAURIE ISLAND 60 44 S 44 37 W 2.2

LAVEBRUA ISLAND 63 02 S 60 35 W 2.45

LAVOISIER ISLAND 66 12 S 66 44 W 3.38
186 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 200

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

LAWS GLACIER 60 38 S 45 38 W 2.8

LAY-BROTHER ROCK 60 34 S 46 13 W 2.13

LECOINTE ISLAND 64 16 S 62 03 W 3.10

LEGRU BAY 62 10 S 58 12 W 2.27

LEHRKE INLET 70 49 S 61 45 W 1.12

LEONIE ISLAND 67 36 S 68 21 W 3.44

LIBERTY ROCKS 62 19 S 59 27 W 2.29

LION ISLAND 64 41 S 63 08 W 3.18

LIONS RUMP 62 08 S 58 07 W 2.27

LIUEGE ISLAND 64 02 S 61 55 W 3.11

LIVINGSTON ISLAND 62 36 S 60 30 W 2.38

LOE HEAD 62 09 S 58 08 W 2.27

LONE ROCK 62 21 S 58 50 W 2.21

LONG ROCK 62 42 S 61 11 W 2.42

LOPEZ NUNATAK 62 29 S 59 39 W 2.33

LOUBET COAST 67 00 S 66 00 W 3.40

LOW ISLAND 63 17 S 62 09 W 2.47

LUITPOLD COAST 77 30 S 32 00 W 1.3

LUSSICH COVE 62 06 S 58 21 W 2.26

LYDDAN ISLAND 74 25 S 20 45 W 1.2

LYNCH ISLAND 60 39 S 45 36 W 2.8

LYNX ROCKS 62 32 S 60 32 W 2.41

M

MABEL ISLAND 60 44 S 44 42 W 2.4

MACKELLER 62 05 S 58 28 W 2.25

MACKENZIE PENINSULA 60 45 S 44 48 W 2.3

MADDER CLIFFS 63 18 S 56 29 W 1.40

MAGNET BAY 66 22 S 56 20 E 4.40

MAINSAIL ROCK 60 37 S 46 03 W 2.13

MANSFIELD POINT 60 39 S 45 44 W 2.12

MARBLE POINT 77 26 S 163 50 E 4.9

MARIHOLM ISLAND 60 45 S 45 42 W 2.10

MARION COVE 62 13 S 58 48 W 2.24

MARSHALL BAY 60 39 S 45 38 W 2.8

MARSHALL PEAK 71 09 S 61 32 W 1.11

MARTEL 62 05 S 58 22 W 2.25

MARTELLO TOWER 62 06 S 58 08 W 2.27

MARTINS HEAD 62 11 S 58 14 W 2.25

MATHA STRAIT 66 34 S 67 30 W 3.38

MATTHEWS ISLAND 60 45 S 45 09 W 2.15

MAURY BAY 66 33 S 124 42 E 4.27

MAWSON STATION 67 36 S 62 52 E 4.38

MAXWELL BAY 62 15 S 58 51 W 2.23

MCDONALD ICE RUMPLES 75 28 S 26 18 W 1.3

MCFARLANE STRAIT 62 32 S 59 55 W 2.36

MCMURDO SOUND 77 30 S 165 00 E 4.5

MCMURDO STATION 77 51 S 166 40 E 4.7

MEADE ISLANDS 62 27 S 60 05 W 2.37

MEIER POINT 60 38 S 45 54 W 2.12

MEKO HARBOR 64 50 S 62 33 W 3.14

MELCHIOR ISLANDS 64 19 S 62 57 W 3.20

MELLONA ROCKS 62 18 S 59 30 W 2.29

MELSON ROCKS 60 31 S 46 10 W 2.13

MELVILLE PEAK 62 01 S 57 41 W 2.28

MERSEY SPIT 62 05 S 57 55 W 2.28

MERZ PENINSULA 72 15 S 61 05 W 1.10

MIDDLE ISLAND 61 58 S 57 38 W 2.29

MIERS BLUFF 62 43 S 60 27 W 2.44

MIKKELSEN HARBOR 63 54 S 60 47 W 3.6

MILL ISLAND 65 37 S 101 00 E 4.29

MIMAS PEAK 71 56 S 69 36 W 3.55

MINSTREL POINT 61 04 S 55 25 W 2.17

MIRNY STATION 66 33 S 93 01 E 4.32

MOE ISLAND 60 45 S 45 42 W 2.10

MOLODEZHNAYA STATION 67 40 S 45 51 E 4.42

MONICA ROCK 62 20 S 59 44 W 2.32

MONK ISLANDS 60 40 S 45 55 W 2.12

MONROE ISLAND 60 36 S 46 03 W 2.12

MONROE POINT 62 49 S 61 30 W 2.43

MONSIMET COVE 62 11 S 58 34 W 2.25

MONTRAVEL ROCK 63 09 S 58 02 W 3.3

MOON BAY 62 35 S 60 00 W 2.39

MORETON POINT 60 37 S 46 02 W 2.12

MORRIS ROCK 62 23 S 59 48 W 2.32

MORTON STRAIT 62 42 S 61 14 W 2.43

MOUNT AUSTIN 74 53 S 63 10 W 1.8

MOUNT BAGSHAWE 71 28 S 67 10 W 3.56

MOUNT BIRD 77 17 S 166 43 E 4.4

MOUNT BOWLES 62 37 S 60 12 W 2.38

MOUNT CAROLINE MIKKELSEN 69 45 S 74 07 E 4.35

MOUNT CHRISTI 62 55 S 62 24 W 2.46

MOUNT DISCOVERY 78 22 S 165 01 E 4.8

MOUNT ENGLAND 77 02 S 162 27 E 4.10

MOUNT EREBUS 77 32 S 167 10 E 4.3

MOUNT FOSTER 63 00 S 62 33 W 2.46

MOUNT FRIESLAND 62 40 S 60 12 W 2.38

MOUNT FRITSCHE 66 00 S 62 42 W 1.16

MOUNT GRIMMINGER 73 18 S 62 18 W 1.9

MOUNT HILL 70 56 S 61 42 W 1.12

MOUNT HOPE 69 46 S 64 34 W 1.13

MOUNT JACKSON 71 23 S 63 22 W 1.11

MOUNT KIRKWOOD 63 00 S 62 39 W 2.45

MOUNT LOLA 60 44 S 44 43 W 2.4

MOUNT PENDRAGON 61 15 S 55 14 W 2.18

MOUNT PISGAH 62 57 S 62 29 W 2.46

MOUNT POND 62 57 S 60 33 W 2.45

MOUNT RAMSAY 60 44 S 44 44 W 2.4

MOUNT TERRA NOVA 77 31 S 167 57 E 4.3

MOUNT TERROR 77 31 S 168 32 E 4.4

MOUNT THOMPSON 70 40 S 62 21 W 1.12

MOUNT TRICORN 73 58 S 61 45 W 1.8

MOUNT TYRRELL 69 58 S 69 30 W 3.55

MUCKLE BLUFF 61 09 S 54 52 W 2.18

N

NANCY ROCK 62 13 S 59 06 W 2.21

NANTUCKET INLET 74 35 S 61 45 W 1.8

NAPIER ROCK 62 10 S 58 26 W 2.25

NEBLES POINT 62 12 S 58 52 W 2.23

NEEDLE PEAK 62 44 S 60 11 W 2.44

NELSON ISLAND 62 18 S 59 03 W 2.21

NELSON ISLAND 62 18 S 59 13 W 2.21

NELSON STRAIT 62 20 S 59 18 W 2.29

NENY BAY 68 12 S 66 58 W 3.52

NEPTUNES BELLOWS 63 00 S 60 34 W 2.45

NEPTUNES WINDOW 62 59 S 60 33 W 2.45

NEW BEDFORD INLET 73 22 S 61 15 W 1.9

NEW HARBOR 77 36 S 163 51 E 4.9

NEW PLYMOUTH 62 37 S 61 12 W 2.42

NEW ROCK 63 01 S 60 44 W 2.45

NEWELL POINT 62 20 S 59 32 W 2.30

NICOLAS ROCKS 60 34 S 46 06 W 2.12

NOEL HILL 62 14 S 58 46 W 2.24

NORDENSKJUOLD COAST 64 30 S 60 30 W 1.17

NORMANNA STRAIT 60 40 S 45 38 W 2.9

NORSEL ICE PORT 71 01 S 11 00 W 4.45

NORTH POINT 60 41 S 45 38 W 2.9

NORWAY BIGHT 60 37 S 45 49 W 2.12

NOVOLAZEREVSKAYA STATION 70 46 S 11 50 E 4.44

NYGREN POINT 64 23 S 58 13 W 1.23

O

O'BRIEN ISLAND 61 30 S 55 58 W 2.19

O'SULLIVAN PEAK 71 26 S 62 06 W 1.11

OKUMA BAY 77 50 S 158 20 W 4.2

OLIPHANT ISLANDS 60 45 S 45 36 W 2.9

OLIVINE POINT 60 40 S 45 29 W 2.8

OMMANNEY BAY 60 33 S 45 32 W 2.15

ONGLEY ISLAND 62 26 S 59 54 W 2.33

ORFORD CLIFF 66 55 S 66 30 W 3.40

ORLEANS STRAIT 63 50 S 60 20 W 3.4

ORNE HARBOR 64 37 S 62 32 W 3.12

ORVILLE COAST 75 45 S 65 30 W 1.6

ORWELL BIGHT 60 43 S 45 23 W 2.7

OSCAR II COAST 65 45 S 62 30 W 1.16

OWEN ISLAND 61 56 S 58 26 W 2.20

P

PAAL HARBOR 60 43 S 45 36 W 2.10

PALMER ARCHIPELAGO 64 15 S 62 50 W 3.4

PALMER BAY 60 37 S 45 20 W 2.15

PALMER LAND 71 30 S 65 00 W 1.8

PALMER STATION 64 46 S 64 04 W 3.24

PARADISE HARBOR 64 51 S 62 54 W 3.14

PARRY PATCH 62 17 S 59 22 W 2.29
Index—Gazetteer 187

Pub. 200

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PAS ISLAND 67 41 S 67 28 W 3.41

PASSAGE ROCK 62 23 S 59 45 W 2.32

PAULET ISLAND 63 35 S 55 47 W 1.38

PAULING ISLANDS 66 32 S 66 58 W 3.40

PELSENEER ISLAND 64 39 S 62 13 W 3.10

PENDULUM COVE 62 56 S 60 36 W 2.45

PENGUIN ISLAND 62 06 S 57 54 W 2.28

PENGUIN POINT 60 31 S 45 56 W 2.12

PENOLA ISLAND 62 02 S 57 51 W 2.28

PETER I ISLAND 68 47 S 90 35 W 3.59

PETERMANN ISLAND 65 10 S 64 10 W 3.29

PETES PILLAR 63 00 S 60 33 W 2.45

PETREL ISLAND 66 40 S 140 00 E 4.25

PETTER BAY 60 43 S 45 10 W 2.15

PIG ROCK 62 19 S 58 48 W 2.21

PINNACLE ROCK 61 06 S 54 47 W 2.17

PITT ISLANDS 65 26 S 65 30 W 3.36

PITT POINT 63 51 S 58 24 W 1.20

PLAZA POINT 62 06 S 58 26 W 2.26

POINT ALDEN 66 48 S 142 02 E 4.25

POINT HENNEQUIN 62 08 S 58 24 W 2.25

POINT MARTIN 60 47 S 44 41 W 2.2

POINT THOMAS 62 10 S 58 30 W 2.25

POISSON HILL 62 29 S 59 39 W 2.33

POLYNESIA POINT 60 43 S 45 36 W 2.10

PORT CHARCOT 65 04 S 64 00 W 3.28

PORT FOSTER 62 57 S 60 39 W 2.45

PORT LOCKROY 64 49 S 63 30 W 3.17

PORTEOUS POINT 60 44 S 45 41 W 2.10

PORTERS PINNACLES 71 33 S 99 09 W 3.60

POSSESSION ISLANDS 71 56 S 171 10 E 4.17

POTTER COVE 62 14 S 58 42 W 2.24

POWELL ISLAND 60 41 S 45 03 W 2.5

POWELL ROCK 60 42 S 45 36 W 2.11

PRAM POINT 77 51 S 166 45 E 4.6

PRIME HEAD 63 13 S 57 17 W 3.2

PRINCE CHARLES STRAIT 61 05 S 54 35 W 2.16

PRINCE GUSTAV CHANNEL 63 50 S 58 15 W 1.19

PRINCESS MARTHA COAST 72 00 S 7 30 W 1.2

PRIOR ISLAND 75 41 S 162 54 E 4.12

PROCLAMATION ISLAND 65 51 S 53 41 E 4.41

PRONG POINT 60 32 S 45 34 W 2.14

PRYDZ BAY 69 00 S 76 00 E 4.35

PUERTO ECHEVERRIA 62 37 S 61 12 W 2.42

PULLEN ISLAND 72 35 S 60 57 W 1.9

PYRAMID ISLAND 62 26 S 60 06 W 2.36

R

RAMBLER HARBOR 66 28 S 66 27 W 3.39

RANVIK BAY 69 00 S 77 40 E 4.35

RAUER ISLANDS 68 51 S 77 50 E 4.35

RAYNER POINT 60 39 S 45 10 W 2.15

RECLUS PENINSULA 64 33 S 61 47 W 3.9

REID ISLAND 60 41 S 45 30 W 2.8

RENIER POINT 62 37 S 59 48 W 2.38

RETHVAL POINT 60 44 S 45 36 W 2.10

RETURN POINT 60 38 S 46 01 W 2.12

RIDLEY ISLAND 61 51 S 58 03 W 2.20

RIP POINT 62 15 S 58 59 W 2.22

ROBERT ISLAND 62 24 S 59 30 W 2.29

ROBERT POINT 62 28 S 59 23 W 2.30

RODMAN COVE 61 07 S 55 28 W 2.17

ROMEO ISLAND 62 23 S 59 55 W 2.33

RONNE ICE SHELF 78 30 S 61 00 W 1.6

ROOSEVELT ISLAND 79 25 S 162 00 W 4.3

ROSS ISLAND 77 30 S 168 00 E 4.3

ROSS POINT 62 21 S 59 08 W 2.23

ROTHSCHILD ISLAND 69 25 S 72 30 W 3.57

ROUND POINT 61 56 S 58 28 W 2.20

ROUX ISLAND 66 54 S 66 57 W 3.40

ROWETT ISLAND 61 17 S 55 13 W 2.18

RUGGED ISLAND 62 38 S 61 15 W 2.42

RUGGED ROCKS 62 37 S 59 48 W 2.38

RUPPERT COAST 75 45 S 141 00 W 3.64

RYDER BAY 67 34 S 68 20 W 3.43

RYSWYCK POINT 64 34 S 62 50 W 3.19

S

SADDLE ISLAND 60 38 S 44 50 W 2.5

SAFFERY ISLANDS 66 04 S 65 49 W 3.38

SAIL ROCK 63 02 S 60 57 W 2.45

SALIENT ROCK 62 22 S 59 20 W 2.29

SALVESEN COVE 64 24 S 61 20 W 3.8

SAN TELMO ISLAND 62 28 S 60 49 W 2.41

SANAE STATION 70 18 S 02 22 W 4.45

SANDEFJORD BAY 60 37 S 46 03 W 2.13

SANDEFJORD PEAKS 60 37 S 45 59 W 2.13

SANTA CRUZ POINT 62 31 S 59 33 W 2.36

SARTORIUS POINT 62 34 S 59 39 W 2.36

SAXUM NUNATAK 63 10 S 56 02 W 1.40

SCHIST POINT 60 43 S 45 14 W 2.8

SCOTIA BAY 60 46 S 44 40 W 2.2

SCOTT BASE 77 51 S 166 45 E 4.6

SCOTT ISLAND 67 24 S 179 55 W 4.20

SCULLIN MONOLITH 67 47 S 66 42 E 4.37

SEA LEOPARD PATCH 62 05 S 58 24 W 2.26

SEAL ISLANDS 60 58 S 55 24 W 2.17

SEALERS PASSAGE 61 02 S 55 23 W 2.17

SHARP PEAK 62 32 S 60 04 W 2.39

SHEEHAN ISLANDS 67 22 S 59 46 E 4.39

SHERRATT BAY 62 02 S 57 50 W 2.28

SHINGLE COVE 60 39 S 45 34 W 2.8

SHIRREFF COVE 62 28 S 60 48 W 2.41

SHMIDT POINT 66 55 S 67 02 W 3.41

SIDDONS POINT 62 33 S 60 26 W 2.39

SIERRA ISLAND 62 24 S 59 48 W 2.32

SIGNY ISLAND 60 43 S 45 38 W 2.9

SILLARD ISLANDS 66 37 S 67 34 W 3.45

SIMPSON ROCKS 61 58 S 57 23 W 2.29

SINBAD ROCK 62 10 S 59 02 W 2.21

SKEP POINT 64 03 S 57 18 W 1.26

SKILLING ISLAND 60 46 S 45 09 W 2.7

SMITH INLET 70 25 S 62 00 W 1.13

SMITH ISLAND 63 00 S 62 30 W 2.46

SNOW HILL ISLAND 64 30 S 57 15 W 1.28

SNOW ISLAND 62 47 S 61 23 W 2.43

SORLLE ROCKS 60 37 S 46 15 W 2.13

SORSDAL GLACIER 68 42 S 78 10 E 4.35

SOUTH BAY 62 40 S 60 23 W 2.44

SOUTH BAY 62 40 S 60 28 W 2.43

SOUTH EAST POINT 62 59 S 60 31 W 2.45

SOUTH ORKNEY ISLANDS 60 35 S 45 30 W 2.1

SOUTH SHETLAND ISLANDS 62 00 S 57 00 W 2.1

SPENCER HARBOR 60 41 S 45 09 W 2.15

SPHINX HILL 62 11 S 58 27 W 2.25

SPHINX ISLAND 65 54 S 64 53 W 3.35

SPHINX ROCK 60 37 S 46 05 W 2.13

SPINDRIFT ROCKS 60 42 S 45 40 W 2.10

SPINE ISLAND 60 36 S 46 02 W 2.13

SPIRO HILL 62 16 S 59 00 W 2.22

SPIT POINT 62 32 S 59 48 W 2.35

SPLITWIND ISLAND 65 02 S 63 56 W 3.28

SPRIGHTLY ISLAND 64 17 S 61 04 W 3.8

SQUARE BAY 67 51 S 67 00 W 3.49

SQUARE END ISLAND 62 10 S 58 59 W 2.21

STACKPOLE ROCKS 62 41 S 60 58 W 2.42

STANCOMB-WILLS GLACIER 75 18 S 19 00 W 1.2

STANLEY PATCH 62 59 S 60 38 W 2.45

START POINT 62 35 S 61 13 W 2.41

STEEPHOLM ISLAND 60 46 S 45 09 W 2.7

STEFANSSON STRAIT 69 26 S 62 25 W 1.14

STELLA CREEK 65 15 S 64 16 W 3.32

STENE POINT 60 39 S 45 42 W 2.12

STENHOUSE BLUFF 62 04 S 58 24 W 2.26

STIGANT POINT 62 02 S 58 45 W 2.21

STINKER POINT 61 13 S 55 23 W 2.18

STOKER ISLAND 62 24 S 59 51 W 2.32

STONINGTON ISLAND 68 11 S 67 01 W 3.52

STRANGER POINT 62 16 S 58 37 W 2.23

STUMP ROCK 62 05 S 58 08 W 2.27

STYGIAN COVE 60 42 S 45 37 W 2.11

SUFFIELD POINT 62 12 S 58 55 W 2.23

SUGARLOAF ISLAND 61 11 S 54 00 W 2.16

SUNSHINE GLACIER 60 38 S 45 30 W 2.8

SVEA STATION 74 35 S 11 13 W 4.45

SVENNER ISLANDS 69 02 S 76 45 E 4.35

SVENNER ISLANDS 69 02 S 76 50 E 4.36

SVIP ROCKS 62 35 S 61 38 W 2.43
188 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 200

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

SYOWA STATION 69 00 S 39 35 E 4.43

T

TABARIN PENINSULA 63 32 S 57 00 W 1.24

TABLE BAY 61 09 S 55 24 W 2.18

TABLE ISLAND 62 21 S 59 49 W 2.29

TARTAR ISLAND 61 56 S 58 29 W 2.20

TAY HEAD 63 21 S 55 34 W 1.39

TENORIO ROCK 62 28 S 59 44 W 2.34

TERNYCK NEEDLE 62 05 S 58 16 W 2.26

TERRA FIRMA ISLANDS 68 42 S 67 32 W 3.53

TERRA NOVA BAY 74 50 S 164 30 E 4.14

THALA ROCK 68 33 S 77 53 E 4.35

THE KNOLL 77 31 S 169 21 E 4.4

THE POINTERS 62 36 S 61 19 W 2.42

THE SPIT 61 29 S 55 30 W 2.19

THE TOE 62 20 S 59 11 W 2.22

THE TRIPLETS 62 24 S 59 41 W 2.31

THE TURRET 60 40 S 45 09 W 2.15

THE TWINS 60 37 S 46 04 W 2.13

THE WATCHKEEPER 62 18 S 59 49 W 2.32

THE WEDDELL SEA 72 00 S 45 00 W 1.1

THREE BROTHERS HILL 62 15 S 58 41 W 2.24

THREE LAKES VALLEY 60 42 S 45 37 W 2.11

THREE SISTERS POINT 62 04 S 57 53 W 2.28

THREE SLICE NUNATAK 68 02 S 64 57 W 1.15

THURSTON ISLAND 72 06 S 99 00 W 3.60

TICKELL HEAD 60 32 S 45 48 W 2.14

TIOGA HILL 60 44 S 45 39 W 2.9

TONSBERG COVE 60 32 S 45 55 W 2.14

TOOTH ROCK 62 52 S 61 24 W 2.43

TOWER ISLAND 63 33 S 59 51 W 3.4

TREPASSEY BAY 63 28 S 56 58 W 1.33

TRETHEWRY POINT 67 24 S 59 47 E 4.38

TRIANGLE POINT 62 32 S 59 51 W 2.35

TRINITY ISLAND 63 45 S 60 44 W 3.5

TRINITY PENINSULA 63 37 S 58 20 W 1.19

TU ROCKS 62 14 S 58 53 W 2.23

TUPINIER ISLANDS 63 22 S 58 16 W 3.3

TURKS HEAD 77 40 S 166 46 E 4.6

TURMOIL ROCK 62 21 S 59 47 W 2.32

TWIN PINNACLES 62 08 S 58 06 W 2.27

TWO HUMMOCK ISLAND 64 08 S 61 42 W 3.11

TWO STEP CLIFFS 72 04 S 68 25 W 3.55

TWO SUMMIT ISLAND 62 15 S 58 57 W 2.22

U

UPTON ROCK 62 12 S 59 08 W 2.21

V

VAN ROCKS 63 06 S 62 50 W 2.46

VAUREAL PEAK 62 11 S 58 18 W 2.25

VAZQUEZ ISLAND 64 55 S 63 25 W 3.15

VENUS BAY 61 55 S 57 54 W 2.20

VESTFOLD HILLS 68 33 S 78 15 E 4.35

VIETOR ROCK 62 41 S 61 06 W 2.42

VINSON MASSIF 78 35 S 82 25 W 3.58

VIOLANTE INLET 72 35 S 61 05 W 1.9

VISCA ANCHORAGE 62 05 S 58 24 W 2.26

W

WADDINGTON BAY 65 16 S 64 05 W 3.30

WALKER BAY 62 38 S 60 42 W 2.44

WALKER POINT 61 08 S 54 42 W 2.18

WATERBOAT POINT 64 49 S 62 51 W 3.14

WAUWERMANS ISLANDS 64 55 S 63 53 W 3.25

WEDDELL ISLANDS 60 39 S 44 51 W 2.5

WEEKS STACK 62 14 S 59 03 W 2.21

WEERTMAN ISLAND 66 58 S 67 45 W 3.45

WEGGER PEAK 62 06 S 58 31 W 2.25

WENSLEYDALE BEACON 62 57 S 60 42 W 2.45

WEST REEF 61 05 S 55 36 W 2.18

WEST STACK 67 03 S 58 03 E 4.40

WHALE BAY 60 44 S 45 11 W 2.8

WHALERS BAY 62 59 S 60 34 W 2.45

WIDEOPEN ISLANDS 63 00 S 55 49 W 1.42

WIENCKE ISLAND 64 50 S 63 25 W 3.15

WILHELMINA BAY 64 38 S 62 10 W 3.9

WILKES STATION 66 15 S 110 31 E 4.28

WILKINS COAST 69 40 S 63 00 W 1.13

WILKINS ICE SHELF 70 15 S 73 00 W 3.57

WILKINS SOUND 70 15 S 73 00 W 3.57

WILLIAMS POINT 62 28 S 60 09 W 2.36

WILLIAMSON ROCK 77 27 S 169 15 E 4.3

WINDOW ISLAND 62 34 S 61 07 W 2.42

WINSHIP POINT 62 15 S 58 44 W 2.24

WITHEM ISLAND 62 14 S 59 09 W 2.21

WOHLSCHLAG BAY 77 22 S 166 25 E 4.4

WOOD ISLAND 62 29 S 60 19 W 2.40

WUST INLET 72 20 S 60 50 W 1.10

Y

YANKEE HARBOR 62 32 S 59 47 W 2.35

YOUNG POINT 63 36 S 58 55 W 3.3

Z

ZAELAEE ROCKS 62 57 S 57 15 W 1.32

ZED ISLANDS 62 26 S 60 10 W 2.36